νέα σελήνη
ΒΙΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΡΓΑ
❧
[ΒΙΟΓΡΑΦΙΑ: ΥΠΟ ΕΤΟΙΜΑΣΙΑ]
Ὁ Πτολεμαῖος ὑπῆρξε πολυμαθὴς ἐπιστήμων ποὺ ἔζησε ἐν τῇ Ἀλεξάνδρειᾳ τῆς Αἰγύπτου, περὶ τὰ μέσα τοῦ 2ου αἰ. π. Χ. / 10ου αἰ. μ. Ὀ.
Ἡ παρούσα ἔκδοση περιέχει τὰ τέσσερα βιβλία τῆς πραγματείας τοῦ Πτολεμαίου ὑπὸ τὸν γενικὸ τίτλο Σύνταξις Ἀποτελεσματική. Γιὰ τὸ πρωτότυπο κείμενο χρησιμοποιήθη: TLG (Τhesaurus Lingua Graeca). Ἡ ἀγγλικὴ μετάφραση μετὰ σχολίων εἶναι τοῦ Φρὰνκ Ε. Ρόμπινς (Frank Egleston Robbins), Κλασικὴ Βιβλιοθήκη Loeb, 1940.
Συμπληρωματικα
- Claudius Ptolemy biography and works Βιογραφία Πτολεμαίου
- Claudius Ptolemy biography and works (from Dictionary of Greek and Roman biography and mythology by W. Smith) Βιογραφία Πτολεμαίου
- Πτολεμαίου Τετράβιβλος Ἀρχαῖο ἑλληνικὸ κείμενο (Perseus Digital Library)
- Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos Ἀγγλικὴ μετάφραση τῆς Τετραβίβλου μετὰ σχολίων (Ashmad, 1822)
- Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos Ἀγγλικὴ μετάφραση τῆς Τετραβίβλου μετὰ σχολίων (Robbins, Loeb Classical Library, 1940)
ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΣΜΑΤΙΚΗ (ΤΕΤΡΑΒΙΒΛΟΣ), ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ Α′
ἑλληνικὸ πρωτότυπο μὲ ἀγγλικὴ μετάφραση, τοῦ Frank Egleston Robbins, Κλασικὴ Βιβλιοθήκη Loeb, 1940
❧
ΠΕΡΙΕΧΟΜΕΝΑ
1. Προοίμιον
2. Ὅτι καταληπτὴ ἡ δι’ ἀστρονομίας γνῶσις καὶ μέχρι τίνος
3. Ὅτι καὶ ὠφέλιμος
4. Περὶ τῆς τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων δυνάμεως
5. Περὶ ἀγαθοποιῶν καὶ κακοποιῶν
6. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν
7. Περὶ νυκτερινῶν καὶ ἡμερινῶν
8. Περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως τῶν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχηματισμῶν
9. Περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων δυνάμεως
10. Περὶ τῶν ὡρῶν τοῦ ἔτους
11. Περὶ τῆς τῶν τεσσάρων γωνιῶν δυνάμεως
12. Περὶ τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν καὶ στερεῶν καὶ δισώμων ζῳδίων
13. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν ζῳδίων
14. Περὶ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων δωδεκατημορίων
15. Περὶ τῶν προστασσόντων καὶ ὑπακουόντων ὁμοίως ζῳδίων
16. Περὶ τῶν βλεπόντων καὶ ἰσοδυναμούντων ἀλλήλοις
17. Περὶ τῶν ἀσυνδέτων
18. Περὶ οἴκων ἑκάστου ἀστέρος
19. Περὶ τριγώνων
20. Περὶ ὑψωμάτων
21. Περὶ ὁρίων διαθέσεως
22. Περὶ τόπων καὶ μοιρῶν ἑκάστου
23. Περὶ προσώπων καὶ λαμπηνῶν καὶτῶν τοιούτων
24. Περὶ συναφῶν καὶ ἀπορροιῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων δυνάμεων
1. Προοίμιον
Τῶν τὸ δι’ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικὸν τέλος παρασκευαζόντων, ὦ Σύρε, δύο τῶν μεγίστων καὶ κυριωτάτων ὑπαρχόντων, ἑνὸς μὲν τοῦ πρώτου καὶ τάξει καὶ δυνάμει, καθ’ ὃ τοὺς γινομένους ἑκάστοτε σχηματισμοὺς τῶν κινήσεων ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης καὶ ἀστέρων πρὸς ἀλλήλους τε καὶ τὴν γῆν καταλαμβανόμεθα· δευτέρου δέ, καθ’ ὃ διὰ τῆς φυσικῆς τῶν σχηματισμῶν αὐτῶν ἰδιοτροπίας τὰς ἀποτελουμένας μεταβολὰς τῶν ἐμπεριεχομένων ·ἐπισκεπτόμεθα· τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἰδίαν ἔχον καὶ δι’ ἑαυτὴν αἱρετὴν θεωρίαν, κἂν μὴ τὸ ἐκ τῆς ἐπιζεύξεως τοῦ δευτέρου τέλος συμπεραίνηται, κατ’ ἰδίαν σύνταξιν ὡς μάλιστα ἐνῆν ἀποδεικτικῶς σοι περιώδευται.
Περὶ δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου καὶ μὴ ὡσαύτως αὐτοτελοῦς ἡμεῖς ἐν τῷ παρόντι ποιησόμεθα λόγον κατὰ τὸν ἁρμόζοντα φιλοσοφίᾳ τρόπον καὶ ὡς ἄν τις φιλαλήθει μάλιστα χρώμενος σκοπῷ μήτε τὴν κατάληψιν αὐτοῦ παραβάλλοι τῇ τοῦ πρώτου καὶ ἀεὶ ὡσαύτως ἔχοντος βεβαιότητι, τὸ ἐν πολλοῖς ἀσθενὲς καὶ δυσείκαστον τῆς ὑλικῆς ποιότητος μὴ προσποιούμενος, μήτε πρὸς τὴν κατὰ τὸ ἐνδεχόμενον ἐπίσκεψιν ἀποκνοίη, τῶν γε πλείστων καὶ ὁλοσχερεστέρων συμπτωμάτων ἐναργῶς οὕτως τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ περιέχοντος αἰτίαν ἐμφανιζόντων.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ πᾶν μὲν τὸ δυσέφικτον παρὰ τοῖς πολλοῖς εὐδιάβλητον ἔχει φύσιν, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν προκειμένων δύο καταλήψεων αἱ μὲν τῆς προτέρας διαβολαὶ τυφλῶν ἂν εἶεν παντελῶς, αἱ δὲ τῆς δευτέρας εὐπροφασίστους ἔχουσι τὰς ἀφορμὰς (ἢ γὰρ τὸ ἐπ’ ἐνίων δυσθεώρητον ἀκαταληψίας τελείας δόξαν παρέσχεν ἢ τὸ τῶν γνωσθέντων δυσφύλακτον καὶ τὸ τέλος ὡς ἄχρηστον διέσυρε), πειρασόμεθα διὰ βραχέων πρὸ τῆς κατὰ μέρος ὑφηγήσεως τὸ μέτρον ἑκατέρου τοῦ τε δυνατοῦ καὶ τοῦ χρησίμου τῆς τοιαύτης προγνώσεως ἐπισκέψασθαι, καὶ πρῶτον τοῦ δυνατοῦ.
1. Introduction
Of the means of prediction through astronomy, O Syrus, two are the most important and valid. One, which is first 1 both in order and in effectiveness, is that whereby we apprehend the aspects of the movements of sun, moon, and stars in relation to each other and to the earth, as they occur from time to time; the second is that in which by means of the natural character of these aspects themselves we investigate the changes which they bring about in that which they surround. The first of these, which has its own science, desirable in itself even though it does not attain the result given by its combination with the second, has been expounded to you as best we could in its own treatise 2 by the method of demonstration.
We shall now give an account of the second and less self‐sufficient method in a properly philosophical way, so that one whose aim is the truth might never compare its perceptions with the sureness of the first, unvarying science, for he ascribes to it the weakness and unpredictability of material qualities found in individual things 3, nor yet refrain from such investigation as is within the bounds of possibility, when it is so evident that most events of a general nature draw their causes from the enveloping heavens.
But since everything that is hard to attain is easily assailed 4 by the generality of men, and in the case of the two before-mentioned disciplines the allegations against the first could be made only by the blind, while there are specious grounds for those levelled at the second –for its difficulty in parts has made them think it completely incomprehensible, or the difficulty of escaping what is known 5 has disparaged even its object as useless– we shall try to examine briefly the measure of both the possibility and the usefulness of such prognostication before offering detailed instruction on the subject. First as to its possibility.
2. Ὅτι καταληπτὴ ἡ δι’ ἀστρονομίας γνῶσις καὶ μέχρι τίνος
Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν διαδίδοται καὶ διικνεῖταί τις δύναμις ἀπὸ τῆς αἰθερώδους καὶ ἀϊδίου φύσεως ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν περίγειον καὶ δι’ ὅλων μεταβλήτην, τῶν ὑπὸ τὴν σελήνην πρώτων στοιχείων πυρὸς καὶ ἀέρος περιεχομένων μὲν καὶ τρεπομένων ὑπὸ τῶν κατὰ τὸν αἰθέρα κινήσεων, περιεχόντων δὲ καὶ συντρεπόντων τὰ λοιπὰ πάντα, γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς φυτὰ καὶ ζῷα, πᾶσιν ἂν ἐναργέστατον καὶ δι’ ὀλίγων φανείη. Ὅ τε γὰρ ἥλιος διατίθησί πως ἀεὶ μετὰ τοῦ περιέχοντος πάντα τὰ περὶ τὴν γῆν, οὐ μόνον διὰ τῶν κατὰ τὰς ἐτησίους ὥρας μεταβολῶν πρὸς γονὰς ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν καρποφορίας καὶ ῥύσεις ὑδάτων καὶ σωμάτων μετατροπάς, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τῶν καθ’ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν περιόδων θερμαίνων τε καὶ ὑγραίνων καὶ ξηραίνων καὶ ψύχων τεταγμένως τε καὶ ἀκολούθως τοῖς πρὸς τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν γινομένοις ὁμοιοτρόποις σχηματισμοῖς.
Ἥ τε σελήνη πλείστην ὡς περιγειοτάτη διαδίδωσιν ἡμῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν ἀπόρροιαν, συμπαθούντων αὐτῇ καὶ συντρεπομένων τῶν πλείστων καὶ ἀψύχων καὶ ἐμψύχων καὶ ποταμῶν μὲν συναυξόντων καὶ συμμειούντων τοῖς φωσὶν αὐτῆς τὰ ῥεύματα, θαλασσῶν δὲ συντρεπουσῶν ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς καὶ ταῖς δύσεσι τὰς ἰδίας ὁρμάς, φυτῶν δὲ καὶ ζῴων ἢ ὅλων ἢ κατά τινα μέρη συμπληρουμένων τε αὐτῇ καὶ συμμειουμένων. Αἵ τε τῶν ἀστέρων τῶν τε ἀπλανῶν καὶ τῶν πλανωμένων πάροδοι πλείστας ποιοῦσιν ἐπισημασίας τοῦ περιέχοντος καυματώδεις καὶ πνευματώδεις καὶ νιφετώδεις, ὑφ’ ὧν καὶ τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οἰκείως διατίθεται.
Ἤδη δὲ καὶ οἱ πρὸς ἀλλήλους αὐτῶν συσχηματισμοί, συνερχομένων πως καὶ συγκιρναμένων τῶν διαδόσεων, πλείστας καὶ ποικίλας μεταβολὰς ἀπεργάζονται, κατακρατούσης μὲν τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου δυνάμεως πρὸς τὸ καθόλου τῆς ποιότητος τεταγμένης, συνεργούντων δὲ ἢ ἀποσυνεργούντων κατά τι τῶν λοιπῶν, καὶ τῆς μὲν σελήνης ἐκφανέστερον καὶ συνεχέστερον ὡς ἐν ταῖς συνόδοις καὶ διχοτόμοις καὶ πανσελήνοις, τῶν δὲ ἀστέρων περιοδικώτερον καὶ ἀσημότερον, ὡς ἐν ταῖς φάσεσι καὶ κρύψεσι καὶ προσνεύσεσιν.
Ὅτι δὲ τούτων οὕτως θεωρουμένων οὐ μόνον τὰ ἤδη συγκραθέντα διατίθεσθαί πως ὑπὸ τῆς τούτων κινήσεως ἀναγκαῖον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν σπερμάτων τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς πληροφορήσεις διαπλάττεσθαι καὶ διαμορφοῦσθαι πρὸς τὴν οἰκείαν τοῦ τότε περιέχοντος ποιότητα, πᾶσιν ἂν δόξειεν ἀκόλουθον εἶναι. Οἱ γοῦν παρατηρητικώτεροι τῶν γεωργῶν καὶ τῶν νομέων ἀπὸ τῶν κατὰ τὰς ὀχείας καὶ τὰς τῶν σπερμάτων καταθέσεις συμβαινόντων πνευμάτων στοχάζονται τῆς ποιότητος τῶν ἀποβησομένων· καὶ ὅλως τὰ μὲν ὁλοσχερέστερα καὶ διὰ τῶν ἐπιφανεστέρων συσχηματισμῶν ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης καὶ ἀστέρων ἐπισημαινόμενα καὶ παρὰ τοῖς μὴ φυσικῶς, μόνον δὲ παρατηρητικῶς σκεπτομένοις ὡς ἐπίπαν προγινωσκόμενα θεωροῦμεν, τὰ μὲν ἐκ μείζονός τε δυνάμεως καὶ ἁπλουστέρας τάξεως καὶ παρὰ τοῖς πάνυ ἰδιώταις, μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ παρ’ ἐνίοις τῶν ἀλόγων ζῴων, ὡς τῶν ὡρῶν καὶ τῶν πνευμάτων τὰς ἐτησίους διαφοράς (τούτων γὰρ ὡς ἐπίπαν ὁ ἥλιος αἴτιος), τὰ δὲ ἧττον οὕτως ἔχοντα παρὰ τοῖς ἤδη κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ταῖς παρατηρήσεσιν ἐνειθισμένοις, ὡς τοῖς ναυτιλλομένοις τὰς κατὰ μέρος τῶν χειμώνων καὶ τῶν πνευμάτων ἐπισημασίας ὅσαι γίνονται κατὰ τὸ περιοδικώτερον ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς σελήνης ἢ καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον συσχηματισμῶν.
Παρὰ μέντοι τὸ μήτε αὐτῶν τούτων τοὺς χρόνους καὶ τοὺς τόπους ὑπὸ ἀπειρίας ἀκριβῶς δύνασθαι κατανοεῖν μήτε τὰς τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων περιόδους πλεῖστον καὶ αὐτὰς συμβαλλομένας τὸ πολλάκις αὐτοῖς σφάλλεσθαι συμβαίνει. Τί δὴ οὖν κωλύει τὸν ἠκριβωκότα μὲν τάς τε πάντων τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης κινήσεις, ὅπως αὐτὸν μηδενὸς τῶν σχηματισμῶν μήτε ὁ τόπος μήτε ὁ χρόνος λανθάνῃ, διειληφότα δὲ ἐκ τῆς ἔτι ἄνωθεν συνεχοῦς ἱστορίας ὡς ἐπίπαν αὐτῶν τὰς φύσεις, κἂν μὴ τὰς κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ ὑποκείμενον ἀλλὰ τάς γε δυνάμει ποιητικάς, οἷον ὡς τὴν τοῦ ἡλίου ὅτι θερμαίνει καὶ τὴν τῆς σελήνης ὅτι ὑγραίνει, καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ὁμοίως, ἱκανὸν δὲ πρὸς τοιαῦτα ὄντα φυσικῶς ἅμα καὶ εὐστόχως ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως πάντων τὸ ἴδιον τῆς ποιότητος διαλαβεῖν, ὡς δύνασθαι μὲν ἐφ’ ἑκάστου τῶν διδομένων καιρῶν ἐκ τῆς τότε τῶν φαινομένων σχέσεως τὰς τοῦ περιέχοντος ἰδιοτροπίας εἰπεῖν, οἷον ὅτι θερμότερον ἢ ὑγρότερον ἔσται, δύνασθαι δὲ καὶ καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων τήν τε καθόλου ποιότητα τῆς ἰδιοσυγκρασίας ἀπὸ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν σύστασιν περιέχοντος συνιδεῖν, οἷον ὅτι τὸ μὲν σῶμα τοιόσδε, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν τοιόσδε, καὶ τὰ κατὰ καιροὺς συμπτώματα, διὰ τὸ τὸ μὲν τοιόνδε περιέχον τῇ τοιᾷδε συγκράσει σύμμετρον ἢ καὶ πρόσφορον γίνεσθαι πρὸς εὐεξίαν, τὸ δὲ τοιόνδε ἀσύμμετρον καὶ πρόσφορον πρὸς κάκωσιν;
Ἀλλὰ γὰρ τὸ μὲν δυνατὸν τῆς τοιαύτης καταλήψεως διὰ τούτων καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων ἔστι συνιδεῖν. Ὅτι δὲ εὐπροφασίστως μέν, οὐ προσηκόντως δὲ τὴν πρὸς τὸ ἀδύνατον ἔσχε διαβολήν, οὕτως ἂν κατανοήσαιμεν. Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ τὰ πταίσματα τῶν μὴ ἀκριβούντων τὸ ἔργον πολλὰ ὄντα ὡς ἐν μεγάλῃ καὶ πολυμερεῖ θεωρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς ἀληθευομένοις τὴν τοῦ ἐκ τύχης παρέσχε δόξαν, οὐκ ὀρθῶς· τὸ γὰρ τοιοῦτον οὐ τῆς ἐπιστήμης ἀλλὰ τῶν μεταχειριζομένων ἐστὶν ἀδυναμία.
Ἔπειτα καὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι τοῦ πορίζειν ἕνεκεν ἑτέραν τέχνην τῷ ταύτης ὀνόματι καταξιοπιστευόμενοι τοὺς μὲν ἰδιώτας ἐξαπατῶσι πολλὰ προλέγειν δοκοῦντες καὶ τῶν μηδεμίαν φύσιν ἐχόντων προγινώσκεσθαι, τοῖς δὲ ζητητικωτέροις διὰ τούτου παρέσχον ἀφορμὴν ἐν ἴσῳ καὶ τῶν φύσιν ἐχόντων προλέγεσθαι καταγινώσκειν, οὐδὲ τοῦτο δεόντως· οὐδὲ γὰρ φιλοσοφίαν ἀναιρετέον, ἐπεί τινες τῶν προσποιουμένων αὐτὴν πονηροὶ καταφαίνονται.
Ἀλλ’ ὅμως ἐναργές ἐστιν ὅτι κἂν διερευνητικῶς τις ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα καὶ γνησίως τοῖς μαθήμασι προσέρχηται, πολλάκις πταίειν αὐτὸν ἐνδέχεται, δι’ οὐδὲν μὲν τῶν εἰρημένων, δι’ αὐτὴν δὲ τὴν τοῦ πράγματος φύσιν καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας ἀσθένειαν. Καθόλου γάρ, πρὸς τῷ τὴν περὶ τὸ ποιὸν τῆς ὕλης θεωρίαν πᾶσαν εἰκαστικὴν εἶναι καὶ οὐ διαβεβαιωτικὴν καὶ μάλιστα τὴν ἐκ πολλῶν ἀνομοίων συγκιρναμένην, ἔτι καὶ τοῖς παλαιοῖς τῶν πλανωμένων συσχηματισμοῖς, ἀφ’ ὧν ἐφαρμόζομεν τοῖς ὡσαύτως ἔχουσι τῶν νῦν τὰς ὑπὸ τῶν προγενεστέρων ἐπ’ ἐκείνων παρατετηρημένας προτελέσεις, παρόμοιοι μὲν δύνανται γίνεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον καὶ οὗτοι διὰ μακρῶν περιόδων, ἀπαράλλακτοι δὲ οὐδαμῶς, τῆς πάντων ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ μετὰ τῆς γῆς κατὰ τὸ ἀκριβὲς συναποκαταστάσεως, εἰ μή τις κενοδοξοίη περὶ τὴν τῶν ἀκαταλήπτων κατάληψιν καὶ γνῶσιν, ἢ μηδόλως ἢ μὴ κατά γε τὸν αἰσθητὸν ἀνθρώπῳ χρόνον ἀπαρτιζομένης, ὡς διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὰς προρρήσεις ἀνομοίων ὄντων τῶν ὑποκειμένων παραδειγμάτων ἐνίοτε διαμαρτάνεσθαι.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν τῶν κατὰ τὸ περιέχον γινομένων συμπτωμάτων τοῦτ’ ἂν εἴη μόνον τὸ δυσχερές, καὶ μηδεμιᾶς ἐνταῦθα συμπαραλαμβανομένης αἰτίας τῇ κινήσει τῶν οὐρανίων. Περὶ δὲ τὰς γενεθλιαλογίας καὶ ὅλως τὰ κατ’ ἰδίαν τῆς ἑκάστου συγκράσεως οὐ μικρὰ οὐδὲ τὰ τυχόντα ἐστὶν ἰδεῖν συναίτια καὶ αὐτὰ γινόμενα τῆς τῶν συνισταμένων ἰδιοτροπίας. Αἵ τε γὰρ τῶν σπερμάτων διαφοραὶ πλεῖστον δύνανται πρὸς τὸ τοῦ γένους ἴδιον, ἐπειδήπερ τοῦ περιέχοντος καὶ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ὑποκειμένου τοῦ αὐτοῦ κατακρατεῖ τῶν σπερμάτων ἕκαστον εἰς τὴν καθόλου τοῦ οἰκείου μορφώματος διατύπωσιν οἷον ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἵππου καὶ τῶν ἄλλων· οἵ τε τόποι τῆς γενέσεως οὐ μικρὰς ποιοῦνται περὶ τὰ συνιστάμενα παραλλαγάς.
Καὶ τῶν σπερμάτων γὰρ κατὰ γένος ὑποκειμένων τῶν αὐτῶν, οἷον ἀνθρωπίνων, καὶ τῆς τοῦ περιέχοντος καταστάσεως τῆς αὐτῆς, παρὰ τὸ τῶν χωρῶν διάφορον πολὺ καὶ τοῖς σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς οἱ γεννώμενοι διήνεγκαν· πρὸς δὲ τούτοις αἵ τε τροφαὶ καὶ τὰ ἔθη πάντων τῶν προκειμένων ἀδιαφόρων ὑποτιθεμένων συμβάλλονταί τι πρὸς τὰς κατὰ μέρος τῶν βίων διαγωγάς, ὧν ἕκαστον ἐὰν μὴ συνδιαλαμβάνηται ταῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ περιέχοντος αἰτίαις, εἰ καὶ ὅτι μάλιστα τὴν πλείστην ἔχει τοῦτο δύναμιν τῷ τὸ μὲν περιέχον κἀκείνοις αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ τοιοῖσδε εἶναι συναίτιον γίνεσθαι, τούτῳ δὲ ἐκεῖνα μηδαμῶς, πολλὴν ἀπορίαν δύναται παρέχειν τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν τοιούτων οἰομένοις ἀπὸ μόνης τῆς τῶν μετεώρων κινήσεως πάντα καὶ τὰ μὴ τέλεον ἐπ’ αὐτῇ δύνασθαι διαγινώσκειν.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων προσῆκον ἂν εἴη μήτε ἐπειδὴ διαμαρτάνεσθαί ποτε τὴν τοιαύτην πρόγνωσιν ἐνδέχεται, καὶ τὸ πᾶν αὐτῆς ἀναιρεῖν, ὥσπερ οὐδὲ τὴν κυβερνητικὴν διὰ τὸ πολλάκις πταίειν ἀποδοκιμάζομεν, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐν μεγάλοις οὕτως καὶ θείοις ἐπαγγέλμασιν ἀσπάζεσθαι καὶ ἀγαπητὸν ἡγεῖσθαι τὸ δυνατόν, μήτ’ αὖ πάλιν πάντα ἡμῖν αἰτεῖν παρ’ αὐτῆς, ἀλλὰ ἀνθρωπίνως καὶ ἐστοχασμένως συμφιλοκαλεῖν καὶ ἐν οἷς οὐκ ἦν ἐπ’ αὐτῇ τὸ πᾶν ἐφοδιάζειν καὶ ὥσπερ τοῖς ἰατροῖς ὅταν ἐπιζητῶσί τινα καὶ περὶ αὐτῆς τῆς νόσου καὶ περὶ τῆς τοῦ κάμνοντος ἰδιοτροπίας, οὐ μεμψόμεθα λέγοντες, οὕτως καὶ ἐνταῦθα τὰ γένη καὶ τὰς χώρας καὶ τὰς τροφὰς ἢ καί τινα τῶν ἤδη συμβεβηκότων μὴ ἀγανακτεῖν ὑποτιθεμένους.
2. That Knowledge by Astronomical Means is Attainable, and How Far
A very few considerations would make it apparent to all that a certain power emanating from the eternal ethereal substance 6 is dispersed through and permeates the whole region about the earth, which throughout is subject to change, since, of the primary sublunar elements, fire and air are encompassed and changed by the motions in the ether, and in turn encompass and change all else, earth and water and the plants and animals therein. For the sun 7, together with the ambient, is always in same way affecting everything on the earth, not only by the changes that accompany the seasons of the year to bring about the generation of animals, the productiveness of plants, the flowing of waters, and the changes of bodies, but also by its daily revolutions furnishing heat, moisture, dryness, and cold in regular order and in correspondence with its positions relative to the zenith.
The moon, too, as the heavenly body nearest the earth, bestows her effluence 8 most abundantly upon mundane things, for most of them, animate or inanimate, are sympathetic to her and change in company with her; the rivers increase and diminish their streams with her light, the seas turn their own tides with her rising and setting, and plants and animals in whole or in same part wax and wane with her. Moreover, the passages of the fixed stars and the planets through the sky often signify hot, windy, and snowy conditions of the air, and mundane things are affected accordingly.
Then, too, their aspects 9 to one another, by the meeting and mingling of their dispensations, bring about many complicated changes. For though the sun’s power prevails in the general ordering of quality, the other heavenly bodies aid or oppose it in particular details, the moon more obviously and continuously, as for example when it is new, at quarter, or full, and the stars at greater intervals and more obscurely, as in their appearances, occultations, and approaches 10.
If these matters be so regarded, all would judge it to follow that not only must things already compounded be affected in same way by the motion of these heavenly bodies, but likewise the germination and fruition of the seed must be moulded and conformed to the quality proper to the heavens at the time. The more observant farmers and herdsmen 11, indeed, conjecture, from the winds prevailing at the time of impregnation and of the sowing of the seed, the quality of what will result; and in general we see that the more important consequences signified by the more obvious configurations of sun, moon, and stars are usually known beforehand, even by those who inquire, not by scientific means, but only by observation. Those which are consequent upon greater forces and simpler natural orders, such as the annual variations of the seasons and the winds, are comprehended by very ignorant men, nay even by the unreasonable animals; for the sun is in general responsible for these phenomena. Things that are not of so general a nature, however, are comprehended by those who have by necessity become used to making observations, as, for instance, sailors know the special signs of storms and winds that arise periodically by reason of the aspects of the moon and fixed stars to the sun.
Yet because they cannot in their ignorance accurately know the times and places of these phenomena, nor the periodic movements of the planets, which contribute importantly to the effect, it happens that they often err. If, then, a man knows accurately the movements of all the stars, the sun, and the moon, so that neither the place nor the time of any of their configurations escapes his notice, and if he has distinguished in general their natures as the result of previous continued study, even though he may discern, not their essential, but only their potentially effective qualities, such as the sun’s heating and the moon’s moistening, and so on with the rest; and if he is capable of determining in view of all these data, both scientifically and by successful conjecture, the distinctive mark of quality resulting from the combination of all the factors, what is to prevent him from being able to tell on each given occasion the characteristics of the air from the relations of the phenomena at the time, for instance, that it will be warmer or wetter? Why can he not, too, with respect to an individual man, perceive the general quality of his temperament from the ambient at the time of his birth, as for instance that he is such and such in body and such and such in soul, and predict occasional events, by use of the fact that such and such an ambient is attuned to such and such a temperament and is favourable to prosperity, while another is not so attuned and conduces to injury?
Enough, however; for the possibility of such knowledge can be understood from these and similar arguments. The following considerations might lead us to observe that criticism of the science on the score of impossibility has been specious but undeserved. In the first place, the mistakes 12 of those who are not accurately instructed in its practice, and they are many, as one would expect in an important and many-sided art, have brought about the belief that even its true predictions depend upon chance, which is incorrect. For a thing like this is an impotence, not of the science, but of those who practise it.
Secondly; most, for the sake of gain, claim credence for another art in the name of this 13, and deceive the vulgar, because they are reputed to foretell many things, even those that cannot naturally be known beforehand, while to the more thoughtful they have thereby given occasion to pass equally unfavourable judgement upon the natural subjects of prophecy. Nor is this deservedly done; it is the same with philosophy – we need not abolish it because there are evident rascals among those that pretend to it 14.
Nevertheless it is clear that even though one approaches astrology in the most inquiring and legitimate spirit possible, he may frequently err, not for any of the reasons state, but because of the very nature of the thing and his own weakness in comparison with the magnitude of his profession. For in general, besides the fact that every science that deals with the quality of its subject-matter is conjectural and not to be absolutely affirmed, particularly one which is composed of many unlike elements, it is furthermore true that the ancient configurations of the planets 15, upon the basis of which we attach to similar aspects of our own day the effects observed by the ancients in theirs, can be more or less similar to the modern aspects, and that, too, at long intervals, but not identical, since the exact return of all the heavenly bodies and the earth to the same positions 16, unless one holds vain opinions of his ability to comprehend and know the incomprehensible, either takes place not at all or at least not in the period of time that falls within the experience of man; so that for this reason predictions sometimes fail, because of the disparity of the examples on which they are based.
As to the investigation of atmospheric phenomena, this would be the only difficulty, since no other cause besides the movement of the heavenly bodies is taken into consideration. But in an inquiry concerning nativities and individual temperaments in general, one can see that there are circumstances of no small importance and of no trifling character, which join to cause the special qualities of those who are born. For differences of seed exert a very great influence on the special traits of the genus, since, if the ambient and the horizon are the same, each seed prevails to express in general its own form, for example, man, horse, and so forth; and the places of birth bring about no small variation in what is produced.
For if the seed is generically the same, human for example, and the condition of the ambient the same, those who are born differ much, both in body and soul, with the difference of countries 17. In addition to this, all the aforesaid conditions being equal, rearing and customs contribute to influence the particular way in which a life is lived. Unless each one of these things is examined together with the causes that are derived from the ambient, although this latter be conceded to exercise the greatest influence (for the ambient is one of the causes for these things being what they are, while they in turn have no influence upon it), they can cause much difficulty for those who believe that in such cases everything can be understood, even things not wholly within its jurisdiction, from the motion of the heavenly bodies alone.
Since this is the case, it would not be fitting to dismiss all prognostication of this character because it can sometimes be mistaken, for we do not discredit the art of the pilot for its many errors; but as when the claims are great, so also when they are divine, we should welcome what is possible and think it enough. Nor, further, should we gropingly and in human fashion demand everything of the art, but rather join in the appreciation of its beauty, even in instances wherein it could not provide the full answer; and as we do not find fault with the physicians, when they examine a person, for speaking both about the sickness itself and about the patient’s idiosyncrasy, so too in this case we should not object to astrologers using as a basis for calculation nationality, country, and rearing, or any other already existing accidental qualities.
3. Ὅτι καὶ ὠφέλιμος
Τίνα μὲν οὖν τρόπον δυνατὸν γίνεται τὸ δι’ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικὸν καὶ ὅτι μέχρι μόνων ἂν φθάνοι τῶν τε κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ περιέχον συμπτωμάτων καὶ τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς τοιαύτης αἰτίας τοῖς ἀνθρώποις παρακολουθούντων (ταῦτα δ’ ἂν εἴη περί τε τὰς ἐξαρχῆς ἐπιτηδειότητας δυνάμεων καὶ πράξεων σώματος καὶ ψυχῆς καὶ τὰ κατὰ καιροὺς αὐτῶν πάθη πολυχρονιότητας τε καὶ ὀλιγοχρονιότητας, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ὅσα τῶν ἔξωθεν κυρίαν τε καὶ φυσικὴν ἔχει πρὸς τὰ πρῶτα συμπλοκὴν ὡς πρὸς τὸ σῶμα μὲν ἡ κτῆσις καὶ ἡ συμβίωσις, πρὸς δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν ἥ τε τιμὴ καὶ τὸ ἀξίωμα, καὶ τὰς τούτων κατὰ καιροὺς τύχας), σχεδὸν ὡς ἐν κεφαλαίοις γέγονεν ἡμῖν δῆλον.
Λοιπὸν δ’ ἂν εἴη τῶν προκειμένων τὴν κατὰ τὸ χρήσιμον ἐπίσκεψιν διὰ βραχέων ποιήσασθαι πρότερον διαλαβοῦσι, τίνα τρόπον καὶ πρὸς τί τέλος ἀφορῶντες τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ χρησίμου δύναμιν ἐκδεξόμεθα. Εἰ μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀγαθά, τί ἂν εἴη συμφορώτερον πρὸς εὐπραγίαν καὶ χαρὰν καὶ ὅλως εὐαρέστησιν τῆς τοιαύτης προγνώσεως, καθ’ ἣν τῶν τε ἀνθρωπίνων καὶ τῶν θείων γινόμεθα συνορατικοί; Εἰ δὲ πρὸς τὰ τοῦ σώματος, πάντων ἂν μᾶλλον ἡ τοιαύτη κατάληψις ἐπιγινώσκοι τὸ οἰκεῖόν τε καὶ πρόσφορον τῇ καθ’ ἑκάστην σύγκρασιν ἐπιτηδειότητι. Εἰ δὲ μὴ πρὸς πλοῦτον ἢ δόξαν ἢ τὰ τοιαῦτα συνεργεῖ, προχωρήσει καὶ περὶ πάσης φιλοσοφίας τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο φάσκειν· οὐδενὸς γὰρ τῶν τοιούτων ἐστὶν ὅσον τὸ ἐφ’ ἑαυτῇ περιποιητική. Ἀλλ’ οὔτ’ ἐκείνης διὰ τοῦτ’ ἂν οὔτε ταύτης καταγινώσκοιμεν δικαίως, ἀφέμενοι τοῦ πρὸς τὰ μείζω συμφέροντος.
Ὅλως δ’ ἂν ἐξετάζουσι φανεῖεν ἂν οἱ τὸ ἄχρηστον τῆς καταλήψεως ἐπιμεμφόμενοι πρὸς οὐδὲν τῶν κυριωτάτων ἀφορῶντες, ἀλλὰ πρὸς αὐτὸ τοῦτο μόνον, ὅτι τῶν πάντη πάντως ἐσομένων ἡ πρόγνωσις περισσή, καὶ τοῦτο δὲ ἁπλῶς πάνυ καὶ οὐκ εὖ διειλημμένως. Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ δεῖ σκοπεῖν, ὅτι καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἀποβησομένων τὸ μὲν ἀπροσδόκητον τούς τε θορύβους ἐκστατικοὺς καὶ τὰς χαρὰς ἐξοιστικὰς μάλιστα πέφυκε ποιεῖν, τὸ δὲ προγινώσκειν ἐθίζει καὶ ῥυθμίζει τὴν ψυχὴν τῇ μελέτῃ τῶν ἀπόντων ὡς παρόντων καὶ παρασκευάζει μετ’ εἰρήνης καὶ εὐσταθείας ἕκαστα τῶν ἐπερχομένων ἀποδέχεσθαι.
Ἔπειθ’ ὅτι μηδ’ οὕτως ἅπαντα χρὴ νομίζειν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἀπὸ τῆς ἄνωθεν αἰτίας παρακολουθεῖν ὥσπερ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἀπό τινος ἀλύτου καὶ θείου προστάγματος καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον νενομοθετημένα καὶ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἀποβησόμενα, μηδεμιᾶς ἄλλης ἁπλῶς αἰτίας ἀντιπρᾶξαι δυναμένης, ἀλλ’ ὡς τῆς μὲν τῶν οὐρανίων κινήσεως καθ’ εἱμαμένην θείαν καὶ ἀμετάπτωτον ἐξ αἰῶνος ἀποτελουμένης, τῆς δὲ τῶν ἐπιγείων ἀλλοιώσεως καθ’ εἱμαρμένην φυσικὴν καὶ μεταπτωτήν, τὰς πρώτας αἰτίας ἄνωθεν λαμβανούσης κατὰ συμβεβηκὸς καὶ κατ’ ἐπακολούθησιν, καὶ ὡς τῶν μὲν διὰ καθολικωτέρας περιστάσεις τοῖς ἀνθρώποις συμβαινόντων, οὐχὶ δὲ ἐκ τῆς ἰδίας ἑκάστου φυσικῆς ἐπιτηδειότητος, ὡς ὅταν κατὰ μεγάλας καὶ δυσφυλάκτους τοῦ περιέχοντος τροπὰς ἐκ πυρώσεων ἢ λοιμῶν ἢ κατακλυσμῶν κατὰ πλήθη διαφθαρῶσιν, ὑποπιπτούσης ἀεὶ τῆς βραχυτέρας αἰτίας τῇ μείζονι καὶ ἰσχυροτέρᾳ, τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὴν ἑνὸς ἑκάστου φυσικὴν ἰδιοσυγκρασίαν διὰ μικρὰς καὶ τὰς τυχούσας τοῦ περιέχοντος ἀντιπαθείας.
Τούτων γὰρ οὕτως διαληφθέντων φανερὸν ὅτι καὶ καθόλου καὶ κατὰ μέρος ὅσων μὲν συμπτωμάτων τὸ πρῶτον αἴτιον ἄμαχόν τέ ἐστι καὶ μεῖζον παντὸς τοῦ ἀντιπράττοντος, ταῦτα καὶ πάντη πάντως ἀποβαίνειν ἀνάγκη, ὅσα δὲ μὴ οὕτως ἔχει, τούτων τὰ μὲν ἐπιτυχόντα τῶν ἀντιπαθησόντων εὐανάτρεπτα γίνεται, τὰ δὲ μὴ εὐπορήσαντα καὶ αὐτὰ ταῖς πρώταις φύσεσιν ἀκολουθεῖ, δι’ ἄγνοιαν μέντοι καὶ οὐκ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῆς ἰσχύος ἀνάγκην.
Τὸ δ’ αὐτὸ ἄν τις ἴδοι συμβεβηκὸς καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων ἁπλῶς τῶν φυσικὰς ἐχόντων τὰς ἀρχάς καὶ γὰρ καὶ λίθων καὶ φυτῶν καὶ ζῴων, ἔτι δὲ καὶ τραυμάτων καὶ παθῶν καὶ νοσημάτων τὰ μὲν ἐξ ἀνάγκης τι ποιεῖν πέφυκε, τὰ δ’ ἂν μηδὲν τῶν ἐναντίων ἀντιπράξῃ. Οὕτως οὖν χρὴ νομίζειν καὶ τὰ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις συμβησόμενα προλέγειν τοὺς φυσικοὺς τῇ τοιαύτῃ προγνώσει καὶ μὴ κατὰ κενὰς δόξας προσερχομένους, ὡς τῶν μὲν διὰ τὸ πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα τὰ ποιητικὰ τυγχάνειν ἀφυλάκτων ὄντων, τῶν δὲ διὰ τοὐναντίον μετατροπὰς ἐπιδεχομένων, καθάπερ καὶ τῶν ἰατρῶν, ὅσοι δυνατοὶ σημειοῦσθαι τὰ παθήματα, προγινώσκουσι τά τε πάντως ἀνελοῦντα καὶ τὰ χωροῦντα βοήθειαν.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν μεταπεσεῖν δυναμένων οὕτως ἀκουστέον τοῦ γενεθλιαλόγου φέρ’ εἰπεῖν ὅτι τῇ τοιᾷδε συγκράσει κατὰ τὴν τοιάνδε τοῦ περιέχοντος ἰδιοτροπίαν, τραπεισῶν ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον ἢ ἔλασσον τῶν ὑποκειμένων συμμετριῶν τὸ τοιόνδε παρακολουθήσει πάθος, ὡς καὶ τοῦ μὲν ἰατροῦ, ὅτι τόδε τὸ ἕλκος νομὴν ἢ σῆψιν ἐμποιεῖ, τοῦ δὲ μεταλλικοῦ λόγου ἕνεκεν, ὅτι τὸν σίδηρον ἡ λίθος ἡ μαγνῆτις ἕλκει· ὥσπερ γὰρ τούτων ἑκάτερον ἐαθὲν μὲν δι’ ἀγνωσίαν τῶν ἀντιπαθησόντων πάντη πάντως παρακολουθήσει τῇ τῆς πρώτης φύσεως δυνάμει, οὔτε δὲ τὸ ἕλκος τὴν νομὴν ἢ τὴν σῆψιν κατεργάσεται τῆς ἀντικειμένης θεραπείας τυχὸν οὔτε τὸν σίδηρον ἡ μαγνῆτις ἑλκύσει παρατριβέντος αὐτῇ σκορόδου καὶ αὐτὰ δὲ ταῦτα τὰ κωλύοντα φυσικῶς καὶ καθ’ εἱμαρμένην ἀντεπάθησεν, οὕτως καὶ ἐπ’ ἐκείνων ἀγνοούμενα μὲν τὰ συμβησόμενα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἢ ἐγνωσμένα μέν, μὴ τυχόντα δὲ τῶν ἀντιπαθούντων πάντη πάντως ἀκολουθήσει τῷ τῆς πρώτης φύσεως εἱρμῷ, προγνωσθέντα δὲ καὶ εὐπορήσαντα τῶν θεραπευόντων φυσικῶς πάλιν καθ’ εἱμαρμένην ἢ ἀγένητα τέλεον ἢ μετριώτερα καθίσταται.
Ὅλως δὲ τῆς τοιαύτης δυνάμεως τῆς αὐτῆς οὔσης ἐπί τε τῶν ὁλοσχερῶς θεωρουμένων καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν κατὰ μέρος θαυμάσειεν ἄν τις, διὰ τίνα δήποτε αἰτίαν ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν καθόλου πιστεύουσι πάντες καὶ τῷ δυνατῷ τῆς προγνώσεως καὶ τῷ πρὸς τὸ φυλάσσεσθαι χρησίμῳ –τάς τε γὰρ ὥρας καὶ τὰς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἐπισημασίας καὶ τοὺς τῆς σελήνης σχηματισμοὺς οἱ πλεῖστοι προγινώσκειν ὁμολογοῦσι καὶ πολλὴν πρόνοιαν ποιοῦνται τῆς φυλακῆς αὐτῶν, πεφροντικότες ἀεὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸ θέρος τῶν ψύχειν δυναμένων, πρὸς δὲ τὸν χειμῶνα τῶν θερμαινόντων καὶ ὅλως προπαρασκευάζοντες αὑτῶν τὰς φύσεις ἐπὶ τὸ εὔκρατον καὶ ἔτι πρὸς μὲν τὸ ἀσφαλὲς τῶν τε ὡρῶν καὶ τῶν ἀναγωγῶν παραφυλάσσοντες τὰς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων ἐπισημασίας, πρὸς δὲ τὰς καταρχὰς τῶν ὀχειῶν καὶ φυτειῶν τοὺς κατὰ πλήρωσιν τῶν φώτων τῆς σελήνης σχηματισμούς, καὶ οὐδὲ εἷς οὐδαμῆ τῶν τοιούτων κατέγνωκεν οὔθ’ ὡς ἀδυνάτων οὔθ’ ὡς ἀχρήστων– ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν κατὰ μέρος ἐκ τῆς τῶν λοιπῶν ἰδιωμάτων συγκράσεως, οἷον τοῦ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον χειμώνων ἢ καυμάτων, καὶ τῆς καθ’ ἕκαστον ἰδιοσυγκρασίας οὔτε τὸ προγινώσκειν ἔτι δυνατὸν ἡγοῦνταί τινες οὔτε τὸ πολλὰ γινώσκειν ἔτι δυνατὸν ἡγοῦνταί τινες οὔτε τὸ πολλὰ ἐγχωρεῖν φυλάξασθαι, καίτοι προδήλου τυγχάνοντος, ὅτι, εἰ πρὸς τὰ καθόλου καύματα, εἰ τύχοιμεν προκαταψύξαντες ἑαυτούς, ἧττον καυσούμεθα, δύναται τὸ ὅμοιον ἐνεργεῖν καὶ πρὸς τὰ ἰδίως τήνδε τὴν σύγκρασιν εἰς ἀμετρίαν αὔξοντα τοῦ θερμοῦ.
Ἀλλὰ γὰρ αἴτιον τῆς τοιαύτης ἁμαρτίας τό τε δύσκολον καὶ ἄηθες τῆς τῶν κατὰ μέρος προγνώσεως, ὅπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων σχεδὸν ἁπάντων ἀπιστίαν ἐμποιεῖ, καὶ τὸ μὴ συναπτομένης ὡς ἐπίπαν τῆς ἀντιπαθούσης δυνάμεως τῇ προγνωστικῇ διὰ τὸ σπάνιον τῆς οὕτως τελείας διαθέσεως τὰς πρῶτας φύσεις ἀνεμποδίστως ἀποτελουμένας δόξαν ὡς περὶ ἀτρέπτων καὶ ἀφυλάκτων παρέχειν καὶ πάντων ἁπλῶς ἀποβησομένων. Ὥσπερ δὲ οἶμαι καὶ ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ προγνωστικοῦ, κἂν μὴ διὰ παντὸς ᾖ ἄπταιστον, τό γε δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ μεγίστης ἄξιον σπουδῆς κατεφαίνετο, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ φυλακτικοῦ καὶ εἰ μὴ πάντων ἐστὶ θεραπευτικόν, ἀλλὰ τό γ’ ἐπ’ ἐνίων κἂν ὀλίγα κἂν μικρὰ ᾖ ἀγαπᾶν καὶ ἀσπάζεσθαι καὶ κέρδος οὐ τὸ τυχὸν ἡγεῖσθαι προσήκει.
Τούτοις δὲ ὡς ἔοικε συνεγνωκότες οὕτως ἔχουσι καὶ οἱ μάλιστα τὴν τοιαύτην δύναμιν τῆς τέχνης προαγαγόντες Αἰγύπτιοι συνῆψαν πανταχῆ τῷ δι’ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικῷ τὴν ἰατρικήν. Οὐ γὰρ ἄν ποτε ἀποτροπιασμούς τινας καὶ φυλακτήρια καὶ θεραπείας συνίσταντο πρὸς τὰς ἐκ τοῦ περιέχοντος ἐπιούσας ἢ παρούσας περιστάσεις καθολικάς τε καὶ μερικάς, εἴ τις αὐτοῖς ἀκινησίας καὶ ἀμετατρεψίας τῶν ἐσομένων ὑπῆρχε δόξα.
Νῦν δὲ καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὰς ἐφεξῆς φύσεις ἀντιπρᾶξαι δυνάμενον ἐν δευτέρᾳ χώρᾳ τοῦ καθ’ εἱμαρμένην λόγου τιθέμενοι συνέζευξαν τῇ τῆς προγνώσεως δυνάμει τὴν κατὰ τὸ χρήσιμον καὶ ὠφέλιμον διὰ τῶν καλουμένων παρ’ αὐτοῖς ἰατρομαθηματικῶν συντάχειν, ὅπως διὰ μὲν τῆς ἀστρονομίας τάς τε τῶν ὑποκειμένων συγκράσεων ποιότητας εἰδέναι συμβαίνῃ καὶ τὰ διὰ τὸ περιέχον ἐσόμενα συμπτώματα καὶ τὰς ἰδίας αὐτῶν αἰτίας, ὡς ἄνευ τῆς τούτων γνώσεως καὶ τῶν βοηθημάτων κατὰ τὸ πλεῖστον διαπίπτειν ὀφειλόντων, ἅτε μὴ πᾶσι σώμασιν ἢ πάθεσι τῶν αὐτῶν συμμέτρων ὄντων, διὰ δὲ τῆς ἰατρικῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ἑκάστοις οἰκείως συμπαθούντων ἢ ἀντιπαθούντων τάς τε τῶν μελλόντων παθῶν προφυλακὰς καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐνεστώτων θεραπείας ἀδιαπτώτους ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα ποιούμενοι διατελῶσιν.
Ἀλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες προτετυπώσθω. Ποιησώμεθα δὲ ἤδη τὸν λόγον κατὰ τὸν εἰσαγωγικὸν τρόπον, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς ἑκάστου τῶν οὐρανίων περὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ποιητικὸν ἰδιοτροπίας, ἀκολούθως ταῖς ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν τρόπον ἐφηρμοσμέναις παρατηρήσεσι καὶ πρώτως τῆς τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων δυνάμεως ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης.
3. That it is also Beneficial
In somewhat summary fashion it has been shown how prognostication by astronomical means is possible, and that it can go no further than what happens in the ambient and the consequences to man from such causes – that is, it concerns the original endowments of faculties and activities of soul and body, their occasional diseases, their endurance for a lοng or a short time, and, besides, all external circumstances that have a directive and natural connection with the original gifts of nature, such as property and marriage in the case of the body and honour and dignities in that of the soul, and finally what befalls them from time to time 18.
The remaining part of our project would be to inquire briefly as to its usefulness 19, first distinguishing how and with what end in view we shall take the meaning of the word usefulness. For if we look to the goods of the soul, what could be more conducive to well-being, pleasure, and in general satisfaction than this kind of forecast, by which we gain full view of things human and divine? And if we look to bodily goods, such knowledge, better than anything else, would perceive what is fitting and expedient for the capabilities of each temperament. But if it does not aid in the acquisition of riches, fame, and the like, we shall be able to say the same of all philosophy, for it does not provide any of these things as far as its own powers are concerned. We should not, however, for that reason be justified in condemning either philosophy or this art, disregarding its greater advantages.
To a general examination it would appear that those who find fault with the uselessness of prognostication have no regard for the most important matters, but only for this – that foreknowledge of events that will happen in any case is superfluous; this, too, quite unreservedly and without due discrimination. For, in the first place. we should consider that even with events that will necessarily take place their unexpectedness is very apt to cause excessive panic and delirious joy, while foreknowledge accustoms and calms the soul by experience of distant events as though they were present, and prepares it to greet with calms and steadiness whatever comes.
A second reason is that we should not believe that separate events attend mankind as the result of the heavenly cause as if they had been originally ordained for each person by some irrevocable divine command and destined – to take place by necessity without the possibility of any other cause whatever interfering. Rather is it true that the movement of the heavenly bodies, to be sure, is eternally performed in accordance with divine, unchangeable destiny, while the change of earthly things is subject to a natural and mutable rate, and in drawing its first causes from above it is governed by chance and natural sequence. Moreover, some things happen to mankind through more general circumstances and not as the result of an individual’s own natural propensities – for example, when men perish in multitudes by conflagration or pestilence or cataclysms, through monstrous and unescapable changes in the ambient, for the lesser cause always yields to the greater 20 and stronger; other occurrences, however, accord with the individual’s own natural temperament through miner and fortuitous antipathies of the ambient.
For if these distinctions are thus made, it is dear that both in general and in particular whatever events depend upon a first cause, which is irresistible and more powerful than anything that opposes it, must by all means take place; on the contrary, of events that are not of this character, those which are provided with resistant forces are easily averted, while those that are not follow the primary natural causes, to be sure, but this is due to ignorance and not to the necessity of almighty power.
One might observe this same thing happening in all events whatsoever that have natural causes. For even of stones, plants, and animals, and also of wounds, mishaps, and sicknesses, some are of such a nature as to act of necessity, others only if no opposing thing interferes. One should therefore believe that physical philosophers predict what is to befall men with foreknowledge of this character and do not approach their task under false impressions; for certain things, because their effective causes are numerous and powerful, are inevitable, but others for the opposite reason may be averted. Similarly those physicians who can recognize ailments know beforehand those which are always fatal and those which admit of aid.
In the case of events that may be modified we must give heed to the astrologer, when, for example, he says that to such and such a temperament, with such and such a character of the ambient, if the fundamental proportions increase or decrease, such and such an affection will result. Similarly we must believe the physician, when he says that this sore will spread or cause putrefaction, and the miner, for instance, that the lodestone attracts iron : just as each of these, if left to itself through ignorance of the opposing forces, will inevitably develop as its original nature compels, but neither will the sore cause spreading or putrefaction if it receives preventive treatment, nor will the lodestone attract the iron if it is rubbed with garlic 21; and these very deterrent measures also have their resisting power naturally and by fate; so also in the other cases, if future happenings to men are not known, or if they are known and the remedies are not applied, they will by all means follow the course of primary nature; but if they are recognized ahead of time and remedies are provided, again quite in accord with nature and fate, they either do not occur at all or are rendered less severe.
And in general, since such power is the same whether applied to things regarded universally or particularly, one would wonder why all believe in the efficacy of prediction in universal matters, and in its usefulness for guarding one’s interests (for most people admit that they have foreknowledge of the seasons, of the significance of the constellations, and of the phases of the moon, and take great forethought for safeguarding themselves, always contriving cooling agents against summer and the means of warmth against winter, and in general preparing their own natures with moderation as a goal; furthermore, to ensure the safety of the seasons and of their sailings they watch the significance of the fixed stars, and, for the beginning of breeding and sowing, the aspects of the moon’s light at its full 22, and no one ever condemns such practices either as impossible or useless); but, on the other hand, as regards particular matters and those depending upon the mixture of the other qualities – such as predictions of more or less, of cold or of heat, and of the individual temperament – some people believe neither that foreknowledge is still possible nor that precautions can be taken in most instances. And yet, since it is obvious that, if we happen to have cooled ourselves against heat in general, we shall suffer less from it, similar measures can prove effective against particular forces which increase this particular temperament to a disproportionate amount of heat.
For the cause of this error is the difficulty and unfamiliarity of particular prognostication, a reason which in most other situations as well brings about disbelief. And since for the most part the resisting faculty is not coupled with the prognostic, because so perfect a disposition is rare, and since the force of nature takes its course without hindrance when the primary natures are concerned, an opinion has been produced that absolutely all future events are inevitable and unescapable 23. But, I think, just as with prognostication, even if it be not entirely infallible, at least its possibilities have appeared worthy of the highest regard, so too in the case of defensive practice, even though it does not furnish a remedy for everything, its authority in some instances at least, however few or unimportant, should be welcomed and prized, and regarded as profitable in no ordinary sense.
Recognizing, apparently, that these things are so, those who have most advanced this faculty of the art, the Egyptians, have entirely united medicine with astronomical prediction 24. For they would never have devised certain means of averting or warding off or remedying the universal and particular conditions that come or are present by reason of the ambient, if they had had any idea that the future cannot be moved and changed.
But as it is, they place the faculty of resisting by orderly natural means in second rank to the decrees of fate, and have yoked to the possibility of prognostication its useful and beneficial faculty, through what they call their iatromathematical systems (medical astrology), in order that by means of astronomy they may succeed in learning the qualities of the underlying temperatures, the events that will occur in the future because of the ambient, and their special causes, on the ground that without this knowledge any measures of aid ought for the most part to fail, because the same ones are not fitted for all bodies or diseases 25; and, on the other band, by means of medicine, through their knowledge of what is properly sympathetic or antipathetic in each case, they proceed, as far as possible, to take precautionary measures against impending illness and to prescribe infallible treatment for existing disease.
Let this be, to this point, our summarily stated preliminary sketch. We shall now conduct our discussion after the manual of an introduction 26, beginning with the character of each of the heavenly bodies with respect to its active power, in agreement with the physical observations attached to them by the ancients, and in the first place the powers of the planets, sun, and moon.
4. Περὶ τῆς τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων δυνάμεως
Ὁ ἥλιος κατείληπται τὸ ποιητικὸν ἔχων τῆς οὐσίας ἐν τῷ θερμαίνειν καὶ ἠρέμα ξηραίνειν· ταῦτα δὲ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων ἡμῖν εὐαισθητότερα γίνεται διά τε τὸ μέγεθος αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸ τῶν κατὰ τὰς ὥρας μεταβολῶν ἐναργές, ἐπειδήπερ, ὅσῳ ἂν μάλιστα ἐγγίζῃ τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπου, μᾶλλον ἡμᾶς οὕτως διατίθησιν.
Ἡ δὲ σελήνη τὸ μὲν πλεῖστον ἔχει τῆς δυνάμεως ἐν τῷ ὑγραίνειν διὰ τὴν περιγειότητα δηλονότι καὶ τὴν τῶν ὑγρῶν ἀναθυμίασιν καὶ διατίθησιν οὕτως ἄντικρυς τὰ σώματα πεπαίνουσα καὶ διασήπουσα τὰ πλεῖστα· κεκοινώνηκε δὲ ἠρέμα καὶ τοῦ θερμαίνειν διὰ τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου φωτισμούς.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ τὸ πλεῖον ἔχει τῆς ποιότητος ἔν τε τῷ ψύχειν καὶ τῷ κατὰ ψῦξιν ἠρέμα ξηραίνειν, διὰ τὸ πλεῖστον ὡς ἔοικεν ἀπέχειν ἅμα τῆς τε τοῦ ἡλίου θερμασίας καὶ τῆς τῶν περὶ τὴν γῆν ὑγρῶν ἀναθυμιάσεις. Συνίστανται δὲ δυνάμεις ἐπί τε τούτου καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν καὶ διὰ τῶν ἐν τοῖς πρὸς ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην σχηματισμοῖς παρατηρήσεων, ἐπειδήπερ οἱ μὲν οὕτως οἱ δὲ οὕτως τὴν τοῦ περιέχοντος κατάστασιν ἐπὶ τὸ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον συντρέποντες φαίνονται.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ξηραίνειν τε μάλιστα καὶ καυσοῦν ἔχει φύσιν τῷ τε πυρώδει τοῦ χρώματος οἰκείως καὶ τῇ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐγγύτητι, ὑποκειμένης αὐτῷ τῆς ἡλιακῆς σφαίρας.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς εὔκρατον ἔχει τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς δυνάμεως, μεταξὺ γινομένης τῆς κινήσεως αὐτοῦ τοῦ τε κατὰ τὸν Κρόνον ψυκτικοῦ καὶ τοῦ κατὰ τὸν Ἄρεα καυστικοῦ θερμαίνει τε γὰρ ἅμα καὶ ὑγραίνει καὶ διὰ τὸ μᾶλλον εἶναι θερμαντικὸς ὑπὸ τῶν ὑποκειμένων σφαιρῶν γονίμων πνευμάτων γίνεται ποιητικός.
Καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης δὲ τῶν μὲν αὐτῶν ἐστι κατὰ τὸ εὔκρατον ποιητικός, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὸ ἐναντίον. Θερμαίνει μὲν γὰρ ἠρέμα διὰ τὴν ἐγγύτητα τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον, μάλιστα δὲ ὑγραίνει καθάπερ ἡ σελήνη καὶ αὐτός, διὰ τὸ μέγεθος τῶν ἰδίων φώτων νοσφιζόμενος τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν περιεχόντων τὴν γῆν ὑγρῶν ἀναθυμίασιν.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ὡς ἐπίπαν ἐξ ἴσου ποτὲ μὲν ξηραντικὸς καταλαμβάνεται καὶ τῶν ὑγρῶν ἀναπωτικὸς διὰ τὸ μηδέποτε πολὺ τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου θερμασίας κατὰ μῆκος ἀφίστασθαι, ποτὲ δ’ αὖ ὑγραντικὸς διὰ τὸ τῇ περιγειοτάτῃ σφαίρᾳ τῆς σελήνης ἐπικεῖσθαι· ταχείας δὲ ποιεῖται τὰς ἐν ἀμφοτέροις μεταβολάς, πνευματούμενος ὥσπερ ὑπὸ τῆς περὶ αὐτὸν τὸν ἥλιον ὀξυκινησίας.
4. Of the Power of the Planets
The active power of the sun’s essential nature is found to be heating and, to a certain degree, drying 27. This is made more easily perceptible in the case of the sun than any other heavenly body by its size and by the obviousness of its seasonal changes, for the closer it approaches to the zenith the more it affects us in this way.
Most of the moon’s power consists of humidifying, dearly because it is close to the earth and because of the moist exhalations 28 therefrom. Its action therefore is precisely this, to soften and cause putrefaction in bodies for the most part, but it shares moderately also in heating power because of the light which it receives from the sun.
It is Saturn’s 29 quality chiefly to cool and, moderately, to dry, probably because he is furthest removed 30 both from the sun’s heat and the moist exhalations about the earth. Both in Saturn’s case and in that of the other planets there are powers, too, which arise through the observation of their aspects to the sun and the moon, for some of them appear to modify conditions in the ambient in one way, some in another, by increase or by decrease.
The nature of Mars is chiefly to dry and to burn, in conformity with his fiery colour and by reason of his nearness to the sun, for the sun’s sphere lies just below him.
Jupiter has a temperate active force because his movement takes place between the cooling influence of Saturn and the burning power of Mars. He both heats and humidifies; and because his heating power is the greater by reason of the underlying spheres, he produces fertilizing winds.
Venus has the same powers and tempered nature as Jupiter, but acts in the opposite way; for she warms moderately because of her nearness to the sun, but chiefly humidifies, like the moon, because of the amount of her own light and because she appropriates the exhalations from the moist atmosphere surrounding the earth.
Mercury in general is found at certain times alike to be drying and absorptive of moisture, because he never is far removed in longitude from the heat of the sun; and again humidifying, because he is next above the sphere of the moon, which is closest to the earth; and to change quickly from one to the other, inspired as it were by the speed of his motion in the neighbourhood of the sun itself.
5. Περὶ ἀγαθοποιῶν καὶ κακοποιῶν
Τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων ἐπειδὴ τῶν τεσσάρων χυμάτων δύο μέν ἐστι τὰ γόνιμα καὶ ποιητικά, τό τε τοῦ θερμοῦ καὶ τὸ τοῦ ὑγροῦ, διὰ τούτων γὰρ πάντα συγκρίνεται τε καὶ αὔξεται, δύο δὲ τὰ φθαρτικὰ καὶ παθητικά, τό τε τοῦ ψυχροῦ καὶ τὸ τοῦ ξηροῦ, δι’ ὧν πάντα πάλιν διακρίνεται καὶ φθίνει, τοὺς μὲν δύο τῶν πλανητῶν, τόν τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, καὶ ἔτι τὴν σελήνη ὡς ἀγαθοποιοὺς οἱ παλαιοὶ παρειλήφασι, διὰ τὸ εὔκρατον καὶ τὸ πλεῖον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ τῷ ὑγρῷ· τὸν δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως ὡς τῆς ἐναντίας φύσεως ποιητικούς, τὸν μὲν τῆς ἄγαν ψύξεως ἕνεκεν, τὸν δὲ τῆς ἄγαν ξηρότητος· τὸν δὲ ἥλιον καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ τὸ κοινὸν τῶν φύσεων ὡς ἀμφότερα δυναμένους καὶ μᾶλλον συντρεπομένους, οἷς ἂν τῶν ἄλλων παραγένωνται.
5. Of Beneficent and Maleficent Planets
Since the foregoing is the case, because two of the four humours are fertile and active, the hot and the moist (for all things are brought together and increased by them), and two are destructive and passive, the dry and the cold, through which all things, again, are separated and destroyed, the ancients accepted two of the planets, Jupiter and Venus, together with the moon, as beneficent because of their tempered nature and because they abound in the hot and the moist, and Saturn and Mars as producing effects of the opposite nature, one because of his excessive cold and the other for his excessive dryness; the sun and Mercury, however, they thought to have both powers, because they, have a common nature, and to join their influences with those of the other planets, with whichever of them they are associated.
6. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν
Πάλιν ἐπειδὴ τὰ πρῶτα γένη τῶν φύσεων δύο ἐστί, τό τε ἄρρεν καὶ τὸ θῆλυ, τῶν δὲ προκειμένων δυνάμεων ἡ τῆς ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας μάλιστα θηλυκὴ τυγχάνει, πλεῖον γὰρ ἐγγίνεται καθόλου τοῦτο τὸ μέρος πᾶσι τοῖς θήλεσι, τὰ δ’ ἄλλα μᾶλλον τοῖς ἄρρεσιν, εἰκότως τὴν μὲν σελήνην καὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἀστέρα θηλυκοὺς ἡμῖν παραδεδώκασι, διὰ τὸ πλεῖον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ, τὸν δὲ ἥλιον καὶ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀρρενικούς, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ κοινὸν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν γενῶν, καθὸ ἐξ ἴσου καὶ τῆς ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας καὶ τῆς ξηρᾶς ἐστι ποιητικός.
Ἀρρενοῦσθαι δέ φασι τοὺς ἀστέρας καὶ θηλύνεσθαι παρά τε τοὺς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχηματισμούς, ἑῴους μὲν γὰρ ὄντας καὶ προηγουμένους ἀρρενοῦσθαι, ἑσπερίους δὲ καὶ ἑπομένους θηλύνεσθαι, καὶ ἔτι παρὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὸν ὁρίζοντα· ἐν μὲν γὰρ τοῖς ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι μεσουρανήσεως ἢ καὶ ἀπὸ δύσεως μέχρι τῆς ὑπὸ γῆν ἀντιμεσουρανήσεως σχηματισμοῖς ὡς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς ἀρρενοῦσθαι, ἐν δὲ τοῖς λοιποῖς τεταρτημορίοις δυσὶν ὡς λιβικοῖς θηλύνεσθαι.
6. Of Masculine and Feminine Planets
Again, since there are two primary kinds of natures, male and female, and of the forces already mentioned that of the moist is especially feminine – for as a general thing this element is present to a greater degree in all females, and the others rather in males with good reason the view has been handed down to us that the moon and Venus are feminine, because they share more largely in the moist, and that the sun, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are masculine, and Mercury common to both genders, inasmuch as he produces the dry and the moist alike.
They say too that the stars become masculine or feminine according to their aspects to the sun, for when they are morning stars 31 and precede the sun they become masculine, and feminine when they are evening stars and follow the sun. Furthermore this happens also according to their positions with respect to the horizon; for when they are in positions from the orient to mid-heaven 32, or again from the occident to lower mid-heaven, they become masculine because they are eastern, but in the other two quadrants, as western stars, they become feminine.
7. Περὶ ἡμερινῶν καὶ νυκτερινῶν
Ὁμοίως δὲ ἐπειδὴ τῶν ποιούντων τὸν χρόνον τὰ ἐκφανέστατα διαστήματα δύο ταῦτα τυγχάνει τό τε τῆς ἡμέρας ἠρρενωμένον μᾶλλον, διὰ τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ θερμὸν καὶ δραστικόν, καὶ τὸ τῆς νυκτὸς τεθηλυσμένον μᾶλλον, διὰ τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ δίυγρον καὶ ἀναπαυστικόν, νυκτερινοὺς μὲν ἀκολούθως παραδεδώκασι τήν τε σελήνην καὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ἡμερινοὺς δὲ τόν τε ἥλιον καὶ τὸν τοῦ Διός, ἐπίκοινον δὲ κατὰ ταῦτα τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἐν μὲν τῷ ἑῴῳ σχήματι ἡμερινόν, ἐν δὲ τῷ ἑσπερίῳ νυκτερινόν.
Προσένειμαν δὲ ἑκατέρᾳ τῶν αἱρέσεων καὶ τοὺς δύο τοὺς τῆς φθαρτικῆς οὐσίας, οὐκ ἔτι μέντοι κατὰ τὰς αὐτὰς τῆς φύσεως αἰτίας, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὰς ἐναντίας. Τοῖς μὲν γὰρ τῆς ἀγαθῆς κράσεως οἰκειούμενα τὰ ὅμοια μεῖζον αὐτῶν τὸ ὠφέλιμον ποιεῖ, τοῖς δὲ φθαρτικοῖς τὰ ἀνοίκεια μιγνύμενα παραλύει τὸ πολὺ τῆς κακώσεως αὐτῶν. Ἔνθεν τὸν μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ψυκτικὸν ὄντα τῷ θερμῷ τῷ τῆς ἡμέρας ἀπένειμαν, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ξηρὸν ὄντα τῷ ὑγρῷ τῷ τῆς νυκτός· οὕτως γὰρ ἑκάτερος ὑπὸ τῆς κράσεως συμμετρίας τυχὼν οἰκεῖος γίνεται τῆς τὸ εὔκρατον παρεχούσης αἱρέσεως.
7. Of Diurnal and Nocturnal 33 Planets
Similarly, since of the two most obvious intervals of those which make up time, the day is more masculine because of its heat and active force, and night more feminine because of its moisture and its gift of rest, the tradition has consequently been handed down that the moon and Venus are nocturnal, the sun and Jupiter diurnal, and Mercury common as before, diurnal when it is a morning star and nocturnal as an evening star.
They also assigned to each of the sects the two destructive stars, not however in this instance on the principle of similar natures 34, but of just the opposite; for when stars of the same kind are joined with those of the good temperament their beneficial influence is increased, but if dissimilar stars are associated with the destructive ones the greatest part of their injurious power is broken. Thus they assigned, Saturn, which is cold, to the warmth of day, and Mars, which is dry, to the moisture of night, for in this way each of them attains good proportion through admixture and becomes a proper member of its sect, which provides moderation.
8. Περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως τῶν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχηματισμῶν
Ἤδη μέντοι καὶ παρὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον συσχηματισμοὺς ἥ τε σελήνη καὶ οἱ τρεῖς τῶν πλανωμένων τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον λαμβάνουσιν ἐν ταῖς οἰκείαις αὐτῶν δυνάμεσιν. Ἥ τε γὰρ σελήνη κατὰ μὲν τὴν ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι τῆς πρώτης διχοτόμου αὔξησιν ὑγρότητος μᾶλλόν ἐστι ποιητική, κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ πρώτης διχοτόμου μέχρι πανσελήνου θερμότητος, κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ πανσελήνου μέχρι δευτέρας διχοτόμου ξηρότητος, κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ δευτέρας διχοτόμου μέχρι κρύψεως ψυχρότητος.
Οἵ τε πλανώμενοι καὶ ἑῷοι μόνον ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀνατολῆς μέχρι τοῦ πρώτου στηριγμοῦ μᾶλλόν εἰσιν ὑγραντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ πρώτου στηριγμοῦ μέχρι τῆς ἀκρονύκτου μᾶλλον θερμαντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς ἀκρονύκτου μέχρι τοῦ δευτέρου στηριγμοῦ μᾶλλον ξηραντικοί, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου στηριγμοῦ μέχρι δύσεως μᾶλλον ψυκτικοί. Δῆλον δέ ἐστιν ὅτι καὶ ἀλλήλοις συγκιρνάμενοι παμπληθεῖς διαφορὰς ποιοτήτων εἰς τὸ περιέχον ἡμᾶς ἀπεργάζονται, κατακρατούσης μὲν ὡς ἐπίπαν τῆς ἰδίας ἑκάστου δυνάμεως, τρεπομένης δὲ κατὰ τὸ ποσὸν ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν συσχηματιζομένων.
8. Of the Power of the Aspects to the Sun
Now, mark you, likewise, according to their aspects to the sun, the moon and three of the planets 35 experience increase and decrease in their own powers. For in its waxing from new moon to first quarter the moon is more productive of moisture; in its passage from first quarter to full, of heat; from full to last quarter; of dryness, and from last quarter to occultation 36, of cold.
The planets, in oriental aspects only, are more productive of moisture from rising to their first station 37, of heat from first station to evening rising, of dryness from evening rising to the second station, of cold from second station to setting; and it is clear that when they are associated with one another they produce very many variations of quality in our ambient, the proper force of each one for the most part persisting, but being changed in quantity by the force of the stars that share the configuration.
9. Περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων δυνάμεως
Ἑξῆς δὲ ὄντος ἀκολούθου καὶ τὰς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων φύσεις κατὰ τὸ ἰδίως αὐτῶν ποιητικὸν ἐπιδραμεῖν, ἐκθησόμεθα καὶ τὰς ἐπ’ αὐτῶν τετηρημένας ἰδιοτροπίας κατὰ τὸ ὅμοιον ταῖς τῶν πλανωμένων φύσεσι τὸν ἐμφανισμὸν ποιούμενοι· καὶ πρῶτον τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν τὸν διὰ μέσων κύκλον ἐχόντων τὰς μορφώσεις.
Τοῦ Κριοῦ τοίνυν οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ τὸ ποιητικὸν ὁμοίως ἔχουσι κεκραμένον τῇ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῇ τοῦ Κρόνου δυνάμει· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ στόματι τῇ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῇ τοῦ Κρόνου· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ ὀπισθίῳ ποδὶ τῇ τοῦ Ἄρεως· οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς τῇ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ Ταύρῳ ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀποτομῆς ὁμοίαν ἔχουσι κρᾶσιν τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ Πλειάδι τῇ τε σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· τῶν δὲ ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ ὁ μὲν λαμπρὸς τῆς Ὑάδος καὶ ὑπόκιρρος, καλούμενος δὲ Λαμπαδίας, τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐν ἄκροις τοῖς κέρασι τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τοῖς Διδύμοις ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ποδῶν τῆς ὁμοίας κεκοινωνήκασι ποιότητος τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης οἱ δὲ περὶ τοὺς μηροὺς λαμπροὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου τῶν δὲ ἐν ταῖς κεφαλαῖς δύο λαμπρῶν ὁ μὲν ἐν τῇ προηγουμένῃ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· καλεῖται δὲ καὶ Ἀπόλλωνος ὁ δὲ ἐν τῇ ἑπομένῃ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· καλεῖται δὲ καὶ Ἡρακλέους.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ Καρκίνῳ ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ποδῶν δύο τῆς αὐτῆς ἐνεργείας εἰσὶ ποιητικοὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως οἱ δὲ ἐν ταῖς χηλαῖς τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἡ δὲ ἐν τῷ στήθει νεφελοειδὴς συστροφὴ καλουμένη δὲ Φάτνη τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ οἱ δὲ ἑκατέρωθεν αὐτῆς δύο καλούμενοι δὲ Ὄνοι τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Λέοντα οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς δύο τὸ ὅμοιον ποιοῦσι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ τραχήλῳ τρεῖς τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς καρδίας λαμπρὸς καλούμενος δὲ Βασιλίσκος τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ ὀσφύι καὶ ὁ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς λαμπρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης · οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς μηροῖς τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὴν Παρθένον οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ ὁ ἐπ’ ἄκρας τῆς νοτίου πτέρυγος ὅμοιον ἔχουσι τὸ ποιητικὸν τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ τῆς πτέρυγος λαμπροὶ καὶ οἱ κατὰ τὰ περιζώματα τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης· ὁ δὲ ἐν τῇ βορείῳ πτέρυγι λαμπρὸς καλούμενος δὲ Προτρυγητὴρ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· ὁ δὲ καλούμενος Στάχυς τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· οἱ δὲ ἐν ἄκροις τοῖς ποσὶ καὶ τῷ σύρματι τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Τῶν δὲ Χηλῶν τοῦ Σκορπίου οἱ μὲν ἐν ἄκραις αὐταῖς ὡσαύτως διατιθέασι τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. οἱ δὲ ἐν μέσαις τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως. Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ σώματι τοῦ Σκορπίου οἱ μὲν ἐν τῷ μετώπῳ λαμπροὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσι τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ σώματι τρεῖς, ὧν ὁ μέσος ὑπόκιρρος καὶ λαμπρότερος, καλεῖται δὲ Ἀντάρης, τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Διός· οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπονδύλοις τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ κέντρου τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἡ δὲ ἑπομένη νεφελοειδὴς συστροφὴ τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Τοξότην οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀκίδος τοῦ βέλους ὅμοιον ἔχουσι τὸ ποιητικὸν τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ τόξον καὶ τὴν λαβὴν τῆς χειρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· ἡ δὲ ἐν τῷ προσώπῳ συστροφὴ τῷ τε ἡλίῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως· οἱ δὲ ἐν ταῖς πτέρυξι καὶ τῷ νώτῳ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς ποσὶ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου·τὸ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς τετράπλευρον τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου.
Τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὸν Αἰγόκερων ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν κεράτων ὡσαύτως ἐνεργοῦσι τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως·οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ στόματι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης· οἱ δὲ ἐν τοῖς ποσὶ καὶ τῇ κοιλίᾳ τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Ὑδροχόον οἱ μὲν ἐν τοῖς ὤμοις ὁμοίως διατιθέασι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ σὺν τοῖς ἐν τῇ ἀριστερᾷ χειρὶ καὶ τῷ ἱματίῳ· οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν μηρῶν μᾶλλον μὲν τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, ἧττον δὲ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ ῥύσει τοῦ ὕδατος τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τοὺς Ἰχθύας οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ τοῦ νοτιωτέρου ἰχθύος τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσι τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ σώματι τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ νοτίου λίνου τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ σώματι καὶ τῇ ἀκάνθῃ τοῦ βορείου ἰχθύος τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ βορείῳ λίνῳ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός· ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ συνδέσμου λαμπρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Περὶ τῶν βορειοτέρων τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν ταῖς βορειοτέραις τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μορφώσεσι οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Μικρὰν ἄρκτον λαμπροὶ τὴν ὁμοίαν ἔχουσι ποιότητα τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Μεγάλην ἄρκτον τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ ὑπὸ τὴν οὐρὰν αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ τοῦ Πλοκάμου συστροφῇ τῇ σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Δράκοντι λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ τοῦ Κηφέως τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Βοώτην τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· ὁ δὲ λαμπρὸς καὶ ὑπόκιρρος καλούμενος Ἀρκτοῦρος τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Βορείῳ στεφάνῳ τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ἐν γόνασι τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ Λύρᾳ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Καὶ οἱ ἐν τῷ Ὄρνιθι ὡσαύτως.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὴν Κασσιέπειαν τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Περσέα τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου· ἡ δὲ ἐν τῇ λαβῇ τῆς μαχαίρας συστροφὴ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Ἡνιόχῳ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ὀφιοῦχον τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Ὄφιν αὐτοῦ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ὀϊστὸν τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Ἀετὸν τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Δελφῖνι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ἵππον λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῇ Ἀνδρομέδᾳ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ τοῦ Τριγώνου τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Περὶ τῶν νοτιωτέρων τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τοῖς νοτιωτέροις τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μορφώμασιν ὁ μὲν ἐν τῷ στόματι τοῦ Νοτίου ἰχθύος λαμπρὸς ὁμοίαν ἔχει τὴν ἐνέργειαν τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ Κῆτος τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Ὠρίωνα οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ὤμων τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου.
Τῶν δὲ ἐν τῷ Ποταμῷ ὁ μὲν ἔσχατος καὶ λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Διός· οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Λαγωῷ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Κύνα οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ὁ δὲ περὶ τὸ στόμα λαμπρὸς τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Ὁ δὲ ἐν τῷ Πρόκυνι λαμπρὸς τῷ τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ὕδρον λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Κρατῆρι τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Κόρακα τῷ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου.
Οἱ δὲ τῆς Ἀργοῦς λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Κένταυρον οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τῷ ἀνθρωπείῳ σώματι τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ· οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ ἵππῳ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ Θηρίον λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Θυμιατηρίῳ τῷ τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἠρέμα τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ Νοτίῳ στεφάνῳ λαμπροὶ τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
9. Of the Power of the Fixed Stars
As it is next in order to recount the natures of the fixed stars with reference to their special powers, we shall set forth their observed characters in an exposition like that of the natures of the planets, and in the first place those of the ones that occupy the figures in the zodiac 38 itself.
The stars in the head of Aries, then, have an effect like the power of Mars and Saturn, mingled; those in the mouth like Mercury’s power and moderately like Saturn’s; those in the hind foot like that of Mars, and those in the tail like that of Venus.
Of those in Taurus 39, the stars along the line where it is cut off have a temperature like that of Venus and in a measure like that of Saturn; those in the Pleiades, like those of the moon and Jupiter; of the stars in the head, the one of the Hyades that is bright and somewhat reddish, called the Torch 40, has a temperature like that of Mars; the others, like that of Saturn and moderately, like that of Mercury ; those in the tips of the horns, like that of Mars.
Of the stars in Gemini, those in the feet share the same quality as Mercury and, to a less degree, as Venus; the bright stars in the thighs, the same as Saturn; of the two bright stars in the heads 41, the one in the head in advance the same as Mercury; it is also called the star of Apollo; the one in the head that follows, the same as Mars; it is also called the star of Hercules.
Of the stars in Cancer, the two in the eyes produce the same effect as Mercury, and, to a less degree, as Mars; those in the claws, the same as Saturn and Mercury; the cloud-like cluster in the breast, called the Manger 42, the same as Mars and the moon; and the two on either side of it, which are called Asses 43, the same as Mars and the sun.
Of those in Leo, the two in the head act in the same way as Saturn and, to a less degree, as Mars; the three in the throat, the same as Saturn and, to a les s degree, as Mercury; the bright star upon the heart, called Regulus, the same as Mars and Jupiter; those in the hip and the bright star in the tail 44, the same as Saturn and Venus; and those in the thighs, the same as Venus and, to a less degree, Mercury.
Of the stars in Virgo 45, those in the head and the one upon the tip of the southern wing have an effect like that of Mercury and, in less degree, of Mars; the other bright stars of the wing and those on the girdles like that of Mercury and, in a measure, of Venus; the bright star in the northern wing, called Vindemiator, like those of Saturn and Mercury; the so-called Spica, like that of Venus and, in a less degree, that of Mars; those in the tips of the feet and the train 46 like that of Mercury and, in a less degree, Mars.
Of those in the Claws of the Scorpion 47, the ones at their very extremities exercise the same influence as do Jupiter and Mercury; those in the middle parts the same as do Saturn and, to a less degree, Mars.
Of the stars in the body of Scorpio, the bright stars on the forehead act in the same way as does Mars and in some degree as does Saturn; the three in the body, the middle one of which is tawny and rather bright and is called Antares, the same as Mars and, in some degree, Jupiter; those in the joints, the same as Saturn and, in some degree, Venus; those in the sting, the same as Mercury and Mars; and the so-called cloud-like cluster, the same as Mars and the moon.
Of the stars in Sagittarius 48, those in the point of his arrow have an effect like that of Mars and the moon; those in the bow and the grip of his hand, like that of Jupiter and Mars; the cluster in his forehead, like that of the sun and Mars; those in the cloak and his back, like that of Jupiter and, to a less degree, of Mercury; those in his feet, like that of Jupiter and Saturn; the quadrangle upon the tail, like that of Venus and, to a less degree, of Saturn.
Of the stars in Capricorn 49, those in the horns act in the same way as Venus and, in same degree, as Mars; those in the mouth, as Saturn and, in same degree, as Venus; those in the feet and the belly, as Mars and Mercury; and those in the tail, as Saturn and Jupiter.
Of the stars in Aquarius, those in the shoulders exert an influence like that of Saturn and Mercury, together with those in the left arm and the cloak; those in the thighs, like that of Mercury in a greater degree and like that of Saturn in a lesser degree; those in the stream of water, like that of Saturn and, in same degree, like that of Jupiter.
Of the stars in Pisces 50, those in the head of the southern Fish act in the same way as Mercury and somewhat as does Saturn; those in the body, as do Jupiter and Mercury; those in the tail and the southern cord, as do Saturn and, in some degree, Mercury; those in the body and backbone of the northern Fish, as do Jupiter and, in some degree, Venus; those in the northern part of the cord, as do Saturn and Jupiter; and the bright star on the bond, as do Mars and, in some degree, Mercury.
Of constellations north of the zodiac.
Of the stars in the configurations north of the zodiac, the bright stars in Ursa Minor have a similar quality to that of Saturn and, to a less degree, to that of Venus;
Those in Ursa Major, to that of Mars;
And the cluster of the Coma Berenices beneath the Bear’s tail, to that of the moon and Venus;
The bright stars in Draco, to that of Saturn, Mars, and Jupiter;
Those of Cepheus, to that of Saturn and Jupiter;
Those in Boötes, to that of Mercury and Saturn; the bright, tawny star, to that of Jupiter and Mars, the star called Arcturus;
The star in Corona Septentrionalis, to that of Venus and Mercury;
Those in Geniculator 51, to that of Mercury;
Those in Lyra 52, to that of Venus and Mercury;
And likewise those in Cygnus.
The stars in Cassiopeia have the effect of Saturn and Venus;
Those in Perseus, of Jupiter and Saturn; the cluster in the hilt of the sword, of Mars and Mercury;
The bright stars in Auriga 53, of Mars and Mercury;
Those in Ophiuchus, of Saturn and, to some degree, of Venus;
Those in his serpent, of Saturn and Mars;
Those in Sagitta, of Mars and, to some degree, of Venus;
Those in Aquila 54, of Mars and Jupiter;
Those in Delphinus, of Saturn and Mars;
The bright stars in the Horse 55, of Mars and Mercury;
Those in Andromeda, of Venus;
Those in Triangulum, of Mercury.
Of constellations south of the zodiac.
Of the stars in the formations south of the zodiac the bright star in the mouth of Piscis Australis 56 has an influence similar to that of Venus and Mercury;
Those in Cetus, similar to that of Saturn;
Of those in Orion 57, the stars on his shoulders similar to that of Mars and Mercury, and the other bright stars similar to that of Jupiter and Saturn;
Of the stars in Eridanus the last bright one 58 has an influence like that of Jupiter and the others like that of Saturn;
The star in Lepus, like that of Saturn and Mercury;
Of those in Canis, the others like that of Venus, and the bright star in the mouth 59, like that of Jupiter and, to a less degree, of Mars;
The bright star Procyon, like that of Mercury. and, in a less degree, that of Mars;
The bright stars in Hydra 60, like that of Saturn and Venus;
Those in Crater, like that of Venus and, in a less degree, of Mercury;
Those in Corvus, like that of Mars and Saturn;
The bright stars of Argo 61, like that of Saturn and Jupiter;
Οf those in Centaurus, the ones in the human body, like that of Venus and Mercury, and the bright stars in the equine body like that of Venus and Jupiter;
The bright stars in Lupus, like that of Saturn and, in less degree, of Mars;
Those in Ara, like that of Venus and, to a lesser degree, of Mercury;
And the bright stars in Corona Australis, like that of Saturn and Mercury.
10. Περὶ τῶν ὡρῶν τοῦ ἔτους
Αἱ μὲν οὖν τῶν ἀστέρων καθ’ ἑαυτοὺς δυνάμεις τοιαύτης ἔτυχον ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιοτέρων παρατηρήσεως. Καὶ τῶν ὡρῶν δὲ τοῦ ἔτους τεσσάρων οὐσῶν ἔαρός τε καὶ θέρους καὶ μετοπώρου καὶ χειμῶνος τὸ μὲν ἔαρ ἔχει τὸ μᾶλλον ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ διὰ τὴν κατὰ τὸ παρῳχημένον ψῦχος ἀρχομένης τῆς θερμασίας διάχυσιν· τὸ δὲ θέρος τὸ πλεῖον ἔχει ἐν τῷ θερμῷ διὰ τὴν τοῦ ἡλίου πρὸς τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπον ἐγγύτητα· τὸ δὲ μετόπωρον τὸ μᾶλλον ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ διὰ τὴν κατὰ τὸ παρῳχημένον καῦμα τῶν ὑγρῶν ἀνάποσιν· ὁ δὲ χειμὼν τὸ πλεῖον ἔχει ἐν τῷ ψυχρῷ διὰ τὸ τὸν ἥλιον πλεῖον ἀφίστασθαι τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπου.
Διόπερ καὶ τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μηδεμιᾶς οὔσης φύσει ἀρχῆς ὡς κύκλου τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας ἀρχόμενον δωδεκατημόριον τὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τῶν ὅλων ἀρχὴν ὑποτίθενται, καθάπερ ἐμψύχου ζῴου τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ τὴν ὑγρὰν τοῦ ἔαρος ὑπερβολὴν προκαταρκτικὴν ποιούμενοι καὶ ἐφεξῆς τὰς λοιπὰς ὥρας, διὰ τὸ καὶ πάντων ζῴων τὰς μὲν πρώτας ἡλικίας τὸ πλεῖον ἔχειν τῆς ὑγρασίας παραπλησίως τῷ ἔαρι ἁπαλὰς οὔσας ἔτι καὶ τρυφεράς, τὰς δὲ δευτέρας τὰς μέχρι τῆς ἀκμαιότητος τὸ πλεῖον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ θερμῷ παραπλησίως τῷ θέρει, τὰς δὲ τρίτας καὶ ἤδη ἐν παρακμῇ καὶ ἀρχῇ φθίσεως τὸ πλεῖον ἤδη καὶ αὐτὰς ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ παραπλησίως τῷ μετοπώρῳ, τὰς δὲ ἐσχάτας καὶ πρὸς τῇ διαλύσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ψυχρῷ, καθάπερ καὶ ὁ χειμών.
10. Of the year’s seasons
Such, then, are the observations of the effects of the stars themselves as made by our predecessors. Of the four seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, and winter, spring exceeds in moisture on account of its diffusion after the cold has passed and warmth is setting in; the summer, in heat, because of the nearness of the sun to the zenith; autumn more in dryness, because of the sucking up of the moisture during the hot season just past; and winter exceeds in cold, because the sun is farthest away from the zenith.
For this reason, although there is no natural beginning of the zodiac, since it is a circle, they assume that the sign which begins with the vernal equinox, that of Aries 62, is the starting point of them all, making the excessive moisture of the spring the first part of the zodiac as though it were a living creature, and taking next in order the remaining seasons, because in all creatures the earliest ages 63, like the spring, have a larger share of moisture and are tender and still delicate. The second age, up to the prime of life, exceeds in heat, like summer; the third, which is now past the prime and on the verge of decline, has an excess of dryness, like autumn; and the last, which approaches dissolution, exceeds in its coldness, like winter.
11. Περὶ τῆς τῶν τεσσάρων γωνιῶν δυνάμεως
Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν τεσσάρων τοῦ ὁρίζοντος τόπων καὶ γωνιῶν, ἀφ’ ὧν καὶ οἱ καθόλου πνέοντες ἄνεμοι τὰς ἀρχὰς ἔχουσιν, ὁ μὲν πρὸς ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς αὐτός τε τὸ πλεῖον ἔχει ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, διὰ τὸ κατ’ αὐτὸν γινομένου τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς νυκτὸς ὑγρανθέντα τότε πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι ξηραίνεσθαι· οἵ τε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες ἄνεμοι, οὓς κοινότερον ἀπηλιώτας καλοῦμεν, ἄνικμοί τέ εἰσιν καὶ ξηραντικοί. Ὁ δὲ πρὸς μεσημβρίᾳ τόπος αὐτός τέ ἐστι θερμότατος διά τε τὸ πυρῶδες τῶν τοῦ ἡλίου μεσουρανήσεων καὶ διὰ τὸ ταύτας κατὰ τὴν τῆς ἡμετέρας οἰκουμένης ἔγκλισιν πρὸς μεσημβρίαν μᾶλλον ἀποκλίνειν· οἵ τε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες ἄνεμοι, οὓς κοινῶς νότους καλοῦμεν, θερμοί τέ εἰσι καὶ πληρωτικοί.
Ὁ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς δυσμαῖς τόπος αὐτός τέ ἐστιν ὑγρὸς διὰ τὸ κατ’ αὐτὸν γινομένου τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας ἀναποθέντα τότε πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι ὑγραίνεσθαι· οἵ τε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ φερόμενοι ἄνεμοι, οὓς κοινότερον ζεφύρους καλοῦμεν, νεαροί τέ εἰσι καὶ ὑγραντικοί. Ὁ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς ἄρκτοις τόπος αὐτός τέ ἐστι ψυχρότατος διὰ τὸ κατὰ τὴν τῆς ἡμετέρας οἰκουμένης ἔγκλισιν τὰς τῆς θερμότητος αἰτίας τοῦ ἡλίου μεσουρανήσεις πλεῖον αὐτοῦ διεστάναι ὥσπερ τοῦ ἡλίου ἀντιμεσουρανοῦντος· οἵ τε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ πνέοντες ἄνεμοι καλούμενοι δὲ κοινῶς βορέαι ψυχροί τε ὑπάρχουσι καὶ πυκνωτικοί.
Χρησίμη δὲ καὶ ἡ τούτων διάληψις πρὸς τὸ τὰς συγκράσεις πάντα τρόπον ἑκάστοτε δύνασθαι διακρίνειν. Εὐκατανόητον γάρ, διότι καὶ παρὰ τὰς τοιαύτας καταστάσεις ἤτοι τῶν ὡρῶν ἢ τῶν ἡλικιῶν ἢ τῶν γωνιῶν τρέπεταί πως τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων δυνάμεως καὶ ἐν μὲν ταῖς οἰκείαις καταστάσεσιν ἀκρατοτέραν τε ἴσχουσι τὴν ποιότητα καὶ τὴν ἐνέργειαν ἰσχυροτέραν, οἷον ἐν ταῖς θερμαῖς οἱ θερμαντικοὶ τὴν φύσιν καὶ ἐν ταῖς ὑγραῖς οἱ ὑγραντικοί, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἐναντίαις κεκραμένην καὶ ἀσθενεστέραν, ὡς ἐν ταῖς ψυχραῖς οἱ θερμαντικοὶ καὶ ἐν ταῖς ξηραῖς οἱ ὑγραντικοὶ καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις δὲ ὡσαύτως κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον τῆς διὰ τῆς μίξεως συγκιρναμένης ποιότητος.
11. Of the power of the four angles
Similarly, too, of the four regions and angles of the horizon, from which originate the winds from the cardinal points 64, the eastern one likewise excels in dryness because, when the sun is in that region, whatever has been moistened by the night then first begins to be dried; and the winds which blow from it, which we call in general Apeliotes 65, are without moisture and drying in effect. The region to the south is hottest because of the fiery heat of the sun’s passages through mid-heaven and because these passages, on account of the inclination of our inhabited world, diverge more to the south; and the winds which blow thence and are called by the general name Notus are hot and rarefying.
The region to the west is itself moist, because when the sun is therein the things dried out during the day then first begin to become moistened; likewise the winds which blow from this part, which we call by the general name Zephyrus, are fresh and moist. The region to the north is the coldest, because through our inhabited world’s inclination it is too far removed from the causes of heat arising from the sun’s culmination, as it is also when the sun is at its lower culmination; and the winds which blow thence, which are called by the general name Boreas, are cold and condensing in effect.
The knowledge of these facts is useful to enable one to form a complete judgement of temperatures in individual instances. For it is easily recognizable that, together with such conditions as these, of seasons, ages, or angles, there is a corresponding variation in the potency of the stars’ faculties, and that in the conditions akin to them their quality is purer and their effectiveness stronger, those that are heating by nature, for instance, in heat, and those that are moistening in the moist, while under opposite conditions their power is adulterated and weaker. Thus the heating stars in the cold periods and the moistening stars in the dry periods are weaker, and similarly in the other cases, according to the quality produced by the mixture.
12. Περὶ τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν καὶ στερεῶν καὶ δισώμων ζῳδίων
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως προεκτεθέντων ἀκόλουθον ἂν εἴη συνάψαι καὶ τὰς αὐτῶν τῶν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ δωδεκατημορίων παραδεδομένας φυσικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας. Αἱ μὲν γὰρ ὁλοσχερέστεραι καθ’ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν κράσεις ἀνάλογον ἔχουσι ταῖς κατ’ αὐτὰ γινομέναις ὥραις. Συνίστανται δέ τινες αὐτῶν ἰδιότητες καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας οἰκειώσεως, ἃς ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς διελευσόμεθα, προτάξαντες τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἀμιγὲς αὐτῶν μόνων τῶν δωδεκατημορίων καθ’ ἑαυτά τε καὶ πρὸς ἄλληλα θεωρουμένας δυνάμεις.
Πρῶται μὲν τοίνυν εἰσὶ διαφοραὶ τῶν καλουμένων τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν καὶ στερεῶν καὶ δισώμων·
Δύο μὲν γάρ ἐστι τροπικά, τό τε πρῶτον ἀπὸ τῆς θερινῆς τροπῆς τριακοντάμοιρον τὸ τοῦ Καρκίνου καὶ τὸ πρῶτον ἀπὸ τῆς χειμερινῆς τροπῆς τὸ κατὰ τὸν Αἰγόκερων. Ταῦτα δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ συμβεβηκότος εἴληφε τὴν ὀνομασίαν· τρέπεται γὰρ ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς αὐτῶν γινόμενος ὁ ἥλιος, ἐπιστρέφων εἰς τὰ ἐναντία τῶν κατὰ πλάτος παρόδων, κατὰ μὲν τὸν Καρκίνον θέρος ποιῶν, κατὰ δὲ τὸν Αἰγόκερων χειμῶνα. Δύο δὲ καλεῖται ἰσημερινὰ τό τε ἀπὸ τῆς ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας πρῶτον δωδεκατημόριον, τὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ, καὶ τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοπωρινῆς, τὸ τῶν Χηλῶν· ὠνόμασται δὲ καὶ ταῦτα πάλιν ἀπὸ τοῦ συμβεβηκότος, ἐπειδὴ κατὰ τὰς ἀρχὰς αὐτῶν γινόμενος ὁ ἥλιος ἴσας ποιεῖ πανταχῆ τὰς νύκτας ταῖς ἡμέραις.
Τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν ὀκτὼ δωδεκατημορίων τέσσαρα μὲν καλεῖται στερεά, τέσσαρα δὲ δίσωμα· καὶ στερεὰ μέν ἐστι τὰ ἑπόμενα τοῖς τε τροπικοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἰσημερινοῖς, Ταῦρος, Λέων, Σκορπίος, Ὑδροχόος, ἐπειδὴ τῶν ἐν ἐκείνοις ἀρχομένων ὡρῶν αἵ τε ὑγρότητες καὶ θερμότητες καὶ ξηρότητες καὶ ψυχρότητες ἐν τούτοις γινομένου τοῦ ἡλίου μᾶλλον καὶ στερεώτερον ἡμῶν καθικνοῦνται, οὐ τῶν καταστημάτων φύσει γινομένων τότε ἀκρατοτέρων, ἀλλ’ ἡμῶν ἐγκεχρονικότων αὐτοῖς ἤδη καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτῶν εὐαισθητότερον ἀντιλαμβανομένων.
Δίσωμα δέ ἐστι τὰ τοῖς στερεοῖς ἑπόμενα Δίδυμοι, Παρθένος, Τοξότης, Ἰχθύες διὰ τὸ μεταξὺ εἶναι τῶν στερεῶν καὶ τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν καὶ ὥσπερ κεκοινωνηκέναι κατά τε τὰ τέλη καὶ κατὰ τὰς ἀρχὰς τῆς τῶν δύο καταστημάτων φυσικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας.
12. Of Solstitial, Equinoctial, Solid, and Bicorporeal Signs
After the explanation of these matters the next subject to be added would be the natural characters of the zodiacal signs themselves, as they have been handed down by tradition. For although their more general temperaments 66 are each analogous to the seasons that take place in them 67, certain peculiar qualities of theirs arise from their kinship 68 to the sun, moon, and planets, as we shall relate in what follows, putting first the unmingled powers of the signs themselves alone, regarded both absolutely and relatively to one another.
The first distinctions, then, are of the so-called solstitial, equinoctial, solid, and bicorporeal signs 69.
For there are two solstitial signs, the first interval of 30° from the summer solstice, the sign of Cancer, and the first from the winter solstice, Capricorn; and they have received their name 70 from what takes place in them. For the sun turns when he is at the beginning of these signs and reverses his latitudinal progress, causing summer in Cancer and winter in Capricorn. Two signs are called equinoctial, the one which is first from the spring equinox, Aries, and the one which begins with the autumnal equinox, Libra; and they too again are named from what happens there, because when the sun is at the beginning of these signs he makes the nights exactly equal to the days.
Of the remaining eight signs four are called solid and four bicorporeal. The solid signs, Taurus, Leo, Scorpio, and Aquarius, are those which follow the solstitial and equinoctial signs; and they are so called because when the sun is in them the moisture, heat, dryness, and cold of the seasons that begin in the preceding signs touch us more firmly, not that the weather is naturally any more intemperate at that time, but that we are by then inured to them and for that reason are more sensible of their power.
The bicorporeal signs, Gemini, Virgo, Sagittarius, and Pisces, are those which follow the solid signs, and are so called because they are between the solid and the solstitial and equinoctial signs and share, as it were, at end and beginning, the natural properties of the two states of weather.
13. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν ζῳδίων
Πάλιν δὲ ὡσαύτως ἓξ μὲν τῶν δωδεκατημορίων ἀπένειμαν τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀρρενικῇ καὶ ἡμερινῇ, ἓξ δὲ τῇ θηλυκῇ καὶ νυκτερινῇ. Καὶ ἡ μὲν τάξις αὐτοῖς ἐδόθη παρ’ ἓν διὰ τὸ συνεζεῦχθαι καὶ ἐγγὺς ἀεὶ τυγχάνειν τὴν ἡμέραν τῇ νυκτὶ καὶ τὸ θῆλυ τῷ ἄρρενι. Τῆς δὲ ἀρχῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ Κριοῦ δι’ ἃς εἴπομεν αἰτίας λαμβανομένης, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τοῦ ἄρρενος ἄρχοντος καὶ πρωτεύοντος, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν ἀεὶ τοῦ παθητικοῦ πρῶτόν ἐστι τῇ δυνάμει, τὸ μὲν τοῦ Κριοῦ δωδεκατημόριον καὶ ἔτι τὸ τῶν Χηλῶν ἀρρενικά τε ἔδοξε καὶ ἡμερινά, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ ἰσημερινὸς κύκλος δι’ αὐτῶν γραφόμενος τὴν πρώτην καὶ ἰσχυροτάτην τῶν ὅλων φορὰν ἀποτελεῖ, τὰ δὲ ἐφεξῆς αὐτῶν ἀκολούθως τῇ παρ’ ἓν ὡς ἔφαμεν τάξει.
Χρῶνται δέ τινες τῇ τάξει τῶν ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνατέλλοντος δωδεκατημορίου, ὃ δὴ καλοῦσιν ὡροσκοποῦν, τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ ἄρρενος ποιούμενοι. Ὥσπερ γὰρ καὶ τὴν τῶν τροπικῶν ἀρχὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ σεληνιακοῦ ζῳδίον λαμβάνουσιν ἔνιοι, διὰ τὸ ταύτην τῶν ἄλλων τάχιον τρέπεσθαι, οὕτως καὶ τὴν τῶν ἀρρενικῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκοποῦντος διὰ τὸ ἀπηλιωτικώτερον καὶ οἱ μὲν ὁμοίως παρ’ ἓν πάλιν τῇ τάξει χρώμενοι, οἱ δὲ καθ’ ὅλα τεταρτημόρια διαιροῦντες καὶ ἑῷα μὲν ἡγούμενοι καὶ ἀρρενικὰ τό τε ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου μέχρι τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος καὶ τὸ κατὰ ἀντίθεσιν ἀπὸ τοῦ δύνοντος μέχρι τοῦ ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανοῦντος, ἑσπέρια δὲ καὶ θηλυκὰ τὰ λοιπὰ δύο τεταρτημόρια.
Καὶ ἄλλας δέ τινας τοῖς δωδεκατημορίοις προσηγορίας ἐφήρμοσαν ἀπὸ τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ μορφώσεων, λέγω δὲ οἷον τετράποδα καὶ χερσαῖα καὶ ἡγεμονικὰ καὶ πολύσπορα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα, ἃς αὐτόθεν τό τε αἴτιον καὶ τὸ ἐμφανιστικὸν ἐχούσας περισσὸν ἡγούμεθα καταριθμεῖν, τῆς ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων διατυπώσεων ποιότητος, ἐν αἷς ἂν τῶν προτελέσεων χρησίμη φαίνηται, δυναμένης προεκτίθεσθαι.
13. Of Masculine and Feminine Signs
Again, in the same way they assigned six of the signs to the masculine and diurnal nature 71 and an equal number to the feminine and nocturnal. An alternating order was assigned to them because day is always yoked to night and close to it, and female to male. Now as Aries is taken as the starting-point for the reasons we have mentioned, and as the male likewise rules and holds first place, since also the active is always superior to the passive in power, the signs of Aries and Libra were thought to be masculine and diurnal, an additional reason being that the equinoctial circle which is drawn through them completes the primary and most powerful movement of the whole universe 72. The signs in succession after them correspond, as we said, in alternating order.
Same, however, employ an order of masculine and feminine signs whereby the masculine begins with the sign that is rising, called the horoscope 73. For just as some begin the solstitial signs with the moon’s sign because the moon changes direction more swiftly than the rest, so they begin the masculine signs with the horoscope because it is further to the east, some as before making use of the alternate order of signs, and others dividing by entire quadrants, and designating as matutinal and masculine signs those of the quadrant from the horoscope to mid-heaven and those of the opposite quadrant from the occident to the lower mid-heaven, and as evening and feminine the other two quadrants.
They have also attached other descriptions 74 to the signs, derived from their shapes; I refer, for example, to “four-footed”, “terrestrial”, “commanding”, “fecund”, and similar appellations. These, since their reason and their significance are directly derived, we think it superfluous to enumerate, since the quality resulting from such conformations can be explained in connection with those predictions wherein it is obviously useful.
14. Περὶ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων δωδεκατημορίων
Οἰκειοῦται δὲ ἀλλήλοις τῶν μερῶν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ πρῶτον τὰ συσχηματιζόμενα. Ταῦτα δ’ ἐστὶν ὅσα διάμετρον ἔχει στάσιν περιέχοντα ὀρθὰς δύο γωνίας καὶ ἓξ δωδεκατημόρια καὶ μοίρας ρπ′, καὶ ὅσα τρίγωνον ἔχει στάσιν περιέχοντα μίαν ὀρθὴν γωνίαν καὶ τρίτον καὶ τέσσαρα δωδεκατημόρια καὶ μοίρας ρκ′, καὶ ὅσα τετραγωνίζειν λέγεται, περιέχοντα μίαν ὀρθὴν καὶ τρία δωδεκατημόρια καὶ μοίρας θ′, καὶ ἔτι ὅσα ἑξάγωνον ποιεῖται στάσιν περιέχοντα δίμοιρον γωνίας ὀρθῆς καὶ δωδεκατημόρια β′ καὶ μοίρας ϛ′. Δι’ ἣν δὲ αἰτίαν αὗται μόναι τῶν διαστάσεων παρελήφθησαν, ἐκ τούτων ἂν μάθοιμεν. Τῆς μὲν γὰρ κατὰ διάμετρον αὐτόθεν ἐστὶν ὁ λόγος φανερός, ἐπειδήπερ ἐπὶ μιᾶς εὐθείας ποιεῖται τὰς συναντήσεις.
Λαμβανομένων δὲ τῶν δύο μεγίστων καὶ διὰ συμφωνίας μορίων τε καὶ ἐπιμορίων, μορίων μὲν πρὸς τὸ τῶν β′ ὀρθῶν τοῦ τε ἡμίσους καὶ τοῦ τρίτου τὸ μὲν εἰς δύο τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου πεποίηκε, τὸ δὲ εἰς τρία τὴν τοῦ ἑξαγώνου καὶ τὴν τοῦ τριγώνου· ἐπιμορίων δὲ πρὸς τὸ τῆς μιᾶς ὀρθῆς τετράγωνον μεταξὺ λαμβανομένων τοῦ τε ἡμιολίου καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτρίτου, τὸ μὲν ἡμιόλιον πάλιν ἐποίησε τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου πρὸς τὴν τοῦ ἑξαγώνου, τὸ δὲ ἐπίτριτον τὴν τοῦ τριγώνου πρὸς τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου. Τούτων μέντοι τῶν συσχηματισμῶν οἱ μὲν τρίγωνοι καὶ ἑξάγωνοι σύμφωνοι καλοῦνται διὰ τὸ ἐξ ὁμογενῶν συγκεῖσθαι δωδεκατημορίων ἤτοι ἐκ πάντων ἀρρενικῶν ἢ θηλυκῶν, ἀσύμφωνοι δὲ οἱ τετράγωνοι καὶ οἱ κατὰ διάμετρον, διότι κατ’ ἀντίθεσιν τῶν ὁμογενῶν τὴν στάσιν λαμβάνουσι.
14. Of the Aspects of the Signs
Of the parts of the zodiac those first are familiar 75 one to another which are in aspect 76. These are the ones which are in opposition, enclosing two right angles, six signs, and 180 degrees; those which are in trine, enclosing one and one-third right angles, four signs, and 120 degrees; those which are said to be in quartile, enclosing one right angle, three signs, and 90 degrees, and finally those that occupy the sextile position, enclosing two-thirds of a right angle, two signs, and 60 degrees. We may learn from the following why only these intervals have been taken into consideration. The explanation of opposition is immediately obvious, because it causes the signs to meet on one straight line.
But if we take the two fractions and the two superparticulars 77 most important in music, and if the fractions one-half and one-third be applied to opposition, composed of two right angles, the half makes the quartile and the third the sextile and trine 78. Of the superparticulars, if the sesquialter and sesquitertian be applied to the quartile interval of one right angle, which lies between them, the sesquialter makes the ratio of the quartile to the sextile and the sesquitertian that of trine to quartile 79. Of these aspects trine and sextile are called harmonious because they are composed of signs of the same kind, either entirely of feminine or entirely of masculine signs; while quartile and opposition are disharmonious because they are composed of signs of opposite kinds.
15. Περὶ τῶν προστασσόντων καὶ ὑπακουόντων ὁμοίως ζῳδίων
Ὡσαύτως δὲ προστάσσοντα καὶ ὑπακούοντα λέγεται τμήματα τὰ κατ’ ἴσην διάστασιν ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἢ καὶ ὁποτέρου τῶν ἰσημερινῶν σημείων ἐσχηματισμένα, διὰ τὸ ἐν τοῖς ἴσοις χρόνοις ἀναφέρεσθαί τε καὶ καταφέρεσθαι καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἴσων εἶναι παραλλήλων. Τούτων δὲ τὰ μὲν ἐν τῷ θερινῷ ἡμικυκλίῳ προστάσσοντα καλεῖται, τὰ δὲ ἐν τῷ χειμερινῷ ὑπακούοντα, διὰ τὸ κατ’ ἐκείνων μὲν γινόμενον τὸν ἥλιον μείζονα ποιεῖν τῆς νυκτὸς τὴν ἡμέραν, κατὰ τούτων δὲ ἐλάττονα.
15. Of Commanding and Obeying Signs
Similarly the names “commanding” and “obeying” 80 are applied to the divisions of the zodiac which are disposed at an equal distance from the same equinoctial sign, whichever it may be, because they ascend 81 in equal periods of time and are on equal parallels. Of these the ones in the summer hemisphere 82 are called “commanding” and those in the winter hemisphere “obedient”, because the sun makes the day longer than the night when he is in the summer hemisphere, and shorter in the winter.
16. Περὶ τῶν βλεπόντων καὶ ἰσοδυναμούντων ἀλλήλοις
Πάλιν δὲ ἰσοδυναμεῖν φασιν ἀλλήλοις μέρη τὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ καὶ ὁποτέρου τῶν τροπικῶν σημείων τὸ ἴσον ἀφεστῶτα, διὰ τὸ καθ’ ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν τοῦ ἡλίου γινομένου τάς τε ἡμέρας ταῖς ἡμέραις καὶ τὰς νύκτας ταῖς νυξὶ καὶ τὰ διαστήματα τῶν οἰκείων ὡρῶν ἰσοχρόνως ἀποτελεῖν. Ταῦτα δὲ καὶ βλέπειν ἄλληλα λέγεται διά τε τὰ προειρημένα καὶ ἐπειδήπερ ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν ἔκ τε τῶν αὐτῶν μερῶν τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ἀνατέλλει καὶ εἰς τὰ αὐτὰ καταδύνει.
16. Of Signs which Behold each other and Signs of Equal Power
Again they say that the parts which are equally removed from the same tropical sign, whichever it may be, are of equal power 83, because when the sun comes into either of them the days are equal to the days, the nights to the nights, and the lengths of their own hours 84 are the same. These also are said to “behold” one another both for the reasons stated and because each of the pair rises from the same part of the horizon and sets in the same part.
17. Περὶ τῶν ἀσυνδέτων
Ἀσύνδετα δὲ καὶ ἀπηλλοτριωμένα καλεῖται τμήματα, ὅσα μηδένα λόγον ἁπλῶς ἔχει πρὸς ἄλληλα τῶν προκατειλεγμένων οἰκειώσεων. Ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ μήτε τῶν προστασσόντων ἢ ὑπακουόντων τυγχάνει μήτε τῶν βλεπόντων ἢ ἰσοδυναμούντων, ἔτι τε καὶ τῶν ἐκκειμένων τεσσάρων συσχηματισμῶν τοῦ τε διαμέτρου καὶ τοῦ τριγώνου καὶ τοῦ τετραγώνου καὶ τοῦ ἑξαγώνου κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἀμέτοχα καταλαμβανόμενα καὶ ἤτοι δι’ ἑνὸς ἢ διὰ πέντε γινόμενα δωδεκατημορίων, ἐπειδήπερ τὰ μὲν δι’ ἑνὸς ἀπέστραπταί τε ὥσπερ ἀλλήλων καὶ δύο αὐτὰ ὄντα ἑνὸς περιέχει γωνίαν, τὰ δὲ διὰ πέντε εἰς ἄνισα διαιρεῖ τὸν ὅλον κύκλον, τῶν ἄλλων σχηματισμῶν εἰς ἴσα τὴν τῆς περιμέτρου διαίρεσιν ποιουμένων.
17. Of Disjunct Signs
“Disjunct” and “alien” are the names applied to those divisions of the zodiac which have none whatever of the aforesaid familiarities with one another. These are the ones which belong neither to the class of commanding or obeying, beholding or of equal power, and furthermore they are found to be entirely without share in the four aforesaid aspects, opposition, trine, quartile, and sextile, and are either one or five signs apart; for those which are one sign apart are as it were averted from one another and, though they are two, bound the angle of one, and those that are five signs apart divide the whole circle into unequal parts, while the other aspects make an equal division of the perimeter.
18. Περὶ οἴκων ἑκάστου ἀστέρος
Συνοικειοῦνται δὲ καὶ οἱ πλανῆται τοῖς τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μέρεσι κατά τε τοὺς καλουμένους οἴκους καὶ τρίγωνα καὶ ὑψώματα καὶ ὅρια καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα. Καὶ τὸ μὲν τῶν οἴκων τοιαύτην ἔχει φύσιν· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ τῶν ιβ′ ζῳδίων τὰ βορειότατα καὶ συνεγγίζοντα μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων τοῦ κατὰ κορυφὴν ἡμῶν τόπου θερμασίας τε καὶ ἀλέας διὰ τοῦτο περιποιητικὰ τυγχάνοντα ὅ τε Καρκίνος καὶ ὁ Λέων ἐστί, τὰ δύο ταῦτα τοῖς μεγίστοις καὶ κυριωτάτοις, τουτέστι τοῖς δύο φωσὶν ἀπένειμαν οἴκους, τὸ μὲν τοῦ Λέοντος ἀρρενικὸν ὂν τῷ ἡλίῳ, τὸ δὲ τοῦ Καρκίνου θηλυκὸν τῇ σελήνῃ, καὶ ἀκολούθως τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ Λέοντος μέχρι Αἰγόκερω ἡμικύκλιον ἡλιακὸν ὑπέθεντο, τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ Ὑδροχόου μέχρι Καρκίνου σεληνιακόν, ὅπως ἐν ἑκατέρῳ τῶν ἡμικυκλίων ἓν ζῴδιον καθ’ ἕκαστον τῶν πέντε ἀστέρων οἰκείως ἀπονεμηθῇ, τὸ μὲν πρὸς ἥλιον τὸ δὲ πρὸς σελήνην ἐσχηματισμένον, ἀκολούθως ταῖς τε τῶν κινήσεων αὐτῶν σφαίραις καὶ ταῖς τῶν φύσεων ἰδιοτροπίαις.
Τῷ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου ψυκτικῷ ὄντι μᾶλλον τὴν φύσιν κατ’ ἐναντιότητα τοῦ θερμοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀνωτάτω καὶ μακρὰν τῶν φώτων ἔχοντι ζώνην ἐδόθη τὰ διάμετρα ζῴδια τοῦ τε Καρκίνου καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος ὅ τε Αἰγόκερως καὶ ὁ Ὑδροχόος, μετὰ τοῦ καὶ ταῦτα τὰ δωδεκατημόρια ψυχρὰ καὶ χειμερινὰ τυγχάνειν καὶ ἕτι τοῦ τὸν κατὰ διάμετρον συσχηματισμὸν ἀσύμφωνον πρὸς ἀγαθοποιίαν εἶναι τῷ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντι εὐκράτῳ καὶ ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ Κρόνου σφαῖραν ἐδόθη τὰ ἐχόμενα δύο τῶν προκειμένων πνευματικὰ ὄντα καὶ γόνιμα ὅ τε Τοξότης καὶ οἱ Ἰχθύες κατὰ τριγωνικὴν πρὸς τὰ φῶτα διάστασιν, ἥτις ἐστὶ συμφώνου καὶ ἀγαθοποιοῦ συσχηματισμοῦ·
Ἐφεξῆς δὲ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ξηραντικῷ μᾶλλον ὄντι τὴν φύσιν καὶ ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ Διὸς ἔχοντι τὴν σφαῖραν τὰ ἐχόμενα πάλιν ἐκείνων ἐδόθη δωδεκατημόρια τὴν ὁμοίαν ἔχοντα φύσιν ὅ τε Κριὸς καὶ ὁ Σκορπίος, ἀκολούθως τῇ φθαρτικῇ καὶ ἀσυμφώνῳ ποιότητι τὴν τοῦ τετραγώνου πρὸς τὰ φῶτα ποιοῦντα διάστασιν. Τῷ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης εὐκρατοτέρῳ τε ὄντι καὶ ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ Ἄρεως τὰ ἐχόμενα ἐδόθη δύο ζῴδια γονιμώτατα ὄντα αἵ τε Χηλαὶ καὶ ὁ Ταῦρος, τηροῦντα τὴν συμφωνίαν τῆς ἑξαγώνου διαστάσεως καὶ ἐπειδήπερ οὐ πλεῖον δύο δωδεκατημορίων ὁ ἀστὴρ οὗτος ἐφ’ ἑκάτερα τὸ πλεῖστον ἀφίσταται τοῦ ἡλίου. Ἐπὶ τέλει δὲ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ οὐδέποτε πλεῖον ἑνὸς δωδεκατημορίου τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου διάστασιν ἐφ’ ἑκάτερα ποιουμένῳ καὶ ὑπὸ μὲν τοὺς ἄλλους ὄντι, σύνεγγυς δὲ μᾶλλόν πως ἀμφοτέρων τῶν φώτων, τὰ λοιπὰ καὶ συνεχῆ τοῖς ἐκείνων οἴκοις ἐδόθη δύο δωδεκατημόρια τό τε τῶν Διδύμων καὶ τὸ τῆς Παρθένου.
18. Of the Houses of the Several Planets
The planets also have familiarity with the parts of the zodiac, through what are called their houses, triangles, exaltations, terms 85, and the like. The system of houses is of the following nature. Since of the twelve signs the most northern, which are closer than the others to our zenith and therefore most productive of heat and of warmth are Cancer and Leo, they assigned these to the greatest and most powerful heavenly bodies, that is, to the luminaries, as houses, Leo, which is masculine, to the sun and Cancer, feminine, to the moon. In keeping with this they assumed the semicircle from Leo to Capricorn to be solar and that from Aquarius to Cancer to be lunar, so that in each of the semicircles one sign might be assigned to each of the five planets as its own, οne bearing aspect to the sun and the other to the moon, consistently with the spheres of their motion 86 and the peculiarities of their natures 87.
For to Saturn, in whose nature cold prevails, as opposed to heat, and which occupies the orbit highest and farthest from the luminaries, were assigned the signs opposite Cancer and Leo, namely Capricorn and Aquarius 88, with the additional reason that these signs are cold and wintry, and further that their diametrical aspect is not consistent with beneficence. To Jupiter, which is moderate and below Saturn’s sphere, were assigned the two signs next to the foregoing, windy and fecund, Sagittarius and Pisces, in triangular aspect 89 to the luminaries, which is a harmonious and beneficent configuration.
Next, to Mars, which is dry in nature and occupies a sphere under that of Jupiter, there were assigned again the two signs, contiguous to the former, Scorpio and Aries, having a similar nature, and, agreeably to Mars’ destructive and inharmonious quality, in quartile aspect 90 to the luminaries. To Venus, which is temperate and beneath Mars, were given the next two signs, which are extremely fertile, Libra and Taurus. These preserve the harmony of the sextile aspect 91; another reason is that this planet at most is never more than two signs removed from the sun in either direction. Finally, there were given to Mercury, which never is farther removed from the sun than one sign in either direction and is beneath the others and closer in a way to both of the luminaries, the remaining signs, Gemini and Virgo, which are next to the houses of the luminaries.
19. Περὶ τριγώνων
Ἡ δὲ πρὸς τὰ τρίγωνα συνοικείωσις τοιαύτη τις οὖσα τυγχάνει. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ τὸ τρίγωνον καὶ ἰσόπλευρον σχῆμα συμφωνότατόν ἐστιν ἑαυτῷ καὶ ὁ ζῳδιακὸς ὑπὸ τριῶν κύκλων ὁρίζεται τοῦ τε ἰσημερινοῦ καὶ τῶν δύο τροπικῶν, διαιρεῖται δὲ τὰ ιβ′ αὐτοῦ μέρη εἰς τρίγωνα ἰσόπλευρα τέσσαρα, τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὅ ἐστι διά τε τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος καὶ τοῦ Τοξότου ἐκ τριῶν ἀρρενικῶν ζῳδίων συγκείμενον καὶ οἴκους ἔχον ἡλίου τε καὶ Διὸς καὶ Ἄρεως, ἐδόθη τῷ Διὶ καὶ ἡλίῳ παρὰ τὴν αἵρεσιν τὴν ἡλιακὴν ὄντος τοῦ Ἄρεως. Λαμβάνει δὲ αὐτοῦ τὴν πρώτην συνοικοδεσποτείαν ἡμέρας μὲν ὁ ἥλιος, νυκτὸς δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός. Καί ἐστιν ὁ μὲν Κριὸς μᾶλλον πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ κύκλῳ, ὁ δὲ Λέων πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ, ὁ δὲ Τοξότης πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ. Γίνεται δὲ προηγουμένως μὲν τοῦτο τὸ τρίγωνον βόρειον διὰ τὴν τοῦ Διὸς συνοικοδεσποτείαν, ἐπειδήπερ οὗτος γόνιμός τέ ἐστι καὶ πνευματώδης, οἰκείως τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἄρκτων ἀνέμοις διὰ δὲ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως οἶκον λαμβάνει τινὰ μίξιν τοῦ λιβὸς καὶ συνίσταται βορρολιβικόν, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως τοιούτων ἐστὶ πνευμάτων ποιητικὸς διά τε τὴν τῆς σελήνης αἵρεσιν καὶ τὸ τῶν δυσμῶν τεθηλυσμένον.
Τὸ δὲ δεύτερον τρίγωνον, ὅ ἐστι διά τε τοῦ Ταύρου καὶ Παρθένου καὶ Αἰγόκερω, συγκείμενον ἐκ τριῶν θηλυκῶν, ἀκολούθως ἐδόθη σελήνῃ τε καὶ Ἀφροδίτῃ, οἰκοδεσποτούσης αὐτοῦ νυκτὸς μὲν τῆς σελήνης, ἡμέρας δὲ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης. Καί ἐστιν ὁ μὲν Ταῦρος πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ μᾶλλον κύκλῳ, ἡ δὲ Παρθένος πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ, ὁ δὲ Αἰγόκερως πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ. Γίνεται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο τὸ τρίγωνον προηγουμένως μὲν νότιον διὰ τὴν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης οἰκοδεσποτείαν, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ ἀστὴρ οὗτος τῶν ὁμοίων ἐστὶ πνευμάτων διὰ τὸ θερμὸν καὶ ἔνικμον τῆς δυνάμεως ποιητικός· προσλαβὸν δὲ μίξιν ἀπηλιώτου διὰ τὸ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου οἶκον ἐν αὐτῷ τυγχάνειν τὸν Αἰγόκερων συνίσταται καὶ αὐτὸ νοταπηλιωτικὸν κατ’ ἀντίθεσιν τοῦ πρώτου, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τοιούτων ἐστὶ πνευμάτων ποιητικός, οἰκειούμενος καὶ αὐτὸς ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς διὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον αἵρεσιν.
Τὸ δὲ τρίτον τρίγωνον, ὅ ἐστι διά τε Διδύμων καὶ Χηλῶν καὶ Ὑδροχόου ἐκ τριῶν ἀρρενικῶν ζῳδίων συγκείμενον καὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως μηδένα λόγον ἔχον, πρὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ τοὺς οἴκους, τούτοις ἀπενεμήθη πάλιν, οἰκοδεσποτούντων ἡμέρας μὲν τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὴν αἵρεσιν, νυκτὸς δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. Καί ἐστι τὸ μὲν τῶν Διδύμων δωδεκατημόριον πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ, τὸ δὲ τῶν Χηλῶν πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ, τὸ δὲ τοῦ Ὑδροχόου πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ. Συνίσταται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο τὸ τρίγωνον προηγουμένως μὲν ἀπηλιωτικὸν διὰ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου, κατὰ δὲ τὴν μίξιν βορραπηλιωτικόν, διὰ τὸ τὴν τοῦ Διὸς αἵρεσιν τῇ τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τὸν ἡμερινὸν λόγον συνοικειοῦσθαι.
Τὸ δὲ τέταρτον τρίγωνον, ὅ ἐστι διά τε Καρκίνου καὶ Σκορπίου καὶ Ἰχθύων, κατελείφθη μόνῳ λοιπῷ ὄντι τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ λόγον ἔχοντι πρὸς αὐτὸ διὰ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Σκορπίου, συνοικοδεσποτοῦσι δὲ αὐτῷ διά τε τὴν αἵρεσιν καὶ τὸ θηλυκὸν τῶν ζῳδίων νυκτὸς μὲν ἡ σελήνη, ἡμέρας δὲ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, καί ἐστιν ὁ μὲν Καρκίνος πρὸς τῷ θερινῷ κύκλῳ, ὁ δὲ Σκορπίος πρὸς τῷ χειμερινῷ μᾶλλον, οἱ δὲ Ἰχθύες πρὸς τῷ ἰσημερινῷ. Καὶ τοῦτο δὲ τὸ τρίγωνον συνίσταται προηγουμένως μὲν λιβικὸν διὰ τὴν τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῆς σελήνης οἰκοδεσποτείαν, κατὰ μίξιν δὲ νοτολιβικόν, διὰ τὴν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συνοικοδεσποτείαν.
19. Of the Triangles
The familiarity by triangles is as follows. Inasmuch as the triangular and equilateral form is most harmonious with itself 92, the zodiac also is bounded by three circles, the equinoctial and the two tropics, and its twelve parts are divided into four equilateral triangles. The first of these, which passes through Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, is composed of three masculine signs and includes the houses of the sun, of Mars, and of Jupiter. This triangle was assigned to the sun and Jupiter, since Mars is not of the solar sect 93. The sun assumes first governance of it by day and Jupiter by night. Also, Aries is close to the equinoctial circle, Leo to the summer solstice and Sagittarius to the winter solstice. This triangle is pre-eminently northern because of Jupiter’s share in its government, since Jupiter is fecund and windy 94, similarly to the winds from the north. However, because of the house of Mars it suffers an admixture of the south-west wind 95 and is constituted Borro-libycon, because Mars causes such winds and also because of the sect of the moon and the feminine quality of the occident 96.
The second triangle, which is the one drawn through Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is composed of three feminine signs, and consequently was assigned to the moon and Venus; the moon governs it by night and Venus by day. Taurus lies toward the summer tropic, Virgo toward the equinox, and Capricorn toward the winter tropic. This triangle is made pre-eminently southern because of the dominance of Venus, since this star through the heat and moisture of its power produces similar winds; but as it receives an admixture of Apeliotes because the house of Saturn, Capricorn, is included within it, it is constituted Notapeliotes 97 in contrast to the filet triangle, since Saturn produces winds of this kind and is related to the cast through sharing in the sect of the sun.
The third triangle is the one drawn through Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, composed of three masculine signs, and having no relation to Mars but rather to Saturn and Mercury because of their houses. It was assigned in turn to these, with Saturn governing during the day on account of his sect and Mercury by night. The sign of Gemini lies toward the summer tropic, Libra toward the equinox, and Aquarius toward the winter tropic. This triangle also is primarily of eastern constitution, because of Saturn, but by admixture north-eastern, because the sect of Jupiter has familiarity with Saturn, inasmuch as it is diurnal.
The fourth triangle, which is the one drawn through Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, was left to the only remaining planet, Mars, which is related to it through his house, Scorpio; and along with him, on account of the sect and the femininity of the signs, the moon by night and Venus by day are co-rulers. Cancer is near the summer circle, Scorpio lies close to the winter one, and Pisces to the equinox. This triangle is constituted preeminently western, because it is dominated by Mars and the moon; but by admixture it becomes south-western through the domination of Venus.
20. Περὶ ὑψωμάτων
Τὰ δὲ καλούμενα τῶν πλανωμένων ὑψώματα λόγον ἔχει τοιόνδε. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος ἐν μὲν τῷ Κριῷ γενόμενος τὴν εἰς τὸ ὑψηλὸν καὶ βόρειον ἡμικύκλιον μετάβασιν ποιεῖται, ἐν δὲ ταῖς Χηλαῖς τὴν εἰς τὸ ταπεινὸν καὶ νότιον, εἰκότως τὸν μὲν Κριὸν ὡς ὕψωμα ἀνατεθείκασιν αὐτῷ, καθ’ ὃν ἄρχεται καὶ τὸ τῆς ἡμέρας μέγεθος καὶ τὸ τῆς φύσεως αὐτοῦ θερμαντικὸν αὔξεσθαι, τὰς δὲ Χηλὰς ὡς ταπείνωμα διὰ τὰ ἐναντία. Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν ἵνα πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἔχῃ διάμετρον στάσιν ὥσπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν οἴκων, τὸν μὲν Ζυγὸν ἀντικειμένως ὡς ὕψωμα ἔλαβε, τὸν δὲ Κριὸν ὡς ταπείνωμα. Ὅπου γὰρ τὸ θερμὸν αὔξεται, ἐκεῖ μειοῦται τὸ ψυχρόν, καὶ ὅπου τὸ ψυχρὸν αὔξεται, ἐκεῖ μειοῦται τὸ θερμόν.
Πάλιν ἐπειδὴ ἐν τῷ ὑψώματι τοῦ ἡλίου τῷ Κριῷ συνοδεύσασα ἡ σελήνη πρώτην ποιεῖται φάσιν καὶ ἀρχὴν τῆς τοῦ φωτὸς αὐξήσεως καὶ ὡσπερανεὶ ὑψώσεως ἐν τῷ τοῦ ἰδίου τριγώνου πρώτῳ ζῳδίῳ τῷ Ταύρῳ, τοῦτο μὲν αὐτῆς ὕψωμα ἐκλήθη, τὸ δὲ διάμετρον τὸ τοῦ Σκορπίου ταπείνωμα. Μετὰ ταῦτα δὲ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Διὸς τῶν βορείων καὶ γονίμων πνευμάτων ἀποτελεστικὸς ὤν, ἐν τῷ Καρκίνῳ μάλιστα βορειότατος γινόμενος, αὔξεται πάλιν καὶ πληροῖ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, ὅθεν τοῦτο μὲν τὸ δωδεκατημόριον ὕψωμα πεποιήκασιν αὐτοῦ, τὸν δὲ Αἰγόκερων ταπείνωμα. Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως φύσει καυσώδης ὢν καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ διὰ τὸ νοτιώτατος γίνεσθαι καυστικώτατος γινόμενος, καὶ αὐτὸς ὕψωμα μὲν ἔλαβεν εἰκότως κατ’ ἀντίθεσιν τῷ τοῦ Διὸς τὸν Αἰγόκερων, ταπείνωμα δὲ τὸν Καρκίνον.
Πάλιν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ὑγραντικὸς ὢν φύσει καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς Ἰχθύσιν, ἐν οἷς ἡ τοὺ ὑγροῦ ἔαρος ἀρχὴ προσημαίνει, καὶ αὐτὸς αὐξάνων τὴν οἰκείαν δύναμιν, τὸ μὲν ὕψωμα ἔσχεν ἐν τοῖς Ἰχθύσι, τὸ δὲ ταπείνωμα ἐν τῇ Παρθένῳ. Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τὸ ἐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑπόξηρος ὢν εἰκότως κατὰ τὸ ἀντικείμενον ἐν μὲν τῇ Παρθένῳ, καθ’ ἣν τὸ ξηρὸν μετόπωρον προσημαίνει, καὶ αὐτὸς ὥσπερ ὑψοῦται, κατὰ δὲ τοὺς Ἰχθύας ὥσπερ ταπεινοῦται.
20. Of Exaltations
The so-called exaltations 98 of the planets have the following explanation. Since the sun, when he is in Aries, is making his transition to the northern and higher semicircle, and in Libra is passing into the southern and lower One, they have fittingly assigned Aries to him as his exaltation, since there the length of the day and the heating power of his nature begin to increase, and Libra as his depression for the opposite reasons. Saturn again, in order to have a position opposite to the sun, as also in the matter of their houses 99, looks, contrariwise, Libra as his exaltation and Aries as his depression. For where heat increases there cold diminishes, and where the former diminishes cold on the contrary increases.
And since the moon, coming to conjunction in the exaltation of the sun, in Aries, shows her first phase and begins to increase her light and, as it were, her height, in the first sign of her own triangle, Taurus, this was called her exaltation, and the diametrically opposite sign, Scorpio, her depression. Then Jupiter, which produces the fecund north winds, reaches farthest north in Cancer and brings his own power to fullness; they therefore made this sign his exaltation and Capricorn his depression. Mars, which by nature is fiery and becomes all the more so in Capricorn because in it he is farthest south, naturally received Capricorn as his exaltation, in contrast to Jupiter, and Cancer as his depression.
Venus, however, as she is moist by nature and increases her own proper power all the more in Pisces, where the beginning of the moist spring is indicated, has her exaltation in Pisces and her depression in Virgo. Mercury, on the contrary, since he is drier, by contrast naturally is exalted, as it were, in Virgo, in which the dry autumn is signified, and is depressed in Pisces.
21. Περὶ ὁρίων διαθέσεως
Περὶ δὲ τῶν ὁρίων δισσοὶ μάλιστα φέρονται τρόποι καὶ ὁ μέν ἐστιν Αἰγυπτιακὸς (ὁ πρὸς τὰς τῶν οἴκων ὡς ἐπίπαν κυρείας), ὁ δὲ Χαλδαϊκὸς (ὁ πρὸς τὰς τῶν τριγώνων οἰκοδεσποτείας). Ὁ μὲν οὖν Αἰγυπτιακὸς ὁ τῶν κοινῶς φερομένων ὁρίων οὐ πάνυ τι σῴζει τὴν ἀκολουθίαν οὔτε τῆς τάξεως οὔτε τῆς καθ’ ἕκαστον ποσότητος. Πρῶτον μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς τάξεως πῇ μὲν τοῖς τῶν οἴκων κυρίοις τὰ πρωτεῖα δεδώκασιν, πῇ δὲ τοῖς τῶν τριγώνων, ἐνίοτε δὲ τοῖς τῶν ὑψωμάτων.
Ἐπεὶ παραδείγματος ἕνεκεν, εἴτε τοῖς οἴκοις ἠκολουθήκασι, διὰ τί τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου εἰ τύχοι πρώτῳ δεδώκασιν ἐν Ζυγῷ καὶ οὐ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης; Καὶ διὰ τί ἐν Κριῷ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ οὐ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως; Εἴτε τοῖς τριγώνοις, διὰ τί τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ δεδώκασιν ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ οὐ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης; Εἴτε καὶ τοῖς ὑψώμασι, διὰ τί τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἐν Καρκίνῳ καὶ οὐ τῷ τοῦ Διός; Εἴτε τοῖς τὰ πλεῖστα τούτων ἔχουσι διὰ τί ἐν Ὑδροχόῳ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ δεδώκασι, τρίγωνον ἔχοντι μόνον, καὶ οὐχὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου; Τούτου γὰρ καὶ οἶκός ἐστι καὶ τρίγωνον. Ἢ διὰ τί ὅλως ἐν Αἰγόκερῳ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ πρώτῳ δεδώκασι, μηδένα λόγον ἔχοντι πρὸς τὸ ζῴδιον οἰκοδεσποτείας; Καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς λοιπῆς δὲ τάξεως τὴν αὐτὴν ἀναλογίαν ἄν τις εὕροι…
Δεύτερον δὲ καὶ ἡ ποσότης τῶν ὁρίων οὐδεμίαν ἀκολουθίαν ἔχουσα φαίνεται. Ὁ τε γὰρ καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον ἀστέρα ἐπισυναγόμενος ἐκ πάντων ἀριθμός, πρὸς ὅν φασιν αὐτῶν τὰ χρονικὰ ἐπιμερίζεσθαι, οὐδένα οἰκεῖον οὐδὲ εὐαπόδεικτον ἔχει λόγον· ἐάν δε καὶ τούτῳ τῷ κατὰ συναγωγὴν ἀριθμῷ πιστεύσωμεν ὡς ἄντικρυς ὑπ’ Αἰγυπτίων ὡμολογημένῳ, πολλαχῶς μὲν καὶ ἄλλως τῆς κατὰ τὸ ζῴδιον ποσότητος ἐναλλασσομένης ὁ αὐτὸς ἀριθμὸς ἂν συναγόμενος εὑρεθείη. Καὶ ὃ πιθανολογεῖν καὶ σοφίζεσθαί τινες ἐπιχειροῦσι περὶ αὐτῶν ὅτι κατὰ παντὸς κλίματος ἀναφορικὸν λόγον οἱ καθ’ ἕκαστον ἀστέρα σχηματιζόμενοί πως χρόνοι τὴν αὐτὴν ἐπισυνάγουσι ποσότητα, ψευδές ἐστι.
Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἀκολουθοῦσι τῇ κοινῇ πραγματείᾳ καὶ πρὸς ὁμαλὰς ὑπεροχὰς τῶν ἀναφορῶν συνισταμένῃ μὴ κατὰ μικρὸν ἐγγιζούσῃ τῆς ἀληθείας, καθ’ ἣν ἐπὶ τοῦ διὰ τῆς κάτω χώρας τῆς Αἰγύπτου παραλλήλου τὸ μὲν τῆς Παρθένου καὶ τῶν Χηλῶν δωδεκατημόριον ἐν λη′ χρόνοις ἑκάτερον καὶ ἔτι τρίτῳ θέλουσιν ἀναφέρεσθαι, τὸ δὲ τοῦ Λέοντος καὶ τοῦ Σκορπίου ἑκάτερον ἐν λε′, δεικνυμένου διὰ τῶν γραμμῶν, ὅτι ταῦτα μὲν ἐν πλείοσι τῶν λε′ χρόνων ἀναφέρεται, τὸ δὲ τῆς Παρθένου καὶ τὸ τῶν Χηλῶν ἐν ἐλάττοσι.
Ἔπειτα καὶ οἱ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐπιχειρήσαντες κατασκευάζειν οὐκέτι φαίνονται κατηκολουθηκότες οὐδὲ οὕτως τῇ παρὰ τοῖς πλείστοις φερομένῃ ποσότητι τῶν ὁρίων καὶ τὰ πολλὰ διηναγκασμένοι καταψεύσασθαι καί που καὶ μορίοις μορίων χρήσασθαι τοῦ σῶσαι τὸ προκείμενον αὐτοῖς ἕνεκεν, οὐδ’ αὐτοῖς ὡς ἔφαμεν ἀληθοῦς ἐχομένοις σκοποῦ. Τὰ μέντοι φερόμενα παρὰ τοῖς πολλοῖς διὰ τὴν τῆς ἔτι ἄνωθεν παραδόσεως ἀξιοπιστίαν τοῦτον ὑπόκειται τὸν τρόπον.
Ὅρια κατ’ Αἰγυπτίους.
| Κριοῦ | Ταῦρου | Διδύμων | |||
| Δίας | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ η′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ϛ′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιβ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιδ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ιβ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ κ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ κβ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιζ′ |
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ κε′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ κζ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ κδ′ |
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ |
| Καρκίνου | Λέοντος | Παρθένου | |||
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ ζ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ζ′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιγ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ια′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιζ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιθ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ ιη′ | Δίας | ϛ′ κα′ |
| Δίας | ϛ′ κϛ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ κδ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ κη′ |
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ |
| Ζυγοῦ | Σκορπίου | Τοξότου | |||
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ ζ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ιβ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιδ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ια′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιζ′ |
| Δίας | ϛ′ κα′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιθ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ κα′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ κη′ | Δίας | ϛ′ κδ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ κϛ′ |
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ |
| Αἰγόκερω | Ὑδροχόου | Ἰχθύων | |||
| Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ζ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ζ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιβ′ |
| Δίας | ϛ′ ιδ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιγ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ιϛ′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ κβ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ κ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιθ′ |
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ κϛ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ κε′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ κη′ |
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ λ′ |
Συνάγεται δὲ ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ὁ ἀριθμὸς οὕτως· Κρόνου μοῖραι νζ′, Διὸς οθ′, Ἄρεως ξϛ′, Ἀφροδίτης πβ′, `Ερμοῦ οϛ′· γίνεται ὁμοῦ τξ′.
Ὁ δὲ Χαλδαϊκὸς τρόπος ἁπλῆν μέν τινα ἔχει καὶ μᾶλλον πιθανήν, οὐχ οὕτως δὲ αὐτάρκη πρός τε τὰς τῶν τριγώνων δεσποτείας τὴν ἀκολουθίαν καὶ τὴν τῆς ποσότητος τάξιν, ὥστε μέντοι καὶ χωρὶς ἀναγραφῆς δύνασθαι ῥᾳδίως τινὰ διαβάλλειν αὐτούς. Ἐν μὲν γὰρ τῷ πρώτῳ τριγώνῳ Κριοῦ καὶ Λέοντος καὶ Τοξότου τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχοντι παρ’ αὐτοῖς κατὰ ζῴδιον διαίρεσιν πρῶτος μὲν λαμβάνει ὁ τοῦ τριγώνου κύριος ὁ τοῦ Διός, εἶθ’ ἑξῆς ὁ τοῦ ἐφεξῆς τριγώνου, λέγω δὴ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, εἶθ’ ἑξῆς ὁ τῶν Διδύμων ὅ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, τελευταῖος δὲ ὁ τοῦ λοιποῦ τριγώνου κύριος ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως.
Ἐν δὲ τῷ δευτέρῳ τριγώνῳ Ταύρου καὶ Παρθένου καὶ Αἰγόκερω πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν κατὰ ζῴδιον ἔχοντι διαίρεσιν, ὁ μὲν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης πρῶτος, εἶθ’ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, μετὰ ταῦτα δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως, τελευταῖος δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός. Σχεδὸν δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν λοιπῶν δύο τριγώνων ἡ τάξις ἥδε συνορᾶται. Τῶν μέντοι τοῦ αὐτοῦ τριγώνου δύο κυρίων, λέγω δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, τὸ πρωτεῖον τῆς κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον τάξεως ἡμέρας μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου λαμβάνει, νυκτὸς δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. Καὶ ἡ καθ’ ἕκαστον δὲ ποσότης ἁπλῆ τις οὖσα τυγχάνει. Ἵνα γὰρ καθ’ ὑπόβασιν τῆς τῶν πρωτείων τάξεως καὶ ἡ ποσότης τῶν ἑκάστου ὁρίων μιᾷ μοίρᾳ λείπηται τῆς προτεταγμένης, τῷ μὲν πρώτῳ πάντοτε διδόασι μοίρας η′, τῷ δὲ δευτέρῳ ζ′, τῷ δὲ τρίτῳ ϛ′, τῷ δὲ τετάρτῳ ε′, τῷ δὲ πέμπτῳ δ′, συμπληρουμένων οὕτως τῶν κατὰ τὸ ζῴδιον λ′ μοιρῶν.
Συνάγεται δὲ καὶ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου μοῖραι ἡμέρας μὲν οη′, νυκτὸς δὲ ξϛ′, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς οβ′, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ξθ′, τοῦ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης οε′, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἡμέρας μὲν ξϛ′, νυκτὸς δὲ οη′. Γίνεται τὸ πᾶν τξ′. Τούτων μὲν οὖν τῶν ὁρίων ἀξιοπιστότερα ὡς ἔφαμεν τυγχάνει τὰ κατὰ τὸν Αἰγυπτιακὸν τρόπον καὶ διὰ τὸ τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν παρὰ τοῖς Αἰγυπτίοις συγγραφεῦσιν ὡς χρησίμην ἀναγραφῆς ἠξιῶσθαι καὶ διὰ τὸ συμφωνεῖν αὐτοῖς ὡς ἐπίπαν τὰς μοίρας τῶν ὁρίων ἐν ταῖς κατατεταγμέναις παρ’ αὐτῶν παραδειγματικαῖς γενέσεσιν· αὐτῶν μέντοι τούτων τῶν συγγραφέων μηδαμῇ τὴν σύνταξιν αὐτῶν μηδὲ τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἐμφανισάντων, ὕποπτον ἂν εἰκότως καὶ εὐδιάβλητον αὐτῶν γίνοιτο τὸ περὶ τὴν τάξιν ἀνομόλογον.
Ἤδη μέντοι περιτετυχήκαμεν ἡμεῖς ἀντιγράφῳ παλαιῷ καὶ τὰ πολλὰ διεφθαρμένῳ, περιέχοντι φυσικὸν καὶ σύμφωνον λόγον τῆς τε τάξεως καὶ τῆς ποσότητος αὐτῶν, μετὰ τοῦ τάς τε τῶν προειρημένων γενέσεων μοιρογραφίας καὶ τὸν τῶν συναγωγῶν ἀριθμὸν σύμφωνον εὑρίσκεσθαι τῇ τῶν παλαιῶν ἀναγραφῇ. Τὸ δὲ κατὰ λέξιν τοῦ βιβλίου πάνυ μὲν μακρὸν ἦν καὶ μετὰ πολλῆς τινος ἀποδείξεως, ἀδιάγνωστον δὲ διὰ τὸ διεφθάρθαι καὶ μόλις ἡμῖν αὐτὴν τὴν καθόλου προαίρεσιν δυνάμενον ὑποδεῖξαι καὶ τυπῶσαι καὶ ταῦτα συνεφοδιαζούσης καὶ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν ὁρίων ἀναγραφῆς μᾶλλόν πως διὰ τὸ πρὸς τῷ τέλει τοῦ βιβλίου κατατετάχθαι διασεσωσμένης. Ἔχει δὲ οὖν ὁ τύπος τῆς ὅλης αὐτῶν ἐπιβολῆς τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον.
Ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τῆς τάξεως τῆς καθ’ ἕκαστον δωδεκατημόριον παραλαμβάνεται τά τε ὑψώματα καὶ τὰ τρίγωνα καὶ οἱ οἶκοι. Καθόλου μὲν γὰρ ὁ μὲν δύο τούτων ἔχων ἀστὴρ οἰκοδεσποτείας ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ζῳδίῳ προτάσσεται κἂν κακοποιὸς ᾖ. Ὅπου δὲ τοῦτο οὐ συμβαίνει, οἱ μὲν κακοποιοὶ πάντοτε ἔσχατοι τάσσονται, πρῶτοι δὲ οἱ τοῦ ὑψώματος κύριοι, εἶτα οἱ τοῦ τριγώνου, εἶτα οἱ τοῦ οἴκου ἀκολούθως τῇ ἐφεξῆς τάξει τῶν ζῳδίων, πάλιν τῶν ἑξῆς ἀνὰ δύο ἐχόντων οἰκοδεσποτείας προτασσομένου τοῦ μίαν ἔχοντος ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ζῳδίῳ. Ὁ μέντοι Καρκίνος καὶ ὁ Λέων οἶκοι ὄντες ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης ἐπεὶ οὐ δίδοται τοῖς φωσὶν ὅρια, ἀπονέμονται τοῖς κακοποιοῖς, διὰ τὸ ἐν τῇ τάξει πλεονεκτεῖσθαι, ὁ μὲν Καρκίνος τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ὁ δὲ Λέων τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἡ τάξις αὐτοῖς ἡ οἰκεία φυλάσσεται.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ποσότητος τῶν ὁρίων, ὡς μὲν μηδενὸς εὑρισκομένου κατὰ δύο τρόπους κυρίου ἤτοι ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ ζῳδίῳ ἢ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς μέχρι τεταρτημορίου, τοῖς μὲν ἀγαθοποιοῖς, τουτέστι τῷ τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ἑκάστῳ δίδονται μοῖραι ζ′, τοῖς δὲ κακοποιοῖς, τουτέστι τῷ τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἑκάστῳ μοῖραι ε′, τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἐπικοίνῳ ὄντι μοῖραι ϛ′ εἰς συμπλήρωσιν τῶν λ′. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἔχουσί τινες ἀεὶ δύο λόγους, ὁ γὰρ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μόνος γίνεται οἰκοδεσπότης τοῦ κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον καὶ Αἰγόκερων τριγώνου, τῆς σελήνης εἰς τὰ ὅρια μὴ παραλαμβανομένης, προσδίδοται μὲν ἑκάστῳ τῶν οὕτως ἐχόντων ἐάν τε ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ ζῳδίῳ, ἐάν τε ἐν τοῖς ἑξῆς μέχρι τεταρτημορίου, μοῖρα μία, οἷς καὶ παρέκειντο στιγμαί.
Ἀφαιροῦνται δὲ αἱ προστιθέμεναι τοῖς διπλοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν λοιπῶν καὶ μοναχῶν, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου, εἶτα καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ τὸ βραδύτερον αὐτῶν τῆς κινήσεως. Ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἡ τούτων τῶν ὁρίων ἔκθεσις τοιαύτη.
Ὅρια κατὰ Πτολεμαῖον.
| Κριοῦ | Ταῦρου | Διδύμων | |||
| Δίας | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἀφρ. | η′ η′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ϛ′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιδ′ | Ἑρμ. | ζ′ ιε′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ιγ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ζ′ α′ | Δίας | ζ′ κβ′ | Ἀφρ. | ζ′ κ′ |
| Ἄρης | ε′ κϛ′ | Κρόν. | β′ κδ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ κϛ′ |
| Κρόν. | δ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | δ′ λ′ |
| Καρκίνου | Λέοντος | Παρθένου | |||
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἑρμ. | ζ′ ζ′ |
| Δίας | ζ′ ιγ′ | Ἑρμ. | ζ′ ιγ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιγ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ζ′ κ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ ιθ′ | Δίας | ε′ ιη′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ζ′ κζ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ κε′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ κδ′ |
| Κρόν. | γ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ε′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ |
| Ζυγοῦ | Σκορπίου | Τοξότου | |||
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἄρης | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Δίας | η′ η′ |
| Ἀφρ. | ε′ ια′ | Ἀφρ. | ζ′ ιγ′ | Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ιδ′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ε′ ιϛ′ | Δίας | η′ κα′ | Ἑρμ. | ε′ ιθ′ |
| Δίας | η′ κδ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ κζ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ κε′ |
| Ἄρης | ϛ′ λ′ | Κρόν. | γ′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ε′ λ′ |
| Αἰγόκερω | Ὑδροχόου | Ἰχθύων | |||
| Ἀφρ. | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Κρόν. | ϛ′ ϛ′ | Ἀφρ. | η′ η′ |
| Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιβ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ ιβ′ | Δίας | ϛ′ ιδ′ |
| Δίας | ζ′ ιθ′ | Ἀφρ. | η′ κ′ | Ἑρμ. | ϛ′ κ′ |
| Κρόν. | ϛ′ κε′ | Δίας | ε′ κε′ | Ἄρης | ε′ κε′ |
| Ἄρης | ε′ λ′ | Ἄρης | ε′ λ′ | Κρόν. | ε′ λ′ |
Γίνεται καὶ τούτων ἐκ τῆς ἐπισυνθέσεως Κρόνου μοῖραι νζ′, Διὸς οθ′, Ἄρεως ξς′, Ἀφροδίτης πβ′, Ἑρμοῦ οϛ′· ὁμοῦ τξ′.
21. Οf the Disposition of Terms
With regard to the terms two systems are most in circulation; the first is the Egyptian 100, which is chiefly based on the government of the houses, and the second the Chaldaean, resting upon the government of the triplicities. Now the Egyptian system of the commonly accepted terms does not at all preserve the consistency either of order or of individual quantity. For in the first place, in the matter of order, they have sometimes assigned the first place to the lords of the houses and again to those of the triplicities, and sometimes also to the lords of the exaltations.
For example, if it is true that they have followed the houses, why have they assigned precedence to Saturn, say, in Libra 101, and not to Venus, and why to Jupiter in Aries and not to Mars? And if they follow the triplicities, why have they given Mercury, and not Venus 102, first place in Capricorn? Or if it be exaltations, why give Mars, and not Jupiter, precedence in Cancer 103; and if they have regard for the planets that have the greatest number of these qualifications, why have they given first place in Aquarius to Mercury, who has only his triplicity there, and not to Saturn, for it is both the house and the triplicity of Saturn? Or why have they given Mercury first place in Capricorn at all, since he has no relation of government to the sign? One would find the same kind of thing in the rest of the system, secondly, the number of the terms manifestly has no consistency.
For the number derived for each planet from the addition of its terms in all the signs, in accordance with which they say the planets assign years of life 104, furnishes no suitable or acceptable argument. But even if we rely upon the number derived from this summation, in accordance with the downright claim of the Egyptians, the sum would be found the same, even though the amounts, sign by sign, be frequently changed in various ways. And as for the specious and sophistic assertion 105 about them that same attempt to make, namely that the times assigned to each single planet by the schedule of ascensions in all the climes add up to this same sum, it is false.
For, in the first place, they follow the common method, based upon evenly progressing increases in the ascensions, which is not even close to the truth. By this scheme they would have each of the signs Virgo and Libra, on the parallel which passes through lower Egypt, ascend in 38 1 ⁄3 times 106, and Leo and Scorpio each in 35, although it is shown by the tables 107 that these latter ascend in more than 35 times and Virgo and Libra in less.
Furthermore, those who have endeavoured to establish this theory even so do not seem to follow the usually accepted number of terms, and are compelled to make many false statements, and they have even made use of fractional parts of fractions in the effort to save their hypothesis, which, as we said, is itself not a true one. However, the terms most generally accepted on the authority of ancient tradition are given in the following fashion:
Terms according to the Egyptians 108.
 |
 6  12  20  25  30 |
 |
8 14 22 27 30 |
 |
6 12 17 24 30 |
 |
7 13 19 26 30 |
 |
6 11 18 24 30 |
 |
7 17 21 28 30 |
 |
6 14 21 28 30 |
 |
7 11 19 24 30 |
 |
12 17 21 26 30 |
 |
7 14 22 26 30 |
 |
7 13 20 25 30 |
 |
12 16 19 28 30 |
From these, the number of each one is derived thus: Saturn’s degrees are 57, Jupiter’s 79, Mars’ 66, Venus’ 82, Mercury’s 76, in total 360.
The Chaldaean method 109 involves a sequence, simple, to be sure, and more plausible, though not so self-sufficient with respect to the government of the triangles and the disposition of quantity, so that, nevertheless, one could easily understand them even without a diagram 110. For in the first triplicity, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, which has with them the same division by signs as with the Egyptians, the lord of the triplicity, Jupiter 111, is the first to receive terms, then the lord of the next triangle, Venus, next the lord of the triangle of Gemini, Saturn, and Mercury, and finally the lord of the remaining triplicity, Mars.
In the second triplicity, Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, which again has the same division by signs, Venus is first, then Saturn, and again Mercury, after these Mars, and finally Jupiter. This arrangement in general is observed also in the remaining two triplicities 112. Of the two lords of the same triplicity, however, Saturn and Mercury, by day 113 Saturn takes the first place in the order of ownership, by night Mercury. The number assigned to each is also a simple matter. For in order that the number of terms of each planet may be less by one degree than the preceding, to correspond with the descending order in which first place is assigned, they always assign 8° to the first, 7° to the second, 6° to the third, 5° to the fourth, and 4° to the last; thus the 30° of a sign is made up.
The sum of the number of degrees thus assigned to Saturn is 78 by day and 66 by night, to Jupiter 72, to Mars 69, to Venus 75, to Mercury 66 by day and 78 by night; the total is 360 degrees. Now of these terms those which are constituted by the Egyptian method are, as we said, more worthy of credence, both because in the form in which they have been collected by the Egyptian writers they have for their utility been deemed worthy of record, and because for the most part the degrees of these terms are consistent with the nativities which have been recorded by them as examples. As these very writers, however, nowhere explain their arrangement or their number, their failure to agree in an account of the system might well become an object of suspicion and a subject for criticism.
Recently, however, we have come upon an ancient manuscript, much damaged, which contains a natural and consistent explanation of their order and number, and at the same time the degrees reported in the aforesaid nativities and the numbers given in the summations were found to agree with the tabulation of the ancients. The book was very lengthy in expression and excessive in demonstration, and its damaged state made it hard to read, so that I could barely gain an idea of its general purport; that too, in spite of the help offered by the tabulations of the terms, better preserved because they were placed at the end of the book 114. At any rate the general scheme of assignment of the terms is as follows.
For their arrangement within each sign, the exaltations, triplicities, and houses are taken into consideration. For, generally speaking, the star that has two rulerships of this sort in the same sign is placed first, even though it may be maleficent. But wherever this condition does not exist, the maleficent planets are always put last, and the lords of the exaltation first, the lords of the triplicity next, and then those of the house, following the order of the signs 115. And again in order, those that have two lordships each are preferred to the one which has but one in the same sign. Since terms are not allotted to the luminaries, however, Cancer and Leo, the houses of the sun and moon, are assigned to the maleficent planets because they were deprived of their share in the order, Cancer to Mars and Leo to Saturn 116; in these the order appropriate to them is preserved.
As for the number of the terms, when no star is found with two prerogatives, either in the sign itself or in those which follow it within the quadrant, there are assigned to each of the beneficent planets, that is, to Jupiter and Venus, 7°; to the maleficent, Saturn and Mars, 5° each; and to Mercury, which is common, 6°; so that the total is 30°. But since some always have two prerogatives for Venus alone becomes the ruler of the triplicity of Taurus, since the moon does not participate in the terms there is given to each one of those in such condition, whether it be in the same sign or in the following signs within the quadrant, one extra degree; these were marked with dots 117.
But the degrees added for double prerogatives are taken away from the others, which have but one, and, generally speaking, from Saturn and Jupiter because of their slower motion. The tabulation 118 of these terms is as follows:
Terms according to Ptolemy.
|
6 14 21 26 30 |
|
8 15 22 24 30 |
|
7 13 20 26 30 |
|
6 13 20 27 30 |
|
6 13 19 25 30 |
|
7 13 18 24 30 |
|
6 11 16 24 30 |
|
6 13 21 27 30 |
|
8 14 19 25 30 |
|
6 12 19 25 30 |
|
6 12 20 25 25 |
|
8 14 20 25 30 |
From these is derived by addition that Saturn’s degrees are 57, Jupiter’s 79, Mars’ 66, Venus’ 82, Mercury’s 76, in total 360 119.
22. Περὶ τόπων καὶ μοιρῶν ἑκάστου
Διεῖλον δέ τινες καὶ εἰς ἔτι τούτων λεπτομερέστερα τμήματα τὰς οἰκοδεσποτείας, τόπους καὶ μοίρας ὀνομάσαντες καὶ τόπον μὲν ὑποτιθέμενοι τὸ τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου δωδεκατημόριον, τουτέστι μοίρας β′ ἥμισυ καὶ διδόντες αὐτοῦ τὴν κυρείαν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς ζῳδίοις, ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ κατ’ ἄλλας τινὰς ἀλόγους τάξεις, μοῖραν δὲ ἑκάστην πάλιν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς ἑκάστῳ διδόντες τῶν ἀστέρων ἀκολούθως τῇ τάξει τῶν Χαλδαϊκῶν ὁρίων. Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν πιθανὸν μόνον καὶ οὐ φυσικὸν ἀλλὰ κενόδοξον ἔχοντα λόγον παρήσομεν·
Ἐκεῖνο δὲ ἐπιστάσεως ἄξιον τυγχάνον οὐ παραλείψομεν ὅτι καὶ τὰς τῶν δωδεκατημορίων καὶ τὰς τῶν ὁρίων ἀρχὰς ἀπὸ τῶν τροπικῶν καὶ τῶν ἰσημερινῶν σημείων εὐλογόν ἐστι ποιεῖσθαι, καὶ τῶν συγγραφέων τοῦτό πως ἐμφανισάντων, καὶ μάλιστα διότι τὰς φύσεις καὶ τὰς δυνάμεις καὶ τὰς συνοικειώσεις αὐτῶν ὁρῶμεν ἐκ τῶν προαποδεδειγμένων ἀπὸ τῶν τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν ἀρχῶν καὶ οὐκ ἀπ’ ἄλλου τινὸς ἐχούσας τὴν αἰτίαν· ἄλλων γὰρ ἀρχῶν ὑποτιθεμένων ἢ μηκέτι συγχρῆσθαι ταῖς φύσεσιν αὐτῶν εἰς τὰς προτελέσεις ἀναγκασθησόμεθα ἢ συγχρώμενοι διαπίπτειν, παραβάντων καὶ ἀπαλλοτριωθέντων τῶν τὰς δυνάμεις αὐτοῖς ἐμπεριποιησάντων τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ διαστημάτων.
22. Οf Places and Degrees
Some have made even finer divisions of rulership than these, using the terms “places” and “degrees”. Defining “place” as the twelfth part of a sign, or 2° 1 ⁄2 , they 120 assign the domination over them to the signs in order. Others follow other illogical orders; and again they assign each “degree” from the beginning to each of the planets of each sign in accordance with the Chaldaean order of terms. These matters, as they have only plausible and not natural, but, rather, unfounded, arguments in their favour, we shall omit.
The following, however, upon which it is worth while to dwell, we shall not pass by, namely, that it is reasonable to reckon the beginnings of the signs also from the equinoxes and solstices 121, partly because the writers make this quite clear, and particularly because from our previous demonstrations we observe that their natures, powers, and familiarities take their cause from the solstitial and equinoctial starting-places, and from no other source. For if other starting-places are assumed, we shall either be compelled no longer to use the natures of the signs for prognostications or, if we use them, to be in error, since the spaces of the zodiac which implant their powers in the planets would then pass over to others 122 and become alienated.
23. Περὶ προσώπων καὶ λαμπηνῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων
Αἱ μὲν οὖν συνοικειώσεις τῶν τε ἀστέρων καὶ τῶν δωδεκατημορίων σχεδὸν ἂν εἶεν τοσαῦται. Λέγονται δὲ καὶ ἰδιοπροσωπεῖν μὲν ὅταν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν τὸν αὐτὸν διασώζῃ πρὸς ἥλιον ἢ σελήνην σχηματισμόν, ὅνπερ καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς ἐκείνων οἴκους, οἷον ὅταν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης λόγου ἕνεκεν ἑξάγωνον ποιήσῃ πρὸς τὰ φῶτα διάστασιν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς ἥλιον μὲν ἑσπέριος ὤν, πρὸς σελήνην δὲ ἑῷος ἀκολούθως τοῖς ἐξ ἀρχῆς οἴκοις. Λαμπήναις δ’ ἐν ἰδίαις λέγονται εἶναι καὶ θρόνοις καὶ τοῖς τοιούτοις, ὅταν κατὰ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τῶν προεκτεθειμένων τρόπων συνοικειούμενοι τυγχάνωσι τοῖς τόποις ἐν οἷς καταλαμβάνονται, τότε μάλιστα τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτῶν πρὸς ἐνέργειαν αὐξομένης διὰ τὸ ὅμοιον καὶ συμπρακτικὸν τῆς τῶν περιεχόντων δωδεκατημορίων ὁμοφύλου οἰκειότητος.
Χαίρειν δέ φασιν αὐτούς, ὅταν κἂν μὴ πρὸς αὐτοὺς ᾖ ἡ συνοικείωσις τῶν περιεχόντων ζῳδίων, ἀλλὰ μέντοι πρὸς τοὺς τῶν αὐτῶν αἱρέσεων, ἐκ μακροῦ μὲν μᾶλλον οὕτως γινομένης τῆς συμπαθείας, κοινωνούσης δὲ ὅμως καὶ κατὰ τὸν τοιοῦτον τρόπον τῆς ὁμοιότητος, ὥσπερ, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς ἠλλοτριωμένοις καὶ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως τόποις καταλαμβάνωνται, πολὺ παραλύεται τῆς οἰκείας αὐτῶν δυνάμεως, ἄλλην τινὰ φύσιν μικτὴν ἀποτελούσης τῆς κατὰ τὸ ἀνόμοιον τῶν περιεχόντων ζῳδίων κράσεως.
23. Of Faces, Chariots, and the Like
Such, then, are the natural affinities of the stars and the signs of the zodiac. The planets are said to be in their “proper face” 123 when an individual planet keeps to the sun or moon the same aspect which its house has to their houses; as, for example, when Venus is in sextile to the luminaries, provided that she is occidental to the sun and oriental to the moon, in accordance with the original arrangement of their houses 124.
They are said to be in their own “chariots” and “thrones” 125 and the like when they happen to have familiarity in two or more of the aforesaid ways with the places in which they are found; for then their power is most increased in effectiveness by the similarity and co-operation of the kindred property of the signs which contain them.
They say they “rejoice” 126 when, even though the containing signs have no familiarity with the stars themselves, nevertheless they have it with the stars of the same sect; in this case the sympathy arises less directly. They share, however, in the similarity in the same way; just as, on the contrary, when they are found in alien regions belonging to the opposite sect, a great part of their proper power is paralysed, because the temperament which arises from the dissimilarity of the signs produces a different and adulterated nature.
24. Περὶ συναφῶν καὶ ἀπορροιῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων δυνάμεων
Καθόλου συνάπτειν μὲν λέγονται τοῖς ἑπομένοις οἱ προηγούμενοι, ἀπερρυηκέναι δὲ οἱ ἑπόμενοι τῶν προηγουμένων, ἐφ’ ὅσον ἂν μὴ μακρὸν ᾖ τὸ μεταξὺ αὐτῶν διάστημα. Παραλαμβάνεται δὲ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐάν τε σωματικῶς ἐάν τε καὶ κατά τινα τῶν παραδεδομένων σχηματισμῶν συμβαίνῃ ἦ πλὴν ὅτι γε πρὸς μὲν τὰς δι’ αὐτῶν τῶν σωμάτων συναφὰς καὶ ἀπορροίας καὶ τὰ πλάτη παρατηρεῖν αὐτῶν χρήσιμον εἰς τὸ μόνας τὰς ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ μέρη τοῦ διὰ μέσων εὑρισκομένας παρόδους παραδέχεσθαι, πρὸς δὲ τὰς διὰ τῶν συσχηματισμῶν περισσόν ἐστι τὸ τοιοῦτον, πασῶν ἀεὶ τῶν ἀκτίνων ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ τουτέστιν ἐπὶ τὸ κέντρον τῆς γῆς φερομένων καὶ ὁμοίως πανταχόθεν συμβαλλουσῶν.
Ἐκ δὴ τούτων ἁπάντων εὐσύνοπτον ὅτι τὸ μὲν ποιὸν ἑκάστου τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπισκεπτέον ἔκ τε τῆς ἰδίας αὐτῶν φυσικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν περιεχόντων δωδεκατημορίων ἢ καὶ τῆς τῶν πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὰς γωνίας συσχηματισμῶν κατὰ τὸν ἐκτεθειμένον ἡμῖν περὶ αὐτῶν τούτων τρόπον, τὴν δὲ δύναμιν πρῶτον μὲν ἐκ τοῦ ἤτοι ἀνατολικοὺς αὐτοὺς εἶναι καὶ προσθετικοὺς ταῖς ἰδίαις κινήσεσι, τότε γὰρ μάλιστά εἰσιν ἰσχυροί, ἢ δυτικοὺς καὶ ἀφαιρετικούς, τότε γὰρ ἀσθενεστέραν ἔχουσι τὴν ἐνέργειαν, ἔπειτα καὶ ἐκ τοῦ πως ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν ὁρίζοντα· μεσουρανοῦντες μὲν γὰρ ἢ ἐπαναφερόμενοι τῷ μεσουρανήματι μάλιστά εἰσι δυναμικοί, δεύτερον δὲ ὅταν ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος ὦσι ἢ ἐπαναφέρωνται, καὶ μᾶλλον ὅταν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀνατολικοῦ, ἧττον δὲ ὅταν ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανῶσιν ἢ ἄλλως συσχηματίζωνται τῷ ἀνατέλλοντι τόπῳ. Μὴ οὕτως δὲ ἔχοντες ἀδύνατοι παντελῶς τυγχάνουσιν.
24. Of Applications and Separations and the Other Powers
In general those which precede 127 are said to “apply” 128 to those which follow, and those that follow to “be separated” from those that precede, when the interval between them is not great 129. Such a relation is taken to exist whether it happens by bodily conjunction 130 or through one of the traditional aspects; except that with respect to the bodily applications and separations of the heavenly bodies it is of use also to observe their latitudes, in order that only those passages may be accepted which are found to be on the same side of the ecliptic 131. In the case of applications and separations by aspect, however, such a practice is superfluous, because all rays always fall and similarly converge from every direction upon the same point, that is, the centre of the earth 132.
From all this then, it is easy to see that the quality of each of the stars must be examined with reference both to its own natural character and that also of the signs that include it, or likewise from the character of its aspects to the sun and the angles, in the manner which we have explained. Their power must be determined, in the first place, from the fact that they are either oriental and adding to their proper motion 133 – for then they are most powerful – or occidental and diminishing in speed, for then their energy is weaker. Second, it is to be determined from their position relative to the horizon; for they are most powerful when they are in mid-heaven or approaching it, and second when they are exactly on the horizon or in the succedent place 134; their power is greater when they are in the orient, and less when they culminate beneath the earth or are in some other aspect to the orient; if they bear no aspect 135 at all to the orient they are entirely powerless.
ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΣΜΑΤΙΚΗ (ΤΕΤΡΑΒΙΒΛΟΣ), ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ Β′
ἑλληνικὸ πρωτότυπον μὲ ἀγγλικὴν μετάφρασιν, τοῦ Frank Egleston Robbins, Κλασικὴ Βιβλιοθήκη Loeb, 1940
❧
ΠΕΡΙΕΧΟΜΕΝΑ
1. Διαίρεσις τῆς καθολικῆς ἐπισκέψεως
2. Περὶ τῶν καθ’ ὅλα κλίματα ἰδιωμάτων
3. Περὶ τῆς τῶν χωρῶν πρὸς τὰ τρίγωνα καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἀστέρας συνοικειώσεως
4. Ἔκθεσις τῶν ἀνηκουσῶν χωρῶν ἑκάστῳ τῶν ζῳδίων
5. Ἔφοδος εἰς τὰς κατὰ μέρος προτελέσεις τῶν ἐκλείψεων
6. Περὶ τῆς τῶν διατιθεμένων χωρῶν ἐπισκέψεως
7. Περὶ τοῦ χρόνου τῶν ἀποτελουμένων
8. Περὶ τοῦ γένους τῶν διατιθεμένων
9. Περὶ τῆς αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ποιότητος
10. Περὶ χρωμάτων ἐκλείψεως καὶ κομητῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων
11. Περὶ τῆς τοῦ ἔτους νεομηνίας
12. Περὶ τῆς μερικῆς πρὸς τὰ καταστήματα φύσεως τῶν ζῳδίων
13. Περὶ τῆς ἐπὶ μέρους τῶν καταστημάτων ἐπισκέψεως
14. Περὶ τῆς τῶν μετεώρων σημειώσεως
1. Διαίρεσις τῆς καθολικῆς ἐπισκέψεως
Τὰ μὲν δὴ κυριώτερα τῶν πινακικῶς προεκτεθειμένων εἰς τὴν τῶν κατὰ μέρος προρρήσεων ἐπίσκεψιν ὡς ἐν κεφαλαίοις μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν ἐφοδευέσθω. Συνάψομεν δὲ ἤδη κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς τῆς ἀκολουθίας τὰ καθ’ ἕκαστα τῆς πραγματείας τῶν εἰς τὸ δυνατὸν τῆς τοιαύτης προρρήσεως ἐμπιπτόντων, ἐχόμενοι πανταχῆ τῆς κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν τρόπον ὑφηγήσεως.
Εἰς δύο τοίνυν τὰ μέγιστα καὶ κυριώτατα μέρη διαιρουμένου τοῦ δι’ ἀστρονομίας προγνωστικοῦ, καὶ πρώτου μὲν ὄντος καὶ γενικωτέρου τοῦ καθ’ ὅλα ἔθνη καὶ χώρας ἢ πόλεις λαμβανομένου, ὃ καλεῖται καθολικόν, δευτέρου δὲ καὶ εἰδικωτέρου τοῦ καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ὅπερ καλεῖται γενεθλιαλογικόν, προσήκειν ἡγούμεθα περὶ τοῦ καθολικοῦ πρῶτον ποιήσασθαι τὸν λόγον, ἐπειδήπερ ταῦτα μὲν κατὰ μείζους καὶ ἰσχυροτέρας αἰτίας τρέπεσθαι πέφυκε μᾶλλον τῶν μερικῶς ἀποτελουμένων· ὑποπιπτουσῶν δὲ ἀεὶ τῶν ἀσθενεστέρων φύσεων ταῖς δυνατωτέραις καὶ τῶν κατὰ μέρος ταῖς καθόλου, παντάπασιν ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη τοῖς προαιρουμένοις περὶ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου σκοπεῖν πολὺ πρότερον περὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων προδιειληφέναι.
Καὶ αὐτῆς δὲ τῆς καθολικῆς ἐπισκέψεως τὸ μὲν πάλιν κατὰ χώρας ὅλας λαμβάνεται, τὸ δὲ κατὰ πόλεις, καὶ ἔτι τὸ μὲν κατὰ μείζους καὶ περιοδικωτέρας περιστάσεις, οἷον πολέμων ἢ λιμῶν ἢ λοιμῶν ἢ σεισμῶν ἢ κατακλυσμῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων, τὸ δὲ κατ’ ἐλάττους καὶ καιρικωτέρας, οἷαί εἰσιν αἱ τῶν ἐτησίων ὡρῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον ἀλλοίωσις περί τε ἀνέσεις ἢ ἐπιτάσεις χειμώνων καὶ καυμάτων καὶ πνευμάτων ἢ εὐφορίας τε καὶ ἀφορίας καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα.
Προηγεῖται δὲ καὶ τούτων εἰκότως ἑκατέρου τό τε κατὰ χώρας ὅλας καὶ τὸ κατὰ μείζους περιστάσεις διὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἰτίαν τῇ προειρημένῃ. Πρὸς δὲ τὴν τούτων ἐπίσκεψιν μάλιστα παραλαμβανομένων δύο τούτων, τῆς τε τῶν δωδεκατημορίων τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων πρὸς ἕκαστα τῶν κλιμάτων συνοικειώσεως καὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς οἰκείοις μέρεσι κατὰ καιροὺς γινομένων ἐπισημασιῶν, κατὰ μὲν τὰς συζυγίας ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης τῶν ἐκλειπτικῶν, κατὰ δὲ τὰς τῶν πλανωμένων παρόδους τῶν περὶ τὰς ἀνατολὰς καὶ τοὺς στηριγμούς, προεκθησόμεθα τὸν τῶν εἰρημένων συμπαθειῶν φυσικὸν λόγον ἅμα παριστάντες ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς καὶ τὰς καθ’ ὅλα ἔθνη θεωρουμένας ὡς ἐπίπαν σωματικάς τε καὶ ἠθικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας, οὐκ ἀλλοτρίας τυγχανούσας τῆς τῶν συνοικειουμένων ἀστέρων τε καὶ δωδεκατημορίων φυσικῆς περιστάσεως.
1. General Divisions of the subject
Let it be considered that thus far we have furnished in brief the most important details of the tabular exposition needful for the inquiry into particular prognostications. Let us now add in proper sequence the procedures for dealing in detail with those matters which lie within the limits of possibility of this kind of prognostication, holding everywhere to the natural method of exposition.
Since, then, prognostication by astronomical means is divided into two great and principal parts, and since the first and more universal is that which relates to whole races, countries, and cities, which is called general, and the second and more specific is that which relates to individual men, which is called genethlialogical, we believe it fitting to treat first of the general division, because such matters are naturally swayed by greater and more powerful causes than are particular events. And since weaker natures always yield to the stronger, and the particular always falls under the general 1, it would by all means be necessary for those who purpose an inquiry about a single individual long before to have comprehended the more general considerations.
Of the general inquiry itself, a part, again, is found to concern whole countries, and a part to concern cities 2; and further, a part deals with the greater and more periodic conditions, such as wars, famines, pestilences, earthquakes, deluges, and the like; and another with the lesser and more occasional, as for example the changes in temperature 3 in the seasons of the year, and the variations of the intensity of storms, heat, and winds, or of good and bad crops, and so on.
But in each of these cases, as is reasonable, procedure, by entire countries and by more important conditions is preferred, for the same reason as before. And since in the examination of these questions these two things particularly are taken into consideration, the familiarity of the signs of the zodiac and also of the stars with the several climes 4, and the significances of heavenly bodies in their own proper regions 5 at a given time, manifested through the ecliptical conjunctions of the sun and moon and the transits 6 of the planets at rising and at their stationary periods, we shall first explain the natural reason for the aforesaid sympathies, and at the same time briefly survey the bodily and ethical peculiarities generally observed to belong to whole nations, which are not alien to the natural character of the stars and signs that are familiar to them.
2. Περὶ τῶν καθ’ ὅλα κλίματα ἰδιωμάτων
Τῶν τοίνυν ἐθνικῶν ἰδιωμάτων τὰ μὲν καθ’ ὅλους παραλλήλους καὶ γωνίας ὅλας διαιρεῖσθαι συμβέβηκεν ὑπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν διὰ μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων κύκλον καὶ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτῶν σχέσεως. Τῆς γὰρ καθ’ ἡμᾶς οἰκουμένης ἐν ἑνὶ τῶν βορείων τεταρτημορίων οὔσης οἱ μὲν ὑπὸ τοὺς νοτιωτέρους παραλλήλους, λέγω δὲ τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἰσημερινοῦ μέχρι τοῦ θερινοῦ τροπικοῦ, κατὰ κορυφὴν λαμβάνοντες τὸν ἥλιον καὶ διακαιόμενοι μέλανές τε τὰ σώματα καὶ τὰς τρίχας οὖλοί τε καὶ δασεῖς καὶ τὰς μορφὰς συνεσπασμένοι καὶ τὰ μεγέθη συντετηγμένοι καὶ τὰς φύσεις θερμοὶ καὶ τοῖς ἤθεσιν ὡς ἐπίπαν ἄγριοι τυγχάνουσι διὰ τὴν ὑπὸ τοῦ καύματος συνέχειαν τῶν οἰκήσεων· οὓς δὴ καλοῦμεν κοινῶς Αἰθίοπας. Καὶ οὐ μόνον αὐτοὺς οὕτως ὁρῶμεν ἔχοντας, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ περιέχον αὐτοὺς τοῦ ἀέρος κατάστημα καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα καὶ τὰ φυτὰ παρ’ αὐτοῖς ἐμφανίζοντα τὴν διαπύρωσιν.
Οἱ δὲ ὑπὸ τοὺς βορειοτέρους παραλλήλους, λέγω δὲ τοὺς ὑπὸ τὰς ἄρκτους τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν ἔχοντες τόπον, πολὺ τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ καὶ τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου θερμότητος ἀφεστῶτες κατεψυγμένοι μέν εἰσι διὰ τοῦτο, δαψιλεστέρας δὲ μεταλαμβάνοντες τῆς ὑγρᾶς οὐσίας θρεπτικωτάτης οὔσης καὶ ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἀναπινομένης θερμοῦ λευκοί τε τὰ χρώματά εἰσι καὶ τετανοὶ τὰς τρίχας τά τε σώματα μεγάλοι καὶ εὐτραφεῖς τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ ὑπόψυχροι τὰς φύσεις, ἄγριοι δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῖς ἤθεσι διὰ τὴν ὑπὸ τοῦ κρύους συνέχειαν τῶν οἰκήσεων· ἀκολουθεῖ δὲ τούτοις καὶ ὁ τοῦ περιέχοντος αὐτοὺς ἀέρος χειμὼν καὶ τῶν φυτῶν τὰ μεγέθη καὶ τὸ δυσήμερον τῶν ζῴων. Καλοῦμεν δὲ τούτους ὡς ἐπίπαν Σκύθας.
Οἱ δὲ μεταξὺ τοῦ θερινοῦ τροπικοῦ καὶ τῶν ἄρκτων, μήτε κατὰ κορυφὴν γινομένου παρ’ αὐτοῖς τοῦ ἡλίου μήτε πολὺ κατὰ τὰς μεσημβρινὰς παρόδους ἀφισταμένου, τῆς τῶν ἀέρων εὐκρασίας μετειλήφασι, καὶ αὐτῆς μὲν διαφερούσης, ἀλλ’ οὐ σφόδρα μεγάλην τὴν παραλλαγὴν τῶν καυμάτων πρὸς τὰ ψύχη λαμβανούσης. Ἔνθεν τοῖς χρώμασι μέσοι καὶ τοῖς μεγέθεσι μέτριοι καὶ ταῖς φύσεσιν εὔκρατοι καὶ ταῖς οἰκήσεσι συνεχεῖς καὶ τοῖς ἤθεσιν ἥμεροι τυγχάνουσι. Τούτων δὲ οἱ πρὸς νότον ὡς ἐπίπαν ἀγχινούστεροι καὶ εὐμήχανοι μᾶλλον καὶ περὶ τὴν τῶν θείων ἱστορίαν ἱκανώτεροι διὰ τὸ συνεγγίζειν αὐτῶν τὸν κατὰ κορυφὴν τόπον τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων, οἷς οἰκείως καὶ αὐτοὶ τὰς ψυχικὰς κινήσεις εὐεπιβόλους ἔχουσι καὶ διερευνητικὰς καὶ τῶν ἰδίως καλουμένων μαθημάτων περιοδευτικάς. Καθόλου δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν πρὸς ἕω μᾶλλόν εἰσιν ἠρρενωμένοι καὶ εὔτονοι τὰς ψυχὰς καὶ πάντα ἐκφαίνοντες, ἐπειδὴ τὰς ἀνατολὰς ἄν τις εἰκότως τῆς ἡλιακῆς φύσεως ὑπολάβοι καὶ τὸ μέρος ἐκεῖνο ἡμερινόν τε καὶ ἀρρενικὸν καὶ δεξιόν, καθ’ ὃ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ζῴοις ὁρῶμεν τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη μᾶλλον ἐπιτηδειότητα ἔχοντα πρὸς ἰσχὺν καὶ εὐτονίαν.
Οἱ δὲ πρὸς ἑσπέραν τεθηλυσμένοι μᾶλλόν εἰσι καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς ἁπαλώτεροι, καὶ τὰ πολλὰ κρύπτοντες, ἐπειδὴ πάλιν τοῦτο τὸ μέρος σεληνιακὸν τυγχάνει πάντοτε τῆς σελήνης τὰς πρώτας ἐπιτολὰς καὶ ἀπὸ συνόδου φαντασίας ἀπὸ λιβὸς ποιουμένης. Διὰ δὴ τοῦτο νυκτερινὸν δοκεῖ κλίμα καὶ θηλυκὸν καὶ εὐώνυμον, ἀντικείμενον τῷ ἀνατολικῷ.
Ἤδη δέ τινες καὶ ἐν ἑκάστοις τούτων τῶν ὅλων μερῶν μορίοις ἰδιότροποι περιστάσεις ἠθῶν καὶ νομίμων φυσικῶς ἐξηκολούθησαν. Ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν τοῦ περιέχοντος καταστημάτων καὶ ἐν τοῖς ὡς ἐπίπαν κατειλεγμένοις θερμοῖς ἢ ψυχροῖς ἢ εὐκράτοις καὶ κατὰ μέρος ἰδιάζουσι τόποι καὶ χῶραί τινες ἐν τῷ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον ἤτοι διὰ θέσεως τάξιν ἢ διὰ ὕψος ἢ ταπεινότητα ἢ διὰ παράθεσιν, ἔτι δὲ ὡς ἱππικοί τινες μᾶλλον διὰ τὸ τῆς χώρας πεδινὸν καὶ ναυτικοὶ διὰ τὴν τῆς θαλάσσης ἐγγύτητα καὶ ἥμεροι διὰ τὴν τῆς χώρας εὐθηνίαν, οὕτως καὶ ἐκ τῆς πρὸς τοὺς ἀστέρας καὶ τὰ δωδεκατημόρια φυσικῆς τῶν κατὰ μέρος κλιμάτων συνοικειώσεως ἰδιοτρόπους ἄν τις εὕροι φύσεις παρ’ ἑκάστοις, καὶ αὐτὰς δὲ ὡς ἐπίπαν, οὐχ ὡς καὶ καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον πάντως ἐνυπαρχούσας. Αναγκαῖον οὖν, ἐφ’ ὅσον ἂν εἴη χρήσιμον, πρὸς τὰς κατὰ μέρος ἐπισκέψεις κεφαλαιωδῶς ἐπελθεῖν.
2. Of the Characteristics of the lnhabitants of the General Climes
The demarcation of national characteristics 7 is established in part by entire parallels and angles 8, through their position relative to the ecliptic and the sun. For while the region which we inhabit is in one of the northern quarters; the people who live under the more southern parallels, that is, those from the equator to the summer tropic, since they have the sun over their heads and are burned by it, have black skins and thick, woolly hair, are contracted in form and shrunken in stature, are sanguine of nature, and in habits are for the most part savage because their homes are continually oppressed by heat; we call them by the general name Ethiopians. Not only do we see them in this condition, but we likewise observe that their climate and the animals and plants of their region plainly give evidence of this baking by the sun.
Those who live under the more northern parallels, those, I mean, who have the Bears over their heads, since they are far removed from the zodiac and the heat of the sun, are therefore cooled; but because they have a richer share of moisture, which is most nourishing and is not there exhausted by heat, they are white in complexion, straight-haired, tall and well-nourished, and somewhat cold by nature; these too are savage in their habits, because their dwelling places are continually cold. The wintry character of their climate, the size of their plants, and the wildness of their animals are in accord with these qualities. We call these men, too, by a general name, Scythians.
The inhabitants of the region between the summer tropic and the Bears, however, since the sun is neither directly over their heads nor far distant at its noon-day transits, share in the equable temperature of the air, which varies, to be sure, but has no violent changes from heat to cold. They are therefore medium in colouring, of moderate stature, in nature equable, live close together, and are civilized in their habits. The southernmost 9 of them are in general more shrewd and inventive, and better versed in the knowledge of things divine because their zenith is close to the zodiac and to the planets revolving about it. Through this affinity the men themselves are characterized by an activity of the soul which is sagacious, investigative, and fitted for pursuing the sciences specifically called mathematical. Of them, again, the eastern group are more masculine, vigorous of soul, and frank in all things 10, because one would reasonably assume that the orient partakes of the nature of the sun 11. This region therefore is diurnal, masculine, and right-handed, even as we observe that among the animals too their right-hand parts are better fitted for strength and vigour.
Those to the west are more feminine, softer of soul, and secretive, because this region, again, is lunar, for it is always in the west that the moon emerges and makes its appearance after conjunction. For this reason it appears to be a nocturnal clime, feminine, and, in contrast with the orient, left-handed.
And now in each of these general regions certain special conditions of character and customs 12 naturally ensue. For as likewise, in the case of the climate, even within the regions that in general are reckoned as hot, cold, or temperate, certain localities and countries have special peculiarities of excess or deficiency by reason of their situation, height, lowness, or adjacency; and again, as some peoples are more inclined to horsemanship because theirs is a plain country, or to seamanship because they live close to the sea, or to civilization because of the richness of their soil, so also would one discover special traits in each arising from the natural familiarity of their particular climes with the stars in the signs of the zodiac. These traits, too, would be found generally present, but not in every individual. We must, then, deal with the subject summarily, in so far as it might be of use for the purpose of particular investigations.
3. Περὶ τῆς τῶν χωρῶν πρὸς τὰ τρίγωνα καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἀστέρας συνοικειώσεως
Tεσσάρων δὴ τριγωνικῶν σχημάτων ἐν τῷ ζῳδιακῷ θεωρουμένων δέδεικται διὰ τῶν ἔμπροσθεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι τὸ μὲν κατὰ τὸν Κριὸν καὶ τὸν Λέοντα καὶ τὸν Τοξότην βορρολιβικόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται μὲν προηγουμένως ὑπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ τὸ βόρειον, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως διὰ τὸ λιβικόν· τὸ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον καὶ τὴν Παρθένον καὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων νοταπηλιωτικόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται μὲν πάλιν προηγουμένως ὑπὸ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ τὸ νότιον, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὸ ἀπηλιωτικόν·
Τὸ δὲ κατὰ τοὺς Διδύμους καὶ τὰς Χηλὰς καὶ τὸν Ὑδροχόον βορραπηλιωτικόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται μὲν προηγουμένως ὑπὸ τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ τὸ ἀπηλιωτικόν, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ τὸ βόρειον· τὸ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Καρκίνον καὶ τὸν Σκορπίον καὶ τοὺς Ἰχθύας νοτολιβικόν τέ ἐστι καὶ οἰκοδεσποτεῖται μὲν πάλιν προηγουμένως ὑπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως διὰ τὸ λιβικόν, συνοικοδεσποτεῖται δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ τὸ νότιον.
Τούτων δὴ οὕτως ἐχόντων, διαιρουμένης δὲ τῆς καθ’ ἡμᾶς οἰκουμένης εἰς τέσσαρα τεταρτημόρια τοῖς τριγώνοις ἰσάριθμα κατὰ μὲν πλάτος ὑπό τε τῆς καθ’ ἡμᾶς θαλάσσης ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἡρακλείου πορθμοῦ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰσσικοῦ κόλπου καὶ τῆς ἐφεξῆς πρὸς ἀνατολὰς ὀρεινῆς ῥάχεως, ὑφ’ ὧν χωρίζεται τό τε νότιον καὶ τὸ βόρειον αὐτῆς μέρος, κατὰ δὲ μῆκος ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἀραβικοῦ κόλπου καὶ Αἰγαίου πελάγους καὶ Πόντου καὶ τῆς Μαιώτιδος λίμνης, ὑφ’ ὧν χωρίζεται τό τε ἀπηλιωτικὸν καὶ τὸ λιβικὸν μέρος, γίνεται τεταρτημόρια τέσσαρα, σύμφωνα τῇ θέσει τῶν τριγώνων· ἓν μὲν τὸ πρὸς βορρόλιβα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης κείμενον, τὸ κατὰ τὴν Κελτογαλατίαν, ὃ δὴ κοινῶς Εὐρώπην καλοῦμεν· τούτῳ δὲ ἀντικείμενον καὶ πρὸς νοταπηλιώτην τὸ κατὰ τὴν Ἑῴαν Αἰθιοπίαν, ὃ δὴ τῆς Μεγάλης Ἀσίας νότιον ἂν μέρος καλοῖτο· καὶ πάλιν τὸ μὲν πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης τὸ κατὰ τὴν Σκυθίαν, ὃ δὴ καὶ αὐτὸ βόρειον μέρος τῆς Μεγάλης Ἀσίας γίνεται· τὸ δὲ ἀντικείμενον τούτῳ καὶ πρὸς λιβόνοτον ἄνεμον, τὸ κατὰ τὴν Ἑσπερίαν Αἰθιοπίαν, ὃ δὴ κοινῶς Λιβύην καλοῦμεν.
Πάλιν δὲ καὶ ἑκάστου τῶν προκειμένων τεταρτημορίων τὰ πρὸς τῷ μέσῳ μᾶλλον ἐσχηματισμένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης τὴν ἐναντίαν λαμβάνει θέσιν πρὸς αὐτὸ τὸ περιέχον τεταρτημόριον ἥνπερ ἐκεῖνο πρὸς ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην· τοῦ γὰρ κατὰ τὴν Εὐρώπην πρὸς βορρόλιβα κειμένου τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης τὰ περὶ τὸ μέσον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀντιγώνια πρὸς νοταπηλιώτην αὐτοῦ τοῦ τεταρτημορίου τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα φαίνεται καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως, ὡς ἐκ τούτων ἕκαστον τῶν τεταρτημορίων δυσὶ καὶ τοῖς ἀντικειμένοις τριγώνοις συνοικειοῦσθαι, τῶν μὲν ἄλλων μερῶν πρὸς τὴν καθόλου πρόσνευσιν ἐφαρμοζομένων, τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸ μέσον πρὸς τὴν κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ μέρος ἀντικειμένην, συμπαραλαμβανομένων πρὸς τὴν οἰκείωσιν καὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς οἰκείοις τριγώνοις τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν ἐχόντων ἀστέρων, ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἄλλων οἰκήσεων πάλιν αὐτῶν μόνων, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν περὶ τὸ μέσον τῆς οἰκουμένης κἀκείνων καὶ ἔτι τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ τὸ μέσον καὶ κοινὸν αὐτὸν ὑπάρχειν τῶν αἱρέσεων.
Ἐκ δὴ τῆς τοιαύτης διατάξεως τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πρώτου τῶν τεταρτημορίων, λέγω δὲ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν Εὐρώπην, τὰ πρὸς βορρόλιβα κείμενα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ βορρολιβικῷ τριγώνῳ τῷ κατὰ Κριὸν καὶ Λέοντα καὶ Τοξότην, οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπὸ τῶν κυρίων τοῦ τριγώνου Διὸς καὶ Ἄρεως ἑσπερίων. Ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα καθ’ ὅλα ἔθνη λαμβανόμενα Βρεττανία Γαλατία Γερμανία Βασταρνία Ἰταλία Γαλλία Ἀπουλία Σικελία Τυρρηνία Κελτικὴ Σπανία. Εἰκότως δὲ τοῖς προκειμένοις ἔθνεσιν ὡς ἐπίπαν συνέπεσε, διά τε τὸ ἀρχικὸν τοῦ τριγώνου καὶ τοὺς συνοικοδεσποτήσαντας ἀστέρας ἀνυποτάκτοις τε εἶναι καὶ φιλελευθέροις καὶ φιλόπλοις καὶ φιλοπόνοις καὶ πολεμικωτάτοις καὶ ἡγεμονικοῖς καὶ καθαρίοις καὶ μεγαλοψύχοις.
Διὰ μέντοι τὸν ἑσπέριον συσχηματισμὸν Διὸς καὶ Ἄρεως καὶ ἔτι διὰ τὸ τοῦ προκειμένου τριγώνου τὰ μὲν ἐμπρόσθια ἠρρενῶσθαι, τὰ δὲ ὀπίσθια τεθηλῦσθαι πρὸς μὲν τὰς γυναῖκας ἀζήλοις αὐτοῖς εἶναι συνέπεσε καὶ καταφρονητικοῖς τῶν ἀφροδισίων, πρὸς δὲ τὴν τῶν ἀρρένων συνουσίαν κατακορεστέροις τε καὶ μᾶλλον ζηλοτύποις αὐτοῖς τε τοῖς διατιθεμένοις μήτε αἰσχρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι τὸ γινόμενον μήτε ὡς ἀληθῶς ἀνάνδροις διὰ τοῦτο καὶ μαλακοῖς ἀποβαίνειν ἕνεκεν τοῦ μὴ παθητικῶς διατίθεσθαι, συντηρεῖν δὲ τὰς ψυχὰς ἐπάνδρους καὶ κοινωνικὰς καὶ πιστὰς καὶ φιλοικείους καὶ εὐεργετικάς.
Καὶ τούτων δὲ αὐτῶν τῶν χωρῶν Βρεττανία μὲν καὶ Γαλατία καὶ Γερμανία καὶ Βασταρνία μᾶλλον τῷ Κριῷ συνοικειοῦνται καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ὅθεν ὡς ἐπίπαν οἱ ἐν αὐταῖς ἀγριώτεροι καὶ αὐθαδέστεροι καὶ θηριώδεις τυγχάνουσιν· Ἰταλία δὲ καὶ Ἀπουλία καὶ Σικελία καὶ Γαλλία τῷ Λέοντι καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ, διόπερ ἡγεμονικοὶ μᾶλλον οὗτοι καὶ εὐεργετικοὶ καὶ κοινωνικοί· Τυρρηνία δὲ καὶ Κελτικὴ καὶ Σπανία τῷ Τοξότῃ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός, ὅθεν τὸ φιλελεύθερον αὐτοῖς καὶ ἁπλοῦν καὶ φιλοκάθαρον.
Τὰ δὲ ἐν τούτῳ μὲν ὄντα τῷ τεταρτημορίῳ μέρη, περὶ δὲ τὸ μέσον ἐσχηματισμένα τῆς οἰκουμένης, Θρᾴκη τε καὶ Μακεδονία καὶ Ἰλλυρία καὶ Ἑλλὰς καὶ Ἀχαΐα καὶ Κρήτη, ἔτι δὲ καὶ αἱ Κυκλάδες καὶ τὰ Παράλια τῆς Μικρᾶς Ἀσίας καὶ Κύπρος, πρὸς νοταπηλιώτην κείμενα τοῦ ὅλου τεταρτημορίου, προσλαμβάνει τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ νοταπηλιωτικοῦ τριγώνου τοῦ τε κατὰ τὸν Ταῦρον καὶ τὴν Παρθένον καὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων, ἔτι δὲ συνοικοδεσποτοῦντας τόν τε τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ἔτι τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, ὅθεν οἱ κατοικοῦντες τὰς χώρας ἐκείνας συγκατεσχηματισμένοι μᾶλλον ἀπεφάνθησαν καὶ κεκραμένοι τοῖς τε σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς, ἡγεμονικοὶ μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ τυγχάνοντες καὶ γενναῖοι καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως, φιλελεύθεροι δὲ καὶ αὐτόνομοι καὶ δημοκρατικοὶ καὶ νομοθετικοὶ διὰ τὸν τοῦ Διός, φιλόμουσοι δὲ καὶ φιλομαθεῖς καὶ φιλαγωνισταὶ καὶ καθάριοι ταῖς διαίταις, διὰ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης κοινωνικοί τε καὶ φιλόξενοι καὶ φιλοδίκαιοι καὶ φιλογράμματοι καὶ ἐν λόγοις πρακτικώτατοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, μυστηρίων δὲ μάλιστα συντελεστικοὶ διὰ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἑσπέριον σχηματισμόν.
Πάλιν δὲ κατὰ μέρος καὶ τούτων αὐτῶν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὰς Κυκλάδας καὶ τὰ Παράλια τῆς Μικρᾶς Ἀσίας καὶ Κύπρον τῷ τε Ταύρῳ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦνται, ὅθεν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖστον τρυφηταί εἰσι καὶ καθάριοι καὶ τοῦ σώματος ἐπιμέλειαν ποιούμενοι. Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα καὶ τὴν Ἀχαΐαν καὶ τὴν Κρήτην τῇ τε Παρθένῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, διὸ μᾶλλον λογικοὶ τυγχάνουσι καὶ φιλομαθεῖς καὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀσκοῦντες πρὸ τοῦ σώματος, οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Μακεδονίαν καὶ Θρᾴκην καὶ Ἰλλυρίαν τῷ τε Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, διὸ φιλοκτήματοι μέν, οὐχ ἥμεροι δὲ οὕτως οὐδὲ κοινωνικοὶ τοῖς νομίμοις.
Τοῦ δὲ δευτέρου τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ τὸ νότιον μέρος τῆς Μεγάλης Ἀσίας τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τὰ περιέχοντα Ἰνδικὴν Ἀριανὴν Γεδρουσίαν Παρθίαν Μηδίαν Περσίδα Βαβυλωνίαν Μεσοποταμίαν Ἀσσυρίαν καὶ τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς νοταπηλιώτην τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης εἰκότως καὶ αὐτὰ συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ νοταπηλιωτικῷ τριγώνῳ Ταύρου καὶ Παρθένου καὶ Αἰγόκερω· οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου ἐπὶ ἑῴων σχημάτων. Διόπερ καὶ τὰς φύσεις τῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἀκολούθως ἄν τις εὕροι τοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν οὕτως οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀποτελουμένας. Σέβουσί τε γὰρ τὸν μὲν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης Ἶσιν ὀνομάζοντες, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου Μίθραν ἢ Ἥλιον καὶ προθεσπίζουσιν οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέλλοντα· καθιεροῦταί τε παρ’ αὐτοῖς τὰ γεννητικὰ μόρια διὰ τὸν τῶν προκειμένων ἀστέρων συσχηματισμὸν σπερματικὸν ὄντα φύσει. Ἔτι δὲ θερμοὶ καὶ ὀχευτικοὶ καὶ καταφερεῖς πρὸς τὰ ἀφροδίσια τυγχάνουσιν ὀρχηστικοί τε καὶ πηδηταὶ καὶ φιλόκοσμοι μὲν διὰ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ἁπλοδίαιτοι δὲ διὰ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου.
Ἀναφανδὸν δὲ ποιοῦνται καὶ οὐ κρύβδην τὰς πρὸς τὰς γυναῖκας συνουσίας διὰ τὸ ἑῷον τοῦ σχηματισμοῦ, τὰς δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ἄρρενας ὑπερεχθαίρουσι διὰ ταῦτα. Καὶ τοῖς πλείστοις αὐτῶν συνέπεσεν ἐκ τῶν μητέρων τεκνοῦν καὶ τὰς προσκυνήσεις τῷ στήθει ποιεῖσθαι διὰ τὰς ἑῴας ἀνατολὰς καὶ τὸ τῆς καρδίας ἡγεμονικὸν οἰκείως ἔχον πρὸς τὴν ἡλιακὴν δύναμιν. Εἰσὶ δὲ ὡς ἐπίπαν καὶ τὰ μὲν ἄλλα περὶ τὰς στολὰς καὶ τοὺς κόσμους καὶ ὅλως τὰς σωματικὰς σχέσεις τρυφεροὶ καὶ τεθηλυσμένοι διὰ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, τὰς δὲ ψυχὰς καὶ τὰς προαιρέσεις μεγαλόφρονες καὶ γενναῖοι καὶ πολεμικοὶ διὰ τὸ οἰκείως ἔχειν τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τὸ τῶν ἀνατολῶν σχῆμα.
Κατὰ μέρος δὲ πάλιν τῷ μὲν Ταύρῳ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦται ἥ τε Παρθία καὶ Μηδία καὶ Περσίς, ὅθεν οἱ ἐνταῦθα στολαῖς τε ἀνθιναῖς χρῶνται κατακαλύπτοντες ἑαυτοὺς ὅλους πλὴν τοῦ στήθους, καὶ ὅλως εἰσὶν ἁβροδίαιτοι καὶ καθάριοι. Τῇ δὲ Παρθένῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τὰ περὶ τὴν Βαβυλωνίαν καὶ Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ Ἀσσυρίαν, διὸ καὶ παρὰ τοῖς ἐνταῦθα τὸ μαθηματικὸν καὶ παρατηρητικὸν τῶν πέντε ἀστέρων ἐξαίρετον συνέπεσε, τῷ δὲ Αἰγόκερῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου τὰ περὶ τὴν Ἰνδικὴν καὶ Ἀριανὴν καὶ Γεδρουσίαν, ὅθεν καὶ τὸ τῶν νεμομένων τὰς χώρας ἐκείνας ἄμορφον καὶ ἀκάθαρτον καὶ θηριῶδες.
Τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τοῦ τεταρτημορίου μέρη περὶ τὸ μέσον ἐσχηματισμένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, Ἰδουμαία Κοίλη Συρία Ἰουδαία Φοινίκη Χαλδαϊκὴ Ὀρχηνία Ἀραβία εὐδαίμων καὶ τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς βορρόλιβα τοῦ ὅλου τεταρτημορίου προσλαμβάνει πάλιν τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ βορρολιβικοῦ τριγώνου, Κριοῦ Λέοντος Τοξότου, ἔχει δὲ συνοικοδεσπότας τόν τε τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ἔτι τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. Διὸ μᾶλλον οὗτοι τῶν ἄλλων ἐμπορικώτεροι καὶ συναλλακτικώτεροι, πανουργότεροι δὲ καὶ δειλοκαταφρόνητοι καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικοὶ καὶ δουλόψυχοι καὶ ὅλως ἀλλοπρόσαλλοι διὰ τὸν τῶν προκειμένων ἀστέρων συσχηματισμόν.
Καὶ τούτων δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Κοίλην Συρίαν καὶ Ἰδουμαίαν καὶ Ἰουδαίαν τῷ τε Κριῷ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦνται, διόπερ ὡς ἐπίπαν θρασεῖς τέ εἰσι καὶ ἄθεοι καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικοί· Φοίνικες δὲ καὶ Χαλδαῖοι καὶ Ὀρχήνιοι τῷ Λέοντι καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ διόπερ ἁπλούστεροι καὶ φιλάνθρωποι καὶ φιλαστρόλογοι καὶ μάλιστα πάντων σέβοντες τὸν ἥλιον· οἱ δὲ κατὰ τὴν Ἀραβίαν τὴν εὐδαίμονα τῷ Τοξότῃ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός, ὅθεν ἀκολούθως τῇ προσηγορίᾳ τό τε τῆς χώρας εὔφορον συνέπεσε καὶ τὸ τῶν ἀρωμάτων πλῆθος καὶ τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων εὐάρμοστον πρός τε διαγωγὰς ἐλεύθερον καὶ συναλλαγὰς καὶ πραγματείας.
Τοῦ δὲ τρίτου τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ τὸ βόρειον μέρος τῆς Μεγάλης Ἀσίας τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τὰ περιέχοντα Ὑρκανίαν Ἀρμενίαν Ματιανὴν Βακτριανὴν Κασπειρίαν Σηρικὴν Σαυροματικὴν Ὠξιανὴν Σουγδιανὴν καὶ πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην κείμενα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ βορραπηλιωτικῷ τριγώνῳ Διδύμων καὶ Ζυγοῦ καὶ Ὑδροχόου, οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπό τε τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς ἐπὶ σχημάτων ἀνατολικῶν. Διόπερ οἱ ταύτας ἔχοντες τὰς χώρας σέβουσι μὲν Δία καὶ Ἥλιον, πλουσιώτατοι δέ εἰσι καὶ πολύχρυσοι περί τε τὰς διαίτας καθάριοι καὶ εὐάγωγοι, σοφοὶ δὲ περὶ τὰ θεῖα καὶ μάγοι καὶ τὰ ἤθη δίκαιοι καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς μεγάλοι καὶ γενναῖοι, μισοπόνηροι δὲ καὶ φιλοστοργότατοι καὶ ὑπεραποθνῄσκοντες ἑτοίμως τῶν οἰκείων ἕνεκεν τοῦ καλοῦ καὶ ὁσίου πρός τε τὰς ἀφροδισίους χρήσεις σεμνοὶ καὶ καθάριοι καὶ περὶ τὰς ἐσθῆτας πολυτελεῖς χαριστικοί τε καὶ μεγαλόφρονες, ἅπερ ὡς ἐπίπαν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τοῦ Διὸς ἀνατολικὸς συσχηματισμὸς ἀπεργάζεται.
Καὶ τούτων δὲ πάλιν τῶν ἐθνῶν τὰ μὲν περὶ τὴν Ὑρκανίαν καὶ Ἀρμενίαν καὶ Ματιανὴν μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦται τοῖς τε Διδύμοις καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, διόπερ εὐκινητότεροι μᾶλλον καὶ ὑποπόνηροι· τὰ δὲ περὶ τὴν Βακτριανὴν καὶ Κασπειρίαν καὶ Σηρικὴν τῷ τε Ζυγῷ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ὅθεν οἱ κατέχοντες τὰς χώρας πλουσιώτατοι καὶ φιλόμουσοι καὶ μᾶλλον ἁβροδίαιτοι· τὰ δὲ περὶ τὴν Σαυροματικὴν καὶ Ὠξιανὴν καὶ Σουγδιανὴν τῷ τε Ὑδροχόῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, διὸ καὶ ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνη μᾶλλον ἀνήμερα καὶ αὐστηρὰ καὶ θηριώδη.
Τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τούτου τοῦ τεταρτημορίου καὶ περὶ τὸ μέσον κείμενα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, Βιθυνία Φρυγία Κολχικὴ Συρία Κομμαγηνὴ Καππαδοκία Λυδία Κιλικία Παμφυλία, τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς λιβόνοτον αὐτοῦ τοῦ τεταρτημορίου, προσλαμβάνει τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ νοτολιβικοῦ τεταρτημορίου Καρκίνου Σκορπίου Ἰχθύων καὶ συνοικοδεσπότας τόν τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ἔτι τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. Διόπερ οἱ περὶ τὰς χώρας ταύτας σέβουσι μὲν ὡς ἐπίπαν τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ὡς μητέρα θεῶν ποικίλοις καὶ ἐγχωρίοις ὀνόμασι προσαγορεύοντες καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως ὡς Ἄδωνιν ἢ ἄλλως πως πάλιν ὀνομάζοντες καὶ μυστήριά τινα μετὰ θρήνων ἀποδίδοντες αὐτοῖς· περίκακοι δέ εἰσι καὶ δουλόψυχοι καὶ πονικοὶ καὶ ὑποπόνηροι καὶ ἐν μισθοφορικαῖς στρατείαις καὶ ἁρπαγαῖς καὶ αἰχμαλωσίαις γινόμενοι καταδουλούμενοί τε ἑαυτοὺς καὶ πολεμικαῖς ἀπωλείαις περιπίπτοντες· διὰ δὲ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης κατὰ ἀνατολικὴν συναρμογήν, ὅτι ἐν μὲν τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τριγωνικῷ ζῳδίῳ τῷ Αἰγόκερῳ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὑψοῦται, ἐν δὲ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως τριγωνικῷ ζῳδίῳ τοῖς Ἰχθύσι ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ὑψοῦται, διὰ τοῦτο τὰς γυναῖκας συνέβη πᾶσαν εὔνοιαν πρὸς τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐνδείκνυσθαι, φιλοστόργους τε οὔσας καὶ οἰκουροὺς καὶ ἐργατικὰς καὶ ὑπηρετικὰς καὶ ὅλως πονικὰς καὶ ὑποτεταγμένας.
Καὶ τούτων δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Βιθυνίαν καὶ Φρυγίαν καὶ Κολχικὴν συνοικειοῦνται μᾶλλον τῷ τε Καρκίνῳ καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ. Διόπερ οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ὡς ἐπίπαν εἰσὶν εὐλαβεῖς καὶ ὑποτακτικοί, τῶν δὲ γυναικῶν αἱ πλεῖσται διὰ τὸ τῆς σελήνης ἀνατολικὸν καὶ ἠρρενωμένον σχῆμα ἔπανδροι καὶ ἀρχικαὶ καὶ πολεμικαὶ καθάπερ αἱ Ἀμαζόνες, φεύγουσαι μὲν τὰς τῶν ἀνδρῶν συνουσίας, φίλοπλοι δὲ οὖσαι καὶ ἀρρενοποιοῦσαι τὰ θηλυκὰ πάντα ἀπὸ βρέφους ἀποκοπῇ τῶν δεξιῶν μαστῶν χάριν τῶν στρατιωτικῶν χρειῶν καὶ ἀπογυμνοῦσαι ταῦτα τὰ μέρη κατὰ τὰς παρατάξεις πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν τοῦ ἀθηλύντου τῆς φύσεως.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Συρίαν καὶ Κομμαγηνὴν καὶ Καππαδοκίαν τῷ τε Σκορπίῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως, διὸ πολὺ παρ’ αὐτοῖς συνέπεσε τὸ θρασὺ καὶ πονηρὸν καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικὸν καὶ ἐπίπονον· οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Λυδίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν τοῖς τε Ἰχθύσι καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός, ὅθεν οὗτοι μᾶλλον πολυκτήμονές τε καὶ ἐμπορικοὶ καὶ κοινωνικοὶ καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ πιστοὶ περὶ τὰς συναλλαγάς.
Τοῦ δὲ λοιποῦ τεταρτημορίου τοῦ κατὰ τὴν κοινῶς καλουμένην Λιβύην τὰ μὲν ἄλλα τὰ περιέχοντα Νουμιδίαν Καρχηδονίαν Ἀφρικὴν Φαζανίαν Νασαμονῖτιν Γαραμαντικὴν Μαυριτανίαν Γαιτουλίαν Μεταγωνῖτιν καὶ τὴν θέσιν ἔχοντα πρὸς λιβόνοτον τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης συνοικειοῦται μὲν τῷ νοτολιβικῷ τριγώνῳ Καρκίνου Σκορπίου Ἰχθύων, οἰκοδεσποτεῖται δὲ εἰκότως ὑπό τε τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπὶ σχήματος ἑσπερίου. Διόπερ συνέπεσε τοῖς πλείστοις αὐτῶν ἕνεκεν τῆς εἰρημένης τῶν ἀστέρων συναρμογῆς ὑπὸ ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικὸς δυεῖν ὁμομητρίων ἀδελφῶν βασιλεύεσθαι, τοῦ μὲν ἀνδρὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἄρχοντος, τῆς δὲ γυναικὸς τῶν γυναικῶν, συντηρουμένης τῆς τοιαύτης διαδοχῆς.
Θερμοί τέ εἰσι σφόδρα καὶ καταφερεῖς πρὸς τὰς γυναικῶν συνουσίας, ὡς καὶ τοὺς γάμους δι’ ἁρπαγῶν γίνεσθαι καὶ πολλαχῇ ταῖς γαμουμέναις τοὺς βασιλεῖς πρώτους συνέρψεσθαι, παρ’ ἐνίοις δὲ καὶ κοινὰς εἶναι τὰς γυναῖκας πάντων. Φιλοκαλλωπισταὶ δὲ τυγχάνουσι καὶ κόσμους γυναικείους περιζώννυνται διὰ τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ἔπανδροι μέντοι ταῖς ψυχαῖς καὶ ὑποπόνηροι καὶ μαγευτικοί, νοθευταὶ δὲ καὶ παράβολοι καὶ ῥιψοκίνδυνοι διὰ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως. Τούτων δὲ πάλιν οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Νουμιδίαν καὶ Καρχηδονίαν καὶ Ἀφρικὴν συνοικειοῦνται μᾶλλον τῷ τε Καρκίνῳ καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ, διόπερ οὗτοι κοινωνικοί τε καὶ ἐμπορικοὶ τυγχάνουσι καὶ ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ πάσῃ διατελοῦντες·
Οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Μεταγωνῖτιν καὶ Μαυριτανίαν καὶ Γαιτουλίαν τῷ τε Σκορπίῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ὅθεν οὗτοι θηριωδέστεροί τέ εἰσι καὶ μαχιμώτατοι καὶ κρεωφάγοι καὶ σφόδρα ῥιψοκίνδυνοι καὶ καταφρονητικοὶ τοῦ ζῆν, ὡς μηδὲ ἀλλήλων ἀπέχεσθαι· οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Φαζανίαν καὶ Νασαμωνῖτιν καὶ Γαραμαντικὴν τοῖς τε Ἰχθύσι καὶ τῷ τοῦ Διός, διόπερ ἐλεύθεροί τε καὶ ἁπλοῖ τοῖς ἤθεσι καὶ φιλεργοὶ καὶ εὐγνώμονες καθάριοί τε καὶ ἀνυπότακτοί εἰσιν ὡς ἐπίπαν καὶ τὸν τοῦ Διὸς ὡς Ἄμμωνα θρησκεύοντες.
Τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τοῦ τεταρτημορίου μέρη καὶ πρὸς τὸ μέσον ἐσχηματισμένα τῆς ὅλης οἰκουμένης, Κυρηναϊκὴ Μαρμαρικὴ Αἴγυπτος Θηβαῒς Ὄασις Τρωγλοδυτικὴ Ἀραβία Ἀζανία μέση Αἰθιοπία πρὸς βορραπηλιώτην τετραμμένα τοῦ ὅλου τεταρτημορίου προσλαμβάνει τὴν συνοικείωσιν τοῦ βορραπηλιωτικοῦ τριγώνου Διδύμων Ζυγοῦ Ὑδροχόου καὶ συνοικοδεσπότας διὰ τοῦτο τόν τε τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Διὸς καὶ ἔτι τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ.
Ὅθεν οἱ κατὰ ταύτας τὰς χώρας κεκοινωνηκότες σχεδὸν τῆς τῶν πέντε πλανήτων οἰκοδεσποτείας ἑσπερίου φιλόθεοι μὲν γεγόνασι καὶ δεισιδαίμονες καὶ θεοπρόσπλοκοι καὶ φιλόθρηνοι καὶ τοὺς ἀποθνῄσκοντας γῇ κρύπτοντες καὶ ἀφανίζοντες διὰ τὸ ἑσπέριον σχῆμα, παντοίοις δὲ ἔθεσι καὶ νομίμοις καὶ θεῶν παντοίων θρησκείαις χρώμενοι καὶ ἐν μὲν ταῖς ὑποταγαῖς ταπεινοὶ καὶ δειλοὶ καὶ μικρολόγοι καὶ ὑπομονητικοί, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡγεμονίαις εὔψυχοι καὶ μεγαλόφρονες, πολυγύναιοι δὲ καὶ πολύανδροι καὶ καταφερεῖς καὶ ταῖς ἀδελφαῖς συναρμοζόμενοι καὶ πολύσποροι μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, εὐσύλληπτοι δὲ αἱ γυναῖκες, ἀκολούθως τῷ τῆς χώρας γονίμῳ, πολλοὶ δὲ καὶ τῶν ἀρρένων σαθροὶ καὶ τεθηλυσμένοι ταῖς ψυχαῖς, ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ τῶν γεννητικῶν μορίων καταφρονοῦντες διὰ τὸν τῶν κακοποιῶν μετὰ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἑσπέριον σχηματισμόν.
Καὶ τούτων δὲ οἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν Κυρηναϊκὴν καὶ Μαρμαρικὴν καὶ μάλιστα οἱ περὶ τὴν κάτω χώραν τῆς Αἰγύπτου μᾶλλον συνοικειοῦνται τοῖς τε Ἰχθύσι καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, διόπερ οὗτοι διανοητικοί τε καὶ συνετοὶ καὶ εὐεπίβολοι τυγχάνουσι περὶ πάντα καὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὴν τῶν σοφῶν καὶ θείων εὕρεσιν μαγευτικοί τε καὶ κρυφίων μυστηρίων ἐπιτελεστικοὶ καὶ ὅλως ἱκανοὶ περὶ τὰ μαθήματα· οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Θηβαΐδα καὶ Ὄασιν καὶ Τρωγλοδυτικὴν τῷ τε Ζυγῷ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ὅθεν καὶ αὐτοὶ θερμότεροί εἰσι τὰς φύσεις καὶ κεκινημένοι καὶ ἐν εὐφορίαις ἔχοντες τὰς διαγωγάς· οἱ δὲ περὶ τὴν Ἀραβίαν καὶ Ἀζανίαν καὶ μέσην Αἰθιοπίαν τῷ Ὑδροχόῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, διὸ καὶ οὗτοι κρεωφάγοι τε καὶ ἰχθυοφάγοι καὶ νομάδες εἰσίν, ἄγριον καὶ θηριώδη βίον ζῶντες.
3. Of the Familiarities between the Countries and the Triplicities and Stars
Now of the four triangular formations recognized in the zodiac, as we have shown above 13, the one which consists of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius is northwestern, and is chiefly dominated by Jupiter on account of the north wind, but Mars joins in its government because of the south-west wind. That which is made up of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn is south-eastern, and again is governed primarily by Venus on account of the south wind, but conjointly by Saturn because of the east wind.
The one consisting of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius is north-eastern and is governed primarily by Saturn because of the east wind, and conjointly by Jupiter because of the north wind. The triangle of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces is south-western and is governed primarily, because of the west wind, by Mars, who is joined by Venus as co-ruler on account of the south wind.
As this is so, and since our inhabited world is divided into four quarters 14, equal in number to the triangles, and is divided latitudinally by our sea from the Straits of Hercules 15 to the Gulf of Issus and the mountainous ridge adjacent on the east 16, and by these its southern and northern portions are separated, and in longitude by the Arabian Gulf, the Aegean Sea, the Pontus 17, and the Lake Maeotis, whereby the eastern and western portions are separated, there arise four quarters, and these agree in position with the triangles.
The first quarter lies in the north-west of the whole inhabited world; it embraces Celtic Gaul 18 and we give it the general name Europe. Opposite this is the south-eastern quarter; this includes eastern Ethiopia 19, which would be called the southern part of Greater Asia. Again, the north-eastern quarter of the whole inhabited world is that which contains Scythia, which likewise is the northern part of Greater Asia; and the quarter opposite this and toward the south-west wind, the quarter of western Ethiopia, is that which we call by the general term Libya.
Again, of each of the aforesaid quarters the parts which are placed closer to the centre of the inhabited world are placed in a contrary fashion with respect to the surrounding quarters, just as are the latter in comparison with the whole world; and since the European quarter lies in the northwest of the whole world, the parts about the centre, which are allied to the opposite angle, obviously are situated in the south-east part of the quarter.
The same holds of the other quarters, so that each of them is related to two oppositely situated triangles; for while the other parts are in harmony with the general inclination of the quarter, the portions at the centre [of the world] share in familiarity with the opposite inclination, and, again, of the stars that govern in their own triangles, in all the other domiciles they alone govern, but in the parts about the centre of the world likewise the other group, and Mercury besides 20, because he is mid-way between and common to the two sects.
Under this arrangement, the remainder of the first quarter, by which I mean the European quarter, situated in the north-west of the inhabited world, is in familiarity with the north-western triangle, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, and is governed, as one would expect, by the lords of the triangle, Jupiter and Mars, occidental 21. In terms of whole nations these parts consist of Britain, (Transalpine) Gaul, Germany, Bastarnia 22, Italy, (Cisalpine) Gaul, Apulia, Sicily, Tyrrhenia 23, Celtica 24, and Spain.
As one might expect, it is the general characteristic of these nations, by reason of the predominance of the triangle and the stars which join in its government, to be independent, liberty-loving, fond of arms, industrious, very warlike, with qualities of leadership, cleanly, and magnanimous.
However, because of the occidental aspect of Jupiter and Mars, and furthermore because the first parts of the aforesaid triangle are masculine and the latter parts feminine 25, they are without passion for women 26 and look down upon the pleasures of love, but are better satisfied with and more desirous of association with men. And they do not regard the act as a disgrace to the paramour, nor indeed do they actually become effeminate and soft thereby, because their disposition is not perverted, but they retain in their souls manliness, helpfulness, good faith, love of kinsmen, and benevolence.
Of these same countries Britain, (Transalpine) Gaul, Germany, and Bastarnia are in closer familiarity with Aries and Mars. Therefore for the most part their inhabitants are fiercer, more headstrong, and bestial. But Italy, Apulia, (Cisalpine) Gaul, and Sicily have their familiarity with Leo and the sun; wherefore these peoples are more masterful, benevolent, and co-operative. Tyrrhenia, Celtica, and Spain are subject to Sagittarius and Jupiter, whence their independence, simplicity, and love of cleanliness.
The parts of this quarter which are situated about the centre of the inhabited world, Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria, Hellas, Achaia 27, Crete, and likewise the Cyclades, and the coastal regions of Asia Minor and Cyprus, which are in the south-east portion of the whole quarter, have in addition familiarity with the south-east triangle, Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, and its co-rulers Venus, Saturn, and Mercury. As a result the inhabitants of those countries are brought into conformity with these planets and both in body and soul are of a more mingled constitution.
They too have qualities of leadership and are noble and independent, because of Mars; they are liberty-loving and self-governing, democratic and framers of law, through Jupiter; lovers of music and of learning, fond of contests and clean livers, through Venus; social, friendly to strangers, justice-loving, fond of letters, and very effective in eloquence, through Mercury; and they are particularly addicted to the performance of mysteries, because of Venus’s occidental aspect.
And again, part by part, those of this group who live in the Cyclades and on the shores of Asia Minor and Cyprus are more closely familiar to Taurus and Venus. For this reason they are, on the whole, luxurious, clean, and attentive to their bodies. The inhabitants of Hellas, Achaia, and Crete, however, have a familiarity with Virgo and Mercury, and are therefore better at reasoning, and fond of learning, and they exercise the soul in preference to the body. The Macedonians, Thracians, and Illyrians have familiarity with Capricorn and Saturn, so that, though they are acquisitive, they are not so mild of nature, nor social in their institutions.
Of the second quarter, which embraces the southern part of Greater Asia, the other parts, including India, Ariana, Gedrosia 28, Parthia, Media, Persia, Babylonia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, which are situated in the south-east of the whole inhabited world, are, as we might presume, familiar to the south-eastern triangle, Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, and are governed by Venus and Saturn in oriental aspects.
Therefore one would find that the natures of their inhabitants conform with the temperaments governed by such rulers; for they revere the star of Venus under the name of Isis 29, and that of Saturn as Mithras Helios. Most of them, too, divine future events; and among them there exists the practice of consecrating the genital organs because of the aspect of the aforesaid stars, which is by nature generative. Further, they are ardent, concupiscent, and inclined to the pleasures of love; through the influence of Venus they are dancers and leapers and fond of adornment, and through that of Saturn luxurious livers.
They carry out their relations with women 30 openly and not in secret, because of the planets’ oriental aspect, but hold in detestation such relations with males. For these reasons most of them beget children by their own mothers, and they do obeisance to the breast, by reason of the morning rising of the planets and on account of the primacy of the heart, which is akin to the sun’s power. As for the rest, they are generally luxurious and effeminate in dress, in adornment, and in all habits relating to the body, because of Venus. In their souls and by their predilection they are magnanimous, noble, and warlike, because of the familiarity of Saturn oriental.
Part by part, again, Parthia, Media, and Persia are more closely familiar to Taurus and Venus; hence their inhabitants use embroidered clothing, which covers their entire body except the breast, and they are as a general thing luxurious and clean. Babylonia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria are familiar to Virgo and Mercury, and so the study of mathematics and the observation of the five planets are special traits of these peoples. India, Ariana, and Gedrosia have familiarity with Capricorn and Saturn; therefore the inhabitants of these countries are ugly, unclean, and bestial.
The remaining parts of the quarter, situated about the centre of the inhabited world, Idumaea, Coelê Syria, Judaea, Phoenicia, Chaldaea, Orchinia, and Arabia Felix 31, which are situated toward the north-west of the whole quarter, have additional familiarity with the north-western triangle, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, and, furthermore, have as co-rulers Jupiter, Mars, and Mercury. Therefore these peoples are, in comparison with the others, more gifted in trade and exchange; they are more unscrupulous, despicable cowards, treacherous, servile, and in general fickle, on account of the aspect of the stars mentioned.
Of these, again, the inhabitants of Coelê Syria, Idumaea, and Judaea are more closely familiar to Aries and Mars, and therefore these peoples are in general bold, godless 32, and scheming. The Phoenicians, Chaldaeans, and Orchinians have familiarity with Leo and the sun, so that they are simpler, kindly, addicted to astrology 33, and beyond all men worshippers of the sun. The inhabitants of Arabia Felix are familiar to Sagittarius and Jupiter; this accounts for the fertility of the country, in accordance with its name, and its multitudes of spices, and the grace of its inhabitants and their free spirit in daily life, in exchange, and in business.
Of the third quarter, which includes the northern part of Greater Asia, the other parts, embracing Hyrcania, Armenia, Matiana, Bactriana, Casperia, Serica, Sauromatica, Oxiana, Sogdiana, and the regions in the north-east of the inhabited world 34, are in familiarity with the north-eastern triangle, Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and are, as might be expected, governed by Saturn and Jupiter in oriental aspect.
Therefore the inhabitants of these lands worship Jupiter and Saturn, have much riches and gold, and are cleanly and seemly in their living, learned and adepts in matters of religion, just and liberal in manners, lofty and noble in soul, haters of evil, and affectionate, and ready to die for their friends in a fair and holy cause. They are. dignified and pure in their sexual relations, lavish in dress, gracious and magnanimous; these things in general are brought about by Saturn and Jupiter in eastern aspects.
Of these nations, again, Hyrcania, Armenia, and Matiana are more closely familiar to Gemini and Mercury ; they are accordingly more easily stirred and inclined to rascality. Bactriana, Casperia, and Serica are akin to Libra and Venus, so that their peoples are rich and followers of the Muses, and more luxurious. The regions of Sauromatica, Oxiana, and Sogdiana are in familiarity with Aquarius and Saturn ; these nations therefore are more ungentle, stern, and bestial.
The remaining parts of this quarter, which lie close to the centre of the inhabited world, Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchica, Syria, Commagenê, Cappadocia, Lydia, Lycia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia 35, since they are situated in the south-west of the quarter, have in addition familiarity with the southwestern quarter, Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and their co-rulers are Mars, Venus, and Mercury; therefore those who live in these countries generally worship Venus as the mother of the gods, calling her by various local names, and Mars as Adonis 36, to whom again they give other names, and they celebrate in their honour certain mysteries accompanied by lamentations.
They are exceedingly depraved, servile, laborious, rascally, are to be found in mercenary expeditions, looting and taking captives, enslaving their own peoples, and engaging in destructive wars. And because of the junction of Mars and Venus in the Orient, since Mars is exalted in Capricorn, a sign of Venus’s triangle, and Venus in Pisces, a sign of Mars’s triangle, it comes about that their women display entire goodwill to their husbands; they are affectionate, home-keepers, diligent, helpful, and in every respect laborious and obedient.
Of these peoples, again, those who live in Bithynia, Phrygia, and Colchica are more closely familiar to Cancer and the moon; therefore the men are in general cautious and obedient, and most of the women, through the influence of the moon’s oriental and masculine aspect, are virile 37, commanding, and warlike, like the Amazons, who shun commerce with men, love arms, and from infancy make masculine all their female characteristics, by cutting off their right breasts for the sake of military needs and baring these parts in the line of battle, in order to display the absence of femininity in their natures.
The people of Syria, Commagenê, and Cappadocia are familiar to Scorpio and Mars; therefore much boldness, knavery, treachery, and laboriousness are found among them. The people of Lydia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia have familiarity with Pisces and Jupiter; these accordingly are more wealthy, commercial, social, free, and trustworthy in their compacts.
Of the remaining quarter, which includes what is called by the common name Libya 38, the other parts, including Numidia, Carthage, Africa, Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica, Mauritania, Gaetulia, Metagonitis 39, and the regions situated in the south-west of the inhabited world, are related by familiarity to the south-western triangle, Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and are accordingly ruled by Mars and Venus in occidental aspect. For this reason it befalls most of the inhabitants, because of the aforesaid junction of these planets, to be governed by a man and wife who are own brother and sister 40, the man ruling the men and the woman the women; and a succession of this sort is maintained.
They are extremely ardent and disposed to commerce with women, so that even their marriages are brought about by violent abduction, and frequently their kings enjoy the jus primae noctis with the brides, and among some of them the women are common to all the men. They are fond of beautifying themselves and gird themselves with feminine adornments, through the influence of Venus; through that of Mars, however, they are virile of spirit, rascally, magicians, impostors, deceivers, and reckless. Of these people, again, the inhabitants of Numidia, Carthage, and Africa are more closely familiar to Cancer and the moon. They therefore are social, commercial, and live in great abundance.
Those who inhabit Metagonitis, Mauritania, and Gactulia are familiar to Scorpio and Mars; they are accordingly fiercer and very warlike, meat eaters, very reckless, and contemptuous of life to such an extent as not even to spare One another. Those who live in Phazania, Nasamonitis, and Garamantica are familiar to Pisces and Jupiter; hence they are free and simple in their characters, willing to work, intelligent, cleanly, and independent, as a general rule, and they are worshippers of Jupiter as Ammon.
The remaining parts of the quarter, which are situated near the centre of the inhabited world, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Egypt, Thebais 41, the Oasis, Troglodytica, Arabia, Azania, and Middle Ethiopia, which face the north-east of the whole quarter, have an additional familiarity with the northeastern triangle Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and therefore have as co-rulers Saturn and Jupiter and, furthermore, Mercury.
Accordingly those who live in these countries, because they all in common, as it were, are subject to the occidental rulership of the five planets, are worshippers of the gods, superstitious, given to religions ceremony and fond of lamentation; they bury their dead in the earth, putting them out of sight, on account of the occidental aspect of the planets; and they practice all kinds of usages, customs, and rites in the service of all manner of gods.
Under command they are humble, timid, penurious, and long-suffering, in leadership courageous and magnanimous; but they are polygamous and polyandrous and lecherous, marrying even their own sisters, and the men are potent in begetting, the women in conceiving, even as their land is fertile. Furthermore, many of the males are unsound and effeminate of soul, and some even hold in contempt the organs of generation, through the influence of the aspect of the maleficent planets in combination with Venus occidental.
Of these peoples the inhabitants of Cyrenaica and Marmarica, and particularly of Lower Egypt, are more closely familiar to Gemini and Mercury; on this account they are thoughtful and intelligent and facile in all things, especially in the search for wisdom and religion; they are magicians and performers of secret mysteries and in general skilled in mathematics 42. Those who live in Thebais, the Oasis, and Troglodytica are familiar to Libra and Venus; hence they are more ardent and lively of nature and live in plenty. The people of Arabia, Azania, and Middle Ethiopia are familiar to Aquarius and Saturn 43, for which reason they are flesh-eaters, fish-eaters, and nomads, living a rough, bestial life.
4. Ἔκθεσις τῶν ἀνηκουσῶν χωρῶν ἑκάστῳ τῶν ζῳδίων
Αἱ μὲν οὖν συνοικειώσεις τῶν τε ἀστέρων καὶ τῶν δωδεκατημορίων πρὸς τὰ κατὰ μέρος ἔθνη καὶ τὰ ὡς ἐπίπαν αὐτῶν ἰδιώματα κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες τοῦτον ἡμῖν ὑποτυπούσθω τὸν τρόπον. Ἐκθησόμεθα δὲ καὶ διὰ τὸ τῆς χρήσεως εὐεπίβολον ἐφ’ ἑκάστου τῶν δωδεκατημορίων κατὰ ψιλὴν παράθεσιν ἕκαστα τῶν συνῳκειωμένων ἐθνῶν ἀκολούθως τοῖς προκατειλεγμένοις περὶ αὐτῶν τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον·
Κριός· Βρεταννία, Γαλατία, Γερμανία, Βασταρνία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Κοίλη Συρία, Παλαιστίνη, Ἰδουμαία, Ἰουδαία.
Ταῦρος· Παρθία, Μηδία, Περσίς· περὶ τὸ μέσον Κυκλάδες νῆσοι, Κύπρος, παράλια τῆς μικρᾶς Ἀσίας.
Δίδυμοι· Ὑρκανία, Ἀρμενία, Ματιανή· περὶ τὸ μέσον Κυρηναϊκή, Μαρμαρική, ἡ κάτω χώρα τῆς Αἰγύπτου.
Καρκίνος· Νουμηδία, Καρχηδονία, Ἀφρική· περὶ τὸ μέσον Βιθυνία, Φρυγία, Κολχική.
Λέων· Ἰταλία, Γαλλία, Σικελία, Ἀπουλία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Φοινίκη, Χαλδαία, Ὀρχηνία.
Παρθένος· Μεσοποταμία, Βαβυλωνία, Ἀσσυρία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Ἑλλάς, Ἀχαΐα, Κρήτη.
Ζυγός· Βακτριανή, Κασπηρία, Σηρική· περὶ τὸ μέσον Θηβαΐς, Ὄασις, Τρωγλοδυτική.
Σκορπίος· Μεταγωνῖτις, Μαυριτανία, Γαιτουλία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Συρία, Κομμαγηνή, Καππαδοκία.
Τοξότης· Τυρρηνία, Κελτική, Ἰσπανία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Ἀραβία ἡ εὐδαίμων.
Αἰγόκερως· Ἰνδική, Ἀριανή, Γεδρωσία· περὶ τὸ μέσον Θρᾴκη, Μακεδονία, Ἰλλυρίς.
Ὑδροχόος· Σαυροματική, Ὀξειανή, Σουγδιανή· περὶ τὸ μέσον Ἀραβία, Ἀζανία, μέση Αἰθιοπία.
Ἰχθῦς· Φαζανία, Νασαμωνῖτις, Γαραμαντική· περὶ τὸ μέσον Λυδία, Κιλικία, Παμφυλία.
Ἐκκειμένων δὲ τούτων εὔλογον κἀκεῖνα τούτῳ τῷ μέρει προσθεῖναι, διότι καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων ἕκαστοι συνοικειοῦνται ταῖς χώραις, ὅσαις καὶ τὰ τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μέρη, καθ’ ὧν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἀπλανεῖς τὰς προσνεύσεις ἐπὶ τοῦ διὰ τῶν πόλων αὐτοῦ γραφομένου κύκλου, φαίνεται ποιούμενα τὴν συμπάθειαν, καὶ ὅτι ἐπὶ τῶν μητροπόλεων ἐκεῖνοι μάλιστα συμπαθοῦσιν οἱ τόποι τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ κύκλου, καθ’ ὧν ἐν ταῖς καταρχαῖς τῶν κτίσεων αὐτῶν ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως ὅ τε ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη παροδεύοντες ἐτύγχανον καὶ τῶν κέντρων μάλιστα τὸ ὡροσκοποῦν· ἐφ’ ὧν δὲ οἱ χρόνοι τῶν κτίσεων οὐχ εὑρίσκονται, καθ’ ὧν ἐν ταῖς τῶν κατὰ καιρὸν ἀρχόντων ἢ βασιλευόντων γενέσεσιν ἐκπίπτει τὸ μεσουράνημα.
4. Of the countries assigned to each of the signs
Let this be our brief exposition of the familiarities of the planets and the signs of the zodiac with the various nations, and of the general characteristics of the latter. We shall also set forth, for ready use, a list of the several nations which are in familiarity, merely noted against each of the signs, in accordance with what has just been said about them, thus:
Aries: Britain, Gaul, Germania, Bastarnia; in the centre, Coelê Syria, Palestine, Idumaea, Judaea.
Taurus: Parthia, Media, Persia; in the centre, the Cyclades, Cyprus, the coastal region of Asia Minor.
Gemini: Hyrcania, Armenia, Matiana; in the centre, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Lower Egypt.
Cancer: Numidia, Carthage, Africa; in the centre, Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchica.
Leo: Italy, Cisalpine Gaul, Sicily, Apulia; in the centre, Phoenicia, Chaldaea, Orchenia.
Virgo: Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Assyria; in the centre, Hellas, Achaia, Crete.
Libra: Bactriana, Casperia, Serica; in the centre, Thebais, Oasis, Troglodytica.
Scorpio: Metagonitis, Mauritania, Gaetulia; in the centre, Syria, Commagenê, Cappadocia.
Sagittarius: Tyrrhenia, Celtica, Spain; in the centre, Arabia Felix.
Capricorn: India, Ariana, Gedrosia; in the centre, Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria.
Aquarius: Sauromatica, Oxiana, Sogdiana; in the centre, Arahia, Azania, Middle Ethiopia.
Pisces: Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica; in the centre, Lydia, Cilicia, Pamphylia 44.
Now that the subject at hand has been set forth, it is reasonable to attach to this section this further consideration –that each of the fixed stars has familiarity with the countries with which the parts of the zodiac, which have the same inclinations as the fixed stars 45 upon the circle drawn through its poles, appear to exert sympathy; furthermore, that, in the case of metropolitan cities, those regions of the zodiac are most sympathetic through which the sun and moon, and of the centres especially the horoscope, were passing at the first founding of the city, as in a nativity. But in cases in which the exact times of the foundations are not discovered, the regions are sympathetic in which falls the midheaven of the nativities of those who held office or were kings at the time 46.
5. Ἔφοδος εἰς τὰς κατὰ μέρος προτελέσεις τῶν ἐκλείψεων
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως προεπεσκεμμένων ἀκόλουθον ἂν εἴη λοιπὸν τὰς τῶν προτελέσεων ἐφόδους κεφαλαιωδῶς ἐπελθεῖν καὶ πρῶτον τῶν καθ’ ὅλας περιστάσεις χωρῶν ἢ πόλεων λαμβανομένων· ἔσται δὲ ὁ τρόπος τῆς ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτος· ἡ μὲν οὖν πρώτη καὶ ἰσχυροτάτη τῶν τοιούτων συμπτωμάτων αἰτία γίνεται παρὰ τὰς ἐκλειπτικὰς ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης συζυγίας καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐταῖς παρόδους τῶν ἀστέρων· τῆς δὲ προτελέσεως αὐτῆς τὸ μέν ἐστι τοπικόν, καθ’ ὃ δεῖ προγινώσκειν, ποίαις χώραις ἢ πόλεσιν ἐπισημαίνουσιν αἱ κατὰ μέρος ἐκλείψεις ἢ καὶ τῶν πλανωμένων αἱ κατὰ καιροὺς ἔμμονοι στάσεις· αὗται δέ εἰσι Κρόνου τε καὶ Διὸς καὶ Ἄρεως, ὅταν στηρίζωσι, ποιοῦνται γὰρ τότε τὰς ἐπισημασίας· τὸ δέ ἐστι χρονικὸν καθ’ ὃ τὸν καιρὸν τῶν ἐπισημασιῶν καὶ τῆς παρατάσεως τὴν ποσότητα δεήσει προγινώσκειν, τὸ δὲ γενικόν, καθ’ ὃ προσήκει λαμβάνειν περὶ ποῖα τῶν γενῶν ἀποβήσεται τὸ σύμπτωμα· τελευταῖον δὲ τὸ εἰδικόν, καθ’ ὃ τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀποτελεσθησομένου ποιότητα θεωρήσομεν.
5. Method of Making Particular Predictions
After this introductory examination it would be the next task to deal briefly with the procedure of the predictions, and first with those concerned with general conditions of countries or cities. The method of the inquiry will be as follows: The first and most potent cause of such events lies in the conjunctions of the sun and moon at eclipse and the movements of the stars at the time. Of the prediction itself, one portion is regional 47; therein we must foresee for what countries or cities there is significance in the various eclipses or in the occasional regular stations of the planet, that is, of Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars, whenever they halt, for then they are significant. Another division of the prediction is chronological; therein the need will be to foretell the time of the portents and their duration. A part, too, is generic; through this we ought to understand with what classes the event will be concerned. And finally there is the specific aspect, by which we shall discern the quality of the event itself.
6. Περὶ τῆς τῶν διατιθεμένων χωρῶν ἐπισκέψεως
Τοῦ μὲν οὖν πρώτου καὶ τοπικοῦ τὴν διάληψιν ποιησόμεθα τοιαύτην. Κατὰ γὰρ τὰς γινομένας ἐκλειπτικὰς συζυγίας ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης καὶ μάλιστα τὰς εὐαισθητοτέρας ἐπισκεψόμεθα τόν τε ἐκλειπτικὸν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ τόπον καὶ τὰς τῷ κατ’ αὐτὸν τριγώνῳ συνοικειουμένας χώρας καὶ ὁμοίως τίνες τῶν πόλεων ἤτοι ἐκ τῆς κατὰ τὴν κτίσιν ὡροσκοπίας καὶ φωσφορίας ἢ ἐκ τῆς τῶν τότε ἡγεμονευόντων μεσουρανήσεως συμπάθειαν ἔχουσι πρὸς τὸ τὴς ἐκλείψεως δωδεκατημόριον.
Ἐφ’ ὅσων δ’ ἂν χωρῶν ἢ πόλεων εὑρίσκωμεν τὴν προκειμένην συνοικείωσιν, περὶ πάσας μὲν ὡς ἐπίπαν ὑπονοητέον ἔσεσθαι τὸ σύμπτωμα, μάλιστα δὲ περὶ τὰς πρὸς αὐτὸ τὸ τῆς ἐκλείψεως δωδεκατημόριον λόγον ἐχούσας καὶ ἐν ὅσαις αὐτῶν ὑπὲρ γῆν οὖσα ἡ ἔκλειψις ἐφαίνετο.
6. Of the Examination of the Countries Affected
We are to judge of the first portion of the inquiry, which is regional, in the following manner: In the eclipses of sun and moon 48 as they occur, particularly those more easily observed 49, we shall examine the region of the zodiac in which they take place, and the countries in familiarity with its triangles, and in similar fashion ascertain which of the cities, either from their horoscope 50 at the time of their founding and the position of the luminaries at the time, or from the mid-heaven 51 of the nativity of their then rulers, are sympathetic 52 to the zodiacal sign of the eclipse.
And in whatsoever countries or cities we discover a familiarity of this kind, we must suppose that same event will occur which applies, generally speaking, to all of them, particularly to those which bear a relation to the actual zodiacal sign of the eclipse and to those of them in which the eclipse, since it look place above the earth, was visible.
7. Περὶ τοῦ χρόνου τῶν ἀποτελουμένων
Τὸ δὲ δεύτερον καὶ χρονικὸν κεφάλαιον καθ’ ὃ τοὺς καιροὺς τῶν ἐπισημασιῶν καὶ τῆς παρατάσεως τὴν ποσότητα προσήκει διαγινώσκειν, ἐπισκεψόμεθα τρόπῳ τοιῷδε.
Τῶν γὰρ κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον γινομένων ἐκλείψεων μὴ κατὰ πᾶσαν οἴκησιν ἐν ταῖς αὐταῖς καιρικαῖς ὥραις ἀποτελουμένων μηδὲ τὰ μεγέθη τῶν ἐπισκοτήσεων ἢ τὸν χρόνον τῶν παρατάσεων κατὰ τὸ ἴσον πανταχῇ λαμβανουσῶν, πρῶτον μὲν κατὰ τὴν ἐν ἑκάστῃ τῶν λόγον ἐχουσῶν οἰκήσεων ἐκλειπτικὴν ὥραν καὶ τὸ τοῦ πόλου ἔξαρμα κέντρα ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως διαθήσομεν· ἔπειτα καὶ ἐπὶ πόσας ἰσημερινὰς ὥρας ἐν ἑκάστῃ παρατείνει τὸ ἐπισκίασμα τῆς ἐκλείψεως.
Τούτων γὰρ ἐξετασθέντων, ὅσας ἂν ἰσημερινὰς ὥρας εὕρωμεν, ἐφ’ ἡλιακῆς μὲν ἐκλείψεως ἐπὶ τοσούτους ἐνιαυτοὺς παραμένειν ὑπονοήσομεν τὸ ἀποτελούμενον, ἐπὶ δὲ σεληνιακῆς ἐπὶ τοσούτους μῆνας, καὶ τῶν καταρχῶν καὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων ἐπιτάσεων θεωρουμένων ἐκ τῆς τοῦ ἐκλειπτικοῦ τόπου πρὸς τὰ κέντρα σχέσεως – πρὸς μὲν γὰρ τῷ ἀπηλιωτικῷ ὁρίζοντι ὁ τόπος ἐκπεσὼν τήν τε καταρχὴν τοῦ συμπτώματος κατὰ τὴν πρώτην τετράμηνον ἀπὸ τοῦ χρόνου τῆς ἐκλείψεως σημαίνει καὶ τὰς ὁλοσχερεῖς ἐπιτάσεις περὶ τὸ πρῶτον τριτημόριον τοῦ καθ’ ὅλην τὴν παράτασιν χρόνου· πρὸς δὲ τῷ μεσουρανήματι κατά τε τὴν δευτέραν τετράμηνον καὶ τὸ μέσον τριτημόριον· πρὸς δὲ τῷ λιβικῷ ὁρίζοντι κατά τε τὴν τρίτην τετράμηνον καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον τριτημόριον – τῶν δὲ κατὰ μέρος ἀνέσεων καὶ ἐπιτάσεων ἀπό τε τῶν ἀνὰ μέσον συζυγιῶν, ὅταν κατὰ τῶν τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιούντων τόπων ἢ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων τόπων αὐτοῖς συμπίπτωσι, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων παρόδων, ὅταν οἱ ποιητικοὶ τοῦ προτελέσματος ἀστέρες ἀνατολὰς ἢ δύσεις ἢ στηριγμοὺς ἢ ἀκρονύκτους φάσεις ποιῶνται, συσχηματιζόμενοι τοῖς τὴν αἰτίαν ἔχουσι δωδεκατημορίοις, ἐπειδήπερ ἀνατέλλοντες μὲν ἢ στηρίζοντες ἐπιτάσεις ποιοῦνται τῶν συμπτωμάτων, δύνοντες δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς ὄντες ἢ ἀκρονύκτους ποιούμενοι προηγήσεις ἄνεσιν τῶν ἀποτελουμένων ποιοῦσιν.
7. Of the Time of the Predicted Events
The second and chronological heading, whereby we should learn the times of the events signified and the length of their duration, we shall consider as follows.
lnasmuch as the eclipses which take place at the same time are not completed in the same number of ordinary hours 53 in every locality, and since the same solar eclipses do not everywhere have the same degree of obscuration or the same time of duration, we shall first set down for the hour of the eclipse, in each of the related localities, and for the altitude of the pole 54, centres, as in a nativity; secondly, how many equinoctial hours 55 the obscuration of the eclipse lasts in each.
For when these data are examined, if it is a solar eclipse, we shall understand that the predicted event lasts as many years 56 as the equinoctial hours which we discover, and if a lunar eclipse, as many months. The nature of the beginnings 57 and of the more important intensifications 58 of the events, however, are deduced from the position of the place of the eclipse relative to the centres. For if the place of the eclipse falls on the eastern horizon, this signifies that the beginning of the predicted event is in the first period of four months from the time of the eclipse and that its important intensifications lie in the first third of the entire period of its duration; if on the mid-heaven, in the second four months and the middle third; if upon the western horizon, in the third four months and the final third. The beginnings of the particular abatements and intensifications of the event we deduce from the conjunctions which take place in the meantime 59, if they occur in the significant regions or the regions in same aspect to them, and also from the other movements of the planets, if those that effect the predicted event are either rising or setting or stationary or at evening rising, and are at the same time in same aspect to the zodiacal signs that hold the cause; for planets when they are rising or stationary produce intensifications in the events, but when setting, and under the rays of the sun 60, or advancing at evening, they bring about an abatement.
8. Περὶ τοῦ γένους τῶν διατιθεμένων
Τρίτου δὲ ὄντος κεφαλαίου τοῦ γενικοῦ, καθ’ ὃ δεῖ διαλαμβάνειν περὶ ποῖα τῶν γενῶν ἀποβήσεται τὸ σύμπτωμα, λαμβάνεται καὶ τοῦτο διὰ τῆς τῶν ζῳδίων ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ μορφώσεως, καθ’ ὧν ἂν τύχωσιν ὄντες οἵ τε τῶν ἐκλείψεων τόποι καὶ οἱ τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λαβόντες τῶν ἀστέρων τῶν τε πλανωμένων καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν τοῦ τε τῆς ἐκλείψεως δωδεκατημορίου καὶ τοῦ κατὰ τὸ κέντρον τὸ πρὸ τῆς ἐκλείψεως. Λαμβάνεται δὲ ἡ τούτων οἰκοδεσποτεία ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων οὕτως.
Ὁ γὰρ τοὺς πλείστους λόγους ἔχων πρὸς ἀμφοτέρους τοὺς ἐκκειμένους τόπους, τόν τε τῆς ἐκλείψεως καὶ τὸν τοῦ ἑπομένου αὐτῷ κέντρου κατά τε τὰς ἔγγιστα φαινομένας συναφὰς ἢ ἀπορροίας καὶ τοὺς λόγον ἔχοντας τῶν συσχηματισμῶν καὶ ἔτι κατὰ τὴν κυρείαν τῶν τε οἴκων καὶ τριγώνων καὶ ὑψωμάτων ἢ καὶ ὁρίων, ἐκεῖνος λήψεται μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν. Εἰ δὲ μὴ ὁ αὐτὸς εὑρίσκοιτο τῆς τε ἐκλείψεως καὶ τοῦ κέντρου κύριος, ἀλλὰ δύο, τοὺς πρὸς ἑκάτερον τῶν τόπων τὰς πλείους ἔχοντας ὡς πρόκειται συνοικειώσεις συμπαραληπτέον, προκρινομένου τοῦ τῆς ἐκλείψεως κυρίου. Εἰ δὲ πλείους εὑρίσκοιντο καθ’ ἑκάτερον ἐφαμίλλοι, τὸν ἐπικεντρότερον ἢ χρηματιστικώτερον ἢ τῆς αἱρέσεως μᾶλλον ὄντα προκρινοῦμεν εἰς τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἀπλανῶν συμπαραληψόμεθα τόν τε αὐτῷ τῷ ἐκλειπτικῷ τόπῳ συγκεχρηματικότα πρῶτον τῶν λαμπρῶν ἐπὶ τῆς παρῳχημένης κεντρώσεως, κατὰ τοὺς διωρισμένους ἡμῖν ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ συντάξει τῶν ἐννέα τρόπων φαινομένους σχηματισμοὺς καὶ τὸν ἐν τῇ φαινομένῃ κατὰ τὴν ἐκλειπτικὴν ὥραν διαθέσει ἤτοι συνανατείλαντα ἢ συμμεσουρανήσαντα τῷ κατὰ τὰ ἑπόμενα κέντρῳ τοῦ τόπου τῆς ἐκλείψεως.
Θεωρηθέντων δὲ οὕτως τῶν εἰς τὴν αἰτίαν τοῦ συμπτώματος παραλαμβανομένων ἀστέρων συνεπισκεψόμεθα καὶ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων μορφώσεις, ἐν οἷς ἥ τε ἔκλειψις καὶ οἱ τὴν κυρείαν λαμβάνοντες τῶν ἀστέρων ἔτυχον ὄντες, ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς τούτων ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ τοῦ ποιοῦ τῶν διατιθεμένων γενῶν ὡς ἐπίπαν λαμβανομένου. Τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀνθρωπόμορφα τῶν ζῳδίων τῶν τε περὶ τὸν διὰ μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων κύκλον καὶ τῶν κατὰ τοὺς ἀπλανεῖς ἀστέρας περὶ τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένος ποιεῖ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον, τῶν δὲ ἄλλων χερσαίων τὰ μὲν τετράποδα περὶ τὰ ὅμοια τῶν ἀλόγων ζῴων, τὰ δὲ ἑρπυστικὰ περὶ τοὺς ὄφεις καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα, καὶ πάλιν τὰ μὲν θηριώδη περὶ τὰ ἀνήμερα τῶν ζῴων καὶ βλαπτικὰ τοῦ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένους, τὰ δὲ ἥμερα περὶ τὰ χρηστικὰ καὶ χειροήθη καὶ συνεργητικὰ πρὸς τὰς εὐετηρίας ἀναλόγως τοῖς καθ’ ἕκαστα μορφώμασιν, οἷον ἵππων ἢ βοῶν ἢ προβάτων καὶ τῶν τοιούτων· ἔτι δὲ τῶν μὲν χερσαίων τὰ μὲν πρὸς ταῖς ἄρκτοις μᾶλλον περὶ τὰς τῆς γῆς αἰφνιδίους κινήσεις, τὰ δὲ πρὸς μεσημβρίαν περὶ τὰς ἀπροσδοκήτους ἐκ τοῦ ἀέρος ῥύσεις.
Πάλιν δὲ ἐν μὲν τοῖς τῶν πτερωτῶν μορφώμασιν ὄντες οἱ κύριοι τόποι, οἷον Παρθένῳ Τοξότῃ Ὄρνιθι Ἀετῷ καὶ τοῖς τοιούτοις περὶ τὰ πτηνὰ καὶ μάλιστα τὰ εἰς τροφὴν ἀνθρώπων τὸ σύμπτωμα ποιοῦσιν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς νηκτοῖς περὶ τὰ ἔνυδρα καὶ τοὺς ἰχθύας· καὶ τούτων ἐν μὲν τοῖς θαλασσίοις οἷον Καρκίνῳ Αἰγοκέρωτι Δελφῖνι περὶ τὰ θαλάσσια καὶ ἔτι τὰς τῶν στόλων ἀναγωγάς, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ποταμίοις οἷον Ὑδροχόῳ καὶ Ἰχθύσι περὶ τὰ ποτάμια καὶ τὰ πηγαῖα, κατὰ δὲ τὴν Ἀργὼ περὶ ἀμφότερα τὰ γένη.
Ὡσαύτως δὲ ἐν τοῖς τροπικοῖς ἢ ἰσημερινοῖς ὄντες κοινῶς μὲν περὶ τὰ τοῦ ἀέρος καταστήματα καὶ τὰς οἰκείας ἑκάστοις αὐτῶν ὥρας ἀποτελοῦσι τὰς ἐπισημασίας, ἰδίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τὰ ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυόμενα· κατὰ μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἐαρινὴν ἰσημερίαν ὄντες περὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς τῶν δενδρικῶν καρπῶν οἷον ἀμπέλου, συκῆς καὶ τῶν συνακμαζόντων, κατὰ δὲ τὴν θερινὴν τροπὴν περὶ τὰς τῶν καρποφορηθέντων συγκομιδὰς καὶ ἀποθέσεις, ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ δὲ ἰδικῶς καὶ περὶ τὴν τοῦ Νείλου ἀνάβασιν· κατὰ δὲ τὴν μετοπωρινὴν ἰσημερίαν περὶ τὸν σπόρον καὶ τὰ χορτικὰ καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα· κατὰ δὲ τὴν χειμερινὴν τροπὴν περὶ τὰς λαχανείας καὶ τὰ κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν καιρὸν ἐπιπολάζοντα ὀρνέων ἢ ἰχθύων γένη.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὰ μὲν ἰσημερινὰ τοῖς ἱεροῖς καὶ ταῖς περὶ τοὺς θεοὺς θρησκείαις ἐπισημαίνει, τὰ δὲ τροπικὰ ταῖς τῶν ἀέρων καὶ ταῖς τῶν πολιτικῶν ἐθισμῶν μεταβολαῖς, τὰ δὲ στερεὰ τοῖς θεμελίοις καὶ τοῖς οἰκοδομήμασι, τὰ δὲ δίσωμα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις καὶ τοῖς βασιλεῦσιν. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὰ μὲν πρὸς ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς μᾶλλον ἔχοντα τὴν θέσιν ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τῆς ἐκλείψεως περὶ τοὺς καρποὺς καὶ τὴν νέαν ἡλικίαν καὶ τοὺς θεμελίους τὸ ἐσόμενον σημαίνει, τὰ δὲ πρὸς τῷ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματι περὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καὶ τοὺς βασιλεῖς καὶ τὴν μέσην ἡλικίαν, τὰ δὲ πρὸς ταῖς δυσμαῖς περὶ τὰς τῶν νομίμων μετατροπὰς καὶ τὴν παλαιὰν ἡλικίαν καὶ τοὺς κατοιχομένους.
Περὶ πόστον δὲ μέρος τοῦ ὑποκειμένου γένους ἡ διάθεσις ἐπελεύσεται, τό τε τῆς ἐπισκοτήσεως τῶν ἐκλείψεων μέγεθος ὑποβάλλει καὶ αἱ τῶν τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιούντων ἀστέρων πρὸς τὸν ἐκλειπτικὸν τόπον σχέσεις· ἑσπέριοι μὲν γὰρ σχηματιζόμενοι πρὸς τὰς ἡλιακὰς ἐκλείψεις, ἑῷοι δὲ πρὸς τὰς σεληνιακὰς ἐπὶ τὸ ἔλαττον ὡς ἐπίπαν διατιθέασι, διαμετροῦντες δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ ἥμισυ, ἑῷοι δὲ συσχηματιζόμενοι πρὸς τὰς ἡλιακὰς ἢ ἑσπέριοι πρὸς τὰς σεληνιακὰς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον.
8. Of the Class of those Affected
The third heading is that of generic classification, whereby one must determine what classes the event will affect. This is ascertained from the special nature and form of the zodiacal signs in which happen to be the places of the eclipses and in which are the heavenly bodies, planets and fixed stars alike, that govern both the sign of the eclipse and that of the angle preceding the eclipse. In the case of the planets we discover the rulership of these regions thus:
The one which has the greatest number of relationships to both the regions aforesaid, that of the eclipse and that of the angle which follows it, both by virtue of the nearest visible applications or recessions, and by those of the aspects which bear a relation, and furthermore by rulership of the houses, triangles, exaltations, and terms, that planet alone will hold the dominance. However, if the same planet is not found to be both lord of the eclipse and of the angle, we must take together the two which have the greatest number of familiarities, as aforesaid, to either one of the regions, giving preference to the lord of the eclipse. And if several rivals be found on either count, we shall prefer for the domination the one which is closest to an angle, or is more significant, or is more closely allied by sect 61.
In the case of the fixed stars, we shall take the first one of the brilliant stars which signifies upon the preceding angle at the actual time of the eclipse, according to the nine kinds of visible aspects defined in our first compilation 62, and the star which of the group visible at the time of the eclipse has either risen or reached meridian with the angle following the place of the eclipse.
When we have thus reckoned the stars that share in causing the event, let us also consider the farms of the signs of the zodiac in which the eclipse and the dominating stars as well happened to be, since from their character the quality of the classes affected is generally discerned. Constellations of human form, both in the zodiac and among the fixed stars, cause the event to concern the human race 63. Of the other terrestrial signs 64, the four-footed 65 are concerned with the four-footed dumb animals, and the signs formed like creeping things 66 with serpents and the like. Again, the animal signs 67 have significance for the wild animals and those which injure the human race; the tame signs concern the useful and domesticated animals, and those which help to gain prosperity, in consistency with their several forms; for example, horses, oxen, sheep, and the like. Again, of the terrestrial signs, the northern tend to signify sudden earthquakes and the southern unexpected rains from the sky.
Yet again, those dominant regions that are in the form of winged creatures 68, such as Virgo, Sagittarius, Cygnus, Aquila, and the like, exercise an effect upon winged creatures, particularly those which are used for human food, and if they are in the form of swimming things, upon water animals and fish. And of these, in the constellations pertaining to the sea 69, such as Cancer, Capricorn, and the Dolphin, they influence the creatures of the sea and the sailing of fleets. In the constellations pertaining to rivers, such as Aquarius and Pisces, they concern the creatures of rivers and springs, and in Argo they affect both classes alike.
Likewise stars in the solstitial 70 or equinoctial signs have significance in general for the conditions of the air and the seasons related to each of these signs, and in particular they concern the spring and things which grow from the earth. For when they are at the spring equinox they affect the new shoots of the arboreal crops, such as grapes and figs, and whatever matures with them; at the summer solstice, the gathering and storing of the crops, and in Egypt, peculiarly, the rising of the Nile; at the autumn solstice they concern the sowing, the hay crops, and such; and at the winter equinox the vegetables and the kinds of birds and fish most common at this season.
Further, the equinoctial signs have significance for sacred rites and the worship of the gods; the solstitial signs, for changes in the air and in political customs; the solid 71 signs, for foundations and the construction of houses; the bicorporeal, for men and kings. Similarly, those which are closer to the orient at the time of the eclipse signify what is to be concerning the crops, youth, and foundations ; those near the mid-heaven above the earth, concerning sacred rites, kings, and middle age; and those near the occident, concerning change of customs, old age, and those who have passed away.
To the question, how large a portion of the class involved will the event affect, the answer is supplied by the extent of the obscuration of the eclipses, and by the positions relative to the place of the eclipse held by the stars which furnish the cause. For when they are occidental to solar eclipses 72, or oriental to lunar, they usually affect a minority; in opposition, a half; and the majority, if they are oriental to solar eclipses or occidental to lunar.
9. Περὶ τῆς αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ποιότητος
Τέταρτον δέ ἐστι κεφάλαιον τὸ περὶ αὐτῆς τῆς τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ποιότητος, τουτέστι πότερον ἀγαθῶν ἢ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐστὶ ποιητικὸν καὶ ποταπὸν ἐφ’ ἑκατέρου κατὰ τὸ τοῦ εἴδους ἰδιότροπον. Τοῦτο δὲ ἀπό τε τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων τοὺς κυρίους τόπους ποιητικῆς φύσεως καταλαμβάνεται καὶ τῆς συγκράσεως τῆς τε πρὸς ἀλλήλους καὶ τοὺς τόπους, καθ’ ὧν ἂν ὦσι τετυχηκότες. Ὁ μὲν γὰρ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη διατάκται καὶ ὥσπερ ἡγεμόνες εἰσὶ τῶν ἄλλων, αὐτοὶ αἴτιοι γινόμενοι τοῦ τε κατὰ τὴν ἐνέργειαν ὅλου καὶ τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων οἰκοδεσποτείας καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἰσχύος ἢ ἀδρανίας. Ἡ δὲ τῶν τὴν κυρείαν λαβόντων συγκρατικὴ θεωρία τὴν τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων δείκνυσι ποιότητα.
Ἀρξόμεθα δὲ τῆς καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν πλανωμένων ποιητικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας, ἐκεῖνο κοινῶς προεκθέμενοι, ὅτι τῆς κεφαλαιώδους ὑπομνήσεως ἕνεκεν, ὅταν καθόλου τινὰ λέγωμεν τῶν πέντε ἀστέρων, τὴν κρᾶσιν καὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς ὁμοίας φύσεως ὑποληπτέον, ἐάν τε αὐτὸς ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ᾖ καταστάσει ἐάν τε καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν τις ἢ τῶν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ τόπων κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν αὐτοῦ κρᾶσιν θεωρῆται, καθάπερ ἂν εἰ τῶν φύσεων καὶ τῶν ποιοτήτων αὐτῶν καὶ μὴ τῶν ἀστέρων ἐτύγχανον αἱ προσηγορίαι, καὶ ὅτι ἐν ταῖς συγκράσεσι πάλιν οὐ μόνον τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους τῶν πλανωμένων μίξιν δεῖ σκοπεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν πρὸς τοὺς τῆς αὐτῆς φύσεως κεκοινωνηκότας ἤτοι ἀπλανεῖς ἀστέρας ἢ τόπους τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ κατὰ τὰς ἀποδεδειγμένας αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς πλανήτας συνοικειώσεις.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λαβὼν καθόλου μὲν φθορᾶς τῆς κατὰ ψῦξίν ἐστιν αἴτιος, ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους γινομένου τοῦ συμπτώματος νόσους μακρὰς καὶ φθίσεις καὶ συντήξεις καὶ ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις καὶ ῥευματισμοὺς καὶ τεταρταϊκὰς ἐπισημασίας φυγαδείας τε καὶ ἀπορίας καὶ συνοχὰς καὶ πένθη καὶ φόβους καὶ θανάτους μάλιστα τῶν τῇ ἡλικίᾳ προβεβηκότων ἐμποιεῖ· τῶν δὲ ἀλόγων ζῴων περὶ τὰ εὔχρηστα ὡς ἐπίπαν σπάνιν τε καὶ τῶν ὄντων φθορὰς σωματικὰς καὶ νοσοποιούς, ἀφ’ ὧν καὶ οἱ χρησάμενοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων συνδιατιθέμενοι διαφθείρονται. Περὶ δὲ τὴν τοῦ ἀέρος κατάστασιν ψύχη φοβερὰ παγώδη καὶ ὁμιχλώδη καὶ λοιμικὰ δυσαερίας τε καὶ συννεφείας καὶ ζόφους, ἔτι δὲ νιφετῶν πλῆθος οὐκ ἀγαθῶν ἀλλὰ φθοροποιῶν, ἀφ’ ὧν καὶ τὰ κακοῦντα τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην φύσιν τῶν ἑρπετῶν συγκρίνεται· περὶ δὲ ποταμοὺς ἢ καὶ θαλάσσας κοινῶς μὲν χειμῶνας καὶ στόλων ναυάγια καὶ δυσπλοίας καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων ἔνδειαν καὶ φθοράν, ἰδίως δὲ ἐν μὲν θαλάσσαις ἀμπώτεις καὶ παλιρροίας, ἐπὶ δὲ ποταμῶν ὑπερμετρίαν καὶ κάκωσιν τῶν ποταμίων ὑδάτων· πρὸς δὲ τοὺς τῆς γῆς καρποὺς ἔνδειαν καὶ σπάνιν καὶ ἀπώλειαν μάλιστα τῶν εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας γινομένων ἤτοι ὑπὸ κάμπης ἢ ἀκρίδος ἢ κατακλυσμῶν ἢ ὑδάτων ὀμβρίων ἐπιφορᾶς ἢ χαλάζης ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, ὡς καὶ μέχρι λιμοῦ φθάνειν καὶ τῆς τοιαύτης ἀνθρώπων ἀπωλείας.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς μόνος τὴν κυρείαν λαβὼν καθόλου μὲν αὐξήσεώς ἐστι ποιητικός, ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους γινομένου τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος δόξας ἀποτελεῖ καὶ εὐετηρίας καὶ εὐθηνίας καὶ καταστάσεις εἰρηνικὰς καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων αὐξήσεις εὐεξίας τε σωματικὰς καὶ ψυχικάς, ἔτι δὲ εὐεργεσίας καὶ δωρεὰς ἀπὸ τῶν βασιλευόντων αὐτῶν τε ἐκείνων αὐξήσεις καὶ μεγαλειότητας καὶ μεγαλοψυχίας καθόλου τε εὐδαιμονίας ἐστὶν αἴτιος. Περὶ δὲ τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα τῶν μὲν εἰς χρῆσιν ἀνθρωπίνην δαψίλειαν καὶ πολυπλήθειαν ἐμποιεῖ, τῶν δὲ εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον φθοράν τε καὶ ἀπώλειαν, εὔκρατον δὲ τὴν τῶν ἀέρων κατάστασιν καὶ ὑγιεινὴν καὶ πνευματώδη καὶ ὑγρὰν καὶ θρεπτικὴν τῶν ἐπιγείων ἀπεργάζεται στόλων τε εὐπλοίας καὶ ποταμῶν συμμέτρους ἀναβάσεις καὶ τῶν καρπῶν δαψίλειαν καὶ ὅσα τούτοις παραπλήσια.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λαβὼν καθόλου μὲν τῆς κατὰ ξηρασίαν φθορᾶς ἐστιν αἴτιος, ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους γινομένου τοῦ συμπτώματος πολέμους ἐμποιεῖ καὶ στάσεις ἐμφυλίους καὶ αἰχμαλωσίας καὶ ἀνδραποδισμοὺς καὶ ὄχλων ἐπαναστάσεις καὶ χόλους ἡγεμόνων, τοὺς δὲ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων θανάτους αἰφνιδίους, ἔτι δὲ νόσους πυρεκτικὰς καὶ τριταϊκὰς ἐπισημασίας καὶ αἱμάτων ἀναγωγὰς καὶ ὀξείας βιαιοθανασίας μάλιστα τῶν ἀκμαίων, ὁμοίως δὲ βίας τε καὶ ὕβρεις καὶ παρανομίας ἐμπρήσεις τε καὶ ἀνδροφονίας καὶ ἁρπαγὰς καὶ λῃστείας. Περί τε τὴν τοῦ ἀέρος κατάστασιν καύσωνας καὶ πνεύματα θερμὰ λοιμικὰ καὶ συντηκτικὰ κεραυνῶν τε ἀφέσεις καὶ πρηστήρων καὶ ἀνομβρίας· περὶ δὲ θάλασσαν στόλων αἰφνίδια ναυάγια διὰ πνευμάτων ἀτάκτων ἢ κεραυνῶν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, ποταμῶν δὲ λειψυδρίας καὶ ἀναξηράνσεις πηγῶν καὶ φθορὰν τῶν ποτίμων ὑδάτων· περὶ δὲ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πρὸς χρῆσιν ἀνθρωπίνην τῶν τε ἀλόγων ζῴων καὶ τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυομένων σπάνιν καὶ φθορὰν καρπῶν τὴν γινομένην ἤτοι ἐκ τῆς τοῦ καύματος καταφλέξεως ἢ βρούχου ἢ τῆς τῶν πνευμάτων ἐκτινάξεως ἢ ἐκ τῆς ἐν ταῖς ἀποθέσεσι συγκαύσεως.
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μόνος κύριος γενόμενος τοῦ συμβαίνοντος, καθόλου μὲν τὰ παραπλήσια τῷ τοῦ Διὸς μετά τινος ἐπαφροδισίας ἀποτελεῖ· ἰδίως δὲ περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους δόξας καὶ τιμὰς καὶ εὐφροσύνας καὶ εὐετηρίας εὐγαμίας τε καὶ πολυτεκνίας καὶ εὐαρεστήσεις πρὸς πᾶσαν συναρμογὴν καὶ τῶν κτήσεων συναυξήσεις καὶ διαίτας καθαρίους καὶ εὐαγώγους καὶ πρὸς τὰ σεβάσμια τιμητικάς, ἔτι δὲ σωματικὰς εὐεξίας καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἡγεμονεύοντας συνοικειώσεις καὶ τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπαφροδισίας· περὶ δὲ τὰ τοῦ ἀέρος πνεύματα εὐκρασίας καὶ διύγρων καὶ θρεπτικωτάτων καταστάσεις εὐαερίας τε καὶ αἰθρίας καὶ ὑδάτων γονίμων δαψιλεῖς ἐπομβρίας στόλων τε εὐπλοίας καὶ ἐπιτυχίας καὶ ἐπικερδείας καὶ ποταμῶν πλήρεις ἀναβάσεις, ἔτι δὲ τῶν εὐχρήστων ζῴων καὶ τῶν τῆς γῆς καρπῶν μάλιστα δαψίλειαν καὶ εὐφορίαν καὶ ὄνησιν ἐμποιεῖ.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λαβὼν καθόλου μὲν ὡς ἂν ᾖ συγκιρνάμενος ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἄλλων, συνοικειοῦται ταῖς ἐκείνων φύσεσιν. Ἰδίως δέ ἐστι πάντων μᾶλλον συγκινητικὸς καὶ ἐν μὲν ἀνθρωπίνοις ἀποτελέσμασιν ὀξὺς καὶ πρακτικώτατος καὶ πρὸς τὸ ὑποκείμενον εὐμήχανος λῃστηρίων τε καὶ κλοπῶν καὶ πειρατικῶν ἐφόδων καὶ ἐπιθέσεων, ἔτι δὲ δυσπλοίας ποιητικὸς ἐν τοῖς πρὸς τοὺς κακοποιοὺς συσχηματισμοῖς νόσων τε αἴτιος ξηρῶν καὶ ἀμφημερινῶν ἐπισημασιῶν καὶ βηχικῶν καὶ ἀναφορικῶν καὶ φθίσεων, ἀποτελεστικὸς δὲ καὶ τῶν περὶ τὸν ἱερατικὸν λόγον καὶ τὰς τῶν θεῶν θρησκείας καὶ τὰς βασιλικὰς προσόδους ἐπισυμβαινόντων καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐθίμων ἢ νομίμων κατὰ καιροὺς ἐναλλοιώσεως, οἰκείως τῇ πρὸς τοὺς ἑκάστοτε τῶν ἀστέρων συγκράσει. Πρὸς δὲ τὸ περιέχον μᾶλλον ξηρὸς ὢν καὶ εὐκίνητος διὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐγγύτητα καὶ τὸ τάχος τῆς ἀνακυκλήσεως πνευμάτων ἀτάκτων καὶ ὀξέων καὶ εὐμεταβόλων μάλιστα κινητικὸς ὑπάρχει, βροντῶν δὲ εἰκότως καὶ πρηστήρων καὶ χασμάτων καὶ σεισμῶν καὶ ἀστραπῶν ἀποτελεστικὸς τῆς τε διὰ τούτων ἐνίοτε περὶ τὰ τῶν ζῴων καὶ τῶν φυτῶν εὔχρηστα φθορᾶς ποιητικὸς ὑδάτων τε καὶ ποταμῶν ἐν μὲν ταῖς δύσεσι στερητικός, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς πληρωτικός.
Ἰδίως μὲν οὖν τῆς οἰκείας φύσεως ἐπιτυχὼν ἕκαστος τὰ τοιαῦτα ἀποτελεῖ, συγκιρνάμενος δὲ ἄλλος ἄλλῳ κατά τε τοὺς συσχηματισμοὺς καὶ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων ἐναλλοιώσεις καὶ τὰς πρὸς ἥλιον φάσεις ἀναλόγως τε καὶ τὴν ἐν τοῖς ἐνεργήμασι σύγκρασιν λαμβάνων μεμιγμένην ἐκ τῶν κεκοινωνηκυιῶν φύσεων τὴν περὶ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον ἰδιοτροπίαν ποικίλην οὖσαν ἀπεργάζεται. Ἀπείρου δὲ ὄντος καὶ ἀδυνάτου καθ’ ἑκάστην σύγκρασιν τὸ ἴδιον ὑπομνηματίζειν ἀποτέλεσμα καὶ πάντας ἁπλῶς τοὺς καθ’ ὁποιονδήποτε τρόπον σχηματισμοὺς διεξελθεῖν οὕτως γε πολυμερῶς νοουμένους, εἰκότως ἂν καταλειφθείη τὸ τοιοῦτον εἶδος τῇ τοῦ μαθηματικοῦ πρὸς τὰς κατὰ μέρος διακρίσεις ἐπιβολῇ καὶ ἐπινοίᾳ.
Παρατηρεῖν δὲ δεῖ καὶ πῶς ἔχουσι συνοικειώσεως οἱ τοῦ προτελέσματος τὴν κυρείαν λαβόντες ἀστέρες πρὸς αὐτὰς τὰς χώρας ἢ τὰς πόλεις αἷς τὸ σύμπτωμα διασημαίνεται. Ἀγαθοποιοὶ μὲν γὰρ ὄντες ἀστέρες καὶ συνοικειούμενοι τοῖς διατιθεμένοις καὶ μὴ καθυπερτερούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως ἔτι μᾶλλον ἀπεργάζονται τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν φύσιν ὠφέλιμον, ὥσπερ μὴ συνοικειούμενοι ἢ καθυπερτερούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀντικειμένων ἧττον ὠφελοῦσι. Τῆς δὲ βλαπτικῆς κράσεως ὄντες καὶ τὴν κυρείαν λαβόντες τοῦ προτελέσματος, ἐὰν μὲν συνοικειούμενοι τοῖς διατιθεμένοις τύχωσιν ἢ καθυπερτερηθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως, ἧττον βλάπτουσιν. Ἐὰν δὲ μήτε τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν ἔχωσι τῶν χωρῶν μήτε καθυπερτερῶνται ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκείως πρὸς αὐτὰς ἐχόντων, σφοδρότερον τὸ ἐκ τῆς κράσεως φθοροποιὸν ἐπισκήπτουσιν.
Ὡς ἐπίπαν μέντοι συνεμπίπτουσι τοῖς καθολικοῖς πάθεσιν ἐκεῖνοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὅσοι ποτ’ ἂν κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας γενέσεις τοὺς ἀναγκαιοτάτους τόπους, λέγω δὴ τοὺς φωσφοροῦντας ἢ τοὺς τῶν κέντρων, τοὺς αὐτοὺς τύχωσιν ἔχοντες τοῖς τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιήσασι τῶν καθολικῶν συμπτωμάτων, τουτέστι τοῖς ἐκλειπτικοῖς ἢ καὶ τοῖς τούτων διαμέτροις. Τούτων δὲ ἐπισφαλέσταται μάλιστα καὶ δυσφύλακτοι τυγχάνουσιν αἱ μοιρικαὶ θίξεις ἢ διαμετρήσεις τῶν ἐκλειπτικῶν τόπων πρὸς ὁπότερον τῶν φώτων.
9. Of the Quality of the Predicted Event
The fourth heading concerns the quality of the predicted event, that is, whether it is productive of good or the opposite 73, and of what sort is its effect in either direction, in accordance with the peculiar character of the species. This is apprehended from the nature of the activity of the planets which rule the dominant places and from their combination both with one another and with the places in which they happen to be. For the sun and the moon are the marshals and, as it were, leaders of the others; for they are themselves responsible for the entirety of the power, and are the causes of the rulership of the planets, and, moreover, the causes of the strength or weakness of the ruling planets 74. The comprehensive observation of the ruling stars shows the quality of the predicted events.
We shall begin with the characteristic active powers of the planets, one by one, first, however, making this general observation, as a summary reminder, that in general whenever we speak of any temperament of the five planets one must understand that whatever produces the like nature is also meant 75, whether it be the planet itself in its own proper condition, or one of the fixed stars, or one of the signs of the zodiac, considered with reference to the temperament proper to it, just as though the characterizations were applied to the natures or the qualities themselves and not to the planets; and let us remember that in the combinations, again, we must consider not only the mixture of the planets one with another, but also their combination with the others that share in the same nature; whether they be fixed stars or signs of the zodiac, by virtue of their affinities with the planets, already set forth 76.
Saturn 77, when he gains sole dominance, is in general the cause of destruction by cold, and in particular, when the event concerns men, causes long illnesses, consumptions, withering, disturbances caused by fluids, rheumatisms, and quartan fevers, exile, poverty, imprisonment, mourning, fears, and deaths, especially among those advanced in age 78. He is usually significant with regard to those dumb animals that are of use to man, and brings about scarcity of them, and the bodily destruction by disease of such as exist, so that the men who use them are similarly affected and perish. With regard to weather, he causes fearful cold, freezing, misty, and pestilential; corruption of the air, clouds, and gloom; furthermore, multitudes of snowstorms, not beneficial but destructive, from which are produced the reptiles 79 harmful to man. As for the rivers and seas, in general he causes storms, the wreck of fleets, disastrous voyages, and the scarcity and death of fish, and in particular the high and ebb tides of the seas and in rivers excessive floods and pollution of their waters. As for the crops of the earth, he brings about want, scarcity, and loss, especially of those grown for necessary uses, either through worms or locusts or floods or cloud-burst or hail or the like, so that famine and the destruction of men thereby result.
When Jupiter 80 rules alone he produces increase in general, and, in particular, when the prediction is concerned with men, he makes fame and prosperity, abundance, peaceful existence, the increase of the necessities of life, bodily and spiritual health, and, furthermore, benefits and gifts from rulers, and the increase, greatness, and magnanimity of these latter; and in general he is the cause of happiness. With reference to dumb animals he causes a multitude and abundance of those that are useful to men and the diminution and destruction of the opposite kind. He makes the condition of the air temperate and healthful, windy, moist, and favourable to the growth of what the earth bears; he brings about the fortunate sailing of fleets, the moderate rise of rivers, abundance of crops, and everything similar.
Mars, when he assumes the rulership alone, is in general the cause of destruction through dryness and in particular, when the event concerns men, brings about wars, civil faction, capture, enslavement, uprisings, the wrath of leaders, and sudden deaths arising from such causes; moreover, revers, tertian agues, raising of blood, swift and violent deaths, especially in the prime of life; similarly, violence, assaults, lawlessness, arson and murder, robbery and piracy. With regard to the condition of the air he causes hot weather, warm, pestilential, and withering winds, the loosing of lightning and hurricanes, and drought. Again, at sea he causes sudden shipwreck of fleets through changeable winds or lightning or the like; the failure of the water of rivers, the drying up of springs, and the tainting of potable waters. With reference to the necessities produced upon the earth for human use, he causes a scarcity and loss of dumb animals and of things which grow from the earth, and the loss of crops by drying as the result of hot weather, or by locusts, or by the beating of the winds, or by burning in places of storage.
Venus, when she becomes sole ruler of the event, in general brings about results similar to those of Jupiter, but with the addition of a certain agreeable quality; in particular, where men are concerned, she causes fame, honour, happiness, abundance, happy marriage, many children, satisfaction in every mutual relationship, the increase of property, a neat and well conducted manner of life, paying honour to those things which are to be revered; further, she is the cause of bodily health, alliances with the leaders, and elegance of rulers; as to the winds of the air, of temperateness and settled conditions of moist and very nourishing winds, of good air, clear weather, and generous showers of fertilizing waters; she brings about the fortunate sailing of fleets, successes, profits, and the full rising of rivers; of useful animals and the fruits of the earth she is the preeminent cause of abundance, good yields, and profit.
Mercury, if he gains the rulership, is, generally speaking, in nature like whatever of the other planets may be associated with him. In particular, he is above all stimulating, and in predictions concerning men is keen and very practical, ingenious in any situation; but he causes robbery, theft, piracy, and assault, and furthermore, brings about unsuccessful voyaging when he is in aspect with the maleficent planets, and occasions diseases of dryness, quotidian agues, coughs, raising, and consumption. he is the cause of events taking place which concern the priestly code, the worship of the gods, the royal revenues, and of change in customs and laws, from time to time, in consistency with his association with the other planets on each occasion. With reference to the air, since he is very dry and swift on account of his nearness to the sun, and the speed of his revolution, he is particularly apt to arouse irregular, fierce, and changeable winds, and, as might be expected, thunder, hurricanes, chasms in the earth, earthquakes, and lightning; sometimes by these means he causes the destruction of useful animals and plants. At setting he diminishes waters and rivers, at rising fills them.
Such are the effects produced by the several planets, each by itself and in command of its own nature. Associated, however, now with one and now with another, in the different aspects, by the exchange of signs 81, and by their phases with reference to the sun 82, and experiencing a corresponding tempering of their powers, each produces a character, in its effect, which is the result of the mixture of the natures that have participated, and is complicated. It is of course a hopeless and impossible task to mention the proper outcome of every combination and to enumerate absolutely all the aspects of whatever kind, since we can conceive of such a variety of them. Consequently questions of this kind would reasonably be left to the enterprise and ingenuity of the mathematician 83, in order to make the particular distinctions.
It is needful to observe what affinity exists between the planets which govern the prediction and the countries or the cities for which the event is signified. For if the ruling planets are beneficent, and have familiarity with the subjects affected, and are not overcome 84 by planets of the opposite sect, they more powerfully produce the benefits natural to them; even as, when they bear no familiarity, or are overcome by their opposites, they are less helpful. But when they are of the injurious temperament and govern the prediction, if they have familiarity with the subjects affected or are overcome by the opposite sect, they do less harm; but if they are neither lords of the countries nor are overcome by the planets that have familiarity with those countries, they exert all the more intensely the destructiveness of their temperament.
Usually, however, those men are affected by the more universal ills who in their own genitures happen to have the most essential places 85, by which I mean those of the luminaries or of the angles 86, the same as those that furnish the cause of the general misfortunes, that is, the places of the eclipses or the places directly opposite. Of these the positions most dangerous and hardest to avoid are those in which either of their luminaries is in possession of the very degree of the place of the eclipse, or the degree opposite.
10. Περὶ χρωμάτων ἐκλείψεων καὶ κομητῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων
Τηρητέον δὲ πρὸς τὰς καθόλου περιστάσεις καὶ τὰ κατὰ τὰς ἐκλείψεις χρώματα ἤτοι τῶν φώτων αὐτῶν ἢ τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ γινομένων συστημάτων, οἷον ῥάβδων ἢ ἅλων ἢ τῶν τοιούτων. Μέλανα μὲν γὰρ ἢ ὑπόχλωρα φανέντα σημαντικὰ γίνεται τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Κρόνου φύσεως εἰρημένων, λευκὰ δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Διός, ὑπόκιρρα δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Ἄρεως, ξανθὰ δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ποικίλα δὲ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ. Κἂν μὲν ἐν ὅλοις τοῖς σώμασι τῶν φώτων ἢ ἐν ὅλοις τοῖς περὶ αὐτὰ τόποις τὸ γινόμενον ἰδίωμα τῆς χροιᾶς φαίνηται, περὶ τὰ πλεῖστα μέρη τῶν χωρῶν ἔσται τὸ ἀποτελεσθησόμενον· ἐὰν δὲ ἀπὸ μέρους οἱουδήποτε, περὶ ἐκεῖνο μόνον τὸ μέρος καθ’ οὗ ἂν καὶ ἡ πρόσνευσις τοῦ ἰδιώματος γίνηται.
Τηρητέον δὲ ἔτι καὶ τὰς συνισταμένας ἤτοι κατὰ τοὺς ἐκλειπτικοὺς καιροὺς ἢ καὶ ὁτεδήποτε κομητῶν ἐπιφανείας πρὸς τὰς καθόλου περιστάσεις, οἷον τῶν καλουμένων δοκίδων ἢ σαλπίγγων ἢ πίθων καὶ τῶν τοιούτων, ὡς ἀποτελεστικὰς μὲν φύσει τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τῆς τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ εἰρημένων ἰδιωμάτων, πολέμων τε καὶ καυσωδῶν ἢ κινητικῶν καταστημάτων καὶ τῶν τούτοις ἐπισυμβαινόντων, δηλούσας δὲ διὰ μὲν τῶν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μερῶν, καθ’ ὧν ἂν αἱ συστάσεις αὐτῶν φαίνωνται, καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὰ σχήματα τῆς κόμης προσνεύσεων τοὺς τόπους οἷς ἐπισκήπτουσι τὰ συμπτώματα, διὰ δὲ τῶν αὐτῆς τῆς συστάσεως ὡσπερεὶ μορφώσεων τό τε εἶδος τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος καὶ τὸ γένος, περὶ ὃ τὸ πάθος ἀποβήσεται, διὰ δὲ τοῦ χρόνου τῆς ἐπιμονῆς τὴν παράτασιν τῶν συμπτωμάτων, διὰ δὲ τῆς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχέσεως τὴν καταρχήν, ἐπειδήπερ ἑῷοι μὲν ἐπιπολὺ φαινόμενοι τάχιον ἐπισημαίνουσι, ἑσπέριοι δὲ βράδιον.
10. Of the Colours of Eclipses, Comets, and the Like
For the prediction of general conditions we must also observe the colours at the time of the eclipses, either those of the luminaries themselves, or those of the formations that occur near them, such as rods 87, halos, and the like. For if they appear black or livid they signify the effects which were mentioned in connection with Saturn’s nature 88; if white, those of Jupiter; if reddish, those of Mars; if yellow, those of Venus; and if variegated, those of Mercury. If the characteristic colour appears to cover the whole body of the luminary or the whole region surrounding it, the predicted event will affect most of the parts of the countries; but if it is in any one part, it will affect only, that part against which the phenomenon is inclined.
We must observe, further, for the prediction of general conditions, the comets 89 which appear either at the time of the eclipse or at any time whatever ; for instance, the so-called “beams”, “trumpets”, “jars”, and the like 90, for these naturally produce the effects peculiar to Mars and to Mercury –wars, hot weather, disturbed conditions, and the accompaniments of these; and they show, through the parts of the zodiac in which their heads appear and through the directions in which the shapes of their tails point, the regions upon which the misfortunes impend. Through the formations, as it were, of their heads they indicate the kind of the event and the class upon which the misfortune will take effect; through the time which they last, the duration of the events; and through their position relative to the sun likewise their beginning; for in general their appearance in the orient betokens rapidly approaching events and in the occident those that approach more slowly.
11. Περὶ τῆς τοῦ ἔτους νεομηνίας
Δεδειγμένης δὲ τῆς ἐφόδου τῶν περὶ τὰ καθόλου περιστάσεων χωρῶν τε καὶ πόλεων λοιπὸν ἂν εἴη καὶ περὶ τῶν λεπτομερεστέρων ὑπομνηματίσασθαι, λέγω δὲ τῶν ἐνιαυσίως περὶ τὰς ὥρας ἀποτελουμένων, πρὸς ἣν ἐπίσκεψιν καὶ περὶ τῆς καλουμένης τοῦ ἔτους νεομηνίας ἁρμόζον ἂν εἴη προδιαλαβεῖν.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἀρχὴν ταύτην εἶναι προσήκει τῆς τοῦ ἡλίου καθ’ ἑκάστην περιστροφὴν ἀποκαταστάσεως, δῆλόν ἐστιν αὐτόθεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς δυνάμεως καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ὀνομασίας. Τίνα δ’ ἄν τις ἀρχὴν ὑποστήσαιτο, ἐν κύκλῳ μὲν αὐτὸ μόνον ἁπλῶς οὔδ’ ἂν ἐπινοήσειεν, ἐν δὲ τῷ διὰ μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων μόνας ἂν εἰκότως ἀρχὰς λάβοι τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἰσημερινοῦ καὶ τῶν τροπικῶν ἀφοριζόμενα σημεῖα, τουτέστι τά τε δύο ἰσημερινὰ καὶ τὰ δύο τροπικά. Ἐνταῦθα μέντοι τις ἀπορήσειεν ἂν ἤδη, τίνι τῶν τεσσάρων ὡς προηγουμένῳ χρήσαιτ’ ἄν· κατὰ μὲν οὖν τὴν ἁπλῆν καὶ κυκλικὴν φύσιν οὐδὲν αὐτῶν ἐστιν ὡς ἐπὶ μιᾶς ἀρχῆς προηγούμενον· κέχρηνται δὲ οἱ περὶ τούτων γράψαντες ἕν τι ὑποτιθέμενοι, διαφόρως ἑκάστῳ τῶν τεσσάρων ὡς ἀρχῇ, κατά τινας οἰκείους λόγους καὶ φυσικὰς συμπαθείας ἐνεχθέντες.
Καὶ γὰρ ἔχει τι τῶν μερῶν τούτων ἕκαστον ἐξαίρετον, ἀφ’ οὗ ἂν ἀρχὴν καὶ νέον ἔτος εἰκότως νομίζοιτο· τὸ μὲν ἐαρινὸν ἰσημερινὸν διά τε τὸ πρώτως τότε μείζονα τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς νυκτὸς ἄρχεσθαι γίνεσθαι καὶ διὰ τὸ τῆς ὑγρᾶς ὥρας εἶναι, ταύτην δὲ τὴν φύσιν, ὡς καὶ πρότερον ἔφαμεν, ἀρχομέναις ταῖς γενέσεσι πλείστην ἐνυπάρχειν· τὸ δὲ θερινὸν τροπικὸν διὰ τὸ κατ’ αὐτοῦ τὴν μεγίστην ἡμέραν ἀποτελεῖσθαι, παρὰ δὲ Αἰγυπτίοις καὶ τὴν τοῦ Νείλου ἀνάβασιν καὶ Κυνὸς ἄστρου ἐπιτολὴν ἐπισημαίνειν· τὸ δὲ μετοπωρινὸν ἰσημερινὸν διὰ τὸ γεγονέναι πάντων ἤδη τῶν καρπῶν συγκομιδήν, τότε δὲ ἀπ’ ἄλλης ἀρχῆς τὸν τῶν ἐσομένων σπόρον καταβάλλεσθαι· τὸ δὲ χειμερινὸν τροπικὸν διὰ τὸ πρώτως ἄρχεσθαι τότε τὸ μέγεθος τῆς ἡμέρας ἀπὸ μειώσεως αὔξησιν λαμβάνειν.
Οἰκειότερον δέ μοι δοκεῖ καὶ φυσικώτερον πρὸς τὰς ἐνιαυσίους ἐπισκέψεις ταῖς τέτταρσιν ἀρχαῖς χρῆσθαι, παρατηροῦντας τὰς ἔγγιστα αὐτῶν προγινομένας ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης συζυγίας συνοδικὰς ἢ πανσεληνιακὰς καὶ μάλιστα πάλιν τούτων τὰς ἐκλειπτικάς, ἵνα ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἐν τῇ περὶ τὸν Κριὸν ἀρχῇ τὸ ἔαρ ὁποῖον ἔσται διασκεψώμεθα, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς περὶ τὸν Καρκίνον τὸ θέρος, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς περὶ τὰς Χηλὰς τὸ μετόπωρον, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς περὶ τὸν Αἰγόκερων τὸν χειμῶνα. Τὰς μὲν γὰρ καθόλου τῶν ὡρῶν ποιότητας καὶ καταστάσεις ὁ ἥλιος ποιεῖ, καθ’ ἃς καὶ οἱ παντελῶς ἄπειροι μαθημάτων πρόγνωσιν ἔχουσι τοῦ μέλλοντος· ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων ἰδιοτρόπους εἰς τοῦτο παρασημασίας ἀνέμων τε καὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων φύσεων παραληπτέον.
Τὰς δὲ ἐν τῷ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον κατὰ καιροὺς ἐναλλοιώσεις καθόλου μὲν πάλιν αἱ περὶ τὰ προειρημένα σημεῖα γινόμεναι συζυγίαι καὶ οἱ τῶν πλανητῶν πρὸς αὐτὰς συσχηματισμοὶ δεικνύουσι, κατὰ μέρος δὲ καὶ αἱ καθ’ ἕκαστον δωδεκατημόριον σύνοδοι καὶ πανσέληνοι καὶ αἱ τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπιπορεύσεις, ἣν δὴ μηνιαίαν ἐπίσκεψιν ἄν τις προσαγορεύοι.
11. Concerning the New Moon of the Year
Now that we have described the procedure of prediction about the general states of countries and cities, it would remain to mention matters of greater detail; I refer to events that happen yearly in connection with the seasons. In the investigation of this subject it would be appropriate first to define the so-called new moon of the year 91.
That this should properly be the beginning of the sun’s circular course in each of his revolutions is plain from the thing itself, both from its power and from its name. To be sure, one could not conceive what starting point to assume in a circle, as a general proposition; but in the circle through the middle of the zodiac one would properly take as the only beginnings the points determined by the equator and the tropics, that is, the two equinoxes and the two solstices. Even then, however, one would still be at a loss which of the four to prefer. Indeed, in a circle, absolutely considered, no one of them takes the lead, as would be the case if there were one starting point, but those who have written on these matters have made use of each of the four 92, in various ways assuming same one as the starting point, as they were led by their own arguments and by the natural characteristics of the four points.
This is not strange, for each of these parts has same special claim to being reasonably considered the starting point and the new year. The spring equinox might be preferred because first at that time the day begins to be longer than the night and because it belongs to the moist season, and this element, as we said before 93, is chiefly present at the beginning of nativities; the summer solstice because the longest day occurs at that time and because to the Egyptians it signifies the flooding of the Nile and the rising of the dog star; the fall equinox because all the crops have by then been harvested, and a fresh start is then made with the sowing of the seed of future crops; and the winter solstice because then, after diminishing, the day first begins to lengthen.
It seems more proper and natural to me, however, to employ the four starting-points for investigations which deal with the year, observing the syzygies of the sun and moon at new and full moon which most nearly precede them, and among these in particular the. conjunctions at which eclipses take place, so that from the starting point in Aries we may conjecture what the spring will be like, from that in Cancer the summer, from that in Libra the autumn, and from that in Capricorn the winter. For the sun creates the general qualities and conditions of the seasons, by means of which even those who are totally ignorant of astrology can foretell the future 94.
Furthermore, we must take into consideration the special qualities of the signs of the zodiac to obtain prognostications of the winds and of the more general natures 95; and the variations of degree from time to time are in general again shown by the conjunctions which take place at the aforesaid points and by the aspects of the planets to them, and in particular also by the conjunctions and full moons in the several signs and by the course of the planets. This might be called monthly investigation.
12. Περὶ τῆς μερικῆς πρὸς τὰ καταστήματα φύσεως τῶν ζῳδίων
Προεκτεθῆναι δὲ ὀφειλόντων εἰς τοῦτο καὶ τῶν ἐν μέρει κατὰ ζῴδιον πρὸς τὰ ἐνιαύσια καταστήματα φυσικῶν ἰδιωμάτων καὶ ἔτι τῶν καθ’ ἕκαστον ἀστέρων, τὴν μὲν τῶν πλανητῶν καὶ τῶν τῆς ὁμοίας κράσεως ἀπλανῶν πρὸς τοὺς ἀέρας τε καὶ τοὺς ἀνέμους συνοικείωσιν καὶ ἔτι τὴν τῶν ὅλων δωδεκατημορίων πρός τε τοὺς ἀνέμους καὶ τὰς ὥρας ἕκαστα δεδηλώκαμεν ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν. Ὑπόλοιπον δ’ ἂν εἴη καὶ περὶ τῆς ἐπὶ μέρους τῶν ζῳδίων φύσεως εἰπεῖν.
Τὸ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κριοῦ δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι διὰ τὴν ἰσημερινὴν ἐπισημασίαν βροντῶδες καὶ χαλαζῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ ἐν τῷ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν κατ’ αὐτὸν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων ἰδιότητος τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ ὀμβρώδη καὶ ἀνεμώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα καυσώδη καὶ λοιμικά, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καυματώδη καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ νότια κρυσταλλώδη καὶ ὑπόψυχρα.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Ταύρου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστιν ἐπισημαντικὸν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν κράσεων καὶ ὑπόθερμον, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καὶ μάλιστα τὰ κατὰ τὴν Πλειάδα σεισμώδη καὶ πνευματώδη καὶ ὁμιχλώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα ὑγραντικὰ καὶ ψυχρά, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα κατὰ τὴν Ὑάδα πυρώδη καὶ κεραυνῶν καὶ ἀστραπῶν ποιητικά, τὰ δὲ βόρεια εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ νότια κινητικὰ καὶ ἄτακτα.
Τὸ δὲ τῶν Διδύμων δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστιν εὐκρασίας ποιητικόν, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ δίυγρα καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα μεμιγμένα καὶ ἄτακτα, τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη καὶ σεισμοποιά, τὰ δὲ νότια ξηρὰ καὶ καυσώδη.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Καρκίνου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστιν εὐδιεινὸν καὶ θερμόν, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καὶ κατὰ τὴν Φάτνην πνιγώδη καὶ σεισμοποιὰ καὶ ἀχλυώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καὶ τὰ νότια ἔκπυρα καὶ καυσώδη.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Λέοντος δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι καυματῶδες καὶ πνιγῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ πνιγώδη καὶ λοιμικά, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ἔνικμα καὶ φθοροποιά, τὰ δὲ βόρεια κινητικὰ καὶ πυρώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια δίυγρα.
Τὸ δὲ τῆς Παρθένου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι δίυγρον καὶ βροντῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ θερμότερα καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὑδατώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια εὔκρατα.
Τὸ δὲ τῶν Χηλῶν δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι τρεπτικὸν καὶ μεταβολικόν, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ μέσα ἐστὶν εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὑδατώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια ἔνικμα καὶ λοιμικά.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Σκορπίου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι βροντῶδες καὶ πυρῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ νιφετώδη, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα σεισμώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καυσώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια ἔνικμα.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Τοξότου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι πνευματῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ δίυγρα, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα πυρώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια κάθυγρα καὶ μεταβολικά.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Αἰγόκερω δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι κάθυγρον, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ καυσώδη καὶ φθαρτικά, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ὄμβρων κινητικά, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καὶ τὰ νότια κάθυγρα καὶ φθαρτικά.
Τὸ δὲ τοῦ Ὑδροχόου δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι ψυχρὸν καὶ ὑδατῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ κάθυγρα, τὰ δὲ μέσα εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια καυσώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια νιφετώδη.
Τὸ δὲ τῶν Ἰχθύων δωδεκατημόριον καθόλου μέν ἐστι ψυχρὸν καὶ πνευματῶδες, κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα αὐτοῦ εὔκρατα, τὰ δὲ μέσα κάθυγρα, τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα καυσώδη, τὰ δὲ βόρεια πνευματώδη, τὰ δὲ νότια ὑδατώδη.
12. Of the Nature of the Signs, Part by Part, and their Effect upon the Weather
As it is proper that for this purpose there be enumerated the peculiar natural powers of the several signs to influence annual conditions, as well as those of the several planets, we have already, in what precedes, explained the familiarity of the planets 96, and of the fixed stars of like temperament 97, with the air and the winds, as well as that of the signs, as wholes 98, with the winds and seasons. It would remain to speak of the nature of the signs, part by part.
Now the sign of Aries as a whole, because it marks the equinox, is characterized by thunder or hail, but, taken part by part, through the variation in degree that is due to the special quality of the fixed stars, its leading 99 portion is rainy and windy, its middle temperate, and the following part hot and pestilential. Its northern parts are hot and destructive, its southern frosty and chilly.
The sign of Taurus as a whole is indicative of both temperatures and is somewhat hot; but taken part by part, its leading portion, particularly near the Pleiades, is marked by earthquakes, winds, and mists; its middle moist and cola, and its following portion, near the Hyades, fiery and productive of thunder and lightning. Its northern parts are temperate, its southern unstable and irregular.
The sign of Gemini as a whole is productive of an equable temperature, but taken part by part its leading portion is wet and destructive, its middle temperate, and its following portion mixed and irregular. Its northern parts are windy and cause earthquakes; its southern parts dry and parching.
The sign of Cancer as a whole is one of fair, warm weather; but, part by part, its leading portion and the region of Praesepe is stifling, productive of earthquakes, and misty; its middle temperate, and its, following parts windy. Its northern and southern parts are fiery and parching 100.
The sign of Leo as a whole is hot and stifling; but, part by part, its leading portion is stifling and pestilential, its middle part temperate, and its following portion wet and destructive. Its northern parts are unstable and fiery, its southern parts moist.
The sign of Virgo as a whole is moist and marked by thunder-storms; but, taken part by part, its leading portion is rather warm and destructive, its middle temperate, and its following part watery. Its northern parts are windy and its southern parts temperate.
The sign of Libra as a whole is changeable and variable; but, taken part by part, its leading and middle portions are temperate and its following portion watery. Its northern parts are windy and its southern moist and pestilential.
The sign of Scorpio as a whole is marked by thunder and fire, but, taken part by part, its leading portion is snowy, its middle temperate, and its following portion causes earthquakes. Its northern parts are hot and its southern moist.
The sign of Sagittarius as a whole is windy; but, taken part by part, its leading portion is wet, its middle temperate, and its following part fiery. Its northern parts are windy, its southern moist and changeable.
The sign of Capricorn as a whole is moist; but, taken part by part, its leading portion is marked by hot weather and is destructive, its middle temperate, and its following part raises rain–storms. Its northern and southern portions are wet and destructive.
The sign of Aquarius as a whole is cold and watery ; but, taken part by part, its leading portion is moist, its middle temperate, its following part windy. Its northern portion brings hot weather and its southern clouds.
The sign of Pisces as a whole is cold and windy ; but, taken part by part, its leading portion is temperate, its middle moist, and its following portion hot. Its northern parts are windy and its southern watery.
13. Περὶ τῆς ἐπὶ μέρους τῶν καταστημάτων ἐπισκέψεως
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως προεκτεθειμένων αἱ κατὰ μέρος ἔφοδοι τῶν ἐπισημασιῶν περιέχουσι τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον. Μία μὲν γάρ ἐστι ἡ ὁλοσχερέστερον πρὸς τὰ τεταρτημόρια νοουμένη, καθ’ ἣν τηρεῖν ὡς ἔφαμεν δεήσει τὰς γινομένας ἔγγιστα πρὸ τῶν τροπικῶν καὶ ἰσημερινῶν σημείων συνόδους ἢ πανσελήνους καὶ κατὰ τὴν μοῖραν ἤτοι συνοδικὴν ἢ πανσεληνιακὴν τὴν ἐν ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἐπιζητουμένων κλιμάτων τὰ κέντρα ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως διατιθέναι, ἔπειτα τοὺς οἰκοδεσπότας λαμβάνειν τοῦ τε συνοδικοῦ ἢ πανσεληνιακοῦ τόπου καὶ τοῦ ἑπομένου αὐτῷ κέντρου, κατὰ τὸν ὑποδεδειγμένον ἡμῖν τρόπον ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν περὶ τῶν ἐκλείψεων, καὶ οὕτως τὸ μὲν καθόλου θεωρεῖν ἐκ τῆς τῶν τεταρτημορίων ἰδιότητος, τὸ δὲ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον ἐπιτάσεων ἢ ἀνέσεων ἐκ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων φύσεως διαλαμβάνοντας, ποίας τε ποιότητός εἰσι καὶ ποίων καταστημάτων κινητικοί.
Δευτέρα δέ ἐστιν ἔφοδος ἡ μηνιαία, καθ’ ἣν δεήσει τὰς καθ’ ἕκαστον δωδεκατημόριον προγινομένας συνόδους ἢ πανσελήνους κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἐπισκοπεῖν, ἐκεῖνο μόνον τηροῦντας, ἵνα συνόδου μὲν ἐμπεσούσης τῆς ἔγγιστα τοῦ παρῳχημένου τροπικοῦ ἢ ἰσημερινοῦ σημείου καὶ ταῖς μέχρι τοῦ ἐφεξῆς τεταρτημορίου συνόδοις χρησώμεθα, πανσελήνου δὲ πανσελήνοις· ἐπισκοπεῖν δὲ ὁμοίως τὰ κέντρα καὶ τοὺς οἰκοδεσπότας ἀμφοτέρων τῶν τόπων καὶ μάλιστα τὰς ἔγγιστα φάσεις, συναφάς τε καὶ ἀπορροίας τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων τάς τε ἰδιότητας αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν τόπων καὶ ποίων ἀνέμων εἰσὶ κινητικοὶ αὐτοί τε καὶ τὰ μέρη τῶν ζῳδίων καθ’ ὧν ἂν τύχωσιν, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ᾧ τὸ πλάτος τῆς σελήνης ἀνέμῳ προσνένευκε κατὰ τὴν λόξωσιν τοῦ διὰ μέσων, ὅπως ἐξ ἁπάντων τούτων κατὰ τὴν ἐπικράτησιν τὰ ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῶν μηνῶν καταστήματα καὶ πνεύματα προγινώσκωμεν.
Τρίτον δ’ ἐστὶ τὸ τὰς ἔτι λεπτομερεστέρας ἐπισημασίας ἀνέσεων καὶ ἐπιτάσεων παρατηρεῖν. Θεωρεῖται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο διά τε τῶν κατὰ μέρος τοῦ ἡλίου καὶ τῆς σελήνης συσχηματισμῶν οὐ μόνον τῶν συνοδικῶν ἢ πανσεληνιακῶν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὰς διχοτόμους, καταρχομένης ὡς ἐπὶ πᾶν τῆς κατὰ τὴν ἐπισημασίαν ἐναλλοιώσεως πρὸ τριῶν ἡμερῶν, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς τῆς ἰσοστάθμου πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἐπιπορεύσεως, καὶ διὰ τοῦ καθ’ ἑκάστην τῶν τοιούτων στάσεων ἢ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, οἷον τριγώνων ἢ ἑξαγώνων, πρὸς τοὺς πλανήτας συσχηματισμοῦ. Τούτων γὰρ ἀκολούθως τῇ φύσει καὶ ἡ τῆς ἐναλλοιώσεως ἰδιοτροπία καταλαμβάνεται συμφώνως ταῖς τε τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων ἀστέρων καὶ ταῖς τῶν ζῳδίων πρός τε τὸ περιέχον καὶ τοὺς ἀνέμους φυσικαῖς συνοικειώσεσιν.
Αὐτῶν δὲ τούτων τῶν κατὰ μέρος ποιοτήτων αἱ καθ’ ἡμέραν ἐπιτάσεις ἀποτελοῦνται μάλιστα μὲν ὅταν τῶν ἀπλανῶν οἱ λαμπρότεροι καὶ δραστικώτεροι φάσεις ἑῴας ἢ ἑσπερίας ἀνατολικὰς ἢ δυτικὰς ποιῶνται πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον, τρέπουσι γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τὰς κατὰ μέρος καταστάσεις πρὸς τὰς ἑαυτῶν φύσεις, οὐδὲν δὲ ἔλαττον καὶ ὅταν τινὶ τῶν κέντρων τὰ φῶτα ἐπιπορεύηται. Πρὸς γὰρ τὰς τοιαύτας αὐτῶν σχέσεις αἱ καθ’ ὥραν ἀνέσεις καὶ ἐπιτάσεις τῶν καταστημάτων μεταβάλλουσι, καθάπερ πρὸς τὰς τῆς σελήνης αἵ τε ἀμπώτεις καὶ αἱ παλίρροιαι καὶ αἱ τῶν πνευμάτων δὲ τροπαὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὰς τοιαύτας τῶν φώτων κεντρώσεις ἀποτελοῦνται, πρὸς οὓς ἂν τῶν ἀνέμων ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ τὸ πλάτος τῆς σελήνης τὰς προσνεύσεις ποιούμενον καταλαμβάνηται. Πανταχῇ μέντοι προσήκει διαλαμβάνειν ὡς προηγουμένης μὲν τῆς καθόλου καὶ πρώτης ὑποκειμένης αἰτίας, ἑπομένης δὲ τῆς τῶν κατὰ μέρος ἐπισυμβαινόντων, βεβαιουμένης δὲ μάλιστα καὶ ἰσχυροποιουμένης τῆς ἐνεργείας, ὅταν οἱ τῶν καθόλου φύσεων οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες ἀστέρες καὶ ταῖς ἐπὶ μέρους τύχωσι συσχηματιζόμενοι.
13. Of the Investigation of Weather in Detail
Now that these facts have been stated in introduction, the method of dealing with the significations in detail involves the following procedure. For οne method is that which is more generally conceived, with relation to the quarters, which will demand, as we have said 101, that we observe the new moons 102 or full moons which most nearly precede the solstitial and equinoctial signs, and that, as the degree of the new moon or of the full moon may fall in each latitude investigated, we dispose the angles as in a nativity 103. It will then be neccssary to determine the rulers of the place of the new moon or full moon and of the angle that follows it, after the fashion explained by us in the preceding sections dealing with eclipses 104, and thus to judge of the general situation from the special nature of the quarters, and determine the question of degree of intensification and relaxation from the nature of the ruling planets, their qualities, and the kinds of weather which they produce.
The second mode of procedure is based on the month. In this it will be necessary for us to examine in the same way the new moons or full moons that take place, in the several signs 105, observing only this, that, if a new moon occurs nearest to the solstitial or equinoctial sign just past, we should use the new moons which take place as far as the next quadrant, and in the case of a full moon the full moons. It will be needful similarly that we observe the angles and the rulers of both the places, and especially the nearest appearances 106 of the planets, and their applications 107 and recessions, the peculiar properties of the planets and of their places, and the winds which are aroused both by the planets themselves and by the parts of the signe in which they chance to be; still further, to what wind the latitude of the moon is inclined through the obliquity of the ecliptic. From all these facts, by means of the principle of prevalence, we may predict the general conditions of weather and the winds of the months.
The third step is to observe the even more minutely detailed indications of relaxation and intensification 108. This observation is based upon the configurations of the sun and the moon successively, not merely the new moons and full moons, but also the half moons, in which case the change signified generally has its beginning three days before, and sometimes three days after, the moon’s progress matches that of the sun 109. It is based also upon their aspects to the planets, when they are at each of the positions of this kind, or likewise others, such as trine and sextile. For it is in accordance with the nature of these that the special quality of the change is apprehended, in harmony with the natural affinities of the attending planets and of the signs of the zodiac for the ambient and the winds.
The day by day intensifications of these particular qualities are brought about chiefly when the more brilliant and powerful of the fixed stars make appearances, matutine or vespertine, at rising or setting, with respect to the sun 110. For ordinarily they modulate the particular conditions to accord with their own natures, and none the less too when the luminaries are passing over οne of the angles. For the hour by hour intensifications and relaxations of the weather vary in response to such positions of the stars as these, in the same way that the ebb and flow of the tide respond to the phases of the moon, and the changes in the air-currents are brought about especially at such appearances of the luminaries at the angles, in the direction of those winds towards which the latitude of the moon is found to be inclining. In every case, however, οne should draw his conclusions on the principle that the universal and primary underlying cause takes precedence and that the cause of particular events is secondary to it, and that the force is most ensured and strengthened when the stars which are the lords of the universal natures are configurated with the particular causes.
14. Περὶ τῆς τῶν μετεώρων σημειώσεως
Χρήσιμοι δ’ ἂν εἶεν πρὸς τὰς τῶν κατὰ μέρος ἐπισημασιῶν προγνώσεις καὶ αἱ τῶν γινομένων σημείων περί τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας παρατηρήσεις. Τὸν μὲν οὖν ἥλιον τηρητέον πρὸς μὲν τὰς ἡμερησίους καταστάσεις ἀνατέλλοντα, πρὸς δὲ τὰς νυκτερινὰς δύνοντα, πρὸς δὲ τὰς παρατεινούσας κατὰ τοὺς πρὸς τὴν σελήνην σχηματισμούς, ὡς ἑκάστου σχήματος τὴν μέχρι τοῦ ἑξῆς κατάστασιν ὡς ἐπίπαν προσημαίνοντος· καθαρὸς μὲν γὰρ καὶ ἀνεπισκότητος καὶ εὐσταθὴς καὶ ἀνέφελος ἀνατέλλων ἢ δύνων εὐδιεινῆς καταστάσεώς ἐστι δηλωτικός, ποικίλον δὲ τὸν κύκλον ἔχων ἢ ὑπόπυρρον ἢ ἀκτῖνας ἐρυθρὰς ἀποπέμπων ἤτοι εἰς τὰ ἔξω ἢ ὡς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν κοιλούμενος ἢ τὰ καλούμενα παρήλια νέφη ἐξ ἑνὸς μέρους ἔχων ἢ σχήματα νεφῶν ὑπόκιρρα καὶ ὡσεὶ μακρὰς ἀκτῖνας ἀπομηκύνων ἀνέμων σφοδρῶν ἐστι σημαντικὸς καὶ τοιούτων, πρὸς ἃς ἂν γωνίας τὰ προειρημένα σημεῖα γένηται. Μέλας δὲ ἢ ὑπόχλωρος ἀνατέλλων ἢ δύνων μετὰ συννεφείας ἢ ἅλως ἔχων περὶ αὑτὸν καθ’ ἓν μέρος ἢ ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν μερῶν παρήλια νέφη καὶ ἀκτῖνας ἢ ὑποχλώρους ἢ μελαίνας χειμώνων καὶ ὑετῶν ἐστι δηλωτικός.
Τὴν δὲ σελήνην τηρητέον ἐν ταῖς πρὸ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἢ μετὰ τρεῖς παρόδοις τῶν τε συνόδων καὶ πανσελήνων καὶ διχοτόμων. Λεπτὴ μὲν γὰρ καὶ καθαρὰ φαινομένη καὶ μηδὲν ἔχουσα περὶ αὑτὴν εὐδιεινῆς καταστάσεώς ἐστι δηλωτική. Λεπτὴ δὲ καὶ ἐρυθρὰ καὶ ὅλον τὸν τοῦ ἀφωτίστου κύκλον ἔχουσα διαφανῆ καὶ ὅλον ὑποκεκινημένον ἀνέμων ἐστὶ σημαντικὴ καθ’ ὧν ἂν μάλιστα ποιῆται τὴν πρόσνευσιν. Μέλαινα δὲ ἢ χλωρὰ καὶ παχεῖα θεωρουμένη χειμώνων καὶ ὄμβρων ἐστὶ δηλωτική.
Παρατηρητέον δὲ καὶ τὰς περὶ αὐτὴν γινομένας ἅλως. Εἰ μὲν γὰρ μία εἴη καὶ αὐτὴ καθαρὰ καὶ ἠρέμα ὑπομαραινομένη, εὐδιεινὴν κατάστασιν σημαίνει, εἰ δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ τρεῖς εἶεν, χειμῶνας δηλοῦσιν, ὑπόκιρροι μὲν οὖσαι καὶ ὥσπερ ῥηγνύμεναι τοὺς διὰ σφοδρῶν ἀνέμων, ἀχλυώδεις δὲ καὶ παχεῖαι τοὺς διὰ νιφετῶν, ὕπωχροι δὲ ἢ μέλαιναι καὶ ῥηγνύμεναι τοὺς δι’ ἀμφοτέρων, καὶ ὅσῳ ἂν πλείους ὦσι τοσούτῳ μείζονας. Καὶ αἱ περὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας δὲ τούς τε πλανωμένους καὶ τοὺς λαμπροὺς τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἅλως συνιστάμεναι ἐπισημαίνουσι τὰ οἰκεῖα τοῖς τε χρώμασιν ἑαυτῶν καὶ ταῖς τῶν ἐναπειλημμένων φύσεσι.
Καὶ τῶν ἀπλανῶν δὲ τῶν κατά τι πλῆθος σύνεγγυς ὄντων παρατηρητέον τὰ χρώματα καὶ τὰ μεγέθη. Λαμπρότεροι μὲν γὰρ καὶ μείζονες ὁρώμενοι παρὰ τὰς συνήθεις φαντασίας εἰς ὁποιονδήποτε μέρος ὄντες ἀνέμους τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου τόπου διασημαίνουσιν. Οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἰδίως νεφελοειδῶν συστροφῶν οἷον τῆς Φάτνης καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων, ἐπὰν αἰθρίας οὔσης αἱ συστάσεις ἀμαυραὶ καὶ ὥσπερ ἀφανεῖς ἢ πεπαχυμέναι θεωρῶνται, φορᾶς ὑδάτων εἰσὶ δηλωτικαί, καθαραὶ δὲ καὶ παλλόμεναι συνεχῶς σφοδρῶν πνευμάτων. Καὶ τῶν ἐπιγινομένων δὲ κατὰ καιροὺς ἐν τοῖς μετεώροις αἱ μὲν τῶν κομητῶν συστροφαὶ ὡς ἐπίπαν αὐχμοὺς καὶ ἀνέμους προσημαίνουσι, καὶ τοσούτῳ μείζονας ὅσῳ ἂν ἐκ πλειόνων μερῶν καὶ ἐπιπολὺ ἡ σύστασις γένηται.
Αἱ δὲ διαδρομαὶ καὶ οἱ ἀκοντισμοὶ τῶν ἀστέρων εἰ μὲν ἀπὸ μιᾶς γίνοιντο γωνίας, τὸν ἀπ’ ἐκείνης ἄνεμον δηλοῦσι, εἰ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων, ἀκαταστασίαν πνευμάτων, εἰ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν τεσσάρων, παντοίους χειμῶνας μέχρι βροντῶν καὶ ἀστραπῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων. Ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὰ νέφη πόκοις ἐρίων ὄντα παραπλήσια προδηλωτικὰ ἐνίοτε γίνεται χειμώνων. Αἵ τε συνιστάμεναι κατὰ καιροὺς ἴριδες χειμῶνα μὲν ἐξ εὐδίας, εὐδίαν δὲ ἐκ χειμῶνος προσημαίνουσι. Καὶ ὡς ἐπίπαν συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, αἱ καθόλου τοῦ ἀέρος ἐπιγινόμεναι ἰδιόχροοι φαντασίαι τὰ ὅμοια δηλοῦσι τοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκείων συμπτωμάτων κατὰ τὰ προδεδηλωμένα διὰ τῶν ἔμπροσθεν ἀποτελουμένοις.
Ἡ μὲν δὴ τῶν καθολικῶν ἐπίσκεψις τῶν τε ὁλοσχερέστερον θεωρουμένων καὶ τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους μέχρι τοσούτων ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες ὑπομεμνηματίσθω. Τῆς δὲ κατὰ τὸ γενεθλιακὸν εἶδος προγνώσεως τὰς πραγματείας ἐν τοῖς ἑξῆς κατὰ τὴν προσήκουσαν ἀκολουθίαν ἐφοδεύσομεν.
14. Of the Significance of Atmospheric Signs
Observations of the signs that are to be seen around the sun, moon, and planets would also be useful for a foreknowledge of the particular events signified. We must, then, observe the sun at rising to determine the weather by day and at setting for the weather at night, and its aspects to the moon for weather conditions of longer extent, on the assumption that each aspect, in general, foretells the condition up to the next. For when the sun rises or sets clear, unobscured, steady, and unclouded, it signifies fair weather; but if its disk is variegated or reddish or sends out ruddy rays, either directly outward or turned back upon itself, or if it has the so-called parheliac clouds on one side, or yellowish formations of clouds, and as it were emits long rays, it indicates heavy winds and such as come from the angles to which the aforesaid signs point. If at rising or setting it is dark or livid, being accompanied by clouds, or if it has halos about it on one side, or the parheliac clouds on both sides, and gives forth either livid or dusky rays, it signifies storms and rain.
We must observe the moon in its course three days before or three days after new moon, full moon, and the quarters. For when it appears thin and clear and has nothing around it, it signifies clear weather. If it is thin and red, and the whole disk of the unlighted portion is visible and somewhat disturbed, it indicates winds, in that direction in which it is particularly inclined. If it is observed to be dark, or pale, and thick, it signifies storms and rains.
We must also observe the halos around the moon. For if there is one, and this is clear, and gradually fading, it signifies fair weather; if there are two or three, storms; if they are yellowish, and broken, as it were, storms accompanied by heavy winds; if they are thick and misty, snowstorms; pale, or dusky, and broken, storms with both winds and snow; and the more of them there are the more severe the storms. And the halos that gather about the stars, both the planets and the brilliant fixed stars, signify what is appropriate to their colours and to the natures of the luminaries which they surround.
As for the fixed stars which are close together in some number, we must observe their colours and magnitudes. For if they appear brighter and larger than usual, in whatever part of the sky they may be, they indicate the winds that blow from their own region. As for the clusters in the proper sense, however, such as Praesepe and the like, whenever in a clear sky their clusters appear to be dim, and, as it were, invisible, or thickened, they signify a downpour of water, but if they are clear and constantly twinkle, heavy winds. Whenever, of the stars called the Asses on each side of Praesepe, the οne to the north becomes invisible, it means that the north wind will blow, and the οne to the south, the south wind 111. Of occasional phenomena in the upper atmosphere, comets generally foretell droughts or winds, and the larger the number of parts that are found in their heads and the greater their size, the more severe the winds.
Rushing and shooting stars, if they come from one angle, denote the wind from that direction, but if from opposite angles, a confusion of winds, and if from all four angles, storms of all kinds, including thunder, lightning, and the like. Similarly clouds resembling flocks of wool are sometimes significant of storms. And the rainbows that appear from time to time signify storms after clear weather and clear weather after storms. To sum up the whole matter, the visible phenomena, which appear with peculiar colours of their own in the atmosphere in general, indicate results similar to those brought about by their own proper occurrences, in the manner already explained in the foregoing 112.
Let us, then, consider that thus far, in outline, there has been given an account of the investigation of general questions, both in their more universal aspects and in particular detail. In the following we shall supply in due order the procedure for the prediction which follows the genethlialogical form.
ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΣΜΑΤΙΚΗ (ΤΕΤΡΑΒΙΒΛΟΣ), ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ Γ′
ἑλληνικὸ πρωτότυπον μὲ ἀγγλικὴν μετάφρασιν, τοῦ Frank Egleston Robbins, Κλασικὴ Βιβλιοθήκη Loeb, 1940
❧
ΠΕΡΙΕΧΟΜΕΝΑ
1. Προοίμιον
2. Περὶ σπορᾶς καὶ ἐκτροπῆς
3. Περὶ μοίρας ὡροσκοπούσης
4. Διαίρεσις γενεθλιαλογίας
5. Περὶ γονέων
6. Περὶ ἀδελφῶν
7. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν γενέσεων
8. Περὶ διδυμογόνων
9. Περὶ τεράτων
10. Περὶ ἀτρόφων
11. Περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς
12. Περὶ μορφῆς καὶ κράσεως σωματικῆς
13. Περὶ σινῶν καὶ παθῶν σωματικῶν
14. Περὶ ποιότητος ψυχῆς
15. Περὶ παθῶν ψυχικῶν
1. Προοίμιον
Ἐφωδευμένης ἡμῖν ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν τῆς περὶ τὰ καθόλου συμπτώματα θεωρίας, ὡς προηγουμένης καὶ τὰ πολλὰ κατακρατεῖν δυναμένης τῶν περὶ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων κατὰ τὸ ἴδιον τῆς φύσεως ἀποτελουμένων, ὧν τὸ προγνωστικὸν μέρος γενεθλιαλογίαν καλοῦμεν, δύναμιν μὲν μίαν καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν εἰδῶν ἡγεῖσθαι προσήκει, καὶ περὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν καὶ περὶ τὸ θεωρητικόν, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ τῶν καθόλου καὶ τῶν καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον συμπτωμάτων αἰτία μὲν ἡ τῶν πλανωμένων ἀστέρων ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης κίνησις, προγνωστικὴ δὲ ἡ τῆς τῶν ὑποκειμένων αὐτοῖς φύσεων τροπῆς κατὰ τὰς ὁμοιοσχήμονας τῶν οὐρανίων παρόδους διὰ τοῦ περιέχοντος ἐπιστημονικὴ παρατήρησις, πλὴν ἐφ’ ὅσον ἡ μὲν καθολικὴ περίστασις μείζων τε καὶ αὐτοτελής, ἡ δὲ ἐπὶ μέρους οὐχ ὁμοίως.
Ἀρχὰς δὲ οὐκέτι τὰς αὐτὰς ἀμφοτέρων νομιστέον εἶναι, ἀφ’ ὧν τὴν τῶν οὐρανίων διάθεσιν ὑποτιθέμενοι τὰ διὰ τῶν τότε σχηματισμῶν σημαινόμενα πειρώμεθα προγινώσκειν, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν καθολικῶν πολλάς, ἐπειδὴ μίαν τοῦ παντὸς οὐκ ἔχομεν, καὶ ταύτας οὐκ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τῶν ὑποκειμένων πάντοτε λαμβανομένας, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν περιεχόντων καὶ τὰς αἰτίας ἐπιφερόντων· σχεδὸν γὰρ πάσας ἀπό τε τῶν τελειοτέρων ἐκλείψεων καὶ τῶν ἐπισήμως παροδευόντων ἀστέρων ἐπισκεπτόμεθα· τῶν δὲ καθ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ μίαν καὶ πολλάς, μίαν μὲν τὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ συγκρίματος ἀρχήν, καὶ ταύτην γὰρ ἔχομεν, πολλὰς δὲ τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς τῶν περιεχόντων πρὸς τὴν πρώτην ἀρχὴν ἐπισημασίας συμβαινούσας, προηγουμένης μέντοι τῆς μιᾶς ἐνθάδε εἰκότως, ἐπειδήπερ αὕτη καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀποτελεῖ.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς πρώτης ἀρχῆς θεωρεῖται τὰ καθόλου τῆς συγκρίσεως ἰδιώματα, διὰ δὲ τῶν ἄλλων τὰ κατὰ καιροὺς παρὰ τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον συμβησόμενα κατὰ τὰς λεγομένας τῶν ἐφεξῆς χρόνων διαιρέσεις.
1. Introduction
As in what precedes we have presented the theory of universal events, because this comes first and for the most part has power to control the predictions which concern the special nature of any individual, the prognostic part of which we call the genethlialogical art, we must believe that the two divisions have one and the same power both practically and theoretically. For the cause both of universal and of particular events is the motion of the planets, sun, and moon; and the prognostic art is the scientific observation of precisely the change in the subject natures which corresponds to parallel movements of the heavenly bodies through the surrounding heavens, except that universal conditions are greater and independent, and particular ones not similarly so.
We must not, however, consider that both divisions 1 employ the same starting points, from which, by reckoning the disposition of the heavenly bodies, we attempt to foretell the events signified by their aspects at that time. On the contrary, in the case of the universals we have to take many starting points, since we have no single one for the universe; and these too are not always taken from the subjects themselves, but also from the elements that attend them and carry with them the causes; for we investigate practically all the starting-points presented by the more complete eclipses and the significant passages of the planets. In predictions affecting individual men, however, we have both one and many starting-points. The one is the beginning of the temperament 2 itself, for this we have; and the many are the successive significances of the ambients which are relative to this first beginning, though to be sure the single starting-point is naturally in this case of greatest importance because it produces the others.
As this is so, the general characteristics of the temperament are determined from the first startingpoint, while by means of the others we predict events that will come about at specific times and vary in degree, following the so-called ages of life 3.
2. Περὶ σπορᾶς καὶ ἐκτροπῆς
Ἀρχῆς δὲ χρονικῆς ὑπαρχούσης τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων τέξεων φύσει μὲν τῆς κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν σποράν, δυνάμει δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὸ συμβεβηκὸς τῆς κατὰ τὴν ἀποκύησιν ἐκτροπῆς, ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἐγνωκότων τὸν τῆς σπορᾶς καιρὸν ἤτοι συμπτωματικῶς ἢ καὶ παρατηρητικῶς, ἐκείνῳ μᾶλλον προσήκει πρός τε τὰ τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἰδιώματα κατακολουθεῖν, τὸ ποιητικὸν τοῦ κατ’ αὐτὸν τῶν ἀστέρων σχηματισμοῦ διασκεπτομένους·
Ἅπαξ γὰρ ἐν ἀρχῇ τὸ σπέρμα ποιόν πως γενόμενον ἐκ τῆς τοῦ περιέχοντος διαδόσεως, κἂν διάφορον τοῦτο γίνηται κατὰ τοὺς ἐφεξῆς τῆς σωματοποιήσεως χρόνους, αὐτὸ τὴν οἰκείαν μόνην ὕλην φυσικῶς προσεπισυγκρίνον ἑαυτῷ κατὰ τὴν αὔξησιν ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐξομοιοῦται τῇ τῆς πρώτης ποιότητος ἰδιοτροπίᾳ· ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν μὴ γινωσκόντων, ὅπερ ὡς ἐπίπαν συμβαίνει, τῇ κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ἀρχῇ καὶ ταύτῃ προσανέχειν ἀναγκαῖον, ὡς μεγίστη καὶ αὕτη καὶ μόνῳ τούτῳ τῆς πρώτης λειπομένη τῷ δι’ ἐκείνης καὶ τὰ πρὸ τῆς ἐκτέξεως δύνασθαι προγινώσκεσθαι.
Καὶ γὰρ εἰ τὴν μὲν ἀρχὴν ἄν τις εἴποι, τὴν δὲ ὥσπερ καταρχήν, τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῆς τῷ μὲν χρόνῳ γίνεται δεύτερον, ἴσον δὲ καὶ μᾶλλον τελειότερον τῇ δυνάμει, σχεδόν τε δικαίως ἐκείνη μὲν ἂν ὀνομάζοιτο σπέρματος ἀνθρωπίνου γένεσις, αὕτη δὲ ἀνθρώπου· πλεῖστά τε γὰρ τότε προσλαμβάνει τὸ βρέφος, ἃ μὴ πρότερον, ὅτε κατὰ γαστρὸς ἦν, προσῆν αὐτῷ, καὶ αὐτὰ τὰ ἴδια μόνης τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως·
Ὅ τε σωματώδης σχηματισμός, κἂν μηδὲν αὐτῷ δοκῇ τὸ κατὰ τὴν ἔκτεξιν περιέχον εἰς τὸ τοιῷδε εἶναι συμβάλλεσθαι, αὐτῷ πρὸς τὸ κατὰ τὸν οἰκεῖον τοῦ περιέχοντος σχηματισμὸν εἰς φῶς ἐλθεῖν συμβάλλεται, τῆς φύσεως μετὰ τὴν τελείωσιν πρὸς τὸ ὁμοιότυπον κατάστημα τῷ κατ’ ἀρχὰς διαμορφώσαντι μερικῶς τὴν ὁρμὴν τῆς ἐξόδου ποιουμένης, ὥστε εὐλόγως καὶ τῶν τοιούτων ἡγεῖσθαι δηλωτικὸν εἶναι τὸν κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν τῶν ἀστέρων σχηματισμόν, οὐχ ὡς ποιητικὸν μέντοι πάντως, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐξ ἀνάγκης κατὰ φύσιν ὁμοιότατον δυνάμει τῷ ποιητικῷ.
Προθέσεως δὲ κατὰ τὸ παρὸν ἡμῖν οὔσης καὶ τοῦτο τὸ μέρος ἐφοδικῶς ἀναπληρῶσαι κατὰ τὸν ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς δὲ τῆς συντάξεως ὑφηγημένον ἐπιλογισμὸν περὶ τοῦ δυνατοῦ τῆς τοιαύτης προγνώσεως, τὸν μὲν ἀρχαῖον τῶν προρρήσεων τρόπον τὸν κατὰ τὸ συγκρατικὸν εἶδος τῶν ἀστέρων πάντων ἢ τῶν πλείστων, πολύχουν τε ὄντα καὶ σχεδὸν ἄπειρον, εἴ τις αὐτὸν ἀκριβοῦν ἐθέλοι, κατὰ τὴν διέξοδον καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν ταῖς κατὰ μέρος ἐπιβολαῖς τῶν φυσικῶς ἐπισκεπτομένων ἢ ἐν ταῖς παραδόσεσι ἀναθεωρεῖσθαι δυνάμενον παραιτησόμεθα διά τε τὸ δύσχρηστον καὶ τὸ δυσδιέξοδον.
Τὰς δὲ πραγματείας αὐτάς, δι’ ὧν ἕκαστα τῶν εἰδῶν κατὰ τὸν ἐπιβλητικὸν τρόπον συνορᾶται, καὶ τὰς κατὰ τὸ ἰδιότροπον καὶ ὁλοσχερὲς τῶν ἀστέρων πρὸς ἕκαστα ποιητικὰς δυνάμεις, ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα, παρακολουθητικῶς τε ἅμα καὶ ἐπιτετμημένως κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν στοχασμὸν ἐκθησόμεθα, τοὺς μὲν τοῦ περιέχοντος τόπους, πρὸς οὓς ἕκαστα θεωρεῖται τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων συμπτωμάτων καθάπερ σκοπὸν οὗ δεῖ καταστοχάζεσθαι προυποτιθέμενοι, τὰς δὲ τῶν τοῖς τόποις κατ’ ἐπικράτησιν συνοικειουμένων σωμάτων ποιητικὰς δυνάμεις ὥσπερ ἀφέσεις βελῶν κατὰ τὸ ὁλοσχερέστερον ἐφαρμόζοντες, τὸ δὲ ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως τῆς ἐκ πλειόνων φύσεων περὶ τὸ ὑποκείμενον εἶδος συναγόμενον ἀποτέλεσμα καταλιπόντες, ὥσπερ εὐστόχῳ τοξότῃ τῷ τοῦ διασκεπτομένου λογισμῷ·
Πρῶτον δὲ περὶ τῶν καθόλου διὰ τῆς κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ἀρχῆς θεωρουμένων ποιησόμεθα τὸν λόγον κατὰ τὴν προσήκουσαν τῆς τάξεως ἀκολουθίαν, πάντων μὲν ὡς ἔφαμεν τῶν φύσιν ἐχόντων διὰ ταύτης λαμβάνεσθαι δυναμένων, συνεργησόντων δὲ εἴ τις ἔτι περιεργάζεσθαι θέλοι πρὸς μόνα τὰ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν σύγκρισιν ἰδιώματα καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὸν τῆς σπορᾶς χρόνον διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς θεωρίας ὑποπιπτόντων ἰδιωμάτων.
2. Of conception and parturition
Since the chronological starting-point of human nativities is naturally the very time of conception, but potentially and accidentally the moment of birth, in cases in which the very time of conception is known either by chance or by observation, it is more fitting that we should follow it in determining the special nature of body and soul, examining the effective power of the configuration of the stars at that time.
For to the seed is given once and for all at the beginning such and such qualities by the endowment of the ambient; and even though it may change as the body subsequently grows, since by natural process it mingles with itself in the process of growth only matter which is akin to itself, thus it resembles even more closely the type of its initial quality. But if they do not know the time of conception, which is usually the case, we must follow the starting-point furnished by the moment of birth and give to this our attention, for it too is of great importance and falls abort of the former only in this respect that by the former it is possible to have foreknowledge also of events preceding birth.
For if one should call the one “source” and the other, as it were, “beginning”, its importance in time, indeed, is secondary, but it is equal or rather even more perfect in potentiality, and with reasonable propriety would the former be called the genesis of human seed and the latter the genesis of a man. For the child at birth and his bodily form take on many additional attributes which he did not have before, when he was in the womb, those very ones indeed which belong to human nature alone;
And even if it seems that the ambient at the time of birth contributes nothing toward his quality, at least his very coming forth into the light under the appropriate conformation of the heavens contributes, since nature, after the child is perfectly formed, gives the impulse to its birth under a configuration of similar type to that which governed the child’s formation in detail in the first place 4. Accordingly one may with good reason believe that the position of the stars at the time of birth is significant of things of this sort, not, however, for the reason that it is causative in the full sense, but that of necessity and by nature it bas potentially very similar causative power.
Since it is our present purpose to treat of this division likewise systematically on the basis of the discussion, introduced at the beginning of this compendium, of the possibility of prediction of this kind, we shall decline to present the ancient method of prediction, which brings into combination all or most of the stars, because it is manifold and well-nigh infinite, if one wishes to recount it with accuracy. Besides, it depends much more upon the particular attempts of those who make their inquiries directly from nature than of those who can theorize on the basis of the traditions; and furthermore we shall omit it on account of the difficulty in using it and following it.
Those very procedures through which each kind of thing is apprehended by the practical method, and the active influences of the stars, both special and general, we shall, as far as possible, consistently and briefly, in accordance with natural conjecture, set forth. Our preface shall be an account of the places in the heavens to which reference is made when particular human events are theoretically considered, a kind of mark at which One must aim before proceeding further; to this we shall add a general discussion of the active powers of the heavenly bodies that gain kinship with these places by dominating them –the loosing of the arrow, as it were; but the predicted result, summed up by the combination of many elements applied to the underlying form, we shall leave, as to a skillful archer, to the calculation of him who conducts the investigation.
First, then, we shall discuss in proper sequence the general matters the consideration of which is accomplished through the time of birth taken as the starting-point, for, as we have said, this furnishes an explanation of all natural events, but, if One is willing to take the additional trouble, by the same reasoning the properties that fall at the time of conception will also be of aid toward ascertaining the peculiar qualities that apply directly to the combination.
3. Περὶ μοίρας ὡροσκοπούσης
Ἐπειδὴ περὶ τοῦ πρώτου καὶ κυριωτάτου, τουτέστι τοῦ μορίου τῆς κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν ὥρας, ἀπορία γίγνεται πολλάκις, μόνης μὲν ὡς ἐπίπαν τῆς δι’ ἀστρολάβων ὡροσκοπείων κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν ἔκτεξιν διοπτεύσεως τοῖς ἐπιστημονικῶς παρατηροῦσι τὸ λεπτὸν τῆς ὥρας ὑποβάλλειν δυναμένης, τῶν δὲ ἄλλων σχεδὸν ἁπάντων ὡροσκοπείων, οἷς οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν ἐπιμελεστέρων προσέχουσι, πολλαχῆ διαψεύδεσθαι τῆς ἀληθείας δυναμένων, τῶν μὲν ἡλιακῶν παρὰ τὰς τῶν θέσεων καὶ τῶν γνωμόνων ἐπισυμπιπτούσας διαστροφάς, τῶν δὲ ὑδρολογίων παρὰ τὰς τῆς ῥύσεως τοῦ ὕδατος ὑπὸ διαφόρων αἰτιῶν καὶ διὰ τὸ τυχὸν ἐποχάς τε καὶ ἀνωμαλίας, ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη προπαραδοθῆναι, τίνα ἄν τις τρόπον εὑρίσκοι τὴν ὀφείλουσαν ἀνατέλλειν μοῖραν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ κατὰ τὸν φυσικὸν καὶ ἀκόλουθον λόγον προυποτεθείσης τῆς κατὰ τὴν διδομένην σύνεγγυς ὥραν διὰ τῆς τῶν ἀναφορῶν πραγματείας εὑρισκομένης.
Δεῖ δὴ λαμβάνειν τὴν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς προγινομένην ἔγγιστα συζυγίαν, ἐάν τε σύνοδος ᾖ ἐάν τε πανσέληνος, καὶ τὴν μοῖραν ἀκριβῶς διασκεψαμένους συνόδου μὲν οὔσης τὴν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν φώτων, πανσελήνου δὲ τὴν τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν αὐτῶν ὄντος κατὰ τὸν χρόνον τῆς ἐκτροπῆς, ἰδεῖν τοὺς πρὸς αὐτὴν οἰκοδεσποτικὸν ἔχοντας λόγον τῶν ἀστέρων τοῦ τρόπου καθόλου τοῦ κατὰ τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν ἐν πέντε τούτοις θεωρουμένου, τριγώνῳ τε καὶ οἴκῳ καὶ ὑψώματι καὶ ὁρίῳ καὶ φάσει ἢ συσχηματισμῷ, τουτέστιν ὅταν ἕν τι ἢ πλείονα τούτων ἢ καὶ πάντα ὁ ζητούμενος ἔχῃ τόπος πρὸς τὸν μέλλοντα οἰκοδεσποτήσειν.
Ἐὰν μὲν οὖν ἕνα πρὸς ταῦτα πάντα ἢ τὰ πλεῖστα οἰκείως διακείμενον εὑρίσκωμεν, ἣν ἂν ἐπέχῃ μοῖραν οὗτος ἀκριβῶς καθ’ ὃ παροδεύει δωδεκατημόριον ἐν τῷ τῆς ἐκτροπῆς χρόνῳ, τὴν ἰσάριθμον αὐτῇ κρινοῦμεν ἀνατέλλειν ἐν τῷ διὰ τῆς τῶν ἀναφορῶν πραγματείας εὑρημένῳ ἐγγυτέρῳ δωδεκατημορίῳ, ἐὰν δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους συνοικοδεσποτοῦντας, οὗ ἂν αὐτῶν ἡ κατὰ τὴν ἐκτροπὴν μοιρικὴ πάροδος ἐγγύτερον ἔχῃ τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῇ κατὰ τὰς ἀναφορὰς ἀνατελλούσῃ, τούτου τῇ ποσότητι τῶν μοιρῶν χρησόμεθα, εἰ δὲ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους ἐγγὺς εἶεν τῷ ἀριθμῷ, τῷ μᾶλλον ἔχοντι λόγον πρὸς τὰ κέντρα, ἢ καὶ τὴν αἵρεσιν κατακολουθήσομεν.
Ἐὰν μέντοι πλείων ᾖ ἡ ἀπόστασις τῶν τῆς οἰκοδεσποτείας μοιρῶν πρὸς τὴν κατὰ τὸ ὁλοσχερὲς ὡροσκοπεῖον, ἤπερ πρὸς τὴν κατὰ τὸ ὅμοιον μεσουράνημα τῷ αὐτῷ ἀριθμῷ πρὸς τὴν μεσουρανοῦσαν μοῖραν καταχρησάμενοι διὰ ταύτης καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν κέντρων διαστησόμεθα.
3. Of the Degree of the Horoscopic Point
Difficulty often arises with regard to the first and most important fact, that is, the fraction of the hour of the birth; for in general only observation by means of horoscopic astrolabes 5 at the time of birth can for scientific observers give the minute of the hour, while practically all other horoscopic instruments on which the majority of the more careful practitioners rely are frequently capable of error, the solar instruments by the occasional shifting of their positions or of their gnomons 6, and the water clocks by stoppages and irregularities in the flow of the water from different causes and by mere chance. It would therefore be necessary that an account first be given how one might, by natural and consistent reasoning, discover the degree of the zodiac which should be rising, given the degree of the known hour nearest the event, which is discovered by the method of ascensions 7.
We must, then, take the syzygy 8 most recently preceding the birth, whether it be a new moon or a full moon; and, likewise having ascertained the degree accurately, of both the luminaries if it is a new moon, and if it is a full moon that of the one of them that is above the earth, we must see what stars rule it at the time of the birth 9. In general the mode of domination is considered as falling under these live forms: when it is trine, house, exaltation, term, and phase or aspect; that is, whenever the place in question is related in one or several or all of these ways to the star that is to be the ruler.
If, then, we discover that one star is familiar with the degree in all or most of these respects, whatever degree this star by accurate reckoning occupies in the sign through which it is passing, we shall judge that the corresponding degree is rising at the time of the nativity in the sign which is found to be closest by the method of ascensions 10. But if we discover two or more corulers, we shall use the number of degrees shown by whichever of them is, at the time of birth, passing through the degree that is closer to that which is rising according to the ascensions. But if two or more are close in the number of degrees, we shall follow the One which is most nearly related to the centres and the sect.
If, however, the distance of the degree occupied by the ruler from that of the general horoscope is greater than its distance from that of the corresponding mid-heaven, we shall use this same number to constitute the midheaven and thereby establish the other angles 11.
4. Διαίρεσις γενεθλιαλογίας
Τούτων δὴ προεκτεθειμένων εἴ τις αὐτῆς τῆς τάξεως ἕνεκεν διαιροίη τὸ καθόλου τῆς γενεθλιαλογικῆς θεωρίας, εὕροι ἂν τῶν κατὰ φύσιν καὶ δυνατῶν καταλήψεων τὴν μὲν τῶν πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως οὖσαν συμπτωμάτων μόνον ὡς τὴν τοῦ περὶ γονέων λόγου, τὴν δὲ τῶν καὶ πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως καὶ μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν, ὡς τὴν τοῦ περὶ ἀδελφῶν λόγου, τὴν δὲ τῶν κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν οὐκέθ’ οὕτως μίαν οὖσαν οὐδὲ ἁπλῆν, τελευταίαν δὲ τὴν τῶν μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν πολυμερεστέραν καὶ ταύτην θεωρουμένην.
Ἔστι δὲ τῶν μὲν κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν ἐπιζητουμένων ὅ τε περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν λόγος καὶ ὁ περὶ διδυμογόνων ἢ πλειστογόνων καὶ ὁ περὶ τεράτων καὶ ὁ περὶ ἀτρόφων, τῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν ὅ τε περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς, ἐπειδήπερ οὐ συνῆπται τῷ περὶ ἀτρόφων, ἔπειτα ὁ περὶ μορφῆς σώματος καὶ ὁ περὶ παθῶν ἢ σινῶν σωματικῶν, ἑξῆς δὲ ὁ περὶ ψυχῆς ποιότητος καὶ ὁ περὶ παθῶν ψυχικῶν, ἔπειθ’ ὁ περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς καὶ ὁ περὶ τύχης ἀξιωματικῆς μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ὁ περὶ πράξεως ποιότητος, εἶτα ὁ περὶ συμβιώσεως γαμικῆς καὶ ὁ περὶ τεκνοποιίας καὶ ὁ περὶ συνεπιπλοκῶν καὶ συναρμογῶν καὶ φίλων, ἑξῆς δ’ ὁ περὶ ξενιτειῶν, τελευταῖος δὲ ὁ περὶ τῆς τοῦ θανάτου ποιότητος, τῇ μὲν δυνάμει συνοικειούμενος τῷ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς, τῇ τάξει δ’ εἰκότως ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις τιθέμενος.
Ὑπὲρ ὧν ἑκάστου κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες ποιησόμεθα τὴν ὑφήγησιν, αὐτὰς τὰς τῆς ἐπισκέψεως πραγματείας μετὰ ψιλῶν τῶν ποιητικῶν δυνάμεων, ὡς ἔφαμεν, ἐκτιθέμενοι, καὶ τὰ μὲν περιέργως ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν φλυαρούμενα καὶ μὴ πιθανὸν ἔχοντα λόγον πρὸς τὰς ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης φύσεως αἰτίας παραπεμπόμενοι, τὰ δὲ ἐνδεχομένην ἔχοντα τὴν κατάληψιν οὐ διὰ κλήρων καὶ ἀριθμῶν ἀναιτιολογήτων, ἀλλὰ δι’ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν σχηματισμῶν πρὸς τοὺς οἰκείους τόπους θεωρίας ἐπισκεπτόμενοι, καθόλου μέντοι καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων ἁπλῶς, ἵνα μὴ καθ’ ἕκαστον εἶδος ταυτολογῶμεν.
Πρῶτον μὲν χρὴ σκοπεῖν τὸν οἰκειούμενον τόπον τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ τῷ ζητουμένῳ τῆς γενέσεως κατ’ εἶδος κεφαλαίῳ, καθάπερ λόγου ἕνεκεν, τῷ περὶ πράξεων τὸν τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἢ τῷ περὶ πατρὸς τὸν ἡλιακόν, ἔπειτα θεωρεῖν τοὺς λόγον ἔχοντας πρὸς τὸν ὑποκείμενον τόπον τῶν ἀστέρων οἰκοδεσποτείας καθ’ οὓς ἐπάνω προείπομεν πέντε τρόπους, κἂν μὲν εἷς ᾖ ὁ κατὰ πάντας κύριος τούτῳ διδόναι τὴν ἐκείνης τῆς προτελέσεως οἰκοδεσποτείαν, ἐὰν δὲ δύο ἢ τρεῖς, τοῖς τὰς πλείους ἔχουσι ψήφους, μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα πρὸς μὲν τὸ ποῖον τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος σκοπεῖν τάς τε αὐτῶν τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων φύσεις καὶ τὰς τῶν δωδεκατημορίων, ἐν οἷς εἰσιν αὐτοί τε καὶ οἱ συνοικειούμενοι τόποι, πρὸς δὲ τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῶν σκοπεῖν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν, πότερον ἐνεργῶς τυγχάνουσι διακείμενοι κατά τε αὐτὸ τὸ κοσμικὸν καὶ τὸ κατὰ τὴν γένεσιν ἢ τὸ ἐναντίον·
Δραστικώτατοι μὲν γάρ εἰσιν, ὅταν κοσμικῶς μὲν ἐν ἰδίοις ἢ ἐν οἰκείοις ὦσι τόποις, καὶ πάλιν ὅταν ἀνατολικοὶ τυγχάνωσι καὶ προσθετικοὶ τοῖς ἀριθμοῖς, κατὰ γένεσιν δέ, ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν κέντρων ἢ τῶν ἐπαναφορῶν παροδεύωσι, καὶ μάλιστα τῶν πρώτων· λέγω δὲ τῶν τε κατὰ τὰς ἀναφορὰς καὶ τὰς μεσουρανήσεις· ἀδρανέστατοι δέ, ὅταν κοσμικῶς μὲν ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις ἢ ἀνοικείοις ὦσι τόποις, καὶ δυτικοὶ ἢ ἀναποδιστικοὶ τοῖς δρόμοις ὦσι, κατὰ γένεσιν δέ, ὅταν ἀποκλίνωσι τῶν κέντρων· πρὸς δὲ τὸν καθόλου χρόνον τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος, πότερον ἑῷοί εἰσιν ἢ ἑσπέριοι πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον, ἐπειδήπερ τὰ μὲν προηγούμενα ἑκατέρου αὐτῶν τεταρτημόρια καὶ τὰ διάμετρα τούτοις ἑῷα γίνεται, τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ καὶ ἑπόμενα ἑσπέρια, καὶ πότερον ἐπὶ τῶν κέντρων τυγχάνουσιν ἢ τῶν ἐπαναφορῶν× ἑῷοι μὲν γὰρ ὄντες ἢ ἐπίκεντροι κατ’ ἀρχὰς γίνονται δραστικώτεροι, ἑσπέριοι δὲ ἢ ἐπὶ τῶν ἐπαναφορῶν βραδύτεροι.
4. The Subdivision of the Science of Nativities
After this preface, should any one simply for the sake of order attempt to subdivide the whole field of genethlialogical science, he would find that, of all the natural and possible predictions, one division concerns solely events preceding the birth, such as the account of the parents; another deals with events both before and after the birth, such as the account of brothers and sisters; another, with events at the very time of the birth, a subject which is no longer so unitary and simple; and finally that which treats of post-natal matters, which is likewise more complex in its theoretical development 12.
Among the subjects contemporary with the birth into which inquiry is made are those of sex, of twins or multiple births, of monsters, and of children that cannot be reared. To those dealing with post-natal events belong the account of the length of life, for this is not attached to the account of children that cannot be reared; second, that of the form of the body and that of bodily illnesses and injuries; next, that of the quality of the mind and illnesses of the mind; then that which concerns fortune, both in the matter of possessions and in that of dignities; and after this the account of the quality of action; then that of marriage and of the begetting of children, and that of associations, agreements, and friends; following comes the account of journeys, and finally that of the quality of death, which is potentially akin to the inquiry about the length of life, but in order is reasonably placed at the end of all these subjects.
We shall sketch each of these subjects briefly, explaining, as we said before, together with the effective powers by themselves, the actual procedure of investigation; as for the nonsense on which many waste their labour and of which not even a plausible account can be given, this we shall dismiss in favour of the primary natural causes. What, however, admits of prediction we shall investigate, not by means of Lots and numbers of which no reasonable explanation can be given, but merely through the science of the aspects of the stars to the places with which they have familiarity, in general terms, however, which are applicable to absolutely all cases, that we may avoid the repetition involved in the discussion of particular cases.
In the first place, we should examine that place of the zodiac which is pertinent to the specific heading of the geniture which is subject to query; for example, the mid-heaven, for the query about action, or the place of the sun for the question about the father; then we must observe those planets which have the relation of rulership to the place in question by the five ways aforesaid 13; and if one planet is lord in all these ways, we must assign to him the rulership of that prediction; if two or three, we must assign it to those which have the more claims. After this, to determine the quality of the prediction, we must consider the natures of the ruling planets themselves and of the signs in which are the planets themse1ves, and the places familiar to them. For the magnitude of the event we must examine their power 14 and observe whether they are actively situated both in the cosmos itself and in the nativity 15, or the reverse;
For they are most effective when, with respect to the cosmos, they are in their own or in familiar regions, and again when they are rising and are increasing in their numbers 16; and, with respect to the nativity, whenever they are passing through the angles or signs that rise after them 17, and especially the principal of these, by which I mean the signs ascendant and culminating. They are weakest, with respect to the universe, when they are in places belonging to others or those unrelated to them, and when they are occidental or retreating in their course; and, with respect to the nativity, when they are declining from the angles. For the time of the predicted event in general we must observe whether they are oriental or occidental to the sun and to the horoscope; for the quadrants which precede each of them and those which are diametrically opposite are oriental, and the others, which follow, are occidental. Also we must observe whether they are at the angles or in the succedent signs; for if they are oriental or at the angles they are more effective at the beginning; if they are occidental or in the succeeding signs they are slower to take action.
5. Περὶ γονέων
Ὁ μὲν οὖν προηγούμενος τύπος τῆς κατ’ εἶδος ἐπισκέψεως, οὗ διὰ παντὸς ἔχεσθαι προσήκει, τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον· ἀρξόμεθα δὲ ἤδη κατὰ τὴν ἐκκειμένην τάξιν ἀπὸ πρώτου τοῦ περὶ γονέων λόγου. Ὁ μὲν τοίνυν ἥλιος καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ τῷ πατρικῷ προσώπῳ συνοικειοῦνται κατὰ φύσιν, ἡ δὲ σελήνη καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τῷ μητρικῷ, καὶ ὅπως ἂν οὗτοι διακείμενοι τυγχάνωσι πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους, τοιαῦτα δεῖ καὶ τὰ περὶ τοὺς γονέας ὑπονοεῖν.
Τὰ μὲν γὰρ περὶ τῆς τύχης καὶ κτήσεως αὐτῶν ἐπισκεπτέον ἐκ τῆς δορυφορίας τῶν φώτων, ἐπειδήπερ περιεχόμενα μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιεῖν δυναμένων καὶ τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως ἤτοι ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς ζῳδίοις ἢ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς ἐπιφανῆ καὶ λαμπρὰ τὰ περὶ τοὺς γονέας διασημαίνει, καὶ μάλιστα ὅταν τὸν μὲν ἥλιον ἑῷοι δορυφορῶσιν ἄστερες, τὴν δὲ σελήνην ἑσπέριοι, καλῶς καὶ αὐτοὶ διακείμενοι, καθ’ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον· ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ αὐτοὶ τυγχάνωσιν ἀνατολικοί τε καὶ ἰδιοπροσωποῦντες ἢ καὶ ἐπίκεντροι, εὐδαιμονίαν πρόδηλον ὑπονοητέον κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον ἑκατέρου τῶν γονέων.
Τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον, ἐὰν κενοδρομοῦντα ᾖ τὰ φῶτα καὶ ἀδορυφόρητα τυγχάνοντα, ταπεινότητος καὶ ἀδοξίας τοῖς γονεῦσί ἐστι δηλωτικά, καὶ μάλιστα ὅταν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἢ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου κακῶς φαίνωνται διακείμενοι. Ἐὰν δὲ δορυφορῆται μέν, μὴ μέντοι ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως, ὡς ὅταν Ἄρης μὲν ἐπαναφέρηται τῷ ἡλίῳ, Κρόνος δὲ τῇ σελήνῃ μήπως καλῶς κειμένων τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν καὶ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἵρεσιν, μετριότητα καὶ ἀνωμαλίαν περὶ τὸν βίον αὐτῶν ὑπονοητέον.
Κἂν μὲν σύμφωνος ᾖ ὁ διασημανθησόμενος τῆς τύχης κλῆρος ἐν τῇ γενέσει τοῖς τὸν ἥλιον ἢ τὴν σελήνην ἐπὶ καλῷ δορυφορήσασι, παραλήψονται σῷα τὰ τῶν γονέων, ἐὰν δὲ ἀσύμφωνος ᾖ ἢ ἐναντίος μηδενὸς ἢ τῶν κακοποιῶν εἰληφότων τὴν δορυφορίαν, ἄχρηστος αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐπιβλαβὴς ἡ τῶν γονέων ἔσται κτῆσις.
Περὶ δὲ πολυχρονιότητος ἢ ὀλιγοχρονιότητος αὐτῶν σκεπτέον ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων συσχηματισμῶν· ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ πατρός, ἐὰν ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ἢ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συσχηματισθῶσιν ὁπωσδήποτε τῷ τε ἡλίῳ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου σύμφωνον ἔχῃ σχηματισμὸν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον ἤτοι συνὼν ἢ ἑξαγωνίζων ἢ τριγωνίζων, ἐν δυνάμει μὲν ὄντων αὐτῶν πολυχρονιότητα τοῦ πατρὸς καταστοχαστέον, ἀδυνατούντων δὲ οὐχ ὁμοίως, οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ ὀλιγοχρονιότητα.
Ἐὰν δὲ τοῦτο μὲν μὴ ὑπάρχῃ, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως καθυπερτερήσῃ τὸν ἥλιον ἢ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου ἢ καὶ ἐπανενεχθῇ αὐτοῖς, ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς πάλιν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου μὴ σύμφωνος ᾖ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον, ἀλλ’ ἤτοι τετράγωνος ἢ διάμετρος, ἀποκεκλικότες μὲν τῶν κέντρων ἀσθενικοὺς μόνον τοὺς πατέρας ποιοῦσιν, ἐπίκεντροι δὲ ἢ ἐπαναφερόμενοι τοῖς κέντροις ὀλιγοχρονίους ἢ ἐπισινεῖς, ὀλιγοχρονίους μέν, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις ὦσι δυσὶ κέντροις τῷ τε ἀνατέλλοντι καὶ τῷ μεσουρανοῦντι καὶ ταῖς τούτων ἐπαναφοραῖς, ἐπισινεῖς δὲ ἢ ἐπινόσους, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς λοιποῖς δυσὶ κέντροις ὦσι τῷ τε δύνοντι καὶ τῷ ὑπογείῳ ἢ ταῖς τούτων ἐπαναφοραῖς.
Ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Ἄρεως τὸν ἥλιον βλέψας, καθ’ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον, αἰφνιδίως ἀναιρεῖ τὸν πατέρα ἢ σίνη περὶ τὰς ὄψεις ποιεῖ, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου βλέψας ἢ θανάτοις ἢ ῥιγοπυρέτοις ἢ σίνεσι διὰ τομῶν καὶ καύσεων περικυλίει· ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ αὐτὸς κακῶς σχηματισθεὶς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τοὺς θανάτους τοὺς πατρικοὺς ἐπινόσους κατασκευάζει καὶ πάθη τὰ διὰ τῆς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεως.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς μητρός, ἐὰν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Διὸς συσχηματισθῇ τῇ τε σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ὁπωσδήποτε, ἢ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συμφώνως ἔχῃ πρὸς τὴν σελήνην ἑξάγωνος ὢν ἢ τρίγωνος ἢ συνὼν αὐτῇ, ἐν δυνάμει ὄντες πολυχρόνιον δεικνύουσι τὴν μητέρα· ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως βλέψῃ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τὴν Ἀφροδίτην ἐπανενεχθεὶς ἢ τετραγωνίσας ἢ διαμετρήσας ἢ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν σελήνην μόνην ὡσαύτως, ἀφαιρετικοὶ μὲν ὄντες ἢ ἀποκεκλικότες πάλιν ἀντιπτώμασι μόνον ἢ ἀσθενείαις περικυλίουσι, προσθετικοὶ δὲ ἢ ἐπίκεντροι ὀλιγοχρονίους ἢ ἐπισινεῖς ποιοῦσι τὰς μητέρας, ὀλιγοχρονίους μὲν ὁμοίως ἐπὶ τῶν ἀπηλιωτικῶν ὄντες κέντρων ἢ ἐπαναφορῶν, ἐπισινεῖς δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν δυτικῶν.
Ἄρης μὲν γὰρ βλέψας τὴν σελήνην τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἀνατολικὴν μὲν οὖσαν τούς τε θανάτους τοὺς μητρικοὺς αἰφνιδίους καὶ τὰ σίνη περὶ τὰς ὄψεις ποιεῖ, ἀποκρουστικὴν δὲ τοὺς θανάτους ἀπὸ ἐκτρωσμῶν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων καὶ τὰ σίνη διὰ τομῶν καὶ καύσεων, τὴν δὲ Ἀφροδίτην βλέψας τούς τε θανάτους πυρεκτικοὺς ἀπεργάζεται καὶ πάθη τὰ δι’ ἀποκρύφων καὶ σκοτισμῶν καὶ προσδρόμων αἰφνιδίων· ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν σελήνην βλέψας θανάτους καὶ πάθη ποιεῖ, ἀνατολικῆς μὲν οὔσης αὐτῆς διὰ ῥιγοπυρέτων, ἀποκρουστικῆς δὲ διὰ νόσων ὑστερικῶν καὶ ἀναβρώσεων.
Προσπαραληπτέον δὲ εἰς τὰ κατὰ μέρος εἴδη τῶν σινῶν ἢ παθῶν ἢ καὶ θανάτων καὶ τὰς τῶν δωδεκατημορίων, ἐν οἷς εἰσιν οἱ τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιοῦντες τῆς ἰδιοτροπίας, ὑπὲρ ὧν εὐκαιρότερον ἐν τοῖς περὶ αὐτῆς τῆς γενέσεως ἐπεξεργασόμεθα· καὶ ἔτι παρατηρητέον ἡμέρας μὲν μάλιστα τόν τε ἥλιον καὶ τὴν Ἀφροδίτην, νυκτὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὴν σελήνην. Λοιπὸν δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν κατ’ εἶδος ἐξεργασιῶν ἁρμόζον καὶ ἀκόλουθον ἂν εἴη τὸν τῆς αἱρέσεως πατρικὸν ἢ μητρικὸν τόπον ὥσπερ ὡροσκόπον ὑποστησαμένους τὰ λοιπὰ ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως αὐτῶν τῶν γονέων ἐπισκοπεῖν κατὰ τὰς ἐφεξῆς ὑποδειχθησομένας τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων εἰδῶν πραγματικάς τε καὶ συμβατικὰς ἐφόδους.
Τοῦ μέντοι συγκρατικοῦ τρόπου καὶ ἐνταῦθα καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων μεμνῆσθαι προσήκει καταστοχαζομένους, ἐὰν μὴ μονοειδεῖς ἀλλὰ διάφοροι ἢ τῶν ἐναντίων ποιητικοὶ τυγχάνωσιν οἱ τὰς κυρίας τῶν ἐπιζητουμένων τόπων εἰληφότες ἀστέρες, τίνες ἐκ τῶν περὶ ἕκαστον συμβεβηκότων πρὸς δύναμιν πλεονεκτημάτων πλείους ἔχοντες εὑρίσκονται ψήφους πρὸς τὴν ἐπικράτησιν τῶν ἀποτελεσθησομένων, ἵνα ἢ ταῖς τούτων φύσεσιν ἀκόλουθον ποιώμεθα τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν ἢ τῶν ψήφων ἰσορρόπων οὐσῶν, ὅταν μὲν ἅμα ὦσιν οἱ ἐπικρατοῦντες, τὸ ἐκ τῆς κράσεως τῶν διαφόρων φύσεων συναγόμενον εὐστόχως ἐπιλογιζώμεθα, ὅταν δὲ διεστηκότες, ἀνὰ μέρος ἕκαστος, κατὰ τοὺς ἰδίους καιροὺς τὰ οἰκεῖα τῶν συμπτωμάτων ἀπομερίζωμεν, προτέροις μὲν τοῖς ἑῴοις μᾶλλον, ὑστέροις δὲ τοῖς ἑσπερίοις.
Ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς μὲν γὰρ ἀνάγκη συνοικειωθῆναι τῷ ζητουμένῳ τόπῳ τὸν μέλλοντά τι περὶ αὐτὸν ἀπεργάζεσθαι τῶν ἀστέρων, καὶ τούτου μὴ συμβεβηκότος, οὐδὲν οἷόν τε καθόλου διαθεῖναι τὸν μηδ’ ὅλως τῆς ἀρχῆς κοινωνήσαντα τοῦ μέντοι χρόνου τῆς κατὰ τὸ ἀποτελούμενον ἐκβάσεως οὐκέτι τὸ τῆς πρώτης δεσποτείας αἴτιον, ἀλλ’ ἡ τοῦ κυριεύσαντός πως πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὰς τοῦ κόσμου γωνίας διάστασις.
5. Of Parents
The guiding style of the specific inquiry, to which we should adhere throughout, runs after this fashion. We shall now, therefore, begin, following the order just stated, with the account of parents, which comes first. Now the sun and Saturn are by nature associated with the person of the father and the moon and Venus with that of the mother, and as these may be disposed with respect to each other and the other stars, such must we suppose to be the affairs of the parents.
Now the question of their fortune and wealth must be investigated by means of the attendance 18 upon the luminaries; for when they are surrounded by planets that can be of benefit and by planets of their own sect, either in the same signs or in the next following, they signify that the circumstances of the parents will be conspicuously brilliant, particularly if morning stars attend the sun and evening stars the moon, while the luminaries themselves are favourably placed in the way already described 19. But if both Saturn and Venus, likewise, happen to be in the orient and in their proper faces 20, or at the angles, we must understand it to be a prediction of conspicuous happiness, in accordance with what is proper and fitting for each parent.
But, on the other hand, if the luminaries are proceeding alone and without attendants, they are indicative of low station and obscurity for the parents, particularly whenever Venus or Saturn do not appeal in a favourable position. If, however, they are attended, but not by planets of the same sect, as when Mars rises close after the sun or Saturn after the moon, or if they are attended by beneficent planets which are in an unfavourable position and not of the same sect, we must understand that a moderate station and changing fortunes in life are predicted for them.
And if the Lot of Fortune 21, of which we shall make an explanation, is in agreement in the nativity with the planets which in favourable position attend the sun or the moon, the children will receive the patrimony intact; if, however, it is in disagreement or opposition, and if no planet attends, or the maleficent planets are in attendance, the estate of the parents will be useless to the children and even harmful.
With regard to the length or the shortness of their life one must inquire from the other configurations. For in the father’s case, if Jupiter or Venus is in any aspect whatever to the sun and to Saturn, or if Saturn himself is in an harmonious aspect to the sun, either conjunction, sextile, or trine, both being in power, we must conjecture long life for the father; if they are weak, however, the significance is not the same, though it does not indicate a short life.
If, however, this condition is not present, but Mars overcomes 22 the sun or Saturn, or rises in succession to them, or when again Saturn is not in accord with the sun but is either in quartile or in opposition, if they are declining from the angles, they merely make the fathers weak, but if they are at the angles or rising after them, they make them short-lived or liable to injury: short-lived when they are upon the first two angles, the orient and the mid-heaven, and the succedent signs, and liable to injury or disease when they are in the other two angles, the occident and lower mid-heaven, or their succedent signs.
For Mars, regarding the sun in the way described 23, destroys the father suddenly or causes injuries to his sight; if he thus regards Saturn he puts him in peril of death or of chills and fever or of injury by cutting and cauterizing. Saturn himself in an unfavourable aspect to the sun still brings about the father’s death by disease and illnesses caused by gatherings of humours.
In the case of the mother, if Jupiter is in any aspect whatever to the moon and to Venus, or if Venus herself is concordant with the moon, in sextile, trine, or conjunction, when they are in power, they signify long life for the mother. If, however, Mars regards the moon or Venus, rising after her or in quartile or in opposition, or if Saturn similarly regards the moon by herself, when they are diminishing or declining, again they merely threaten with misfortune or sickness; but if they are increasing or angular, they make the mothers short-lived or subject to injury. They make them short-lived similarly when they are at the eastern angles or the signs that rise after them, and liable to injury when they are at the western angles.
For when Mars in this way regards the waxing moon, it brings about sudden death and injury of the eyesight for the mothers; but if the moon is waning, death from abortions or the like, and injury from cutting and cauterizing. If he regards Venus, he causes death by fever, mysterious and obscure illnesses, and sudden attacks of disease. Saturn regarding the moon causes death and illnesses, when the moon is in the orient, by chills and fever; when she is in the occident, by uterine ulcers and cancers.
We must take into consideration, also, with reference to the particular kinds of injuries, diseases, or deaths, the special characters of the signs in which are the planets which produce the cause, with which we shall find more appropriate occasion to deal in the discussion of the nativity itself 24, and furthermore we must observe by day particularly the sun and Venus, and by night Saturn and the moon. For the rest, in carrying out these particular inquiries, it would be fitting and consistent to set up the paternal or maternal place of the sect as a horoscope 25 and investigate the remaining topics as though it were a nativity of the parents themselves, following the procedure for the investigation of the general classifications, both practical and casual, the headings of which will be set forth in the following.
However, both here and everywhere it is well to recall the mode of mixture of the planets, and, if it happens that the planets which rule the places under inquiry are not of one kind but different, or bring about opposite effects, we should aim to discover which ones have most claims, from the ways in which they happen to exceed in power in a particular case, to the rulership of the predicted events. This is in order that we may either guide our inquiry by the natures of these planets, or, if the claims of more than one are of equal weight, when the rulers are together, we may successfully calculate the combined result of the mixture of their different natures; but when they are separated; that we may assign to each in turn at their proper times the events which belong to them, first to the more oriental among them and then to the occidental.
For a planet must from the beginning have familiarity with the place about which the inquiry is made, if it is going to exercise any effect upon it, and in general, if this is not the case, a planet which had no share whatsoever in the beginning can exert no great influence; of the time of the occurrence of the event, however, the original dominance is no longer the cause, but the distance of the planet which dominates in any way from the sun and from the angles of the universe.
6. Περὶ ἀδελφῶν
Ὁ μὲν οὖν περὶ γονέων τόπος σχεδὸν καὶ ἀπὸ τούτων ἂν ἡμῖν γένοιτο καταφανής, ὁ δὲ περὶ ἀδελφῶν εἴ τις καὶ ἐνταῦθα τὸ καθόλου μόνον ἐξετάζοιτο καὶ μὴ πέρα τοῦ δυνατοῦ τόν τε ἀριθμὸν ἀκριβῶς καὶ κατὰ μέρος ἐπιζητοίη, λαμβάνοιτο ἂν φυσικώτερον ὅ τε περὶ ὁμομητρίων μόνον ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος δωδεκατημορίου τοῦ μητρικοῦ τόπου, τουτέστι τοῦ περιέχοντος ἡμέρας μὲν τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, νυκτὸς δὲ τὴν σελήνην, ἐπειδήπερ τοῦτο τὸ ζῴδιον καὶ τὸ ἐπαναφερόμενον αὐτῷ γίνεται τῆς μητρὸς ὁ περὶ τέκνων τόπος ὁ αὐτὸς ὀφείλων εἶναι τῷ τοῦ γινομένου περὶ ἀδελφῶν.
Ἐὰν μὲν οὖν ἀγαθοποιοὶ τῷ τόπῳ συσχηματίζωνται, δαψίλειαν ἀδελφῶν ἐροῦμεν πρός τε τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν τῶν ἀστέρων τὸν στοχασμὸν ποιούμενοι, καὶ πότερον ἐν μονοειδέσι ζῳδίοις τυγχάνουσι ἢ ἐν δισώμοις. ἐὰν δὲ οἱ κακοποιοὶ καθυπερτερῶσιν αὐτὸν ἢ καὶ ἐναντιωθῶσι κατὰ διάμετρον, σπαναδελφίας εἰσι δηλωτικοί, μάλιστα δὲ κἂν τὸν ἥλιον συμπαραλαμβάνωσι. Εἰ δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν κέντρων ἡ ἐναντίωσις γένοιτο, καὶ μάλιστα τοῦ ὡροσκοποῦντος, ἐπὶ μὲν Κρόνου καὶ πρωτότοκοι ἢ πρωτότροφοι γίγνονται, ἐπὶ δὲ Ἄρεως θανάτῳ τῶν λοιπῶν σπαναδελφοῦσιν.
Ἔτι μέντοι τῶν διδόντων ἀστέρων, ἐὰν μὲν καλῶς κατὰ τὸ κοσμικὸν τυγχάνωσι διακείμενοι, εὐσχήμονας καὶ ἐνδόξους ἡγητέον τοὺς διδομένους ἀδελφούς, ἐὰν δὲ ἐναντίως ταπεινοὺς καὶ ἀνεπιφάντους, ἐὰν δὲ καθυπερτερήσωσι τοὺς διδόντας ἢ ἐπανενεχθῶσιν αὐτοῖς οἱ κακοποιοὶ καὶ ὀλιγοχρονίους· δώσουσι δὲ τοὺς μὲν ἄρρενας οἱ κοσμικῶς ἠρρενωμένοι, τὰς δὲ θηλείας οἱ τεθηλυσμένοι, καὶ πάλιν τοὺς μὲν πρώτους οἱ ἀπηλιωτικώτεροι τοὺς δὲ ὑστέρους οἱ λιβικώτεροι. Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἐὰν οἱ διδόντες τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς συμφώνως ἐσχηματισμένοι τυγχάνωσι τῷ κυριεύοντι τοῦ περὶ τῶν ἀδελφῶν δωδεκατημορίου, προσφιλεῖς ποιήσουσι τοὺς διδομένους ἀδελφούς, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τῷ κλήρῳ τῆς τύχης, καὶ κοινωνοὺς βίου, ἐὰν δὲ ἐν τοῖς ἀσυνδέτοις τύχωσιν ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἐναντίαν στάσιν, φιλέχθρους καὶ φθονεροὺς καὶ ὡς ἐπίπαν ἐπιβουλευτικούς.
Λοιπὸν δὲ καὶ τὰ καθ’ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν εἴ τις ἐπιπολυπραγμονοίη, συνεικάζοιτο ἂν καὶ ἐνταῦθα πάλιν τοῦ διδόντος ἀστέρος ὑποτιθεμένου κατὰ τὸν ὡροσκοπικὸν λόγον καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως συνθεωρουμένων.
6. Of Brothers and Sisters
The preceding may perhaps have made clear the topic of the parents. As for that of brethren, if here too one examines only the general subject and does not carry beyond the bounds of possibility his inquiry as to the exact number and other particulars, it is more naturally to be taken, when it is a question of blood-brethren alone, from the culminating sign, the place of the mother 26, that is, that which contains by day Venus and by night the moon; for in this sign and that which succeeds it is the place of the children of the mother, which should be the same as the place of the brethren of the offspring.
If, then, beneficent planets bear an aspect to this place, we shall predict an abundance of brethren, basing our conjecture upon the number of the planets and whether they are in signs of a simple or of a bicorporeal form. But if the malevolent planets overcome them or oppose them in opposition, they signify a dearth of brethren, especially if they have the sun among them. If the opposition is at the angles, and especially at the horoscope 27, in case Saturn is in the ascendant, they are the first-born or the first to be reared; in case it is Mars, there is a small number of brethren by reason of the death of the others.
If the planets which give brethren are in a favourable mundane 28 position, we must believe that the brethren thereby given will be elegant and distinguished; if the reverse is the case, humble and inconspicuous. But if the maleficent planets overcome those that give brethren, or rise after them, the brethren will also be short-lived; and the male planets in the mundane sense 29 will give males, the female females; again, those farther to the east the first and those farther to the west the later-born. Besides this, if the planets that give brethren are in harmonious aspect with the planet that rules the place of brethren 30, they will make the given brethren friendly, and will also make them live together, if they are in harmonious aspect with the Lot of Fortune 31; but if they are in disjunct signs or in opposition, they will produce quarrelsome, jealous, and for the most part, scheming brethren.
Finally, if one would busy himself with further inquiries about details concerning individuals, he might in this case again make his conjecture by taking the planet which gives brethren as the horoscope and dealing with the rest as in a nativity.
7. Περὶ ἀρρενικῶν καὶ θηλυκῶν
Ὑπ’ ὄψιν ἤδη καὶ τοῦ περὶ ἀδελφῶν λόγου κατὰ τὸν ἁρμόζοντα καὶ φυσικὸν λόγον ἡμῖν γεγονότος ἑξῆς ἂν εἴη τῶν κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν ἄρξασθαι καὶ πρῶτον ἐπιδραμεῖν τὸν περὶ ἀρρενικῶν τε καὶ θηλυκῶν ἐπιλογισμόν. Θεωρεῖται δ’ οὗτος οὐ μονοειδῶς οὐδ’ ἀφ’ ἑνός τινος, ἀλλ’ ἀπό τε τῶν φώτων ἀμφοτέρων καὶ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου, τῶν τε λόγον ἐχόντων πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἀστέρων, μάλιστα μὲν κατὰ τὴν τῆς σπορᾶς διάθεσιν, ὁλοσχερέστερον δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς. Τὸ δ’ ὅλον παρατηρητέον, πότερον οἱ προειρημένοι τρεῖς τόποι καὶ οἱ τούτων οἰκοδεσποτοῦντες ἀστέρες ἅπαντες ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τυγχάνουσιν ἠρρενωμένοι πρὸς ἀρρενογονίαν ἢ τεθηλυσμένοι πρὸς θηλυγονίαν καὶ οὕτως ἀποφαντέον.
Διακριτέον μέντοι τοὺς ἠρρενωμένους καὶ τεθηλυσμένους, καθ’ ὃν ὑπεθέμεθα τρόπον ἐν ταῖς πινακικαῖς ἐκθέσεσιν ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς συντάξεως, ἀπό τε τῆς τῶν δωδεκατημορίων, ἐν οἷς εἰσι, φύσεως, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ ἔτι ἀπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν κόσμον σχέσεως, ἐπειδήπερ ἀπηλιωτικοὶ μὲν ὄντες ἀρρενοῦνται, λιβικοὶ δὲ θηλύνονται, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἀπὸ τῆς πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον, ἑῷοι μὲν γὰρ πάλιν ὄντες ἀρρενοῦνται, θηλύνονται δὲ ἑσπέριοι· δι’ ὧν πάντων τὴν κατὰ τὸ πλεῖστον ἐπικράτησιν τοῦ γένους προσήκει καταστοχάζεσθαι.
7. Of Males and Females
Now that the topic of brethren has been brought before our eyes in suitable and natural fashion, the next step would be to begin the discussion of matters directly concerned with the birth, and first to treat of the reckoning of males and females. This is determined by no simple theory based upon some one thing, but it depends upon the two luminaries, the horoscope, and the stars which bear some relation to them, particularly by their disposition at the time of conception, but more generally also by that at the time of the birth. The whole situation must be observed, whether the aforesaid three places and the planets which rule them are either all or the most of them masculine, to produce males, or feminine, to produce females, and to produce females, and on this basis the decision must be made.
We must however distinguish the male and the female planets in the way set forth by us in the tabular series in the beginning of this compilation 32, from the nature of the signs in which they are, and from the nature of the planets themselves, and furthermore from their position with reference to the universe, since they become masculine when they are in the east and feminine in the west; and besides, from their relation to the sun, for again when they rise in the morning they are made masculine, and feminine when they rise in the evening. By means of all these criteria one must conjecture what planet exercises preponderating control over the sex.
8. Περὶ διδυμογόνων
Καὶ περὶ τῶν γεννωμένων δὲ ὁμοίως ἀνὰ δύο ἢ καὶ πλειόνων τοὺς αὐτοὺς τόπους παρατηρεῖν προσήκει τουτέστι τάδε δύο φῶτα καὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον. Παρακολουθεῖν δὲ εἴωθε τοῦτο τὸ σύμπτωμα παρὰ τὰς κράσεις, ὅταν οἱ δύο ἢ καὶ οἱ τρεῖς τόποι δίσωμα περιέχωσι ζῴδια, καὶ μάλιστα, ὅταν καὶ οἱ οἰκοδεσποτίζοντες αὐτῶν ἀστέρες τὸ αὐτὸ πάθωσιν, ἤ τινες μὲν ἐν δισώμοις, τινὲς δὲ ἀνὰ δύο κείμενοι τυγχάνωσιν ἢ πλείους. Ἐπὰν δὲ καὶ ἐν δισώμοις ὦσιν οἱ κύριοι τόποι καὶ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ πλείονες τῶν ἀστέρων συνεσχηματισμένοι, τότε καὶ πλείονα τῶν δύο κυΐσκεσθαι συμπίπτει, τοῦ μὲν πλήθους ἀπὸ τοῦ τὸ ἰδίωμα ποιοῦντος ἀστέρος τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ συνεικαζομένου τοῦ δὲ γένους ἀπὸ τοῦ τῶν συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων τῷ τε ἡλίῳ καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ ὡροσκόπῳ προσώπου πρὸς ἀρρενογονίαν ἢ θηλυγονίαν κατὰ τοὺς ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν εἰρημένους τρόπους.
Ὅταν δὲ ἡ τοιαύτη διάθεσις μὴ συμπεριλαμβάνῃ τοῖς φωσὶ τὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου κέντρον ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, αἱ τοιαῦται τῶν μητέρων δίδυμα ὡς ἐπίπαν ἢ καὶ πλείονα κυΐσκουσιν· ἰδίως δὲ τρεῖς μὲν ἄρρενας πληροφοροῦσιν ὑπὸ τὴν τῶν Ἀνακτόρων γένεσιν ἅμα τοῖς προκειμένοις τόποις ἐν δισώμοις συσχηματισθέντες Κρόνος Ζεὺς Ἄρης, τρεῖς δὲ θηλείας ὑπὸ τὴν τῶν Χαρίτων Ἀφροδίτη σελήνη μεθ’ Ἑρμοῦ τεθηλυσμένου, δύο δὲ ἄρρενας καὶ μίαν θήλειαν ὑπὸ τὴν τῶν Διοσκούρων Κρόνος Ζεὺς Ἀφροδίτη, δύο δὲ θηλείας καὶ ἄρρενα ἕνα ὑπὸ τὴν Δήμητρος καὶ Κόρης Ἀφροδίτη, σελήνη, Ἄρης, ἐφ’ ὧν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ συμβαίνειν εἴωθε τό τε μὴ τελεσφορεῖσθαι τὰ γινόμενα καὶ τὸ μετὰ παρασήμων τινῶν σωματικῶν ἀποκυΐσκεσθαι καὶ ἔτι τὸ γίγνεσθαί τινα τοῖς τόποις ἐξαίρετα καὶ ἀπροσδόκητα διὰ τὴς τῶν τοιούτων συμπτωμάτων ὥσπερ ἐπιφανείας.
8. Of Twins
Likewise with regard to the births of two or even more, it is fitting to observe the same two places, that is, the two luminaries and the horoscope. For such an event is apt to attend the intermixture 33 when either two or the three places 34 cover bicorporeal signs, and particularly when the same is true of the planets that rule them, or when some are in bicorporeal signs, and some are disposed in pairs or in larger groups. But when both the dominant places are in bicorporeal signs and most of the planets are similarly configurated, then it befalls that even more than two are conceived, for the number is conjectured from the star that causes the peculiar property of the number 35, and the sex from the aspects which the planets have with respect to the sun and the moon and the horoscope for the production of males or of females, in accordance with the ways stated above 36.
But whenever such an arrangement of the planets does not include the horoscopic angle with the luminaries, but rather that of the mid-heaven, mothers with such genitures generally conceive twins or even more; and in particular, they give multiple birth, to three males, by the geniture of the Kings 37, when Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are in bicorporeal signs and bear same aspect to the aforesaid places; and to three females, by the geniture of the Graces, when Venus and the moon, with Mercury made feminine, are so arranged; to two males and One female, by the geniture of the Dioscuri, when Saturn, Jupiter, and Venus are so ordered, and to two females and a male, by the geniture of Demeter and Korê 38, when Venus, the moon, and Mars are thus ordered. In these cases it generally happens that the children are not completely developed and are born with certain bodily marks, and again the governing places may bear certain unusual and surprising marks by reason of the divine manifestation, as it were, of such portents.
9. Περὶ τεράτων
Οὐκ ἀλλότριος δὲ τῆς προκειμένης σκέψεως οὐδ’ ὁ περὶ τῶν τεράτων λόγος. Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν τοιούτων τὰ μὲν φῶτα ἀποκεκλικότα ἢ ἀσύνδετα τῷ ὡροσκόπῳ κατὰ τὸ πλεῖστον εὑρίσκεται, τὰ δὲ κέντρα διειλημμένα ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν. Ὅταν οὖν τοιαύτη τις ὑπ’ ὄψιν πέσῃ διάθεσις, ἐπειδὴ γίνεται πολλάκις καὶ περὶ τὰς ταπεινὰς καὶ κακοδαίμονας γενέσεις, κἂν μὴ τερατώδεις ὦσιν, εὐθὺς ἐπισκοπεῖν προσήκει τὴν προγενομένην συζυγίαν συνοδικὴν ἢ πανσεληνιακὴν καὶ τὸν οἰκοδεσποτήσαντα ταύτης τε καὶ τῶν τῆς ἐκτροπῆς φώτων.
Ἐὰν γὰρ οἱ τῆς ἐκτροπῆς αὐτῶν τόποι καὶ ὁ τῆς σελήνης καὶ ὁ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου πάντες ἢ οἱ πλείονες ἀσύνδετοι τυγχάνωσιν ὄντες τῷ τῆς προγενομένης συζυγίας τόπῳ, τὸ γεννώμενον αἰνιγματῶδες ὑπονοητέον. Ἐὰν μὲν οὖν τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων τά τε φῶτα ἐν τετράποσιν ἢ θηριώδεσιν εὑρίσκηται ζῳδίοις καὶ οἱ δύο κεκεντρωμένοι τῶν κακοποιῶν, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἔσται τὸ γεννώμενον, μηδενὸς μὲν μαρτυροῦντος τοῖς φωσὶν τῶν ἀγαθαποιῶν τέλεον ἀνήμερον καὶ τῶν ἀγρίαν καὶ κακωτικὴν ἐχόντων φύσιν, μαρτυρούντων δὲ Διὸς ἢ Ἀφροδίτης τῶν ἐκθειαζομένων, οἷον κυνῶν ἢ αἰλούρων ἢ πιθήκων ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, Ἑρμοῦ δὲ τῶν εἰς χρείαν ἀνθρωπίνην, οἷον ὀρνίθων ἢ συῶν ἢ βοῶν ἢ αἰγῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων.
Ἐὰν δὲ ἐν ἀνθρωποειδέσι τὰ φῶτα καταλαμβάνηται τῶν ἄλλων ὡσαύτως ἐχόντων, ὑπ’ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ἢ παρ’ ἀνθρώποις ἔσται τὰ γεγενημένα, τέρατα δὲ καὶ αἰνιγματώδη, τῆς κατὰ τὸ ποῖον ἰδιότητος καὶ ἐνταῦθα συνορωμένης ἐκ τῆς τῶν ζῳδίων μορφώσεως, ἐν οἷς οἱ διειληφότες τὰ φῶτα ἢ τὰ κέντρα κακοποιοὶ τυγχάνουσι. Ἐὰν μὲν οὖν καὶ ἐνταῦθα μηδὲ εἷς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀστέρων προσμαρτυρῇ μηδενὶ τῶν προειρημένων τόπων, ἄλογα καὶ ὡς ἀληθῶς αἰνιγματώδη γίνεται τέλεον· ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ἢ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μαρτυρήσῃ, τιμώμενον καὶ εὔσχημον ἔσται τὸ τοῦ τέρατος ἴδιον, ὁποῖον περὶ τοὺς ἑρμαφροδίτους ἢ τοὺς καλουμένους ἁρποκρατικοὺς καὶ τοὺς τοιούτους εἴωθε συμβαίνειν, εἰ δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ μαρτυρήσῃ, μετὰ τούτων μὲν καὶ ἀποφθεγγομένους καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων ποριστικούς, μόνος δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ νωδοὺς καὶ κωφούς, εὐφυεῖς μέντοι καὶ πανούργους ἄλλως ἀπεργάζεται.
9. Of Monsters
The subject of monsters is not foreign to the present inquiry; for, in the first place, in such cases the luminaries are, found to be as far as possible removed from the horoscope or in no way related to it, and the angles 39 are separated by the maleficent planets. Whenever, then, such a disposition is observed, for it frequently occurs in humble and unlucky nativities, even though they are not the genitures of monsters, one should at once look for the last preceding new or full moon, and the lord of this and of the luminaries of the birth.
For if the places of the birth, of the moon, and of the horoscope, all or the majority of them, happen to be unrelated to the place of the preceding syzygy, it must be supposed that the child will be nondescript. Now if, under such conditions, the luminaries are found in four-footed or animal-shaped 40 signs, and the two maleficent planets are centred, the child will not even belong to the human race, but if no beneficent planet witnesses to the luminaries, but the maleficent planets do so, it will be completely savage, an animal with wild and harmful nature; but if Jupiter or Venus witness, it will be one of the kinds regarded as sacred, as for example dogs, cats 41, and the like; if Mercury witnesses, one of those that are of use to man, such as birds, swine, oxen, goats, and the like.
If the luminaries are found in signs of human form, but the other planets are disposed in the same way, what is born will be, indeed, of the human race or to be classed with humans, but monsters and nondescript in qualitative character, and their qualities in this case too are to be observed from the form of the signs in which the maleficent planets which separate the luminaries or the angles happen to be. Now if even in this case not one of the beneficent planets bears witness to any of the places mentioned, the offspring are entirely irrational and in the true sense of the word nondescript; but if Jupiter or Venus bears witness, the type of monster will be honoured and seemly, such as is usually the case with hermaphrodites or the so–called harpocratiacs 42, and the like. If Mercury should bear witness, along with the foregoing, this disposition produces prophets who also make money thereby; but when alone, Mercury makes them toothless and deaf and dumb, though otherwise clever and cunning.
10. Περὶ ἀτρόφων
Λοιποῦ δὲ ὄντος εἰς τὰ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν τοῦ περὶ ἀτρόφων λόγου προσήκει διαλαβεῖν, ὅτι πῇ μὲν ὁ τρόπος οὗτος ἔχεται τοῦ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς λόγου, ἐπειδὴ τὸ ζητούμενον εἶδος οὐκ ἀλλότριον ἑκατέρου, πῇ δὲ κεχώρισται παρὰ τὸ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν τῆς ἐπισκέψεως δύναμιν διαφέρειν πως. Ὁ μὲν γὰρ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς ἐπὶ τῶν ὅλως ἐχόντων χρόνους αἰσθητοὺς θεωρεῖται, τουτέστι μὴ ἐλάττονας ἡλιακῆς περιόδου μιᾶς· χρόνος γὰρ ἰδίως ὁ τοιοῦτος ἐνιαυτὸς καταλαμβάνεται, δυνάμει δὲ καὶ ὁ ἐλάττων τούτου, μῆνές εἰσι καὶ ἡμέραι καὶ ὧραι· ὁ δὲ περὶ τῶν ἀτρόφων ἐπὶ τῶν μηδ’ ὅλως φθανόντων ἐπὶ τὸν προκείμενον χρόνον ἀλλ’ ἐν τοῖς ἐλάττοσιν ἀριθμοῖς δι’ ὑπερβολὴν τῆς κακώσεως φθειρομένων.
Ἔνθεν κἀκεῖνος μὲν πολυμερεστέραν ἔχει τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν, οὗτος δὲ ὁλοσχερεστέραν. Ἁπλῶς γάρ, ἐάν τε κεκεντρωμένον ᾖ τὸ ἕτερον τῶν φώτων, καὶ τῶν κακοποιῶν ὁ ἕτερος συνῇ ἢ διαμηκίζῃ, ταῦτα δὲ μοιρικῶς καὶ κατ’ ἰσοσκελίαν μηδενὸς μὲν ἀγαθοποιοῦ συσχηματιζομένου, τοῦ δὲ οἰκοδεσπότου τῶν φώτων ἐν τοῖς τῶν κακοποιῶν τόποις κατειλημμένου, τὸ γεννώμενον οὐ τραφήσεται, παρ’ αὐτὰ δὲ ἕξει τὸ τέλος τῆς ζωῆς·
Ἐὰν δὲ μὴ κατ’ ἰσοσκελίαν μὲν τοῦτο συμβαίνῃ, ἀλλ’ ἐγγὺς ἐπαναφέρωνται τοῖς τῶν φώτων τόποις αἱ τῶν κακοποιῶν βολαί, δύο δὲ ὦσιν οἱ κακοποιοὶ καὶ ἤτοι τὸ ἕτερον τῶν φώτων ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα βλάπτοντες ἢ κατὰ ἐπαναφορὰν ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον ἢ ἐν μέρει τὸ ἕτερον ὁ ἕτερος, ἢ ὁ μὲν ἕτερος διαμετρῶν ὁ δὲ ἕτερος ἐπαναφερόμενος, καὶ οὕτως ἄχρονα γίνεται τοῦ πλήθους τῶν κακώσεων ἀφανίζοντος τὸ ἐκ τοῦ διαστήματος τῆς ἐπαναφορᾶς εἰς ἐπιμονὴν τῆς ζωῆς φιλάνθρωπον.
Βλάπτει δὲ ἐξαιρέτως κατὰ μὲν τὰς ἐπαναφορὰς ἥλιον μὲν ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως, σελήνην δὲ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, κατὰ δὲ τὰς διαμετρήσεις ἢ καθυπερτερήσεις ἀνάπαλιν ἥλιον μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, σελήνην δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως, καὶ μάλιστα, ἐὰν κατάσχωσι τοπικῶς ἤτοι τὰ φῶτα ἢ τὸν ὡροσκόπον οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες. Ἐὰν δὲ δύο τυγχάνωσι διαμετρήσεις ἐπικέντρων ὄντων τῶν φώτων καὶ τῶν κακοποιῶν κατ’ ἰσοσκελίαν, τότε καὶ νεκρὰ ἢ ἡμιθανῆ τίκτεται τὰ βρέφη.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐὰν μὲν ἀπόρροιαν ἀπό τινος τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἔχοντα τὰ φῶτα τυγχάνῃ ἢ καὶ ἄλλως αὐτοῖς ᾖ συνεσχηματισμένα τοῖς προηγουμένοις ἑαυτῶν μέρεσι μέντοι γε τὰς ἀκτῖνας αὐτῶν ἐπιφερόντων, ἐπιζήσεται τὸ τεχθὲν ἄχρι τοῦ τῶν μεταξὺ τῆς τε ἀφέσεως καὶ τοῦ τῶν ἐγγυτέρων τῶν κακοποιῶν ἀκτίνων ἀριθμοῦ τῶν μοιρῶν τοὺς ἴσους μῆνας ἢ ἡμέρας ἢ καὶ ὥρας πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος τῆς κακώσεως καὶ τὴν δύναμιν τῶν τὸ αἴτιον ποιούντων.
Ἐὰν δὲ αἱ μὲν τῶν κακοποιῶν ἀκτῖνες εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα φέρωνται τῶν φώτων, αἱ δὲ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα, τὸ γεννώμενον ἐκτεθὲν ἀναληφθήσεται καὶ ζήσεται, καὶ πάλιν, ἐὰν μὲν οἱ συσχηματισθέντες ἀγαθοποιοὶ καθυπερτερηθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν, εἰς κάκωσιν καὶ ὑποταγήν, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ καθυπετερήσωσιν, εἰς ὑποβολὴν ἄλλων γονέων.
Εἰ δὲ καὶ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν τις ἀνατολὴν ἢ συναφὴν ποιοῖτο τῇ σελήνῃ, τῶν δὲ κακοποιῶν ὑπὸ δύσιν τις εἴη, ὑπ’ αὐτῶν τῶν γονέων ἀναληφθήσεται. Κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν πλειστογονούντων, ἐὰν μὲν ὑπὸ δύσιν τις ᾖ τῶν κατὰ δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων, ἡμιθανές τε ἢ σάρκωμα καὶ ἀτελὲς τὸ γεννώμενον ἀποτεχθήσεται, ἐὰν δὲ ὑπὸ κακοποιῶν καθυπερτερῆται, ἄτροφον ἢ ἄχρονον ἔσται τὸ ὑπὸ τῆς κατ’ αὐτὸν αἰτίας συγγεγενημένον.
10. Of Children that are not Reared
As the account of children that are not reared 43 is still lacking in the discussion of matters related to the birth itself, it is fitting to see that in one way this procedure. is connected with the inquiry concerning length of life, for the question in each case is of the same kind; but in another way they are distinct, because there is a certain difference in the actual meaning of the inquiry. For the question of length of life considers those who in general endure for perceptible lengths of time, that is, not less than one circuit of the sun, and such a space is properly understood to be a year; but potentially also lesser periods than this, months and days and hours, are perceptible lengths of time. But the inquiry concerning children that are not reared refers to those who do not attain at all to “time” thus defined, but perish in something less than “time” through excess of the evil influence.
For this reason the investigation of the former question is more complex; but this is simpler. For it is merely the case that if one of the luminaries is angular 44 and one of the maleficent planets is in conjunction with it, or in opposition, both in degrees and with equality of distance 45, while no beneficent planet bears any aspect, and if the lord of the luminaries 46 is found in the places of the maleficent planets, the child that is born will not be reared, but will at once come to its end.
But if this comes about without the equality of distance, but the shafts of the maleficent planets succeed closely upon the places of the luminaries, and there are two maleficent planets, and if they afflict 47 either one or both of the luminaries either by succeeding them or by opposition, or if one afflicts one luminary and the other the other in turn, or if one afflicts by opposition and the other by succeeding the luminary, in this way too children are born that do not live; for the number of afflictions dispels all that is favourable to length of life because of the distance of the maleficent planet through its succession.
Mars especially afflicts the sun by succeeding it, and Saturn the moon; but conversely in opposition or in superior position Saturn afflicts the sun and Mars the moon, most of all if they occupy as rulers the places of the luminaries or of the horoscope. But if there chance to be two oppositions, when the luminaries are at the angles and the maleficent planets are in an isosceles configuration, then the infants are born dead or half-dead.
And in such circumstances, if the luminaries should chance to be removing from conjunction with one of the beneficent planets, or are in some other aspect to them, but nevertheless east their rays in the parts that precede them, the child that is born will live a number of months or days, or even hours, equal to the number of degrees between the prorogator 48 and the nearest rays of the maleficent planets, in proportion to the greatness of the affliction and the power of the planets ruling the cause.
But if the rays of the maleficent planets fall before the luminaries, and those of the beneficent behind them, the child that has been exposed will be taken up and will live. And again, if the maleficent planets overcome 49 the beneficent ones that bear an aspect upon the geniture, they will live to affliction and subjection; but if the beneficent planets overcome, they will live but as supposititious children of other parents; and if one of the beneficent planets should either be rising or applying 50 to the moon, while one of the maleficent planets is setting, they will be reared by their own parents.
And the same methods of judgement are to be used also in cases of multiple births. But if one of the planets that two by two or in larger groups bear an aspect to the geniture is at setting, the child will be born half-dead, or a mere lump of flesh, and imperfect. But if the maleficent planets overcome them, the infant born subject to this influence will not be reared or will not survive.
11. Περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς
Τῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν συμπτωμάτων ἡγεῖται μὲν ὁ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς λόγος, ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ τὸν ἀρχαῖον γελοῖόν ἐστι τὰ καθ’ ἕκαστα τῶν ἀποτελουμένων ἐφαρμόζειν τῷ μηδ’ ὅλως ἐκ τῆς τῶν βιωσίμων ἐτῶν ὑποστάσεως ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποτελεστικοὺς αὐτῶν χρόνους ἥξοντι. Θεωρεῖται δὲ οὗτος οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδ’ ἀπολελυμένως, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν κυριωτάτων τόπων ἐπικρατήσεως πολυμερῶς λαμβανόμενος.
Ἔστι δ’ ὁ μάλιστά τε συμφωνῶν ἡμῖν καὶ ἄλλως ἐχόμενος φύσεως τρόπος τοιοῦτος. Ἤρτηται μὲν γὰρ τὸ πᾶν ἔκ τε τῆς τῶν ἀφετικῶν τόπων διαλήψεως καὶ ἐκ τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐπικρατούντων καὶ ἔτι ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἢ ἀστέρων. Διακρίνεται δὲ τούτων ἕκαστον οὕτως.
Τόπους μὲν πρῶτον ἡγητέον ἀφετικοὺς ἐν οἷς εἶναι δεῖ πάντως τὸν μέλλοντα τὴν κυρείαν τῆς ἀφέσεως λαμβάνειν τό τε περὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον δωδεκατημόριον, ἀπὸ πέντε μοιρῶν τῶν προαναφερομένων αὐτοῦ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος μέχρι τῶν λοιπῶν καὶ ἐπαναφερομένων μοιρῶν εἴκοσι πέντε καὶ τὰς ταύταις ταῖς λ′ μοίραις δεξιὰς ἑξαγώνους τὰς τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ δαίμονος καὶ τετραγώνους τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος καὶ τριγώνους τοῦ καλουμένου θεοῦ καὶ διαμέτρους τοῦ δύνοντος, προκρινομένων καὶ ἐν τούτοις εἰς δύναμιν ἐπικρατήσεως πρῶτον μὲν τῶν κατὰ τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουράνημα, εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὴν ἀνατολήν, εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὴν ἐπαναφορὰν τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὸ δῦνον, εἶτα τῶν κατὰ τὸ προηγούμενον τοῦ μεσουρανήματος.
Τό τε γὰρ ὑπὸ γῆν πᾶν εἰκότως ἀθετητέον πρὸς τὴν τηλικαύτην κυρείαν πλὴν μόνων τῶν παρ’ αὐτὴν τὴν ἐπαναφορὰν εἰς φῶς ἐρχομένων, τοῦ τε ὑπὲρ γῆν οὔτε τὸ ἀσύνδετον τῷ ἀνατέλλοντι δωδεκατημόριον ἁρμόζει παραλαμβάνειν, οὔτε τὸ προανατεῖλαν, ὃ καλεῖται τοῦ κακοῦ δαίμονος, ἐπειδήπερ κακοῖ τὴν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀπόρροιαν τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ ἀστέρων μετὰ τοῦ καὶ ἀποκεκλικέναι, θολοῖ καὶ ὥσπερ ἀφανίζει τὸ ἀναθυμιώμενον ἐκ τῶν τῆς γῆς ὑγρῶν παχὺ καὶ ἀχλυῶδες, παρ’ ὃ καὶ τοῖς χρώμασι καὶ τοῖς μεγέθεσιν οὐ κατὰ φύσιν ἔχοντες φαίνονται.
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα πάλιν ἀφέτας παραληπτέον τούς τε κυριωτάτους τέσσαρας τόπους, ἥλιον, σελήνην, ὡροσκόπον, κλῆρον τύχης, καὶ τοὺς τούτων οἰκοδεσποτήσαντας, κλῆρον μέντοι τύχης τὸν συναγόμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ πάντοτε καὶ νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας τοῦ ἀπὸ ἡλίου ἐπὶ σελήνην καὶ τὰ ἴσα φέροντος ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου κατὰ τὰ ἑπόμενα τῶν ζῳδίων, ἵνα ὃν ἔχει λόγον καὶ σχηματισμὸν ὁ ἥλιος πρὸς τὸν ὡροσκόπον, τοῦτον ἔχῃ καὶ ἡ σελήνη πρὸς τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης καὶ ᾖ ὥσπερ σεληνιακὸς ὡροσκόπος. Ἴσως δὲ αὐτὸ τοῦτο θέλει τε καὶ δύναται παρὰ τῷ συγγραφεῖ τὸ τοῖς νυκτὸς γεννωμένοις ἀπὸ σελήνης ἐπὶ ἥλιον ἀριθμεῖν καὶ ἀνάπαλιν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου, τουτέστιν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα, διεκβάλλειν· καὶ οὕτως γὰρ κἀκεῖνος ὁ αὐτὸς τόπος τοῦ κλήρου καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς τοῦ συσχηματισμοῦ λόγος ἐκβήσεται.
Προκριτέον δὲ καὶ ἐκ τούτων ἡμέρας μὲν πρῶτον τὸν ἥλιον, ἐάνπερ ᾖ ἐν τοῖς ἀφετικοῖς τόποις, εἰ δὲ μή, τὴν σελήνην, εἰ δὲ μή, τὸν πλείους ἔχοντα λόγους οἰκοδεσποτείας πρός τε τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν προγενομένην σύνοδον καὶ πρὸς τὸν ὡροσκόπον, τουτέστιν ὅταν τῶν οἰκοδεσποτικῶν τρόπων ε′ ὄντων τρεῖς ἔχῃ πρὸς ἕνα ἢ καὶ πλείους τῶν εἰρημένων, εἰ δὲ μή, τελευταῖον τὸν ὡροσκόπον, νυκτὸς δὲ πρῶτον τὴν σελήνην, εἶτα τὸν ἥλιον, εἶτα τὸν πλείους ἔχοντα λόγους οἰκοδεσποτείας πρός τε τὴν σελήνην καὶ πρὸς τὴν γενομένην πανσέληνον καὶ τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης, εἰ δὲ μή, τελευταῖον συνοδικῆς μὲν οὔσης τῆς προγενομένης συζυγίας τὸν ὡροσκόπον, πανσεληνιακῆς δὲ τὸν κλῆρον τῆς τύχης. Εἰ δὲ καὶ ἀμφότερα τὰ φῶτα ἢ καὶ ὁ τῆς οἰκείας αἱρέσεως οἰκοδεσπότης ἐν τοῖς ἀφετικοῖς εἶεν τόποις, τὸν ἐν τῷ κυριωτέρῳ τόπῳ τῶν φώτων παραληπτέον, τότε δὲ μόνον τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην ἀμφοτέρων προκριτέον, ὅταν καὶ κυριώτερον ἐπέχῃ τόπον καὶ πρὸς ἀμφοτέρας τὰς αἱρέσεις οἰκοδεσποτείας λόγον ἔχῃ.
Τοῦ δὲ ἀφέτου διακριθέντος ἔτι καὶ τῶν ἀφέσεων δύο τρόπους παραληπτέον, τόν τε εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα μόνον τῶν ζῳδίων ὑπὸ τὴν καλουμένην ἀκτινοβολίαν, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς τόποις, τουτέστι τοῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἐπὶ τὸν ὡροσκόπον τόποις, ᾖ ὁ ἀφέτης, καὶ τὸν οὐ μόνον εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα κατὰ τὴν λεγομένην ὡριμαίαν, ὅταν ἐν τοῖς ἀποκεκλικόσι τοῦ μεσουρανήματος τόποις ᾖ ὁ ἀφέτης.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων ἀναιρετικαὶ γίγνονται μοῖραι κατὰ μὲν τὴν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα τῶν ζῳδίων ἄφεσιν ἡ τοῦ δυτικοῦ ὁρίζοντος μόνη διὰ τὸ ἀφανίζειν τὸν κύριον τῆς ζωῆς, αἱ δὲ τῶν οὕτως ὑπαντώντων ἢ μαρτυρούντων ἀστέρων ἀφαιροῦσι μόνον καὶ προστιθέασιν ἔτη τοῖς μέχρι τῆς καταδύσεως τοῦ ἀφέτου συναγομένοις καὶ οὐκ ἀναιροῦσι διὰ τὸ μὴ αὐτοὺς ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ἀφετικῷ τόπῳ ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνον τοῖς αὐτῶν. Καὶ προστιθέασιν μὲν οἱ ἀγαθοποιοί, ἀφαιροῦσι δὲ οἱ κακοποιοί, τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ πάλιν ὁποτέροις ἂν αὐτῶν συσχηματισθῇ προστιθεμένου. Ὁ δὲ ἀριθμὸς τῆς προσθέσεως ἢ ἀφαιρέσεως θεωρεῖται διὰ τῆς καθ’ ἕκαστον μοιροθεσίας· ὅσοι γὰρ ἂν ὦσιν ὡριαῖοι χρόνοι τῆς ἑκάστου μοίρας, ἡμέρας μὲν οὔσης οἱ τῆς ἡμέρας, νυκτὸς δὲ οἱ τῆς νυκτός, τοσοῦτον πλῆθος ἐτῶν ἔσται τὸ τέλειον· ὅπερ ἐπὶ τῆς ἀνατολῆς αὐτῶν ὄντων λογιστέον, εἶτα κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον τῆς ἀποχωρήσεως ὑφαιρετέον, ἕως ἂν πρὸς τὰς δυσμὰς εἰς τὸ μηδὲν καταντήσῃ.
Κατὰ δὲ τὴν εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα τῶν ζῳδίων ἄφεσιν ἀναιροῦσιν οἵ τε τῶν κακοποιῶν τόποι Κρόνου καὶ Ἄρεως ἤτοι σωματικῶς ὑπαντώντων ἢ ἀκτῖνα ἐπιφερόντων ὅθεν δήποτε τετράγωνον ἢ διάμετρον, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀκουόντων ἢ βλεπόντων κατ’ ἰσοδυναμίαν ἑξαγώνων, καὶ αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ τῷ ἀφετικῷ τόπῳ τετράγωνος ἀπὸ τῶν ἑπομένων, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν πολυχρονούντων δωδεκατημορίων κακωθεὶς ὁ ἑξάγωνος, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ὀλιγοχρονίων ὁ τρίγωνος σελήνης δὲ ἀφιείσης καὶ ὁ τοῦ ἡλίου τόπος·
Ἰσχύουσι γὰρ αἱ κατὰ τὴν τοιαύτην ἄφεσιν ὑπαντήσεις καὶ ἀναιρεῖν καὶ σῴζειν, ἐπειδὴ αὗται τῷ τοῦ ἀφέτου τόπῳ ἐπιφέρονται. Οὐ πάντοτε μέντοι τούτους τοὺς τόπους καὶ πάντως ἀναιρεῖν ἡγητέον, ἀλλὰ μόνον ὅταν ὦσι κεκακωμένοι· παραποδίζονται γάρ, ἐάν τε εἰς ἀγαθοποιοῦ ὅριον ἐμπέσωσιν, ἐάν τέ τις τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀκτῖνα συνεπιφέρῃ τετράγωνον ἢ τρίγωνον ἢ διάμετρον ἤτοι πρὸς αὐτὴν τὴν ἀναιρετικὴν μοῖραν ἢ εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα αὐτῆς, ἐπὶ μὲν Διὸς μὴ ὑπὲρ τὰς δώδεκα μοίρας, ἐπὶ δὲ Ἀφροδίτης μὴ ὑπὲρ τὰς ὀκτώ, ἐάν τε σωμάτων ὄντων ἀμφοτέρων τοῦ τε ἀφιέντος καὶ τοῦ ὑπαντῶντος μὴ τὸ αὐτὸ πλάτος ᾖ ἀμφοτέρων.
Ὅταν οὖν δύο ἢ πλείονα ᾖ ἑκατέρωθεν τά τε βοηθοῦντα καὶ τὰ κατὰ τὸ ἐναντίον ἀναιροῦντα, σκεπτέον τὴν ἐπικράτησιν ὁποτέρου τῶν εἰδῶν κατά τε τὸ πλῆθος τῶν συλλαμβανομένων αὐτοῖς καὶ κατὰ τὴν δύναμιν, κατὰ μὲν τὸ πλῆθος, ὅταν αἰσθητῶς πλείονα ᾖ τὰ ἕτερα τῶν ἑτέρων, κατὰ δύναμιν δέ, ὅταν τῶν βοηθούντων ἢ ἀναιρούντων ἀστέρων οἱ μὲν ἐν οἰκείοις ὦσι τόποις, οἱ δὲ μή, μάλιστα δ’ ὅταν οἱ μὲν ὦσιν ἀνατολικοί, οἱ δὲ δυτικοί. Καθόλου γὰρ τῶν ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς ὄντων οὐδένα παραληπτέον οὔτε πρὸς ἀναίρεσιν οὔτε πρὸς βοήθειαν, πλὴν εἰ μὴ τῆς σελήνης ἀφέτιδος οὔσης αὐτὸς ὁ τοῦ ἡλίου τόπος ἀνέλῃ συντετραμμένος μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ συνόντος κακοποιοῦ, διὰ μηδενὸς δὲ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀναλελυμένος.
Ὁ μέντοι τῶν ἐτῶν ἀριθμός, ὃν ποιοῦσιν αἱ τῶν μεταξὺ διαστάσες ν′ μοῖραι τοῦ τε ἀφετικοῦ τόπου καὶ τοῦ ἀναιροῦντος, οὐδὲ ἁπλῶς οὐδὲ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὀφείλει λαμβάνεσθαι κατὰ τὰς τῶν πολλῶν παραδόσεις ἐκ τῶν ἀναφορικῶν πάντοτε χρόνων ἑκάστης μοίρας, εἰ μὴ μόνον, ὅταν ἤτοι αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνατολικὸς ὁρίζων τὴν ἄφεσιν ᾖ εἰληφὼς ἤ τις τῶν κατ’ αὐτὸν ποιουμένων ἀνατολήν.
Ἑνὸς γὰρ ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου τῷ φυσικῶς τοῦτο τὸ μέρος ἐπισκεπτομένῳ προκειμένου τοῦ σκοπεῖν, μετὰ πόσους ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους ὁ τοῦ ἑπομένου σώματος ἢ σχήματος τόπος ἐπὶ τὸν τοῦ προηγουμένου κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν παραγίνεται διὰ τὸ τοὺς ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους ὁμαλῶς διέρχεσθαι καὶ τὸν ὁρίζοντα καὶ τὸν μεσημβρινόν, πρὸς οὓς ἀμφοτέρους αἱ τῶν τοπικῶν ἀποστάσεων ὁμοιότητες λαμβάνονται, καὶ ἰσχύειν δὲ ἕκαστον τῶν χρόνων ἐνιαυτὸν ἕνα ἡλιακὸν εἰκότως, ὅταν μὲν ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀνατολικοῦ ὁρίζοντος ᾖ ὁ ἀφετικὸς καὶ προηγούμενος τόπος, τοὺς ἀναφορικοὺς χρόνους τῶν μέχρι τῆς ὑπαντήσεως μοιρῶν προσήκει λαμβάνειν· μετὰ τοσούτους γὰρ ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους ὁ ἀναιρέτης ἐπὶ τὸν τοῦ ἀφέτου τόπον τουτέστι ἐπὶ τὸν ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα παραγίνεται, ὅταν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ, τὰς ἐπ’ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφοράς, ἐν ὅσαις ἕκαστον τμῆμα διέρχεται τὸν μεσημβρινόν, ὅταν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ δυτικοῦ ὁρίζοντος, ἐν ὅσαις ἑκάστη τῶν τῆς διαστάσεως μοιρῶν καταφέρεται, τουτέστιν ἐν ὅσαις αἱ διαμετροῦσαι ταύτας ἀναφέρονται.
Τοῦ δὲ προηγουμένου τόπου μηκέτι ὄντος ἐν τοῖς τρισὶ τούτοις ὅροις ἀλλ’ ἐν ταῖς μεταξὺ διαστάσεσιν, οὐκέτι οἱ τῶν προκειμένων ἀναφορῶν ἢ καταφορῶν ἢ μεσουρανήσεων χρόνοι τοὺς ἑπομένους τόπους οἴσουσιν ἐπὶ τοὺς αὐτοὺς τοῖς προηγουμένοις ἀλλὰ διάφοροι. Ὅμοιος μὲν γὰρ καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς τόπος ἐστὶν ὁ τὴν ὁμοίαν καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ μέρη θέσιν ἔχων ἅμα πρός τε τὸν ὁρίζοντα καὶ τὸν μεσημβρινόν· τοῦτο δὲ ἔγγιστα συμβέβηκε τοῖς ἐφ’ ἑνὸς κειμένοις ἡμικυκλίου τῶν γραφομένων διὰ τῶν τομῶν τοῦ τε μεσεμβρινοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος, ὧν ἕκαστος κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν θέσιν τὴν ἴσην ἔγγιστα καιρικὴν ὥραν ποιεῖ. Ὥσπερ δ’ ἂν περιάγηται περὶ τὰς εἰρημένας τομάς, ἔρχεται μὲν ἐπὶ τὴν αὐτὴν θέσιν καὶ τῷ ὁρίζοντι καὶ τῷ μεσημβρινῷ, τοὺς δὲ τῆς διελεύσεως τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ χρόνους ἀνίσους ἐφ’ ἑκατέρου ποιεῖ, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ κατὰ τὰς τῶν ἄλλων ἀποστάσεων θέσεις δι’ ἀνίσων ἐκείνοις χρόνων τὰς παρόδους ἀπεργάζεται.
Μία δέ τις ἡμῖν ἔφοδος ἔστω τοιαύτη, δι’ ἧς, ἐάν τε ἀνατολικὴν ἐάν τε μεσημβρινὴν ἢ δυτικὴν ἐάν τε ἄλλην τινὰ ἔχῃ θέσιν ὁ προηγούμενος τόπος, τὸ ἀνάλογον τῶν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν φερόντων χρόνων τὸν ἑπόμενον τόπον ληφθήσεται· προδιαλαβόντες γὰρ τήν τε μεσουρανοῦσαν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ μοῖραν καὶ ἔτι τήν τε προηγουμένην καὶ τὴν ἐπερχομένην πρῶτον σκεψόμεθα τὴν τῆς προηγουμένης θέσιν, πόσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπέχει τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ, ἀριθμήσαντες τὰς μεταξὺ αὐτῆς καὶ τῆς μεσουρανούσης οἰκείως ἤτοι ὑπὲρ γῆν ἢ ὑπὸ γῆν μοίρας ἐπ’ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφορὰς καὶ μερίσαντες εἰς τὸ πλῆθος τῶν αὐτῆς τῆς προηγουμένης μοίρας ὡριαίων χρόνων, εἰ μὲν ὑπὲρ γῆν εἴη, τῶν ἡμερησίων, εἰ δὲ ὑπὸ γῆν, τῶν τῆς νυκτός, ἐπειδὴ τὰ τὰς αὐτὰς καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπέχοντα τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ τμήματα τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ καθ’ ἑνὸς καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γίνεται τῶν προειρημένων ἡμικυκλίων, καὶ δεήσει λαβεῖν, μετὰ πόσους ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους καὶ τὸ ἑπόμενον τμῆμα τὰς ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀφέξει τοῦ αὐτοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ τῇ προηγουμένῃ, ταύτας δέ, ἃς εἰλήφαμεν, ἐπισκεψόμεθα, πόσους τε κατὰ τὴν ἐξ ἀρχῆς θέσιν ἀπεῖχεν ἰσημερινοὺς χρόνους καὶ ἡ ἑπομένη μοῖρα τῆς κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ μεσουράνημα διὰ τῶν ἐπ’ ὀρθῆς πάλιν τῆς σφαίρας ἀναφορῶν, καὶ πόσους, ὅτε τὰς ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἐποίει τῇ προηγουμένῃ, πολυπλασιάσαντές τε καὶ ταύτας ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν τῆς ἑπομένης μοίρας ὡριαίων χρόνων, εἰ μὲν πρὸς τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν εἴη μεσουράνημα πάλιν ἡ σύγκρισις, τῶν καιρικῶν ὡρῶν τὸ τῶν ἡμερησίων, εἰ δὲ πρὸς τὸ ὑπὸ γῆν, τὸ τῶν τῆς νυκτός, καὶ τοὺς γινομένους ἐκ τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἀμφοτέρων τῶν διαστάσεων λαβόντες ἕξομεν τὸ τῶν ἐπιζητουμένων ἐτῶν πλῆθος.
Ἵνα δὲ φανερώτερον γένηται τὸ λεγόμενον, ὑποκείσθω προηγούμενος μὲν τόπος ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Κριοῦ λόγου ἕνεκεν, ἑπόμενος δὲ ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν Διδύμων, κλίμα δέ, ὅπου ἡ μὲν μεγίστη ἡμέρα ὡρῶν ἐστι τεττάρων καὶ δέκα, τὸ δ’ ὡριαῖον μέγεθος τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν Διδύμων ἔγγιστα χρόνων ἰσημερινῶν ιζ′, καὶ ἀνατελλέτω πρῶτον ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἵνα μεσουρανῇ ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Αἰγοκέρωτος, καὶ ἀπεχέτω τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς ρμη′.
Ἐπεὶ οὖν ἡ τοῦ Κριοῦ ἀρχὴ ἀπέχει τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ μεσουρανήματος καιρικὰς ὥρας ἕξ, ταύτας πολλαπλασιάσαντες ἐπὶ τοὺς ιζ′ χρόνους, οἵπερ ἦσαν τοῦ ὡριαίου μεγέθους τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν Διδύμων, ἐπειδήπερ πρὸς τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουράνημά ἐστιν ἡ τῶν ρμη′ χρόνων ἀποχή, ἕξομεν καὶ ταύτης τῆς διαστάσεως χρόνους ρβ′· μετὰ τοὺς τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἄρα χρόνους μς′ ὁ ἑπόμενος τόπος ἐπὶ τὸν τοῦ προηγουμένου μεταβήσεται. Τοσοῦτοι δέ εἰσιν ἔγγιστα χρόνοι καὶ τῆς ἀναφορᾶς τοῦ τε Κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ Ταύρου, ἐπειδὴ ὁ ἀφετικὸς τόπος ὑπόκειται ὡροσκοπῶν.
Μεσουρανείτω δὴ ὁμοίως ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἵνα ἀπέχῃ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς νη′. Ἐπειδὴ οὖν κατὰ τὴν δευτέραν θέσιν ὀφείλει μεσουρανεῖν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων, ἕξομεν τὴν τῶν διαστάσεων ὑπεροχὴν αὐτῶν τῶν νη′ χρόνων, ἐν ὅσοις πάλιν διὰ τὸ μεσουρανεῖν τὸν ἀφετικὸν τόπον διέρχεται τὸν μεσημβρινὸν ὅ τε Κριὸς καὶ ὁ Ταῦρος. Δυνέτω δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἵνα μεσουρανῇ μὲν ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Καρκίνου, ἀπέχῃ δὲ τοῦ ὑπὲρ γὴν μεσουρανήματος ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς λβ′. Ἐπειδὴ οὖν πάλιν ἓξ ὥρας καιρικὰς ἀπέχει τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ πρὸς δυσμάς, ἐὰν ἑπτακαιδεκάκις ταύτας ποιήσωμεν, ἕξομεν ρβ′ χρόνους, οὓς ἀφέξει τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ καὶ ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν Διδύμων, ὅταν δύνῃ. Ἀπεῖχε δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἐπὶ τὰ αὐτὰ χρόνους λβ′. Ἐν τοῖς τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἄρα χρόνοις ο ἐπὶ τὸ δῦνον ἠνέχθη, ἐν οἷς καὶ καταφέρεται μὲν ὅ τε Κριὸς καὶ ὁ Ταῦρος, ἀναφέρεται δὲ τὰ διαμετροῦντα δωδεκατημόρια τό τε τῶν Χηλῶν καὶ τὸ τοῦ Σκορπίου.
Ὑποκείσθω τοίνυν ἐπὶ μηδενὸς μὲν οὖσα τῶν κέντρων ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ, ἀπέχουσα δέ, λόγου ἕνεκεν εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα τῆς μεσημβρίας καιρικὰς ὥρας τρεῖς, ἵνα μεσουρανῇ μὲν ἡ τοῦ Ταύρου μοῖρα ὀκτωκαιδεκάτη, ἀπέχῃ δὲ κατὰ τὴν πρώτην θέσιν ἡ τῶν Διδύμων ἀρχὴ τοῦ ὑπὲρ γῆν μεσουρανήματος εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα χρόνους ἰσημερινοὺς ιγ′· ἐὰν οὖν πάλιν τοὺς ιζ′ χρόνους ἐπὶ τὰς γ′ ὥρας πολλαπλασιάσωμεν, ἀφέξει μὲν καὶ κατὰ τὴν δευτέραν θέσιν ἡ τῶν Διδύμων ἀρχὴ τῆς μεσημβρίας εἰς τὰ προηγούμενα χρόνους να′, τοὺς δὲ πάντας ποιήσει χρόνους ξδ′. Ἐποίει δὲ διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς ἀγωγῆς, ὅτε μὲν ἀνέτελλεν ὁ ἀφετικὸς τόπος, χρόνους μι′, ὅτε δὲ ἐμεσουράνει, χρόνους νη′, ὅτε δὲ ἔδυνε, χρόνους ο′. Διήνεγκεν μὲν ἄρα καὶ ὁ κατὰ τὴν μεταξὺ θέσιν τῆς τε μεσουρανήσεως καὶ τῆς δύσεως τῶν χρόνων ἀριθμὸς ἑκάστου τῶν ἄλλων· γέγονε γὰρ χρόνων ξδ′· διήνεγκε δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον τῆς τῶν γ′ ὡρῶν ὑπεροχῆς, ἐπειδήπερ αὕτη ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἄλλων κατὰ τὰ κέντρα τεταρτημορίων ιβ′ χρόνων ἦν, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς τῶν τριῶν ὡρῶν ἀποστάσεως ἓξ χρόνων. Ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων ἡ αὐτὴ σχεδὸν ἀναλογία συντηρεῖται, δυνατὸν ἔσται κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἁπλούστερον τῇ μεθόδῳ χρῆσθαι.
Πάλιν γὰρ ἀνατελλούσης μὲν τῆς προηγουμένης μοίρας ταῖς μέχρι τῆς ἑπομένης ἀναφοραῖς συγχρησόμεθα, μεσουρανούσης δὲ ταῖς ἐπ’ ὀρθῆς τῆς σφαίρας, δυνούσης δὲ ταῖς καταφοραῖς, ὅταν δὲ μεταξὺ τούτων ᾖ, ὡς λόγου ἕνεκεν ἐπὶ τῆς ἐκκειμένης διαστάσεως τοῦ Κριοῦ, ληψόμεθα πρῶτον τοῦς ἐπιβάλλοντας χρόνους ἑκατέρῳ τῶν περιεχόντων κέντρων, εὑρήσομεν δέ, ἐπειδὴ μετὰ τὸ μεσουράνημα τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν ὑπέκειτο ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ Κριοῦ μεταξὺ τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος κέντρου καὶ τοῦ δύνοντος, τοὺς ἐπιβάλλοντας χρόνους μέχρι τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν Διδύμων, τῶν μὲν συμμεσουρανήσεων νη′, τῶν δὲ συγκαταδύσεων ο′.
Ἔπειτα μαθόντες, ὡς πρόκειται, πόσας καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπέχει τὸ προηγούμενον τμῆμα ὁποτέρου τῶν κέντρων, ὅσον ἂν ὦσι μέρος αὗται τῶν τοῦ τεταρτημορίου καιρικῶν ὡρῶν ἕξ, τοσοῦτον μέρος τῆς ἀμφοτέρων τῶν συναγωγῶν ὑπεροχῆς προσθήσομεν ἢ ἀφελοῦμεν τῶν συγκρινομένων κέντρων, οἷον ἐπεὶ τῶν προκειμένων ο′ καὶ νη′ ἡ ὑπεροχή ἐστι χρόνων ιβ′, ὑπέκειτο δὲ τὰς ἴσας καιρικὰς ὥρας τρεῖς ὁ προηγούμενος τόπος ἑκατέρου τῶν κέντρων ἀπέχων, αἵ εἰσι τῶν ἓξ ὡρῶν ἥμισυ μέρος, λαβόντες καὶ τῶν ιβ′ χρόνων τὸ ἥμισυ ἤτοι τοῖς νη′ προσθέντες ἢ τῶν ο′ ἀφελόντες εὑρήσομεν τὴν ἐπιβολὴν χρόνων ξδ′.
Εἰ δέ γε δύο καιρικὰς ὥρας ἀπεῖχεν ὁποτέρου τῶν κέντρων, αἵ εἰσι τῶν ς′ ὡρῶν τὸ τρίτον μέρος, τὸ τρίτον πάλιν τῶν τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ιβ′ χρόνων, τουτέστι τοὺς δ′, εἰ μὲν ἡ τῶν δύο ὡρῶν ἀποχὴ ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ὑπέκειτο, προσεθήκαμεν ἂν τοῖς νη′ χρόνοις, εἰ δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ δύνοντος, ἀφείλομεν ἂν ἀπὸ τῶν ο′. Ὁ μὲν οὖν τρόπος τῆς τῶν χρονικῶν διαστάσεων ποσότητος οὕτως ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον ὀφείλει λαμβάνεσθαι.
Διακρινοῦμεν δὲ λοιπὸν ἐφ’ ἑκάστης τῶν προειρημένων ὑπαντήσεων ἢ καὶ καταδύσεων κατὰ τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀλιγοχρονιωτέρων τάξιν τάς τε ἀναιρετικὰς καὶ τὰς κλιμακτηρικὰς καὶ τὰς ἄλλως παροδικὰς διά τε τοῦ ἢ κεκακῶσθαι τῆν ὑπάντησιν ἢ βοηθεῖσθαι κατὰ τὸν προειρημένον ἡμῖν τρόπον καὶ διὰ τῶν καθ’ ἕκαστον τῶν διασημαινομένων ἐκ τῆς ὑπαντήσεως χρονικῶν ἐπεμβάσεων· κεκακωμένων γὰρ ἅμα τῶν τόπων καὶ τῆς πρὸς τὴν ἐπέμβασιν τῶν ἐτῶν παρόδου τῶν ἀστέρων κακοποιούσης τοὺς κυριωτάτους τόπους ἄντικρυς θανάτους ὑπονοητέον, τοῦ δὲ ἑτέρου τούτων φιλανθρωποῦντος κλιμακτῆρας μεγάλους καὶ ἐπισφαλεῖς, ἀμφοτέρων δὲ νωθρίας μόνον ἢ βλάβας καὶ καθαιρέσεις παροδικὰς τῆς καὶ ἐν τούτοις ἰδιότητος λαμβανομένης ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν ὑπαντητικῶν τόπων πρὸς τὰ τῆς γενέσεως πράγματα συνοικειώσεως.
Οὐδὲν δὲ ἐνίοτε κωλύει, δισταζομένων τῶν τὴν ἀναιρετικὴν κυρίαν λαμβάνειν ὀφειλόντων τὰς καθ’ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ὑπαντήσεις ἐπιλογιζομένους ἤτοι ταῖς μάλιστα πρὸς τὰ ἐκβάντα ἤδη τῶν συμπτωμάτων συμφωνούσαις καὶ πρὸς τὰ μέλλοντα κατακολουθεῖν ἢ πρὸς ἁπάσας ὡς κατ’ ἰσότητα τῆς δυνάμεως ἰσχυούσας παρατηρητικῶς ἔχειν τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον αὐτῶν κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἐπισκεπτομένους.
11. Of Length of Life
The consideration of the length of life takes the leading place among inquiries about events following birth, for, as the ancient 51 says, it is ridiculous to attach particular predictions to one who, by the constitution of the years of his life, will never attain at all to the time of the predicted events. This doctrine is no simple matter, nor unrelated to others, but in complex fashion derived from the domination of the places of greatest authority.
The method most pleasing to us and, besides, in harmony with nature is the following. For it depends entirely upon the determination of the prorogative 52 places and the stars that rule the prorogation, and upon the determination of the destructive 53 places or stars 54. Each of these is determined in the following fashion.
In the first place we must consider those places prorogative in which by all means the planet must be that is to receive the lordship of the prorogation; namely, the twelfth part of the zodiac surrounding the horoscope, from 5° above the actual horizon up to the 25° that remains, which is rising in succession to the horizon; the part sextile dexter to these thirty degrees, called the House of the Good Daemon; the part in quartile, the mid-heaven; the part in trine, called the House of the God; and the part opposite, the Occident. Among these there are to be preferred, with reference to power of domination, first those 55 which are in the midheaven, then those in the orient, then those in the sign succedent to the mid-heaven, then those in the occident 56, then those in the sign rising before mid-heaven.
For the whole region below the earth must, as is reasonable, be disregarded when a domination of such importance is concerned, except only those parts which in the ascendant sign itself are coming into the light. Of the part above the earth it is not fitting to consider either the sign that is disjunct from the ascendant 57, nor that which rose before it, called the House of the Evil Daemon 58, because it injures the emanation from the stars in it to the earth and is also declining, and the thick, misty exhalation from the moisture of the earth creates such a turbidity and, as it were, obscurity, that the stars do not appear in either their true colours or magnitudes.
After this again we must take as prorogatives the four regions of greatest authority, still, moon, horoscope, the Lot of Fortune, and the rulers of these regions. Take as the Lot of Fortune 59 always the amount of the number of degrees, both by night and by day, which is the distance from the sun to the moon, and which extends to an equal distance from the horoscope in the order of the following signs 60, in order that, whatever relation and aspect the sun bears to the horoscope, the moon also may bear to the Lot of Fortune, and that it may be as it were a lunar horoscope 61.
Of these 62, by day we must give first place to the sun, if it is in the prorogative places; if not, to the moon; and if the moon is not so placed, to the planet 63 that has most relations of domination to the sun, to the preceding conjunction, and to the horoscope; that is, when, of the five methods of domination 64 that exist, it has three to one, or even more; but if this cannot be, then finally we give preference to the horoscope. By night prefer the moon first, next the Sun, next the planets having the greater number of relations of domination to the moon, to the preceding full moon, and to the Lot of Fortune; otherwise, finally, if the preceding syzygy was a new moon, the horoscope, but if it was a full moon the Lot of Fortune 65. But if both the luminaries or the ruler of the proper sect 66 should be in the prorogative places, we must take the one of the luminaries that is in the place of greatest authority. And we should prefer the ruling planet to both of the luminaries only when it both occupies a position of greater authority and bears a relation of domination to both the sects.
When the prorogator has been distinguished, we must still further adopt two methods of prorogation 67. The one, that which follows the order of the following signs, must be used only in the case of what is called the projection of rays 68, when the prorogator is in the orient, that is, between mid-heaven and the horoscope. We must use not only the method that follows the order of following signs, but also that which follows the order of leading signs, in the so–called horimaea, when the prorogator is in places that decline from mid-heaven 69.
This being the case, the destructive degrees in the prorogation that follows the order of leading signs are only the degree of the western horizon, because it causes the lord of life 70 to vanish; and the degrees of the planets that thus approach or bear witness 71 merely take away and add years to the sum of those as far as the setting of the prorogator, and they do not destroy because they do not move toward the prorogative place, but it moves toward them 72. The beneficent stars add and the maleficent subtract. Mercury, again, is reckoned with the group to which he bears an aspect. The number of the addition or subtraction is calculated by means of the location in degrees in each case. For the entire number of years is the same as the number of hourly periods of each degree, hours of the day 73 when it is day and hours of the night when it is night; this must be our reckoning when they are in the orient, and subtraction must be made in proportion to their departure therefrom, until at their setting it becomes zero.
In the prorogation which follows the order of following signs, the places of the maleficent planets, Saturn and Mars, destroy, whether they are approaching bodily, or project their rays from any place whatever in quartile or in opposition, and sometimes too in sextile, upon the signs called “hearing” or “seeing” 74 on grounds of equality of power; and the sign that is quartile to the prorogative sign in the order of following signs likewise destroys.
And sometimes, also, among the signs that ascend slowly the sextile aspect destroys, when it is afflicted 75, and again among the signs that ascend rapidly the trine. When the moon is the prorogator, the place of the sun also destroys. For in a prorogation of this kind the approaches of planets avail both to destroy and to preserve, since these are in the direction of the prorogative place 76. However, it must not be thought that these places always inevitably destroy, but only when they are afflicted. For they are prevented both if they fall within the term 77 of a beneficent planet and if one of the beneficent planets projects its ray from quartile, trine, or opposition either upon the destructive degree itself or upon the parts that follow it, in the case of Jupiter not more than 120, and in that of Venus not over 80; also if, when both the prorogator and the approaching planet are present bodily, the latitude of both is not the same 78.
Thus when there are two or more on each side, assisting and, vice versa, destroying, we must consider which of them prevails, both by the number of those that co-operate and by power; by number when one group is perceptibly more numerous than the other, and with regard to power when some of the assisting or of the destroying planets are in their own proper places, and some are not, and particularly when some are rising and others setting. For in general we must not admit any planet, either to destroy or to aid, that is under the rays of the sun, except that when the moon is prorogator the place of the sun itself is destructive, when it is changed about by the presence of a maleficent planet 79 and is not released 80 by any of the beneficent ones.
However, the number of years, determined by the distances between the prorogative place and the destructive planet, ought not to be taken simply or offhand, in accordance with the usual traditions, from the times of ascension of each degree, except only when the eastern horizon itself is the prorogator, or some one of the planets that are rising in that region.
For one method 81 alone 81 is available for him who is considering this subject in a natural manner –to calculate after how many equinoctial periods 82 the place of the following body or aspect comes to the place of the one preceding at the actual time of birth, because the equinoctial periods pass evenly 83 through both the horizon and the mid-heaven, to both of which are referred the proportions of spatial distances, and, as is reasonable, each one of the periods has the value of one solar year 84. Whenever the prorogative and preceding place is actually on the eastern horizon, we should take the times of ascension of the degrees up to the meetingplace; for after this number of equinoctial periode the destructive planet comes to the place of the prorogator, that is, to the eastern horizon. But when it 85 is actually at the mid-heaven, we should take the ascensions on the right sphere in which the segment 86 in each case passes mid-heaven; and when it is on the western horizon, the number in which each of the degrees of the interval descends, that is, the number in which those directly opposite them ascend.
But if the precedent place is not on these three limits but in the intervals between them, in that case the times of the aforesaid ascensions, descensions, or culminations will not carry the following places to the places of the preceding, but the periods will be different. For a place is similar and the same if it has the same position 87 in the same direction with reference both to the horizon and to the meridian. This is most nearly true of those which lie upon one of those semicircles 88 which are described through the sections of the meridian and the horizon, each of which at the same position makes nearly the same temporal hour. Even as, if the revolution is upon the aforesaid arcs, it reaches the same position with reference to both the meridian and horizon, but makes the periods of the passage of the zodiac unequal with respect to either, in the same way also at the positions of the other distances it makes their passages in times unequal to the former 89.
We shall therefore adopt one method only, as follows, whereby, whether the preceding place occupies the orient, the mid-heaven, the occident, or any other position, the proportionate number of equinoctial times that bring the following place to it will be apprehended. For after we have first determined the culminating degree of the zodiac and furthermore the degree of the precedent and that of the subsequent, in the first place we shall investigate the position of the precedent, how many ordinary hours it is removed from the meridian, counting the ascensions that properly intervene up to the very degree of mid-heaven, whether over or under the earth, on the right sphere, and dividing them by the amount of the horary periods 90 of the precedent degree 90, diurnal if it is above the earth and nocturnal if it is below.
But since the sections of the zodiac which are an equal number of ordinary hours removed from the meridian lie upon one and the same of the aforesaid semicircles, it will also be necessary to find after how many equinoctial periods the subsequent section will be removed from the same meridian by the same number of ordinary hours as the precedent 91. When we have determined these, we shall inquire how many equinoctial hours at its original position the degree of the subsequent was removed from the degree at mid-heaven, again by means of ascensions in the right sphere, and how many when it made the same number of ordinary hours as the precedent, multiplying these into the number of the horary periods 92 of the degree of the subsequent; if again the comparison of the ordinary hours relates to the mid-heaven above the earth, multiplying into the number of diurnal hours, but if it relates to that below the earth, the number of nocturnal hours. And taking the results from the difference of the two distances, we shall have the number of years for which the inquiry was made.
To make this clearer, suppose that the precedent place is the beginning of Aries, for example, and the subsequent the beginning of Gemini, and the latitude that where the longest day is fourteen hours long 93, and the horary magnitude of the beginning of Gemini is approximately 17 equinoctial times 94. Assume first that the beginning of Aries is rising, so that the beginning of Capricorn is at mid-heaven, and let the beginning of Gemini be removed from the mid-heaven above the earth 148 equinoctial times 95. Now since the beginning of Aries is six ordinary hours 96 removed from the diurnal mid-heaven, multiplying these into the 17 equinoctial times, which are the times of the horary magnitude of the beginning of Gemini, since the distance of 148 times relates to the mid-heaven above the earth, we shall have for this interval also 102 times. Hence, after 46 times, which is the difference, the subsequent place will pass to the position of the precedent. These are very nearly the equinoctial times of the ascension of Aries and Taurus, since it is assumed that the prorogative sign is the horoscope.
Similarly, let the beginning of Aries be at midheaven, so that at its original position the beginning of Gemini may be 58 equinoctial times 97 removed from the mid-heaven above the earth. Therefore, since at its second position the beginning of Gemini should be at mid-heaven, we shall have for the difference of the distances precisely this amount of 58 times, in which again, because the prorogative sign is at mid-heaven, Aries and Taurus 98 page through the meridian. In the same way let the beginning of Aries be setting, so that the beginning of Cancer may be at mid-heaven and the beginning of Gemini may be removed from the mid-heaven above the earth in the direction of the leading signs 99 by 32 equinoctial periode. Since; then, again the beginning of Aries is six ordinary hours removed from the meridian in the direction of the occident, if we multiply this by 17 we shall have 102 times, which will be the distance of the beginning of Gemini from the meridian when it sets. At its first position also it was distant from the same point 32 times; hence it moved to the occident in the 70 times of the difference, in which period also Aries and Taurus descend and the opposite signs Libra and Scorpio ascend 100.
Now let it be assumed that the beginning of Aries is not on any of the angles, but removed, for example, three ordinary hours from the meridian in the direction of the leading signs, so that the 18th degree of Taurus is at mid-heaven, and in its first position the beginning of Gemini is 13 equinoctial times removed from the mid-heaven above the earth in the order of the following signs 101. If, then, again we multiply 17 equinoetial times into the three hours, the beginning of Gemini will at its second position be distant from mid-heaven in the direction of the leading signs 51 equinoctial times, and it will make in all 64 times 102. But it made 46 times by the same procedure when the prorogative place was rising, 58 when it was in mid-heaven, and 70 when it was setting. Hence the number of equinoctial times at the position between mid-heaven and the occident differs from each of the others. For it is 64, and the difference is proportional to the excess of three hours 103, since this was 12 equinoctial times in the case of the other quadrants at the centres, but 6 equinoetial times in the case of the distance of three hours. And inasmuch as in all cases approximately the same proportin is observed, it will be possible to use the method in this simpler way.
For again, when the precedent degree is at rising, we shall employ the ascensions up to the subsequent; if it is at mid-heaven, the degrees on the right sphere; and if it is setting, the descensions. But when it is between these points, for example, at the aforesaid interval from Aries, we shall take first the equinoctial times corresponding to each of the surrounding angles, and we shall find, since the beginning of Aries was assumed to be beyond the mid-heaven above the earth, between mid-heaven and the occident, that the corresponding equinoctial times up to the first of Gemini from mid-heaven are 58 and from the occident 70.
Next let us ascertain, as was set forth above 104, how many ordinary hours the precedent section is removed from either of the angles, and whatever fraction they may be of the six ordinary hours of the quadrant, that fraction of the difference between both sums we shall add to or subtract from the angle with which comparison is made. For example, since the difference between the above mentioned 70 and 58 is 12 times, and it was assumed that the precedent place was removed by an equal number of ordinary hours, three, from each of the angles, which are one half of the six hours, then taking also one-half of the 12 equinoctial times and either adding them to the 58 or subtracting them from the 70, we shall find the result to be 64 times.
But if it was removed two ordinary hours from either one of the angles, which are one-third of the six hours, again we shall take one-third of the 12 times of the excess, that is, 4, and if the removal by two hours had been assumed to be from the mid-heaven, we would have added them to the 58 times, but if it was measured from the occident we would have subtracted them from 70. The method of ascertaining the amount of the temporal intervals ought in this way consistently to be followed.
For the rest, we shall determine in each of the aforesaid cases of approach or setting 105, in the order of those that ascend more rapidly, those which are destructive, climacteric, or otherwise transitional 106, according as the meeting is afflicted or assisted in the way we have already explained 107, and by means of the particular significance of the predictions made from the temporal ingresses of the meeting 108. For when at the same time the places are afflicted and the transit of the stars relative to the ingress of the years of life afflicts the governing places, we must understand that death is definitely signified; if one of them is benignant, great and dangerous crises; if both are benignant, only sluggishness, injuries, or transitory disasters. In these matters the special quality is ascertained from the familiarity of the occurrent places with the circumstances of the nativity.
Sometimes, when it is doubtful which ought to take over the destroying power, there is nothing to prevent our calculating the occourses of each and then either following, in predicting the future, the occourses which most agree with past events, or observing them all, as having equal power, determining as before the question of their degree.
12. Περὶ μορφῆς καὶ κράσεως σωματικῆς
Ἐφωδευμένης δὲ καὶ τῆς τοῦ περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς λόγου πραγματείας λέγομεν ἀρχὴν τῶν κατὰ μέρος, λαβόντες κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν τάξιν περί τε τῆς μορφῆς καὶ τῆς σωματικῆς διατυπώσεως, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τὰ τοῦ σώματος τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς προτυποῦται κατὰ φύσιν, τοῦ μὲν σώματος διὰ τὸ ὑλικώτερον συγγεννωμένας ἔχοντος σχεδὸν τὰς τῶν ἰδιοσυγκρασιῶν φαντασίας, τῆς δὲ ψυχῆς μετὰ ταῦτα καὶ κατὰ μικρὸν τὰς ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης αἰτίας ἐπιτηδειότητας ἀναδεικνυούσης, τῶν δ’ ἐκτὸς ἔτι μᾶλλον ὕστερον κατὰ τὸν ἐφεξῆς χρόνον ἐπισυμπιπτόντων.
Παρατηρητέον οὖν καθόλου μὲν τὸν ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα καὶ τοὺς ἐπόντας ἢ τοὺς τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν αὐτοῦ λαμβάνοντας τῶν πλανωμένων, καθ’ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον, ἐπὶ μέρους δὲ καὶ τὴν σελήνην ὡσαύτως· διὰ γὰρ τῆς τῶν τόπων τούτων ἀμφοτέρων καὶ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων διαμορφωτικῆς φύσεως καὶ τῆς καθ’ ἑκάτερον εἶδος συγκράσεως καὶ ἔτι τῆς τῶν συνανατελλόντων αὐτοῖς ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων σχηματογραφίας τὰ περὶ τὰς διατυπώσεις τῶν σωμάτων θεωρεῖται, πρωτευόντων μὲν τῇ δυνάμει τῶν τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν ἐχόντων ἀστέρων, ἐπισυνεργούσης δὲ καὶ τῆς τῶν τόπων αὐτῶν ἰδιοτροπίας. Τὸ μέντοι καθ’ ἕκαστον καὶ ὡς ἄν τις ἁπλῶς οὕτως ἀποδοίη, τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον.
Πρῶτον γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀστέρων ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ἀνατολικὸς ὢν τῇ μὲν μορφῇ μελιχρόας ποιεῖ καὶ εὐεκτικοὺς καὶ μελανότριχας καὶ οὐλοκεφάλους καὶ δασυστέρνους καὶ μεσοφθάλμους καὶ συμμέτρους τοῖς μεγέθεσι, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ μᾶλλον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ, δυτικὸς δὲ ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν μορφῇ μέλανας καὶ σπινώδεις καὶ μικροὺς καὶ ἁπλότριχας καὶ ὑποψίλους καὶ ὑπορρύθμους καὶ μελανοφθάλμους, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ μᾶλλον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς οἰκοδεσποτήσας τοὺς προκειμένους τόπους ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ποιεῖ λευκοὺς ἐπὶ τὸ εὔχρουν καὶ μεσότριχας καὶ μεγαλοφθάλμους καὶ εὐμεγέθεις καὶ ἀξιωματικούς, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ ὑγρῷ, δυτικὸς δὲ ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν χρόᾳ λευκοὺς μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ εὔχρουν δὲ ὁμοίως, τετανότριχάς τε καὶ ἀναφαλαντιαίους καὶ μεσοφαλάκρους καὶ μετρίους τοῖς μεγέθεσι, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὁμοίως ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ποιεῖ λευκερύθρους καὶ εὐμεγέθεις καὶ εὐέκτας καὶ γλαυκοφθάλμους καὶ δασεῖς καὶ μεσότριχας, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ ξηρῷ, δυτικὸς δὲ ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ἐρυθροὺς ἁπλῶς καὶ μετρίους τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ μικροφθάλμους καὶ ὑποψίλους καὶ ξανθτριχας καὶ τετανούς, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ.
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τὰ παραπλήσια ποιεῖ τῷ τοῦ Διός, ἐπὶ μέντοι τὸ εὐμορφώτερον καὶ ἐπιχαριτώτερον καὶ γυναικοπρεπωδέστερον καὶ θηλυμορφώτερον καὶ εὐχυμότερον καὶ τρυφερώτερον, ἰδίως δὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ποιεῖ μετὰ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς ὑποχαροπούς.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀνατολικὸς τῇ μὲν μορφῇ ποιεῖ μελίχροας καὶ συμμέτρους τοῖς μεγέθεσι καὶ εὐρύθμους καὶ μικροφθάλμους καὶ μεσότριχας, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ, δυτικὸς δὲ ὑπάρχων τῇ μὲν μορφῇ λευκοὺς μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ εὔχρουν δὲ ὁμοίως, τετανότριψας, μελαγχλώρους καὶ σπινοὺς καὶ ἰσχνοὺς καὶ λοξοφθάλμους τε καὶ αἰγόπους καὶ ὑπερύθρους, τῇ δὲ κράσει τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ.
Συνεργοῦσι δὲ ἑκάστῳ τούτων συσχηματισθέντες ὁ μὲν ἥλιος ἐπὶ τὸ μεγαλοπρεπέστερον καὶ εὐεκτικώτερον, ἡ δὲ σελήνη, καὶ μάλισθ’, ὅταν τὴν ἀπόρροιαν αὐτῆς ἐπέχωσι, καθόλου μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ συμμετρώτερον καὶ ἰσχνώτερον καὶ τῇ κράσει ὑγρότερον, κατὰ μέρος δὲ ἀναλόγως τῇ τῶν φωτισμῶν ἰδιότητι κατὰ τὴν ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς συντάξεως ἐκτεθειμένην κρᾶσιν. Πάλιν δὲ καθόλου ἑῷοι μὲν ὄντες καὶ φάσεις ποιησάμενοι μεγαλοποιοῦσι τὰ σώματα, στηρίζοντες δὲ τὸ πρῶτον ἰσχυρὰ καὶ εὔτονα, προηγούμενοι δὲ ἀσύμμετρα, τὸ δὲ δεύτερον στηρίζοντες ἀσθενέστερα, δύνοντος δὲ ἄδοξα μὲν παντελῶς, οἰστικὰ δὲ κακουχιῶν καὶ συνοχῶν.
Καὶ τῶν τόπων δὲ αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς σχηματισμοὺς μάλιστα τῶν διατυπώσεων καὶ τὰς κράσεις, ὡς ἔφαμεν, συνεργούντων καθόλου πάλιν τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας ἐπὶ θερινὴν τροπὴν τεταρτημόριον ποιεῖ εὔχροας, εὐμεγέθεις, εὐέκτας, εὐοφθάλμους, τὸ δὲ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ καὶ θερμῷ, τὸ δ’ ἀπὸ τῆς θερινῆς τροπῆς μέχρι μετοπωρινῆς ἰσημερίας μεσόχροας, συμμέτρους τοῖς μεγέθεσιν, εὐέκτας, μεγαλοφθάλμους, δασεῖς, οὐλότριχας, τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ θερμῷ καὶ ξηρῷ, τὸ δ’ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοπωρινῆς ἰσημερίας μέχρι τῆς χειμερινῆς τροπῆς μελίχροας, ἰσχνούς, σπινώδεις, παθήνους, μεσότριχας, εὐοφθάλμους, τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ, τὸ δ’ ἀπὸ τῆς χειμερινῆς τροπῆς ἕως ἐαρινῆς ἰσημερίας μελανόθροας, συμμέτρους τοῖς μεγέθεσι, τετανότριχας, ὑποψίλους, ὑπορρύθμους, τὸ πλεῖον ἔχοντας ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ καὶ ψυχρῷ.
Κατὰ μέρος δὲ τὰ μὲν ἀνθρωποειδῆ τῶν ζῳδίων τῶν τε ἐν τῷ ζῳδιακῷ καὶ τῶν ἐκτὸς εὔρυθμα καὶ σύμμετρα τοῖς σχήμασι τὰ σώματα κατασκευάζει, τὰ δὲ ἑτερόμορφα μετασχηματίζει πρὸς τὸ τῆς ἰδίας μορφώσεως οἰκεῖον τὰς τοῦ σώματος συμμετρίας καὶ κατά τινα λόγον ἀφομοιοῖ τὰ οἰκεῖα μέρη τοῖς ἑαυτῶν ἤτοι ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον καὶ ἔλαττον ἢ ἐπὶ τὸ ἰσχυρότερον καὶ ἀσθενέστερον ἢ ἐπὶ τὸ εὐρυθμότερον καὶ ἀρρυθμότερον, ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον μέν, ὡς λόγου ἕνεκεν ὁ Λέων καὶ ἡ Παρθένος καὶ ὁ Τοξότης, ἐπὶ τὸ ἔλαττον δὲ ὡς οἱ Ἰχθύες καὶ ὁ Καρκίνος καὶ ὁ Αἰγόκερως, καὶ πάλιν ὡς τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ Ταύρου καὶ τοῦ Λέοντος τὰ μὲν ἄνω καὶ ἐμπρόσθια ἐπὶ τὸ εὐεκτικώτερον, τὰ δὲ κάτω καὶ ὀπίσθια ἐπὶ τὸ ἀσθενέστερον, τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον ὡς τοῦ Τοξότου καὶ τοῦ Σκορπίου καὶ τῶν Διδύμων τὰ μὲν ἐμπρόσθια ἐπὶ τὸ ἰσχνότερον, τὰ δὲ ὀπίσθια ἐπὶ τὸ εὐεκτικώτερον, ὁμοίως δὲ ὡς ἡ μὲν Παρθένος καὶ αἱ Χῆλαι καὶ ὁ Τοξότης ἐπὶ τὸ σύμμετρον καὶ εὔρυθμον, ὁ δὲ Σκορπίος καὶ οἱ Ἰχθύες καὶ ὁ Ταῦρος ἐπὶ τὸ ἄρρυθμον καὶ ἀσύμμετρον καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως, ἅπερ ἅπαντα συνεφορῶντας καὶ συνεπικίρναντας προσήκει τὴν ἐκ τῆς κράσεως συναγομένην ἰδιοτροπίαν περί τε τὰς μορφώσεις καὶ τὰς κράσεις τὼν σωμάτων καταστοχάζεσθαι.
12. Of Bodily Form and Temperament
Now that the procedure in the matter of the length of life has been explained, we Break about the form and character of the body, beginning the detailed discussion in the proper order, inasmuch as naturally, too, the bodily parts are formed prior to the soul; for the body, because it is more material, carries almost from birth the outward appearances of its idiosyncrasies, while the soul shows forth the characters conferred upon it by the first cause only afterwards and little by little, and external accidental qualities come about still later in time.
We must, then, in general observe the eastern horizon and the planets that are upon it or assume its rulership in the way already explained 109; and in particular also the moon as well; for it is through the formative power of these two places 110 and of their rulers and through the mixture of the two kinds 111, and furthermore through the forms of the fixed stars that are rising at the same time, that the conformation of the body is ascertained; the ruling planets have most power in this matter and the special characters of their places aid them.
The detailed account, then, as one might report it in simple terms, is this: First, among the planets, Saturn, if he is in the orient, makes his subjects in appearance dark-skinned, robust, black-haired, curly-haired, hairy-chested, with eyes of moderate size, of middling stature, and in temperament having an excess of the moist and cold. If Saturn is setting, in appearance he makes them dark, slender, small, straight-haired, with little hair on the body, rather graceful, and black-eyed; in temperament, sharing most in the cold and dry.
Jupiter, as the ruler of the aforesaid regions, when he is rising, makes his subjects in appearance light of skin, but in such a way as to have a good colour, with moderately curling hair and large eyes, tall, and commanding respect; in temperament they exceed in the hot and the moist. When Jupiter is setting, he makes his subjects light, to be sure, but not as befare, in such a way as to give them a good colour, and with lank hair or even bald in front and on the crown, and of average stature; in temperament they have an excess of the moist.
Similarly, Mars, when rising, makes his subjects in appearance red and white of complexion, tall and robust, gray-eyed, with thick hair, somewhat curly, and in temperament showing an excess of the warm and dry. When he is setting, he makes them in appearance simply ruddy, of middle height, with small eyes, not much hair on the body, and straight yellow hair; their temperament exceeds in the dry.
Venus has effects similar to Jupiter’s, but is apt to make her subjects more shapely, graceful, womanish, effeminate in figure, plump, and luxurious. On her own proper account she makes the eyes bright as well as beautiful.
Mercury, in the orient, makes his subjects in appearance sallow, of moderate height, graceful, with small eyes and moderately curling hair; in temperament, showing an excess of the warm. In the occident he makes them, in appearance, of light but not of good colouring, with straight hair and olive complexion, lean and spare, with glancing, brilliant eyes 112, and somewhat ruddy; in temperament they exceed in the dry.
The luminaries assist each of these when they bear an aspect to them, the sun tending to a more impressive and robust effect, and the moon, especially when she is separating 113 from the planets, in general tending toward better proportion and greater slenderness, and toward a more moist temperament; but in particular cases her effect is proportioned to the special quality of her illumination, in accordance with the system of internixture explained in the beginning of the treatise 114. Again, generally, when the planets are morning stars and make an appearance 115, they make the body large; at their first station, powerful and muscular; when they are moving forward 116, not well-proportioned; at their second station, rather weak; and at setting, entirely without repute but able to bear hardship and oppression.
Likewise their places, as we have said 117, take an important part in the formation of the bodily characters and temperaments. In general terms, once more, the quadrant from the spring equinox to the summer solstice makes the subjects well-favoured in complexion, stature, robustness, and eyes, and exceeding in the moist and warm. The quadrant from the summer solstice to the autumn equinox produces individuals with moderately good complexion and moderate height, robust, with large eyes and thick and curly hair, exceeding in the warm and dry. The quadrant from the autumn equinox to the winter solstice makes them sallow, spare, slender, sickly, with moderately curling hair and good eyes, exceeding in the dry and cold. The quadrant from the winter solstice to the spring equinox produces individuals of dark complexion, moderate height, straight hair, with little hair on their bodies, somewhat graceful, and exceeding in the cold and moist.
In particular, the constellations both within and outside of the zodiac which are of human shape produce bodies which are harmonious of movement and well-proportioned; those however which are of other than human shape modify the bodily proportions to correspond to their own peculiarities, and after a fashion make the corresponding parts like their own, larger and smaller, or stronger and weaker, or more and less graceful. For example, Leo, Virgo, and Sagittarius make them larger; others, as Pisces, Cancer, and Capricorn, smaller. And again, as in the case of Aries, Taurus, and Leo, the upper and fore parts make them more robust and the lower and hind parts weaker. Conversely the fore parts of Sagittarius, Scorpio, and Gemini cause slenderness and the hind parts robustness. Similarly too Virgo, Libra, and Sagittarius tend to make them well-proportioned and graceful, while Scorpio, Pisces, and Taurus bring about awkwardness and disproportion. So it is with the rest, and it is fitting that we should observe and combine all these things and make a conjecture as to the character which results from the mixture, with regard both to the form and to the temperament of the body.
13. Περὶ σινῶν καὶ παθῶν σωματικῶν
Ἑπομένου δὲ τούτοις τοῦ περὶ τὰ σωματικὰ σίνη τε καὶ πάθη λόγου συνάψομεν αὐτοῖς κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς τὴν κατὰ τοῦτο τὸ εἶδος συνισταμένην ἐπίσκεψιν ἔχουσαν οὕτως· καὶ ἐνταῦθα γὰρ πρὸς μὲν τὴν καθόλου διάληψιν ἀποβλέπειν δεῖ πρὸς τὰ τοῦ ὁρίζοντος δύο κέντρα, τουτέστι τό τε ἀνατέλλον καὶ τὸ δύνον, μάλιστα δὲ πρός τε τὸ δύνον αὐτὸ καὶ πρὸς τὸ προδύνον, ὅ ἐστιν ἀσύνδετον τῷ ἀνατολικῷ κέντρῳ, καὶ παρατηρεῖν τοὺς κακωτικοὺς τῶν ἀστέρων, πῶς ἐσχηματισμένοι πρὸς αὐτὰ τυγχάνουσιν· ἐὰν γὰρ πρὸς τὰς ἐπαναφερομένας μοίρας τῶν εἰρημένων τόπων ὦσιν ἑστῶτες ἤτοι σωματικῶς ἢ τετραγωνικῶς ἢ καὶ κατὰ διάμετρον ἤτοι ὁπότερος αὐτῶν ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι, σίνη καὶ πάθη σωματικὰ περὶ τοὺς γεννωμένους ἕξειν ὑπονοητέον, μάλιστα δ’ ἂν καὶ τῶν φώτων ἤτοι τὸ ἕτερον ἢ ἀμφότερα κεκεντρωμένα, καθ’ ὃν εἰρήκαμεν τρόπον, τυγχάνῃ ἢ ἅμα ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον.
Τότε γὰρ οὐ μόνον, ἐὰν ἐπαναφέρηταί τις τῶν κακοποιῶν, ἀλλὰ κἂν προαναφέρηται τῶν φώτων αὐτὸς κεκεντρωμένος, ἱκανός ἐστι διαθεῖναί τι τῶν ἐκκειμένων, ὁποῖον ἂν οἵ τε τοῦ ὁρίζοντος τόποι καὶ οἱ τῶν ζῳδίων ὑποφαίνωσι σίνος ἢ πάθος καὶ αἱ τῶν ἀστέρων φύσεις τῶν τε κακούντων καὶ τῶν κακουμένων καὶ ἔτι τῶν συσχηματιζομένων αὐτοῖς. Τά τε γὰρ μέρη τῶν ζῳδίων ἑκάστου τὰ περιέχοντα τὸ ἀδικούμενον μέρος τοῦ ὁρίζοντος δηλώσει τὸ μέρος τοῦ σώματος, περὶ ὃ ἔσται τὸ αἴτιον, καὶ πότερον σίνος ἢ πάθος ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα τὸ δηλούμενον μέρος ἐπιδείξασθαι δύναται, αἵ τε τῶν ἀστέρων φύσεις τὰ εἴδη καὶ τὰς αἰτίας τῶν συμπτωμάτων ποιοῦσιν, ἐπειδὴ τῶν κυριωτάτων τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μερῶν ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου κύριός ἐστιν ἀκοῶν τε δεξιῶν καὶ σπληνὸς καὶ κύστεως καὶ φλέγματος καὶ ὀστέων, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ἁφῆς τε καὶ πνεύμονος καὶ ἀρτηριῶν καὶ σπέρματος, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀκοῶν εὐωνύμων καὶ νεφρῶν καὶ φλεβῶν καὶ μορίων, ὁ δὲ ἥλιος ὁράσεως καὶ ἐγκεφάλου καὶ καρδίας καὶ νεύρων καὶ τῶν δεξιῶν πάντων, ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ὀσφρήσεώς τε καὶ ἥπατος καὶ σαρκῶν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ λόγου καὶ διανοίας καὶ γλώσσης καὶ χολῆς καὶ ἕδρας, ἡ δὲ σελήνη γεύσεώς τε καὶ καταπόσεως καὶ στομάχου καὶ κοιλίας καὶ μήτρας καὶ τῶν εὐωνύμων πάντων.
Ἔστι δὲ τῶν καθόλου καὶ τὰ σίνη μὲν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ συμπίπτειν ἀνατολικῶν ὄντων τῶν τὸ αἴτιον ποιούντων κακοποιῶν, πάθη δὲ τοὐναντίον δυτικῶν αὐτῶν ὑπαρχόντων, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ διώρισται τούτων ἑκάτερον τῷ τὸ μὲν σίνος ἅπαξ διατιθέναι καὶ μὴ διατείνουσαν ἔχειν τὴν ἀλγηδόνα, τὸ δὲ πάθος ἤτοι συνεχῶς ἢ ἐπιληπτικῶς τοῖς πάσχουσιν ἐπισκήπτειν.
Πρὸς δὲ τὴν κατὰ μέρος ἐπιβολὴν ἤδη τινὰ παρατηρήσεως ἔτυχεν ἐξαιρέτου σινωτικά τε καὶ παθητικὰ σχήματα διὰ τῶν ὡς ἐπίπαν κατὰ τὰς ὁμοιοσχήμονας θέσεις παρακολουθούντων συμπτωμάτων· πηρώσεις γὰρ ὄψεως ἀποτελοῦνται κατὰ μὲν τὸν ἕτερον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, ὅταν τε ἡ σελήνη καθ’ αὑτὴν ἐπὶ τῶν προειρημένων οὖσα κέντρων ἢ συνοδεύουσα ἢ πανσεληνιάζουσα τύχῃ, καὶ ὅταν ἐφ’ ἑκατέρου μὲν τῶν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον σχήματος λόγον ἐχόντων, συνάπτῃ δέ τινι τῶν νεφελοειδῶν ἐν τῷ ζῳδιακῷ συστροφῶν, ὡς τῷ νεφελίῳ τοῦ Καρκίνου καὶ τῇ πλειάδι τοῦ Ταύρου καὶ τῇ ἀκίδι τοῦ Τοξότου καὶ τῷ κέντρῳ τοῦ Σκορπίου καὶ τοῖς περὶ τὸν πλόκαμον μέρεσι τοῦ Λέοντος ἢ τῇ κάλπιδι τοῦ Ὑδροχόου, καὶ ὅταν ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἢ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου ἐπικέντρῳ οὔσῃ αὐτῇ καὶ ἀποκρουστικῇ ἀνατολικοὶ αὐτοὶ ὄντες ἐπιφέρωνται ἢ πάλιν τοῦ ἡλίου ἐπικέντρου ὄντος προαναφέρωνται.
Ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφοτέροις ἅμα τοῖς φωσὶν ἤτοι κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ ζῴδιον ἢ καὶ κατὰ διάμετρον, ὡς εἴπομεν, συσχηματισθῶσιν, ἑῷοι μὲν τῷ ἡλίῳ ὄντες, τῇ δὲ σελήνῃ ἑσπέριοι, περὶ ἀμφοτέρους τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τὸ αἴτιον ποιήσουσιν· ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀπὸ πληγῆς ἢ κρούσματος ἢ σιδήρου ἢ κατακαύματος ποιεῖ τὰς πηρώσεις, μετὰ δὲ Ἑρμοῦ συσχηματισθεὶς ἐν παλαίστραις ἢ γυμνασίοις ἢ κακούργων ἐφόδοις, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου δι’ ὑποχύσεων ἢ ψύξεων ἢ ἀπογλαυκώσεων καὶ τῶν τοιούτων.
Πάλιν ἐπὰν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπί τινος ᾖ τῶν προειρημένων κέντρων, μάλιστα δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ δύνοντος τῷ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου συνὼν ἢ συσχηματιζόμενος ἢ ἐνηλλαχὼς τοὺς τόπους, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως καθυπερτερούμενος ἢ διαμετρούμενος, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ἄγονοι γίνονται, αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες ἐκτρωσμοῖς ἢ ὠμοτοκίαις ἢ καὶ ἐμβρυοτομίαις περικυλίονται, μάλιστα δὲ ἐν Καρκίνῳ καὶ Παρθένῳ καὶ Αἰγοκέρωτι, κἂν ἡ σελήνη ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως συνάπτῃ. Ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ συσχηματισθῇ σὺν τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου, τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως πάλιν καθυπερτεροῦντος ἢ διαμετροῦντος, εὐνοῦχοι ἢ ἑρμαφρόδιτοι ἢ ἄτρωγλοι καὶ ἄτρητοι γίγνονται.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐπὰν καὶ ὁ ἥλιος συσχηματισθῇ τῶν μὲν φώτων καὶ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἠρρενωμένων, ἀποκρουστικῆς δὲ τῆς σελήνης οὔσης καὶ τῶν κακοποιῶν ταῖς ἐπαναφερομέναις μοίραις ἐπαναφερομένων, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ἀπόκοποι ἢ τὰ μόρια σεσινωμένοι γίνονται καὶ μάλιστα ἐν Κριῷ καὶ Λέοντι καὶ Σκορπίῳ καὶ Αἰγοκέρωτι καὶ Ὑδροχόῳ, αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες ἄτοκοι καὶ στεῖραι.
Ἐνίοτε δὲ οὐδὲ ἀσινεῖς ταῖς ὄψεσιν οἱ τοιοῦτοι διαμένουσιν, ἐμποδίζονται δὲ τὴν γλῶτταν καὶ γίνονται τραυλοὶ ἢ μογγιλάλοι, ὅσοι τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνόντας ἐπὶ τῶν εἰρημένων κέντρων ἔχουσι τῷ ἡλίῳ, μάλιστα δὲ ὅταν καὶ δυτικὸς ᾖ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, καὶ συσχηματίζωνται ἀμφότεροι τῇ σελήνῃ. Τούτοις δ’ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως παρατυχὼν λύειν εἴωθεν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τὸ τῆς γλώττης ἐμπόδιον, ἀφ’ οὗ ἂν ἡ σελήνη τὴν πρὸς αὐτὸν συνάντησιν ποιήσηται.
Πάλιν ἐὰν ἤτοι τὰ φῶτα ἐπικέντροις τοῖς κακοποιοῖς ἐπιφέρηται ἅμα ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον, ἢ ἐὰν τοῖς φωσὶν οἱ κακοποιοὶ καὶ μάλιστα τῆς σελήνης ἐπὶ συνδέσμων ἢ ἐπὶ καμπίων οὔσης ἢ ἐπὶ τῶν ἐπαιτίων ζῳδίων, οἷον Κριοῦ, Ταύρου, Καρκίνου, Σκορπίου, Αἰγοκέρωτος, γίνονται λωβήσεις τοῦ σώματος κυρτώσεων ἢ κυλλώσεων ἢ χωλώσεων ἢ παραλύσεων, ἐὰν μὲν σὺν τοῖς φωσὶν ὦσιν οἱ κακοποιοί, ἀπὸ τῆς γενήσεως αὐτῆς, ἐὰν δὲ ἐν τοῖς μεσουρανήμασι καθυπερτεροῦντες τὰ φῶτα ἢ διαμηκίζοντες ἀλλήλους ὦσιν, ἀπὸ κινδύνων μεγάλων ὡς τῶν ἀποκρημνισμῶν ἢ συμπτώσεων ἢ λῃστηρίων ἢ τετραπόδων, Ἄρεως μὲν γὰρ ἐπικρατοῦντος τῶν διὰ πυρὸς ἢ τραυμάτων ἢ ὀχλικῶν ἢ λῃστηρίων, Κρόνου δὲ τῶν διὰ συμπτώσεων ἢ ναυαγίων ἢ σπασμῶν.
Ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ δὲ γίνεται σίνη καὶ περὶ τὰ τροπικὰ καὶ ἰσημερινὰ σημεῖα τῆς σελήνης οὔσης, μάλιστα δὲ περὶ μὲν τὸ ἐαρινὸν τὰ δι’ ἀλφῶν, περὶ δὲ τὸ θερινὸν τὰ διὰ λειχήνων, περὶ δὲ τὸ μετοπωρινὸν τὰ διὰ λεπρῶν, περὶ δὲ τὸ χειμερινὸν τὰ διὰ φακῶν καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων. Πάθη δὲ συμβαίνειν εἴωθεν, ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν προκειμένων στάσεων οἱ κακοποιοὶ συσχηματισθῶσι, κατὰ τὸ ἐναντίον μέντοι, τουτέστιν ἑσπέριοι μὲν τῷ ἡλίῳ τῇ δὲ σελήνῃ ἑῷοι.
Καθόλου γὰρ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ψυχροκοιλίους ποιεῖ καὶ πολυφλεγμάτους καὶ ῥευματώδεις κατίσχνους τε καὶ ἀσθενικοὺς καὶ ἰκτερικοὺς καὶ δυσεντερικοὺς καὶ βηχικοὺς καὶ ἀναφορικοὺς καὶ κωλικοὺς καὶ ἐλεφαντιῶντας, τὰς δὲ γυναῖκας ἔτι καὶ ὑστερικάς· ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως αἱμοπτυϊκούς, μελαγχολικούς, πνευμονικούς, ψωριῶντας ἔτι τε τοὺς διὰ τομῶν ἢ καύσεων κρυπτῶν τόπων συνεχῶς ἐνοχλουμένους συρίγγων ἕνεκεν ἢ αἱμορροίδων ἢ κονδυλωμάτων ἢ καὶ τῶν πυρωδῶν ἑλκώσεων ἢ νομῶν, τὰς δὲ γυναῖκας ἔτι καὶ ἐκτρωσμοῖς ἢ ἐμβρυοτομίαις ἢ ἀναβρώσεσιν εἴωθε περικυλίειν.
Ἰδίως δὲ καὶ παρὰ τὰς προειρημένας τῶν συσχηματιζομένων ἀστέρων φύσεις πρὸς τὰ μέρη τοῦ σώματος τὰ ἰδιώματα ποιοῦσι τῶν παθῶν, συνεργεῖ δὲ αὐτοῖς μάλιστα πρὸς τὰς ἐπιτάσεις τῶν φαύλων ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστὴρ τῷ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τὸ ψυχρὸν συνοικειούμενος καὶ μᾶλλον ἐν κινήσει συνεχεῖ ποιῶν τοὺς ῥευματισμοὺς καὶ τὰς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις, ἐξαιρέτως δὲ τῶν περὶ θώρακα καὶ στόμαχον καὶ φάρυγγα, τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως πρὸς τὸ ξηραντικώτερον συνεπισχύων ὡς ἐπί τε τῶν ἑλκωδῶν ψιλώσεων καὶ ἐσχαρῶν καὶ ἀποστημάτων καὶ ἐρυσιπελάτων καὶ λειχήνων ἀγρίων καὶ μελαίνης χολῆς ἢ μανίας ἢ νόσου ἱερᾶς ἢ τῶν τοιούτων.
Καὶ παρὰ τὰς τῶν ζῳδίων δὲ ἐναλλαγὰς τῶν τοὺς προειρημένους ἐπὶ τῶν δύο κέντρων συσχηματισμοὺς περιεχόντων γίνονταί τινες ποιότητες παθῶν. Ἰδίως γὰρ ὁ μὲν Καρκίνος καὶ ὁ Αἰγόκερως καὶ οἱ Ἰχθύες καὶ ὅλως τὰ χερσαῖα καὶ τὰ ἰχθυϊκὰ ζῴδια τὰ διὰ τῶν νομῶν πάθη ποιεῖ καὶ λειχήνων ἢ λεπίδων ἢ χοιράδων ἢ συρίγγων ἢ ἐλεφαντιάσεων καὶ τῶν τοιούτων, ὁ δὲ Τοξότης καὶ οἱ Δίδυμοι τὰ διὰ πτωματισμῶν ἢ ἐπιλήψεων. Καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις δὲ μοίραις παρατυγχάνοντες οἱ ἀστέρες τῶν δωδεκάτη μορίων περὶ τὰ ἄκρα μάλιστα τὰ πάθη καὶ τὰ σίνη ποιοῦσι διὰ λωβήσεων ἢ ῥευματισμῶν, ἀφ’ ὧν ἐλεφαντιάσεις τε καὶ ὡς ἐπίπαν χειράγραι καὶ ποδάγραι συμβαίνουσι.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐὰν μὲν μηδεὶς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν συσχηματίζηται τοῖς τὰ αἴτια ποιοῦσι κακοποιοῖς ἢ τοῖς κεκεντρωμένοις φωσίν, ἀνίατα καὶ ἐπαχθῆ τά τε σίνη καὶ τὰ πάθη γενήσεται, ὡσαύτως δέ, κἂν συσχηματίζωνται μέν, καθυπερτερῶνται δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν ἐν δυνάμει ὄντων· ἐὰν δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ κατὰ κυρίων ὄντες σχημάτων καθυπερτερῶσι τοὺς τὸ αἴτιον ἐμποιοῦντας κακοποιούς, τότε τὰ σίνη εὐσχήμονα καὶ οὐκ ἐπονείδιστα γίνεται καὶ τὰ πάθη μέτρια καὶ εὐπαρηγόρητα, ἔσθ’ ὅτε δὲ καὶ εὐαπάλλακτα ἀνατολικῶν ὄντων τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν.
Ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Διὸς βοηθείαις ἀνθρωπίναις διὰ πλούτων ἢ ἀξιωμάτων τά τε σίνη κρύπτειν εἴωθε καὶ τὰ πάθη παρηγορεῖν, σὺν δὲ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ φαρμακείαις ἢ ἰατρῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐπικουρίαις, ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ προφάσεως θεῶν καὶ χρησμῶν τὰ μὲν σίνη τρόπον τινὰ εὔμορφα καὶ ἐπιχάριτα κατασκευάζει, τὰ δὲ πάθη ταῖς ἀπὸ θεῶν ἰατρείαις εὐπαρηγόρητα, τοῦ μέντοι τοῦ Κρόνου προσόντος μετὰ παραδειγματισμῶν καὶ ἐξαγοριῶν καὶ τῶν τοιούτων, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ μετ’ ἐπικουρίας καὶ πορισμοῦ τινος ἢ δι’ αὐτῶν τῶν σινῶν ἢ καὶ παθῶν τοῖς ἔχουσι περιγενομένου.
13. Of Bodily Injuries and Diseases
Since the subject which comes next is that which treats of the injuries and diseases of the body, we shall attach here in regular order the method of investigation devised for this form of query. It is as follows. In this case also, to gain a general comprehension, it is necessary to look to the two angles of the horizon, that is, the orient and the occident, and especially to the occident itself and the sign preceding it, which is disjunct 118 from the oriental angle. We must also observe what aspect the maleficent planets bear to them. For if they, one or both of them, are stationed against the ascending degrees of the aforesaid places, either bodily on them or quartile or in opposition to them, we must conclude that the subjects born will suffer bodily injuries and disease, especially if either one or both of the luminaries as well chance to he angular in the manner described 119, or in opposition.
For in that case not only if one of the maleficent planets is rising after the luminaries, but even if it is rising before them and is itself angular, it has power to produce one of the aforesaid injuries or diseases of such kind as the places of the horizon and of the signs may indicate, likewise what is indicated by the natures of the afflicting and the afflicted planets 120, and moreover by those that bear an aspect toward them. For the parts of the individual signs of the zodiac which surround the afflicted portion of the horizon will indicate the part of the body which the portent will concern, and whether the part indicated can suffer an injury or a disease or both, and the natures of the planets produce the kinds and causes of the events that are to occur. For, of the most important parts of the human body, Saturn is lord 121 of the right ear, the spleen, the bladder, the phlegm, and the bones; Jupiter is lord of touch, the lungs, arteries, and semen; Mars of the left ear, kidneys, veins, and genitals; the sun of the sight, the brain, heart, sinews and all the right-hand parts; Venus of smell, the liver, and the flesh; Mercury of speech and thought, the tongue, the bile, and the buttocks ; the moon of taste and drinking, the stomach, belly, womb, and all the left-hand parts.
For the most part it is a general principle that injuries occur when the significant maleficent planets are oriental, and diseases, conversely, when they are setting. The reason for this is that these two things are distinguished thus –an injury affects the subject once for all and does not involve lasting pain, while disease bears upon the patient either continuously or in sudden attacks.
For the purpose of ascertaining particulars, certain configurations significant of injury or sickness have been specially observed, by means of the events which generally accompany such positions of the stars. For blindness in one eye is brought about when the moon by itself is upon the aforesaid angles, or is in conjunction, or is full, and when it is in another aspect that bears a relation to the sun, but applies to one of the star clusters in the zodiac, as for example to the cluster in Cancer, and to the Pleiades of Taurus, to the arrow point of Sagittarius, to the sting of Scorpio, to the parts of Leo around the Coma Berenices, or to the pitcher of Aquarius ; and whenever Mars or Saturn moves toward the moon, when it is angular and waning and they are rising, or again when they ascend before the sun, being themselves angular.
But if they are in aspect with both luminaries at once, either in the same sign or in opposition, as we said, morning stars with respect to the sun,and evening stars to the moon, they will affect both eyes; for Mars brings about blindness from a blow, a thrust, iron, or burning; when he has Mercury in aspect, in palaestras and gymnasiums or by felonious attack. Saturn causes it by suffusion, cold, glaucoma, and the like.
Again if Venus is upon one of the aforesaid angles, particularly the occident, if she is joined with Saturn or is in aspect with him or has exchanged houses, and is inferior to Mars or has him in opposition, the men who are born are sterile, and the women are subject to miscarriages, premature births, or even to embryotomies, particularly in Cancer, Virgo, and Capricorn 122. And if the moon at rising applies to Mars, and if she also bears the same aspect to Mercury that Saturn does, while Mars again is elevated above her or is in opposition, the children born are eunuchs or hermaphrodites or have no ducts and vents 123.
Since this is so, when the sun also is in aspect, if the luminaries and Venus are made masculine, the moon is waning, and the maleficent planets are approaching in the succeeding degrees, the males that are born will be deprived of their sexual organs or injured therein, particularly in Aries, Leo, Scorpio, Capricorn, and Aquarius, and the females will be childless and sterile.
Sometimes those who have such genitures continue not without injury to the sight also; but those suffer impediment of speech, lisp, or have difficulty in enunciation who have Saturn and Mercury joined with the sun at the aforesaid angles, particularly if Mercury is also setting and both bear some aspect to the moon. When Mars is present with them he is generally apt to loosen the impediment to the tongue, after the moon meets him.
Again, if the luminaries, together or in opposition, move toward the maleficent planets upon the angles, or if the maleficent planets move toward the luminaries, particularly when the moon is at the nodes 124 or her bendings, or in the injurious signs such as Aries, Taurus, Cancer, Scorpio, or Capricorn, there come about deformations of the body such as hunchback, crookedness, lameness, or paralysis, congenital if the maleficent planets are joined with the luminaries, but if they are at the mid-heaven points, elevated above the luminaries or in opposition one to the other, the deformations will result from serious dangers, such as falls from a height, the collapse of houses, or the attacks of robbers or animals. If Mars prevails, the danger is from fire, wounds, bilious attacks, or robberies; if it is Saturn, through collapse of buildings, shipwreek, or spasms.
For the most part injuries come about when the moon is near the solstitial or equinoetial signs, particularly at the spring equinox, injuries by white leprosy; at the summer solstice, by lichens; at the fall equinox, by leprosy; at the winter solstice, by moles and the like. Diseases are likely to result when at the positions already described the maleficent planets are in aspect, but in the opposite sense, that is, evening stars with respect to the sun and morning stars to the moon.
For in general Saturn causes his subjeets to have cold bellies, increases the phlegm, makes them rheumatic, meagre, weak, jaundiced, and prone to dysentery, coughing, raising, colic, and elephantiasis; the females he makes also subject to diseases of the womb. Mars causes men to spit blood, makes them melancholy, weakens their lungs, and causes the itch or scurvy; and furthermore he causes them to be constantly irritated by cutting or cautery of the secret parts because of fistulas, hæmorrhoids, or tumours, or also burning ulcers, or eating sores; he is apt to afflict women furthermore with miscarriages, embryotomies, or corrosive diseases.
Of themselves, they also bring ahout the properties of disease in agreement with the natures, which have been already discussed, of the planets in aspect, as they relate to the parts of the body 125. Mercury assists them 126 chiefly to prolong the evil effects, when he is allied with Saturn inclining toward cold and continually stirring into activity rheumatisms and gatherings of fluid, particularly about the chest, throat, and stomach. When he is allied with Mars he adds his force to produce greater dryness, as in cases of ulcerous sore eyes, eschars 127, abscesses, erysipelas, savage lichens or skin eruptions, black bile, insanity, the sacred disease 128, or the like.
Certain qualities of disease are determined by changes among the zodiacal signs which surround the aforesaid configurations on the two angles. For in particular Cancer, Capricorn, and Pisces, and in general the terrestrial and piscine signs, cause diseases involving eating sores, lichens, scales, scrofula, fistulas, elephantiasis, and the like. Sagittarius and Gemini are responsible for those that come about with falling fits or epileptic seizures. And when the planets are in the last degrees of the signs they cause diseases and injuries especially in the extremities, through lesions or rheumatism, from which elephantiasis and, in general, gout in the feet and hands result.
Since this is the case, if no beneficent planet bears an aspect to the maleficent ones which furnish the cause, or to the luminaries on the centres, the injuries and diseases will be incurable and painful; so also, if they bear an aspect but the maleficent planets are in power and overcome them. But if the beneficent planets are themselves in the authoritative positions and overcome the maleficent planets that bear the responsibility for the evil, then the injuries are not disfiguring and do not entail reproach and the diseases are moderate and yield to treatment, and sometimes they may be easily cured, if the beneficent planets are rising.
For Jupiter generally causes the injuries to be concealed by human aid through riches or honours, and the diseases to be mitigated; and in company with Mercury he brings this about by drugs and the aid of good physicians. And Venus contrives that through pronouncements of the gods and oracles the blemishes shall be, in a way, comely and attractive 129, and that the diseases shall be readily moderated by divine healing; if however Saturn is by, the healing will be accompanied by exhibition and confession of the disease 130, and such like, but if Mercury 131 is joined with her it will be with the accrual of use and gain, through the injuries and diseases themselves, to those that have them.
14. Περὶ ποιότητος ψυχῆς
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν σωματικῶν συμπτωμάτων ὁ τύπος τῆς ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτος ἄν τις εἴη· τῶν δὲ ψυχικῶν ποιοτήτων αἱ μὲν περὶ τὸ λογικὸν καὶ νοερὸν μέρος καταλαμβάνονται διὰ τῆς κατὰ τὸν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστέρα θεωρουμένης ἑκάστοτε περιστάσεως, αἱ δὲ περὶ τὸ αἰσθητικὸν καὶ ἄλογον ἀπὸ τοῦ σωματωδεστέρου τῶν φώτων, τουτέστι τῆς σελήνης, καὶ τῶν πρὸς τὰς ἀπορροίας ἢ καὶ τὰς συναφὰς αὐτῆς συνεσχηματισμένων ἀστέρων.
Πολυτροπωτάτου δ’ ὄντος τοῦ κατὰ τὰς ψυχικὰς ὁρμὰς εἴδους εἰκότως ἂν καὶ τὴν τοιαύτην ἐπίσκεψιν οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδ’ ὡς ἔτυχε ποιούμεθα, διὰ πλειόνων δὲ καὶ ποικίλων παρατηρήσεων. Καὶ γὰρ αἱ τῶν ζῳδίων τῶν περιεχόντων τόν τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ τὴν σελήνην ἢ τοὺς τὴν ἐπικράτησιν αὐτῶν εἰληφότας ἀστέρας διαφοραὶ πολὺ δύνανται συμβάλλεσθαι πρὸς τὰ τῶν ψυχῶν ἰδιώματα καὶ οἱ τῶν λόγον ἐχόντων πρὸς τὸ προκείμενον εἶδος ἀστέρων σχηματισμοὶ πρὸς τὸν ἥλιόν τε καὶ τὰ κέντρα καὶ ἔτι τὸ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν ἑκάστου τῶν ἀστέρων φύσιν πρὸς τὰς ψυχικὰς κινήσεις ἰδιότροπον.
Τῶν μὲν οὖν ζῳδίων καθόλου τὰ μὲν τροπικὰ δημοτικωτέρας ποιεῖ τὰς ψυχάς, ὀχλικῶν τε καὶ πολιτικῶν πραγμάτων ἐπιθυμητικάς, ἔτι δὲ καὶ φιλοδόξους καὶ θεοπροσπλόκους, εὐφυεῖς τε καὶ εὐκινήτους, ζητητικάς τε καὶ εὑρετικάς, εὐεικάστους καὶ ἀστρολογικὰς καὶ μαντικάς, τὰ δὲ δίσωμα ποικίλας, εὐμεταβόλους, δυσκαταλήπτους, κούφας, εὐμεταθέτους, διπλάς, ἐρωτικάς, πολυτρόπους, φιλομούσους, ῥᾳθύμους, εὐπορίστους, μεταμελητικάς, τὰ δὲ στερεὰ δικαίας, ἀκολακεύτους, ἐπιμόνους βεβαίας, συνετάς, ὑπομονητικάς, φιλοπόνους, σκληράς, ἐγκρατεῖς, μνησικάκους, ἐκβιβαστικάς, ἐριστικάς, φιλοτίμους, στασιώδεις, πλεονεκτικάς, ἀποκρότους, ἀμεταθέτους.
Τῶν δὲ σχηματισμῶν αἱ μὲν ἀνατολικαὶ ὡροσκοπίαι καὶ μάλιστα αἱ ἰδιοπροσωπίαι ἐλευθερίους καὶ ἁπλᾶς καὶ αὐθάδεις καὶ ἰσχυρὰς καὶ εὐφυεῖς καὶ ὀξείας καὶ ἀπαρακαλύπτους τὰς ψυχὰς ἀπεργάζονται, οἱ δὲ ἑῷοι στηριγμοὶ καὶ αἱ μεσουρανήσεις ἐπιλογιστικάς, ἐπιμόνους, μνημονικάς, βεβαίας, συνετάς, μεγαλόφρονας, ἀποτελεστικὰς ὧν βούλονται, ἀτρέπτους, ῥωμαλέας, ἀνεξαπατήτους, κριτικάς, ἐμπράκτους, κολαστικάς, ἐπιστημονικάς, αἱ δὲ προηγήσεις καὶ αἱ δύσεις εὐμεταθέτους καὶ ἀβεβαίους, ἀσθενεῖς, ἀφερεπόνους, ἐμπαθεῖς, ταπεινάς, δειλάς, ἀμφιβόλους, θρασυδείλους, ἀμβλείας, βλακώδεις, δυσκινήτους, οἱ δὲ ἑσπέριοι στηριγμοὶ καὶ αἱ ὑπὸ γῆν μεσουρανήσεις, ἔτι δὲ ἐφ’ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ἡμέρας μὲν αἱ ἑσπέριοι δύσεις, νυκτὸς δὲ αἱ ἑῷοι, εὐφυεῖς μὲν καὶ φρενήρεις, οὐκ ἄγαν δὲ μνημονικὰς οὐδ’ ἐπιμόχθους ἢ φιλοπόνους, διερευνητικὰς δὲ τῶν ἀποκρύφων καὶ ζητητικὰς τῶν ἀθεωρήτων, οἷον μαγικάς, μυστηριακάς, μετεωρολογικάς, ὀργανικάς, μηχανικάς, θαυματοποιούς, ἀστρολογικάς, φιλοσόφους, οἰωνοσκοπικάς, ὀνειροκριτικὰς καὶ τὰς ὁμοίας.
Πρὸς τούτοις δὲ ἐν ἰδίοις μὲν ἢ καὶ οἰκείοις ὄντες τόποις καὶ αἱρέσεσιν οἱ τὴν κυρείαν ἔχοντες τῶν ψυχικῶν, καθ’ ὃν ἐν ἀρχῇ διωρισάμεθα τρόπον, προφανῆ καὶ ἀπαραπόδιστα καὶ αὐθέκαστα καὶ ἐπιτευκτικὰ ποιοῦσι τὰ ἰδιώματα, καὶ μάλισθ’ ὅταν οἱ αὐτοὶ τῶν δύο τόπων ἐπικρατήσωσιν ἅμα, τουτέστι τῷ μὲν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τυγχάνωσιν ὁπωσδήποτε συνεσχηματισμένοι, τὴν δὲ τῆς σελήνης ἀπόρροιαν ἢ καὶ συναφὴν ἐπέχοντες· μὴ οὕτως δὲ διακείμενοι ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀνοικείοις ὄντες τόποις τὰ μὲν τῆς ἑαυτῶν φύσεως οἰκεῖα πρὸς τὴν ψυχικὴν ἐνέργειαν ἀνεπίφαντα καὶ ἀμαυρὰ καὶ ἀτελείωτα καὶ ἀπρόκοπα καθιστᾶσι·
Τὰ δὲ τῆς τῶν κρατησάντων ἢ καθυπερτερησάντων ἰσχυρά τε καὶ ἐπιβλαβῆ τῶν προκειμένων, ὡς ὅταν οἵ τε διὰ τὴν τῶν κακοποιῶν οἰκείωσιν ἄδικοι καὶ πονηροὶ κρατούντων μὲν αὐτῶν εὐπροχώρητον καὶ ἀνεμπόδιστον καὶ ἀκίνδυνον καὶ ἐπίδοξον ἔχωσι τὴν πρὸς τὸ κακῶς ἄλλους ποιεῖν ὁρμήν, κρατουμένων δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως κατάφοροι καὶ ἀνεπίτευκτοι καὶ ἀτιμώρητοι γίνωνται, οἱ δ’ αὖ πάλιν διὰ τὴν τῶν ἀγαθοποιούντων πρὸς τοὺς εἰρημένους ὅρους συνοικείωσιν ἀγαθοὶ καὶ δίκαιοι ἀκαθυπερτερήτων μὲν ὄντων αὐτοί τε χαίρωσι καὶ εὐφημῶνται ἐπὶ ταῖς τῶν ἄλλων εὐποιίαις καὶ ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἀδικούμενοι ἀλλ’ ὀνησιφόρον ἔχοντες τὴν δικαιοσύνην διατελῶσι, κρατουμένων δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀνάπαλιν καὶ δι’ αὐτὸ τὸ πρᾷον καὶ φιλάνθρωπον καὶ ἐλεητικὸν εὐκαταφρόνητοί τε καὶ ἐπίμεμπτοι ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν πλείστων εὐαδίκητοι τυγχάνωσιν.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν καθόλου τρόπος τῆς ἠθικῆς ἐπισκέψεως τοιοῦτός τις ἂν εἴη, τὰς δὲ κατὰ μέρος ἀπ’ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων φύσεως κατὰ τὴν κυρίαν ἀποτελουμένας ἰδιοτροπίας ἑξῆς κατὰ τὸ κεφαλαιῶδες ἐπεξελευσόμεθα μέχρι τῆς καθ’ ὁλοσχέρειαν θεωρουμένης συγκράσεως.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν καὶ αὐθεντήσας τοῦ τε Ἑρμοῦ καὶ τοῦ τῆς σελήνης, ἐὰν μὲν ἐνδόξως ἔχῃ πρός τε τὸ κοσμικὸν καὶ τὰ κέντρα, ποιεῖ φιλοσωμάτους, ἰσχυρογνώμονας, βαθύφρονας, αὐστηρούς, μονογνώμονας, ἐπιμόχθους, ἐπιτακτικούς, κολαστικούς, περιουσιαστικούς, φιλοχρημάτους, βιαίους, θησαυριστικούς, φθονερούς, ἐναντίως δὲ καὶ ἀδόξως κείμενος ῥυπαρούς, μικρολόγους, μικροψύχους, ἀδιαφόρους, κακογνώμονας, βασκάνους, δειλούς, ἀνακεχωρηκότας, κακολόγους, φιλερήμους, φιλοθρήνους, ἀναιδεῖς, δεισιδαίμονας, φιλομόχθους, ἀστόργους, ἐπιβουλευτικοὺς τῶν οἰκείων, ἀνευφράντους, μισοσωμάτους·
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς κατὰ τὸν ἐκκείμενον τρόπον συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων πάλιν διαθέσεων ποιεῖ ἀγαθούς, τιμητικοὺς τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, καθεστῶτας, καλογνώμονας, ἐπικούρους, κριτικούς, φιλοκτήμονας, μεγαλοψύχους, μεταδοτικούς, εὐπροαιρέτους, φιλοικείους, πρᾴους, συνετούς, ἀνεκτικούς, ἐμφιλοσόφους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀπειροκάλους, μανιώδεις, ψοφοδεεῖς, δεισιδαίμονας, ἱεροφοιτοῦντας, ἐξαγορευτάς, ὑπόπτους, μισοτέκνους, ἀφίλους, ἐνδομύχους, ἀκρίτους, ἀπίστους, μωροκάκους, ἰώδεις, ὑποκριτικούς, ἀδρανεῖς, ἀφιλοτίμους, μεταμελητικούς, αὐστηρούς, δυσεντεύκτους, δυσπροσίτους, εὐλαβητικούς, εὐήθεις δὲ ὁμοίως καὶ ἀνεξικάκους·
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ ἀδιαφόρους, ἐπιπόνους, παρρησιαστικούς, ὀχληρούς, θρασυδείλους, αὐστηροπράκτους, ἀνελεήμονας, καταφρονητικούς, τραχεῖς, πολεμικούς, ῥιψοκινδύνους, φιλοθορύβους, δολίους, ἐνεδρευτάς, δυσμήνιδας, ἀδήκτους, ὀχλοκόπους, τυραννικούς, πλεονέκτας, μισοπολίτας, φιλέριδας, μνησικάκους, βαθυπονήρους, δράστας, ἀνυποίστους, σοβαρούς, φορτικούς, καυχηματίας, κακώτας, ἀδίκους, ἀκαταφρονήτους, μισανθρώπους, ἀτρέπτους, ἀμεταθέτους, πολυπράγμονας, εὐαναστρόφους μέντοι καὶ πρακτικοὺς καὶ ἀκαταγωνίστους καὶ ὅλως ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ἅρπαγας, λῃστάς, νοθευτάς, κακοπαθεῖς, αἰσχροκερδεῖς, ἀθέους, ἀστόργους, ὑβριστάς, ἐπιβουλευτικούς, κλέπτας, ἐπιόρκους, μιαιφόνους, ἀθεμιτοφάγους, κακούργους, ἀνδροφόνους, φαρμακευτάς, ἱεροσύλους, ἀσεβεῖς, τυμβωρύχους καὶ ὅλως παγκάκους·
Τῷ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ μισογυναίους, φιλαρχαίους, φιλερήμους, ἀηδεῖς πρὸς τὰς ἐντεύξεις, ἀφιλοτίμους, μισοκάλους, φθονερούς, αὐστηροὺς πρὸς συνουσίας, ἀσυμπεριφόρους, μονογνώμονας, φοιβαστικούς, θρησκευτάς, μυστηρίων καὶ τελετῶν ἐπιθυμητάς, ἱεροποιούς, ἐνθεαστικούς, θεοπροσπλόκους, σεμνοὺς δὲ καὶ εὐεντρέπτους, αἰδήμονας, ἐμφιλοσόφους, πιστοὺς πρὸς συμβιώσεις, ἐγκρατεῖς, ἐπιλογιστικούς, εὐλαβεῖς, ἀγανακτητάς τε καὶ πρὸς τὰς τῶν γυναικῶν ὑποψίας ζηλοτύπους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων λάγνους, ἀσελγεῖς, αἰσχροποιούς, ἀδιαφόρους καὶ ἀκαθάρτους, πρὸς τὰς συνουσίας ἀνάγνους, ἐπιβουλευτικοὺς θηλυκῶν προσώπων καὶ μάλιστα τῶν οἰκειοτάτων, σαθρούς, παμψόγους, καταφερεῖς, μισοκάλους, μωμητικούς, κακολόγους, μεθύσους, λατρευτικούς, ὑπονοθευτάς, ἀθεμίτους, πρὸς τὰς συνελεύσεις διατιθέντας καὶ διατιθεμένους οὐ μόνον πρὸς τὰ κατὰ φύσιν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ παρὰ φύσιν, πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀτίμων καὶ παρανόμων καὶ θηριωδῶν μίξεων ἐπιθυμητάς, ἀσεβεῖς, θεῶν καταφρονητικούς, μυστηρίων καὶ ἱερῶν διασυρτικούς, πάμπαν ἀπίστους, διαβολικούς, φαρμακούς, παντοποιούς·
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ περιέργους, φιλοπεύστας, νομίμων ζητητικούς, φιλιάτρους, μυστικούς, μετόχους ἀποκρύφων καὶ ἀπορρήτων, τερατουργούς, παραλογιστάς, ἐφημεροβίους, ἐντρεχεῖς, διοικητικοὺς πραγμάτων καὶ ἀγχίφρονας, περιπίκρους καὶ ἀκριβεῖς, νήπτας, φιλοφρόνους, φιλοπράκτους, ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ληρώδεις, μνησικάκους, νηλεεῖς, ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐπιμόχθους, μισοϊδίους, φιλοβασάνους, ἀνευφράντους, νυκτιρέμβους, ἐνεδρευτάς, προδότας, ἀσυμπαθεῖς, κλέπτας, μαγικούς, φαρμακευτάς, πλαστογράφους, ῥᾳδιουργούς, ἀποτευκτικούς τε καὶ εὐεμπτώτους.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ μεγαλοψύχους, χαριστικούς, θεοσεβεῖς, τιμητικούς, ἀπολαυστικούς, φιλανθρώπους, μεγαλοπρεπεῖς, ἐλευθερίους, δικαίους, μεγαλόφρονας, σεμνούς, ἰδιοπράγμονας, ἐλεήμονας, φιλολόγους, εὐεργετικούς, φιλοστόργους, ἡγεμονικούς. Ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας διαθέσεως τυγχάνων τὰς ὁμοίας μὲν φαντασίας περιποιεῖ ταῖς ψυχαῖς, ἐπὶ τὸ ταπεινότερον μέντοι καὶ ἀνεπιφαντότερον καὶ ἀκριτώτερον, οἷον ἀντὶ μὲν μεγαλοψυχίας ἀσωτίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ θεοσεβείας δεισιδαιμονίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ αἰδοῦς δειλίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ σεμνότητος οἴησιν, ἀντὶ δὲ φιλανθρωπίας εὐήθειαν, ἀντὶ δὲ φιλοκαλίας φιληδονίαν, ἀντὶ δὲ μεγαλοφροσύνης βλακείαν, ἀντὶ δὲ ἐλευθεριότητος ἀδιαφορίαν, καὶ ὅσα τούτοις παραπλήσια.
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ τραχεῖς, μαχίμους, στρατηγικούς, διοικητικούς, κεκινημένους, ἀνυποτάκτους, θερμούς, παραβόλους, παρρησιαστάς, πρακτικούς, ἐλεγκτικούς, ἀνυτικούς, φιλονείκους, ἀρχικούς, εὐεπιβούλους, ἐπιεικεῖς, ἐπάνδρους, νικητικούς, μεγαλοψύχους δὲ καὶ φιλοτίμους καὶ θυμικοὺς καὶ κριτικοὺς καὶ ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ὑβριστάς, ἀδιαφόρους, ὠμούς, ἀνεξιλάστους, στασιαστάς, ἐριστικούς, μονοπόνους, διαβόλους, οἰηματίας, πλεονέκτας, ἅρπαγας, ταχυμεταβόλους, κούφους, μεταμελητικούς, ἀστάτους, προπετεῖς, ἀπίστους, ἀκρίτους, ἀγνώμονας, ἐκστατικούς, ἐμπατάκτους, μεμψιμοίρους, ἀσώτους, ληρώδεις καὶ ὅλως ἀνωμάλους καὶ παρακεκινημένους.
Τῷ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ καθαρίους, ἀπολαυστικούς, φιλοκάλους, φιλοτέκνους, φιλοθεώρους, φιλομούσους, ᾠδικούς, φιλοτρόφους, εὐήθεις, εὐεργετικούς, ἐλεητικούς, ἀκάκους, φιλοθέους, ἀσκητάς, φιλαγωνιστάς, φρονίμους, φιλητικούς, ἐπαφροδίτους ἐν τῷ σεμνῷ, λαμπροψύχους, εὐγνώμονας, μεταδοτικούς, φιλογραμμάτους, κριτικούς, συμμέτρους καὶ εὐσχήμονας πρὸς τὰ ἀφροδίσια, φιλοικείους, εὐσεβεῖς, φιλοδικαίους, φιλοκώμους, φιλοδόξους καὶ ὅλως καλούς τε καὶ ἀγαθούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων τρυφητάς, ἡδυβίους, θηλυψύχους, ὀρχηστικούς, γυναικοθύμους, δαπάνους, καταγυναίους, ἐρωτικούς, λάγνους, καταφερεῖς, μοιχούς, φιλοκόσμους, ὑπομαλάκους, ῥᾳθύμους, ἀσώτους, ἐπιμώμους, ἐμπαθεῖς, καλλωπιστάς, γυναικονοήμονας, ἱερῶν ἐγκατόχους, προαγωγικούς, μυστηριακούς, πιστοὺς μέντοι καὶ ἀπονήρους καὶ ἐπιχαρίτους καὶ εὐπροσίτους καὶ εὐδιαγώγους καὶ πρὸς τὰς συμφορὰς ἐλευθεριωτέρους·
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ πολυγραμμάτους, φιλολόγους, γεωμέτρας, μαθηματικούς, ποιητικούς, δημηγορικούς, εὐφυεῖς, σωφρονικούς, ἀγαθόφρονας, καλοσυμβούλους, πολιτικούς, εὐεργετικούς, ἐπιτροπικούς, χρηστοήθεις, φιλοδώρους, φιλόχλους, εὐεπιβούλους, ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἡγεμονικούς, εὐσεβεῖς, φιλοθέους, εὐχρηματίστους, φιλοστόργους, φιλοικείους, εὐπαιδεύτους, ἐμφιλοσόφους, ἀξιωματικούς· ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων εὐήθεις, ληρώδεις, σφαλλομένους, εὐκαταφρονήτους, ἐνθουσιαστικούς, θεοπροσπλόκους, φληνάφους, ὑποπίκρους, προσποιησισόφους, ἀνοήτους, ἀλαζονικούς, ἐπιτηδευτάς, μαγευτικούς, ὑποκεκινημένους, πολυίστορας δὲ καὶ μνημονικοὺς καὶ διδασκαλικοὺς καὶ καθαρίους ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ γενναίους, ἀρχικούς, θυμικούς, φιλόπλους, πολυτρόπους, σθεναρούς, παραβόλους, ῥιψοκινδύνους, ἀνυποτάκτους, ἀδιαφόρους, μονοτόνους, ὀξεῖς, αὐθάδεις, καταφρονητικούς, τυραννικούς, δράστας, ὀργίλους, ἡγεμονικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας ὠμούς, ὑβριστάς, φιλαίμους, φιλοθορύβους, δαπάνους, κραυγαστάς, πλήκτας, προπετεῖς, μεθύσους, ἅρπαγας, ἀνελεήμονας, κακούργους, τεταραγμένους, μανιώδεις, μισοικείους, ἀθέους.
Τῷ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ ἐπιχάριτας, εὐδιαγώγους, φιλεταίρους, ἡδυβίους, εὐφροσύνους, παιγνιώδεις, ἀφελεῖς, εὐρύθμους, φιλορχηστάς, ἐρωτικούς, φιλοτέκνους, μιμητικούς, ἀπολαυστικούς, διασκευαστάς, ἐπάνδρους καὶ εὐκαταφόρους μὲν πρὸς τὰς ἀφροδισιακὰς ἁμαρτίας, ἐπιτευκτικοὺς δὲ καὶ εὐπεριστόλους καὶ νουνεχεῖς καὶ δυσεξελέγκτους καὶ ἀδιακρίτους, ἔτι δὲ νέων ἐπιθυμητικοὺς ἀρρένων τε καὶ θηλειῶν, δαπάνους τε καὶ ὀξυθύμους καὶ ζηλοτύπους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων ῥιψοφθάλμους, λάγνους, καταφερεῖς, διασύρτας, μοιχικούς, ὑβριστάς, ψεύστας, δολοπλόκους, ὑπονοθευτὰς οἰκείων τε καὶ ἀλλοτρίων, ὀξεῖς ἅμα καὶ προσκορεῖς πρὸς τὰς ἐπιθυμίας, διαφθορεῖς γυναικῶν καὶ παρθένων, παραβόλους, θερμούς, ἀτάκτους, ἐνεδρευτάς, ἐπιόρκους, εὐεμπτώτους τε καὶ φρενοβλαβεῖς, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ἀσώτους, φιλοκόσμους καὶ θρασεῖς καὶ διατιθεμένους καὶ ἀσελγαίνοντας.
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ στρατηγικούς, δεινούς, δράστας, εὐκινήτους, ἀκαταφρονήτους, πολυτρόπους, εὑρετικούς, σοφιστάς, ἐπιπόνους, πανούργους, προγλώσσους, ἐπιθετικούς, δολίους, ἀστάτους, μεθοδευτάς, κακοτέχνους, ὀξύφρονας, ἐξαπατητάς, ὑποκριτικούς, ἐνεδρευτάς, κακοτρόπους, πολυπράγμονας, φιλοπονήρους, ἐπιτευκτικοὺς δ’ ἄλλως καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ὁμοίους εὐσυνθέτους καὶ εὐσυνδεξιάστους καὶ ὅλως ἐχθρῶν μὲν βλαπτικούς, φίλων δὲ εὐποιητικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἐναντίων δαπάνους, πλεονέκτας, ὠμούς, παραβόλους, τολμηρούς, μεταμελητικούς, ἐμπατάκτους, παρακεκινημένους, ψεύστας, κλέπτας, ἀθέους, ἐπιόρκους, ἐπιθέτας, στασιαστάς, ἐμπρηστάς, θεατροκόπους, ἐφυβρίστους, λῃστρικούς, τοιχωρύχους, μιαιφόνους, πλαστογράφους, ῥᾳδιουργούς, γόητας, μάγους, φαρμάκους, ἀνδροφόνους.
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ προσηνεῖς, ἀγαθούς, τρυφητάς, λογίους, καθαρίους, εὐφροσύνους, φιλορχηστάς, καλοζήλους, μισοπονήρους, φιλοτέχνους, φιλοθεωτάτους, εὐσχήμονας, εὐεκτικούς, εὐονείρους, φιλοστόργους, εὐεργετικούς, ἐλεήμονας, σικχούς, εὐσυναλλάκτους, ἐπιτευκτικοὺς καὶ ὅλως ἐπαφροδίτους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας ῥᾳθύμους, ἐρωτικούς, τεθηλυσμένους, γυναικώδεις, ἀτόλμους, ἀδιαφόρους, καταφερεῖς, ἐπιψόγους, ἀνεπιφάντους, ἐπονειδίστους.
Τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξων διαθέσεων ποιεῖ φιλοτέχνους, ἐμφιλοσόφους, ἐπιστημονικούς, εὐφυεῖς, ποιητικούς, φιλομούσους, φιλοκάλους, χρηστοήθεις, ἀπολαυστικούς, τρυφεροδιαίτους, εὐφροσύνους, φιλοφίλους, εὐσεβεῖς, συνετούς, πολυμηχάνους, διανοητικούς, εὐεπιβούλους, κατορθωτικούς, ταχυμαθεῖς, αὐτοδιδάκτους, ζηλωτὰς τῶν ἀρίστων, μιμητὰς τῶν καλῶν, εὐστόμους καὶ ἐπιχάριτας τῷ λόγῳ, ἐρασμίους, εὐαρμόστους, τοῖς ἤθεσι σπουδαίους, φιλάθλους, ὀρθούς, κριτικούς, μεγαλόφρονας, τῶν δὲ ἀφροδισίων πρὸς μὲν τὰ γυναικεῖα φυλακτικούς, πρὸς δὲ τὰ παιδικὰ μᾶλλον κεκινημένους καὶ ζηλοτύπους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας ἐπιθέτας, πολυμηχάνους, κακοστόμους, ἀλλοπροσάλλους, κακογνώμονας, ἐξαπατητάς, κυκητάς, ψεύστας, διαβόλους, ἐπιόρκους, βαθυπονήρους, ἐπιβουλευτικούς, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀδεξιάστους, νοθευτάς, γυναικῶν διαφθορέας καὶ παίδων, ἔτι δὲ καλλωπιστάς, ὑπομαλάκους, ἐπιψόγους, κακοφήμους, πολυθρυλλήτους, παντοπράκτας καὶ ἐνίοτε μὲν ἐπὶ διαφθορᾷ τὰ τοιαῦτα ὑποκρινομένους, ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἀληθείαις διατιθεμένους τε καὶ αἰσχροποιοῦντας καὶ ποικίλοις πάθεσιν ὑβριζομένους.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστὴρ μόνος τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς λαβὼν ἐπὶ μὲν ἐνδόξου διαθέσεως ποιεῖ τοὺς γεννωμένους συνετούς, ἀγχίνους, νοήμονας, πολυίστορας, εὑρετικούς, ἐμπείρους, λογικούς, φυσιολόγους, θεωρητικούς, εὐφυεῖς, ζηλωτικούς, εὐεργετικούς, ἐπιλογιστικούς, εὐστόχους, μαθηματικούς, μυστηριακούς, ἐπιτευκτικούς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς ἐναντίας πανούργους, προπετεῖς, ἐπιλήσμονας, ὁρμητάς, κούφους, εὐμεταβόλους, μεταμελητικούς, μωροκάκους, ἄφρονας, ἁμαρτωλούς, ψεύστας, ἀδιαφόρους, ἀστάτους, ἀπίστους, πλεονέκτας, ἀδίκους καὶ ὅλως σφαλερούς τε τῇ διανοίᾳ καὶ καταφόρους τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασι.
Τούτων δὲ οὕτως ἐχόντων συμβάλλεται μέντοι καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ τῆς σελήνης κατάστασις, ἐπειδήπερ ἐν μὲν ταῖς καμπίαις τυγχάνουσα τοῦ τε νοτίου καὶ βορείου πέρατος συνεργεῖ τοῖς ψυχικοῖς ἰδιώμασιν ἐπὶ τὸ πολυτροπώτερον καὶ τὸ πολυμηχανώτερον καὶ εὐμεταβολώτερον, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν συνδέσμων ἐπὶ τὸ ὀξύτερον καὶ πρακτικώτερον καὶ εὐκινητότερον· ἔτι δὲ ἐν μὲν ταῖς ἀνατολαῖς καὶ ταῖς τῶν φώτων αὐξήσεσιν ἐπὶ τὸ εὐφυέστερον καὶ προφανέστερον καὶ βεβαιότερον καὶ παρρησιαστικώτερον, ἐν δὲ ταῖς μειώσεσι τῶν φώτων ἢ ταῖς κρύψεσιν ἐπὶ τὸ νωχελέστερον καὶ ἀμβλύτερον καὶ μεταμελητικώτερον καὶ εὐλαβέστερον καὶ ἀνεπιφανέστερον·
Συμβάλλεται δὲ καὶ ὁ ἥλιος συνοικειωθείς πως τῷ τῆς ψυχικῆς κράσεως οἰκοδεσποτήσαντι κατὰ μὲν τὸ ἔνδοξον πάλιν τῆς διαθέσεως ἐπὶ τὸ δικαιότερον καὶ ἀνυτικώτερον καὶ τιμητικώτερον καὶ σεμνότερον καὶ θεοσεβέστερον, κατὰ δὲ τὸ ἐναντίον καὶ ἀνοίκειον ἐπὶ τὸ ταπεινότερον καὶ ἐπιπονώτερον καὶ ἀσεμνότερον καὶ ὠμότερον καὶ μονογνωμονέστερον καὶ αὐστηρότερον καὶ δυσδιαγωγότερον καὶ ὅλως ἐπὶ τὸ δυσκατορθώτερον.
14. Of the Quality of the Soul
The character, then, of the inquiry into bodily affections would be of this sort. Of the qualities of the soul, those which concern the reason and the mind are apprehended by means of the condition of Mercury observed on the particular occasion; and the qualities of the sensory and irrational part are discovered from the one of the luminaries which is the more corporeal, that is, the moon, and from the planets which are configurated with her in her separations and applications 132.
But since the variety of the impulses of the soul is great, it stands to reason that we would make such an inquiry in no simple or offhand manner, but by means of many complicated observations. For indeed the differences between the signs which contain Mercury and the moon, or the planets that dominate them, can contribute much to the character of the soul; so likewise do the aspects to the sun and the angles shown by the planets that are related to the class of qualities under consideration, and, furthermore, that peculiar natural quality of each one of the planets which relates to the movements of the soul.
Of the signs of the zodiac in general, then, the solstitial signs produce souls fitted for deaIing with the people, fond of turbulence and political activity, glory-seeking, moreover, and attentive to the gods, noble, mobile, inquisitive, inventive, good at conjecture, and fitted for astrology and divination. The bicorporeal signs make souls complex, changeable, hard to apprehend, light, unstable, fickle, amorous, versatile, fond of music, lazy, easily acquisitive, prone to change their minds. The solid signs make them just, unaffected by flattery, persistent, firm, intelligent, patient, industriens, stern, selfcontrolled, tenacious of grudges, extortionate, contentious, ambitious, factious, grasping, hard, inflexible.
Of configurations, positions in the orient and at the horoscope, and in particular those which are in proper face 133, produce liberal, simple, self-willed, strong, noble, keen, open souls. Morning stations and culminations make them calculating, patient, of good memory, firm, intelligent, magnanimous, accomplishing what they desire, inflexible, robust, rough, not readily deceived, critical, practical, prone to inflict Punishment, gifted with understanding. Precessions 134 and settings make them easily changed, unstable, weak, unable to bear labour, emotional, humble, cowardly, deceitful, bullying, dull, slowwitted, hard to arouse. Evening stations and position at mid-heaven beneath the earth, and furthermore, in the case of Mercury and Venus, by day evening settings and by night morning settings, produce souls noble and wise, but with mediocre memory, not painstaking nor fond of labour, but investigators of hidden things and seekers after the unknown, as for example magicians, adepts in the mysteries, meteorologists, makers of instruments and machines, conjurors, astrologers, philosophers, readers of omans, interpretere of dreams, and the like.
When, in addition, the governors of the soul, as we explained at the beginning, are in their own or familiar houses or sects 135, they make the characters of the soul open, unimpeded, spontaneous, and effective, especially when the same planets rule the two places at once, that is, when they are configurated to Mercury in any aspect whatever, and hold the separation or application of the moon 136; if they are not so disposed, however, but are in places alien to them, it renders the properties of their own natures obscure, indistinct, imperfect, and ineffective with respect to the active quality of the soul.
The powers, however, of the nature of the planets that dominate or overcome 137 them are vigorous and injurious to the subjects. Thus men who, by reason of the familiarity of the maleficent planets, are unjust and evil, find their impulse to injure one another easy, unimpeded, secure, and honourable, if those planets are in power; but if they are overcome by planets of the opposite sect, the men are lethargic, ineffective, and easily punished. And those again that through the familiarity of the beneficent planets to the aforesaid boundaries are good and just, if these planets are not overcome, are themselves happy and bear a good repute for their kindness to others, and, injured by none, continue to benefit from their own justice; if, however, the good planets are dominated by opposites, simply because of their gentleness, kindness, and compassion, they suffer from contempt and reproach or even may easily be wronged by most people.
This, then, is the general method of inquiry as to character. We shall next briefly consider, in due order, the particular traits resulting from the very nature of the planets, in this kind of domination, until the theory of mixture has been treated in its most important aspects.
If Saturn alone is ruler of the soul and dominates Mercury and the moon, if he has a dignified position with reference to the universe and the angles 138, he makes his subjects lovers of the body 139, strongminded, deep thinkers, austere, of a single purpose, laborious, dictatorial, ready to punish, lovers of property, avaricious, violent, amassing treasure, and jealous; but if his position is the opposite and without dignity, he makes them sordid, petty, mean-spirited, indifferent, mean-minded, malignant, cowardly, diffident, evil-speakers, solitary, tearful, shameless, superstitious; fond of toil, unfeeling, devisers of plots against their friends, gloomy, taking no care of the body.
Saturn, allied with Jupiter in the way described, again in dignified positions, makes his subjects good, respectful to elders, sedate, noble-minded, helpful 140, critical, fond of possessions, magnanimous, generous, of good intentions, lovers of their friends, gentle, wise, patient, philosophical; but in the opposite positions, he makes them uncultured, mad, easily frightened, superstitious, frequenters of shrines, public confessors of ailments, suspicious, hating their own children, friendless, hiding within doors, without judgement, faithless, knavishly foolish, venomous, hypocritical, ineffective, unambitious, prone to change their minds, stern, hard to speak with or to approach, cautious, but nevertheless foolish and submissive to abuse.
Saturn, allied with Mars, in honourable positions makes his subjects neither good nor bad, industrious, outspoken, nuisances, cowardly braggarts, harsh in conduct, without pity, contemptuous, rough, contentious, rash, disorderly, deceitful, layers of ambushes, tenacious of anger, unmoved by pleading, courting the mob, tyrannical, grasping, haters of the citizenry, fond of strife, malignant, evil through and through, active, impatient, blustering, vulgar, boastful, injurious, unjust, not to be despised, haters of mankind, inflexible, unchangeable, busy-bodies, but at the same time adroit and practical, not to be overborne by rivals, and in general successful in achieving their ends. In the opposite positions he makes his subjects robbers, pirates, adulterators, submissive to disgraceful treatment, takers of base profits, godless, without affection, insulting, crafty, thieves, perjurers, murderers, eaters of forbidden foods, evildoers, homicides, poisoners, impious, robbers of temples and of tombs, and utterly depraved.
Allied with Venus in honourable positions Saturn makes his subjects haters of women, lovers of antiquity, solitary, unpleasant to meet, unambitious, hating the beautiful, envious, stern in social relations, not companionable, of fixed opinions, prophetic, given to the practice of religions rites, lovers of mysteries and initiations, performers of sacrificial rites, mystics, religions addicts, but dignified and reverent; modest, philosophical, faithful in marriage 141, self-controlled, calculating, cautious, quick to take offence, and easily led by jealousy to be suspicious of their wives. In positions of the opposite kind he makes them loose, lascivious, doers of base acts, undiscriminating and unclean in sexual relations, impure, deceivers of women and particularly their own kin, unsound, censorious, depraved, hating the beautiful, fault-finders, evil-speakers, drunken, servile, adulterators, lawless in sexual relations, both active and passive, both natural and unnatural, and willing to seek them with those barred by age, station, or law, or with animals, impious, contemptuous of the gods, deriding mysteries and sacred rites, entirely faithless, slanderous, poisoners, rogues who will stop at nothing.
Saturn, in familiarity with Mercury, in honourable positions makes his subjects meddlers, inquisitive, inquirers into matters of law and custom, fond of the art of medicine, mystics, partakers in concealed and secret rites, miracle-workers, cheaters, living only for the day, facile, able to direct business, shrewd, bitter, accurate, sober, friendly, fond of practical affairs, capable of gaining their ends. In dishonourable positions he makes them frivolous talkers, malignant, with no pity in their souls, given to toil, hating their own kin, fond of torment, gloomy, night-prowlers, layers of ambushes, traitors, unsympathetic, thieves, magicians, poisoners, forgers, unscrupulous, unfortunate, and usually unsuccessful.
If Jupiter alone has the domination of the soul, in honourable positions he makes his subjects magnanimous, generous, god-fearing, honourable, pleasureloving, kind, magnificent, liberal, just, highminded, dignified, minding their own business, compassionate, fond of discussion, beneficent, affectionate, with qualities of leadership. If he chances to be in the opposite kind of position, he makes their souls seem similar, to be sure, but with a difference in the direction of greater humility, less conspicuousness, and poorer judgement 142. For example, instead of magnanimity, he endows them with prodigality; instead of reverence for the gods, with superstition; instead of modesty, with cowardice; instead of dignity, with conceit; instead of kindness, with foolish simplicity; instead of the love of beauty, with love of pleasure; instead of high-mindedness, with stupidity; instead of liberality, with indifference, and the like.
Jupiter allied with Mars in honourable positions makes his subjects rough, pugnacious, military, managerial, restless, unruly, ardent, reckless, practical, outspoken, critical, effective, contentious, commanding, given to plotting, respectable, virile, fond of victory, but magnanimous, ambitious, passionate, judicious, successful. In the opposite position he makes then insolent, undiscriminating, savage, implacable, seditious, contentious, stubborn, slanderous, conceited, avaricious, rapacious, quickly changeable, light, readily changing their minds, unstable, headstrong, untrustworthy, of poor judgement, unfeeling, excitable, active, querulous, prodigal, gossipy, and in all ways uneven and easily excited.
Jupiter, allied with Venus, in honourahle positions makes his subjects pure, pleasure-loving, lovers of the beautiful, of children, of spectacles, and of the domain of the Muses, singels, fond of those who reared them, of good character 143, beneficent, compassionate, guileless, religious, prone to athletic training, fond of competition, wise, affectionate, charming in a dignified way, magnanimous, fair, charitable, fond of learning, of good judgement, moderate and decorous in matters of love, fond of their kinsfolk, pious, just, ambitious, seekers after glory, and in general gentlemanly. In the opposite positions he renders them luxurious, soft-livers, effeminate, fond of the dance, womanly in spirit, lavish in expenditure, evil in relations with women, erotic, lascivious, lecherous, slanderous, adulterous, lovers of ornament, rather saft, lazy, profligate, given to fault-finding, passionate, adorners of their persons, womanly minded, infatuated by religious rites, panderers, frequenters of the mysteries, trustworthy however and not rascally, but gracious, easy of approach, and cheerful, and inclined to liberality in misfortune.
Jupiter allied with Mercury in honourable positions makes his subjects learned, fond of discussion, geometricians, mathematicians, Facts, orators, gifted, sober, of good intellect, good in counsel, statesmen, benefactors, managers, good natured, generous, lovers of the mob, shrewd, successful, leaders, reverent, religious, skilful in business, affectionate, lovers of their own kin, well brought up, philosophical, dignified. In the opposite positions he makes them simple, garrulous, prone to make mistakes, contemptible, fanatical, religious enthusiasts, speakere of folly, inclined to bitterness, pretenders to wisdom, fools, boasters, students, magicians, somewhat deranged, but well informed, of good memory, teachers, and pure in their desires.
Mars alone, given the domination of the soul, in an honourable position makes his subjects noble, commanding, spirited, military, versatile 144, powerful, venturesome, rash, unruly, indifferent, stubborn, keen, headstrong, contemptuous, tyrannical, active, easily angered, with the qualities of leadership. In a position of the opposite kind he makes them savage, insolent, bloodthirsty, makers of disturbances, spendthrifts, loud-mouthed, quick-fisted, impetuous, drunken, rapacious, evil-doers, pitiless, unsettled, mad, haters of their own kin, impious.
Allied with Venus, in honourable positions, Mars makes his subjects pleasing, cheerful, friendly, softliving, happy, playful, artless, graceful, fond of dancing, erotic, artistic, imitative, pleasure-loving, able to secure themselves property 145, masculine, and given to misconduct in matters of love, but still successful, circumspect, and sensible, difficult to convict and discreet, furthermore passionate for both young men and young women, spendthrifts, quick-tempered, and jealous. In contrary positions he makes them leering, lascivious, profligate, indifferent, slanderers, adulterers, insolent, liars, deceivers, seducers of those both in their own families and in those of others, at the same time keen and insatiate of pleasure, corrupters of women and maidens, venturesome, ardent, unruly, treacherous, perjurers, easily influenced and of unsound mind, but sometimes likewise profligate, fond of adornment, bold, disposed to base practices, and shameless.
Allied with Mercury, in honourable positions Mars makes his subjects leaders of armies, skilful, vigorous, active, not to be despised, resourceful, inventive, sophistic, painstaking, rascally, talkative, pugnacious, tricky, unstable, systematic workers, practising evil arts, keen-witted, deceitful, hypocritical, insidious, of bad character, meddlers, inclined to rascality but nevertheless successful and capable of keeping contract and faith with persons like themselves, and in general injurious to their enemies and helpful to their friends. In opposite positions he makes them spendthrifts, avaricious, savage, venturesome, daring, prone to change their minds, excitable, easily aroused, liars, thieves, impious, perjurers, ready to take the offensive, seditious, kindlers of fires, creators of disturbances in the theatre, insolent, piratical, burglars, murderers, forgers, villains, wizards, magicians, sorcerers, homicides.
If Venus alone takes the domination of the soul, in an honourable position she makes her subjects pleasant, good, luxurious 146, eloquent, neat, cheerful, fond of dancing, eager for beauty, haters of evil, lovers of the arts, fond of spectacles, decorous, healthy, dreamers of pleasant dreams, affectionate, beneficent, compassionate, fastidious, easily conciliated, successful, and, in general, charming. In the opposite position she makes them careless, erotic, effeminate, womanish, timid, indifferent, depraved, censorious, insignificant, meriting reproach.
Joined with Mercury, in honorable positions Venus makes them artistic, philosophical, gifted with understanding, talented, poetic, lovers of the muses, lovers of beauty, of worthy character, seekers after enjoyment, luxurious, happy 147, fond of friends, pious, sagacious, resourceful, intellectual, intelligent, successful, quick to learn 148, self-taught, seekers after the best, imitators of beauty, eloquent and pleasing in speech, commanding affection, of well-ordered character, earnest, fond of athletics, upright, of good judgement, magnanimous; in affairs of love, restrained in their relations with women but more passionate for boys, and jealous. In the contrary position she makes them pugnacious, resourceful, evil-speakers, unstable, of bad intentions, deceivers, agitators, liars, slanderers, perjurers, thorough rascals, plotters, faithless, unreliable, adulterators, corrupters of women and children; furthermore, adorners of their persons, rather effeminate, malicious in censure and in gossip, garrulous, villains, sometimes 149 feigning such acts with a view to corruption and sometimes performing them in earnest, lending themselves to base acts and performing them, and subjected to all sorts of base treatment.
Mercury, by himself taking the domination of the soul, in an honourable position makes those who are born under him wise, shrewd, thoughtful, learned, inventive, experienced, good calculators, inquirers into nature, speculative, gifted, emulous, beneficent, prudent, good at conjecture, mathematicians, partakers in mysteries, successful in attaining their ends. In the opposite position he makes them utter rascals, precipitate, forgetful, impetuous, light-minded, fickle, prone to change their minds, foolish rogues, witless, sinful, liars, undiscriminating, unstable, undependable, avaricious, unjust, and, in general, unsteady in judgement and inclined to evil deeds.
While the foregoing is true as stated, nevertheless the condition of the moon itself also makes a certain contribution. For when the moon happens to be at the bendings of its northern and southern limits 150, it helps 151; with respect to the character of the soul, in the direction of greater versatility, resourcefulness, and capacity for change; at the nodes, in the direction of greater keenness, activity, and excitability; again, at rising and in the increases of its illumination,. towards greater natural endowments, renown, firmness, and frankness; and in the waning of its illumination, or its occultations, towards greater sluggishness and dullness, less fixity of purpose, greater cautiousness, and less renown.
The sun also aids, when it is familiar with the planet that governs the temperament of the soul, in an honourable position modifying it in the direction of justice, success, honour, dignity, and reverence for the gods, but in the contrary and alien position making it humbler, more industrious, less conspicuous, more savage, more obstinate, harsher, with a harder life, and in general less successful.
15. Περὶ παθῶν ψυχικῶν
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τοῖς τῆς ψυχῆς ἰδιώμασιν ἀκολουθεῖ πως καὶ ὁ περὶ τῶν ἐξαιρέτων αὐτῆς παθῶν λόγος, καθόλου μὲν πάλιν ἐπισημαίνεσθαι καὶ παρατηρεῖν προσήκει τόν τε τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστέρα καὶ τὴν σελήνην, πῶς ἔχουσι πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τὰ κέντρα καὶ τοὺς πρὸς κάκωσιν οἰκείους τῶν ἀστέρων, ὡς ἐάν τε αὐτοὶ ἀσύνδετοι ὄντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἐάν τε πρὸς τὸν ἀνατολικὸν ὁρίζοντα καθυπερτερηθῶσιν ἢ ἐμπερισχεθῶσιν ἢ διαμηκισθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνοικείως καὶ βλαπτικῶς ἐσχηματισμένων, ποικίλων παθῶν περὶ τὰς ψυχικὰς ἰδιοτροπίας συμπιπτόντων εἰσὶ ποιητικοί. Τῆς διακρίσεως αὐτῶν πάλιν θεωρουμένης ἀπὸ τῆς προκατειλημμένης τῶν τοῖς τόποις συνοικειωθέντων ἀστέρων ἰδιοτροπίας.
Τὰ μὲν οὖν πλεῖστα τῶν μετριωτέρων παθῶν σχεδὸν καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν περὶ τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς ἰδιωμάτων ῥηθεῖσι διακέκριται τῆς ἐπιτάσεως αὐτῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν κακούντων ὑπερβολῆς συνορᾶσθαι δυναμένης, ἐπειδήπερ ἤδη τις ἂν εἰκότως εἴποι πάθη καὶ τὰ ἄκρα τῶν ἠθῶν καὶ ἤτοι ἐλλείποντα ἢ καὶ πλεονάζοντα τῆς μεσότητος· τὰ δὲ ἐξαίρετον ἔχοντα τὴν ἀμετρίαν καὶ ὥσπερ νοσηματώδη καὶ παρὰ ὅλην τὴν φύσιν καὶ περὶ αὐτὸ τὸ διανοητικὸν τῆς ψυχῆς μέρος καὶ περὶ τὸ παθητικὸν ὡς ἐν τύπῳ τοιαύτης ἔτυχε παρατηρήσεως. Ἐπιληπτικοὶ μὲν γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ γίνονται, ὅσοι τῆς σελήνης καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, ὥσπερ εἴπομεν, ἢ ἀλλήλοις ἢ τῷ ἀνατολικῷ ὁρίζοντι ἀσυνδέτων ὄντων τὸν μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου ἡμέρας, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως νυκτός, ἔχουσιν ἐπίκεντρον καὶ κατοπτεύοντα τὸ προκείμενον σχῆμα, μανιώδεις δέ, ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ἀνάπαλιν ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου νυκτός, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἡμέρας, κεκυριευκὼς ᾖ τοῦ σχήματος, καὶ μάλιστα ἐν Καρκίνῳ ἢ Παρθένῳ ἢ Ἰχθύσι, δαιμονιόπληκτοι δὲ καὶ ὑγροκέφαλοι, ὅταν οὕτως ἔχοντες οἱ κακοποιοῦντες ἐπὶ φάσεως οὖσαν κατέχωσι τὴν σελήνην, ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου συνοδεύουσαν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως πανσεληνιάζουσαν, μάλιστα δὲ ἐν Τοξότῃ καὶ Ἰχθύσι.
Μόνοι μὲν οὖν οἱ κακοποιοὶ κατὰ τὸν προειρημένον τρόπον τὴν ἐπικράτησιν τοῦ σχήματος λαβόντες ἀνίατα μὲν ἀνεπίφαντα δὲ ὅμως καὶ ἀπαραδειγμάτιστα ποιοῦσι τὰ προκείμενα τοῦ διανοητικοῦ τῆς ψυχῆς νοσήματα· συνοικειωθέντων δὲ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν Διός τε καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν λιβικῶν μερῶν ὄντες αὐτοὶ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς κεκεντρωμένων ἰάσιμα μὲν εὐπαραδειγμάτιστα δὲ ποιοῦσι τὰ πάθη. Ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ θεραπειῶν ἰατρικῶν καὶ ἤτοι διαιτητικῆς ἀγωγῆς ἢ φαρμακείας, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ χρησμῶν καὶ τῆς ἀπὸ θεῶν ἐπικουρίας, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἀπηλιωτικῶν αὐτοὶ κεκεντρωμένοι τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν δυνόντων ἀνίατά τε ἅμα καὶ πολυθρύλλητα καὶ ἐπιφανέστατα ποιοῦσι τὰ νοσήματα, κατὰ μὲν τὰς ἐπιληψίας συνεχείαις καὶ περιβοησίαις καὶ κινδύνοις θανατικοῖς τοὺς πάσχοντας περικυλίοντες, κατὰ δὲ τὰς μανίας καὶ ἐκστάσεις ἀκατασχεσίαις καὶ ἀπαλλοτριώσεσι τῶν οἰκείων καὶ γυμνητείαις καὶ βλασφημίαις καὶ τοῖς τοιούτοις, κατὰ δὲ τὰς δαιμονιοπληξίας ἢ τὰς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις ἐνθουσιασμοῖς καὶ ἐξαγορείαις καὶ αἰκίαις καὶ τοῖς ὁμοίοις τῶν παραδειγματισμῶν.
Ἰδίως δὲ καὶ τῶν τὸ σχῆμα περιεχόντων τόπων οἱ μὲν ἡλίου καὶ οἱ τοῦ Ἄρεως πρὸς τὰς μανίας μάλιστα συνεργοῦσιν, οἱ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ Ἑρμοῦ πρὸς τὰς ἐπιληψίας, οἱ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης πρὸς τὰς θεοφορίας καὶ ἐξαγορείας, οἱ δὲ τοῦ Κρόνου καὶ σελήνης πρὸς τὰς τῶν ὑγρῶν ὀχλήσεις καὶ τὰς δαιμονιοπληξίας.
Ἡ μὲν οὖν περὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν τῆς ψυχῆς καθ’ ὅλας τὰς φύσεις νοσηματικὴ παραλλαγὴ σχεδὸν ἔν τε τοῖς τοιούτοις ἐστὶν εἴδεσι καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων ἀποτελεῖται σχηματισμῶν, ἡ δὲ τῶν περὶ τὸ παθητικὸν κατὰ τοῦτο πάλιν τὸ ἐξαίρετον θεωρουμένη καταφαίνεται μάλιστα περὶ τὰς κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ γένος τοῦ ἄρρενος καὶ θήλεως ὑπερβολὰς καὶ ἐλλείψεις τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν, διαλαμβάνεται δὲ ἐπισκεπτικῶς κατὰ τὸν ὅμοιον τῷ προκειμένῳ τρόπον, τοῦ ἡλίου μέντοι μετὰ τῆς σελήνης ἀντὶ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ παραλαμβανομένου καὶ τῆς τοῦ Ἄρεως σὺν τῷ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης πρὸς αὐτοὺς συνοικειώσεως· τούτων γὰρ οὕτως ὑπ’ ὄψιν πιπτόντων,
Ἐὰν μὲν μόνα τὰ φῶτα ἐν ἀρσενικοῖς ᾖ ζῳδίοις, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες ὑπερβάλλουσι τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες τοῦ παρὰ φύσιν πρὸς τὸ ἔπανδρον ἁπλῶς τῆς ψυχῆς, καὶ δραστικώτερον, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἤτοι ὁπότερος ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι ἠρρενωμένοι ὦσιν, οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες πρὸς τὰς κατὰ φύσιν συνουσίας γίνονται καταφερεῖς καὶ μοιχικοὶ καὶ ἀκόρεστοι καὶ ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ πρόχειροι πρός τε τὰ αἰσχρὰ καὶ τὰ παράνομα τῶν ἀφροδισίων, αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες πρὸς τὰς παρὰ φύσιν ὁμιλίας λάγνοι καὶ ῥιψόφθαλμοι καὶ αἱ καλούμεναι τριβάδες· διατιθέασι γὰρ θηλείας ἀνδρῶν ἔργα ἐπιτελούσας, κἂν μὲν μόνος ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἠρρενωμένος ᾖ, λάθρᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀναφανδόν, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ἄντικρυς, ὥστε ἐνίοτε καὶ νομίμας ὥσπερ γυναῖκας τὰς διατιθεμένας ἀναδεικνύειν.
Τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον τῶν φώτων κατὰ τὸν ἐκκείμενον σχηματισμὸν ἐν θηλυκοῖς ζῳδίοις ὑπαρχόντων μόνον αἱ μὲν γυναῖκες ὑπερβάλλουσι τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες τοῦ παρὰ φύσιν πρὸς τὸ εὔθρυπτον καὶ τεθηλυσμένον τῆς ψυχῆς. Ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ᾖ τεθηλυσμένος, αἱ μὲν γυναῖκες καταφερεῖς τε καὶ μοιχάδες καὶ λάγνοι γίνονται πρὸς τὸ διατίθεσθαι κατὰ φύσιν ἐν παντί τε καιρῷ καὶ ὑπὸ παντὸς οὑτινοσοῦν, ὡς μηδενὸς ἁπλῶς, ἐάν τε αἰσχρὸν ᾖ ἐάν τε παράνομον, ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀφροδισίων, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες μαλακοί τε καὶ σαθροὶ πρὸς τὰς παρὰ φύσιν συνουσίας καὶ γυναικῶν ἔργα διατιθέμενοι παθητικῶς, ἀποκρύφως μέντοι καὶ λεληθότως. Ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ᾖ τεθηλυσμένος, ἄντικρυς καὶ μετὰ παρρησίας ἀναισχυντοῦσι τὰ προκείμενα καθ’ ἑκάτερον εἶδος ἀποτελοῦντες τὸ πορνικὸν καὶ πολύκοινον καὶ πολύψογον καὶ πάναισχρον σχῆμα περιβαλλόμενοι μέχρι τῆς κατὰ τὴν λοιδορίαν καὶ τὴν τῆς χρήσεως ὕβριν σημειώσεως.
Συμβάλλονται δὲ καὶ οἱ μὲν ἀνατολικοὶ καὶ ἑῷοι σχηματισμοί, τοῦ τε τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης πρός τε τὸ ἐπανδρότερον καὶ εὐδιαβοητότερον, οἱ δὲ δυτικοὶ καὶ ἑσπέριοι πρός τε τὸ θηλυκώτερον καὶ τὸ κατασταλτικώτερον· ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου συμπροσγενόμενος ἐπὶ τὸ ἀσελγέστερον καὶ ἀκαθαρτότερον ἢ καὶ ἐπονειδιστότερον ἑκάστῳ τῶν ἐκκειμένων πέφυκε συνεργεῖν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς πρὸς τὸ εὐσχημονέστερον καὶ φυλακτικώτερον καὶ αἰδημονέστερον, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ πρός τε τὸ περιβοητότερον καὶ τὸ τῶν παθῶν εὐκινητότερον καὶ πολυτροπώτερον καὶ εὖ προσκοπώτερον.
15. Of Diseases of the Soul
Since the account of the principal diseases of the soul, in a sense, follows upon that of the soul’s characteristics, it is in general needful to note and observe the positions of Mercury and the moon relative to each other, to the angles, and to the planets whose nature it is to do injury; for if, while they themselves are unrelated to each other, or to the eastern horizon, they are overcome, or surrounded, or held in opposition by unfamiliar stars in injurious aspect, they cause the incidence of various diseases which affect the soul’s character. Their interpretation again is to be calculated from the previously described qualities of the planets which are familiar to the places 152 in the sky.
Indeed, most of the more moderate diseases have, in a way, already been distinguished in what has been said about the character of the soul, and their increase can be discerned from the excess of injurious influences; for one might now with propriety call “diseases” those extremes of character which either fall short of or exceed the mean. Those affections, however, which are utterly disproportionate and as it were pathological, which relate to the whole nature, and which concern both the intelligent part of the soul and its passive part, are, in brief, to be discerned as follows. In most cases those are epileptic 153 in whose genitures the moon and Mercury are, as we said above, unrelated to each other or to the eastern horizon, while Saturn by day or Mars by night is angular and in the aspect previously described 154. They are violently insane when, again under the same conditions, Saturn by night and Mars by day rules the position, particularly in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces. They are afflicted by demons 155 and have water on the brain when the maleficent planets are in this position and control the moon in phase, Saturn when she is at conjunction, Mars when she is full, and particularly in Sagittarius and Pisces. When. the maleficent planets are by themselves and rule the configuration in the manner stated, the diseases of the rational part of the soul which we have mentioned as being caused by them are, to be sure, incurable, but latent and obscure.
But if the beneficent planets Jupiter and Venus have some familiarity to them when they are themselves in the western parts and the beneficent planets are angular 156 in the east, they make the diseases curable, but noticeable; if it be Jupiter, curable by medical treatments, a diet, or drugs; if Venus, by oracles and the aid of the gods. When the maleficent planets themselves are angular in the east and the beneficent planets are setting, the diseases which they cause are both incurable, the subject of talk, and conspicuous; in epilepsy they involve the victims in continuous attacks, notoriety, and deadly peril; in madness and seizures, they cause instability, alienation of friends, tearing off clothes, abusive language, and the like; in demonic seizures, or water on the brain, possession, confession, torments, and similar manifestations.
In detail, of the places that possess the configuration, those of the sun and Mars aid in causing madness, those of Jupiter and Mercury, epilepsy; those of Venus, divine possession and public confession; and those of Saturn and the moon, gatherings of water and demonic seizures.
The morbid perversion of the active part of the soul in its general nature, therefore, is produced in some such forms as these and is produced by these configurations of the planets. The corresponding perversion of the passive portion, as in the former instance viewed in its extreme cases, is most apparent in excesses and deficiencies in matters of sex, male and female, as compared with what is natural, and in inquiry is apprehended in the same fashion as before, though the sun is taken, together with the moon, instead of Mercury, and the relation to them of Mars, together with Venus, is observed.
For when these thus fall under observation, if the luminaries are unattended in masculine signs, males exceed in the natural, and females exceed in the unnatural quality, so as merely to increase the virility and activity of the soul. But if likewise Mars or Venus as well, either one or both of them, is made masculine 157, the males become addicted to natural sexual intercourse, and are adulterous, insatiate, and ready on every occasion for base and lawless acts of sexual passion, while the females are lustful for unnatural congresses, east inviting glances of the eye, and are what we call tribades 158; for they deal with females and perform the functions of males. If Venus alone is constituted in a masculine manner, they do these things secretly and not openly. But if Mars likewise is so constituted, without reserve, so that sometimes they even designate the women with whom they are on such terms as their lawful “wives”.
But on the other hand, when the luminaries in the aforesaid configuration are unattended in feminine signs, the females exceed in the natural, and the males in unnatural practice, with the result that their souls become soft and effeminate. If Venus too is made feminine, the women become depraved, adulterous, and lustful, with the result that they may be dealt with in the natural manner on any occasion and by any one soever, and so that they refuse absolutely no sexual act, though it be base or unlawful. The men, on the contrary, become effeminate and unsound with respect to unnatural congresses and the functions of women, and are dealt with as pathics, though privately and secretly. But if Mars also is constituted in a feminine manner, their shamelessness is outright and frank and they perform the aforesaid acts of either kind, assuming the guise of common bawds who submit to general abuse and to every baseness until they are stamped with the reproach and insult that attend such usages.
And the rising and morning positions of both Mars and Venus have a contributory effect, to make them more virile and notorious, while setting and evening positions increase femininity and sedateness. Similarly, if Saturn is present, his influence joins with each of the foregoing to produce more licentiousness, impurity, and disgrace, while Jupiter aids in the direction of greater decorum, restraint, and modesty, and Mercury tends to increase notoriety, instability of the emotions, versatility, and foresight.
ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΣΜΑΤΙΚΗ (ΤΕΤΡΑΒΙΒΛΟΣ), ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ Δ′
ἑλληνικὸ πρωτότυπον μὲ ἀγγλικὴν μετάφρασιν, τοῦ Frank Egleston Robbins, Κλασικὴ Βιβλιοθήκη Loeb, 1940
❧
ΠΕΡΙΕΧΟΜΕΝΑ
1. Προοίμιον
2. Περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς
3. Περὶ τύχης ἀξιωματικῆς
4. Περὶ πράξεως ποιότητος
5. Περὶ συναρμογῶν
6. Περὶ τέκνων
7. Περὶ φίλων καὶ ἐχθρῶν
8. Περὶ ξενιτείας
9. Περὶ θανάτου ποιότητος
10. Περὶ χρόνων διαιρέσεως
1. Προοίμιον
Τὰ μὲν οὖν πρὸ τῆς γενέσεως καὶ τὰ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν γένεσιν δυνάμενα θεωρεῖσθαι καὶ ἔτι τῶν μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν, ὅσα τῆς συστάσεώς ἐστιν ἴδια τὸ καθόλου ποῖον τῶν συγκριμάτων ἐμφαίνοντα, σχεδὸν ταῦτα ἂν εἴη τῶν δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἐκτὸς συμβεβηκότων καὶ ἐφεξῆς ὀφειλόντων διαλαμβάνεσθαι προηγεῖται μὲν ὁ περὶ τυχῆς κτητικῆς τε καὶ ἀξιωματικῆς λόγος, συνῆπται δ’ ὥσπερ ἡ μὲν κτητικὴ ταῖς τοῦ σώματος οἰκειώσεσιν, ἡ δὲ ἀξιωματικὴ ταῖς τῆς ψυχῆς.
1. Introduction
The foregoing may be taken as what can be learned by investigation of matters antecedent to the nativity and contemporary with it, together with such of those posterior to the nativity as properly apply to the constitution of the subject by disclosing the general quality of his temperament. Among external accidentals, which should be treated next in order, the discussion of the fortune of both riches and honour comes first; and as material fortune is associated with the properties of the body, so honour belongs to those of the soul.
2. Περὶ τύχης κτητικῆς
Τὰ μὲν οὖν τῆς κτήσεως ὁποῖά τινα ἔσται, ληπτέον ἀπὸ τοῦ καλουμένου κλήρου τῆς τύχης, μόνου μέντοι, καθ’ ὃν πάντοτε τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου ἐπὶ τὴν σελήνην διάστασιν ἐκβάλλομεν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμέρας καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν νυκτὸς γεννωμένων, δι’ ἃς εἴπομεν ἐν τοῖς περὶ χρόνων ζωῆς αἰτίας. Σκοπεῖν οὖν δεήσει τοὺς τοῦ συνισταμένου τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον δωδεκατημορίου λαβόντας τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν, καὶ πῶς ἔχουσιν οὗτοι δυνάμεως καὶ οἰκειότητος, καθ’ ὃν ἐν ἀρχῇ διωρισάμεθα τρόπον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοὺς συσχηματιζομένους αὐτοῖς ἢ τοὺς καθυπερτεροῦντας τῶν τῆς αὐτῆς ἢ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως.
Ἐν δυνάμει μὲν γὰρ ὄντες οἱ τοῦ κλήρου τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λαβόντες ποιοῦσι πολυκτήμονας, καὶ μάλιστα, ὅταν ὑπὸ τῶν φώτων οἰκείως τύχωσι μαρτυρηθέντες, ἀλλ’ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου διὰ θεμελίων ἢ γεωργιῶν ἢ ναυκληριῶν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς διὰ πίστεων ἢ ἐπιτροπειῶν ἢ ἱερατειῶν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως διὰ στρατειῶν καὶ ἡγεμονιῶν, ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ φιλικῶν καὶ γυναικείων δωρεῶν, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ λόγων καὶ ἐμποριῶν.
Ἰδίως δ’ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τῇ κτητικῇ τύχῃ συνοικειούμενος, ἐὰν τῷ τοῦ Διὸς συσχηματισθῇ, κληρονομίας περιποιεῖ, καὶ μάλιστα ὅταν ἐπὶ τῶν ἄνω κέντρων τοῦτο συμβῇ τοῦ τοῦ Διὸς ἐν δισώμῳ ζῳδίῳ τυχόντος ἢ καὶ τὴν συναφὴν τῆς σελήνης ἐπέχοντος· τότε γὰρ καὶ εἰς παιδοποιίαν ἀνεχθέντες ἀλλότρια κληρονομοῦσι· κἂν μὲν οἱ τῆς αὐτῆς αἱρέσεως τοῖς οἰκοδεσπόταις τὰς μαρτυρίας τῶν οἰκοδεσποτειῶν αὐτοῖς τύχωσι ποιούμενοι, τὰς κτήσεις ἀκαθαιρέτους διαφυλάττουσιν, ἐὰν δὲ οἱ τῆς ἐναντίας αἱρέσεως καθυπερτερήσωσι τοὺς κυρίους τόπους ἢ ἐπανενεχθῶσιν αὐτοῖς, καθαιρέσεις ποιοῦνται, τῶν ὑπαρχόντων τοῦ καθολικοῦ καιροῦ λαμβανομένων διὰ τῆς τῶν τὸ αἴτιον ποιούντων πρὸς τὰ κέντρα καὶ τὰς ἐπαναφορὰς προσνεύσεως.
2. Of Material Fortune
What the subject’s material acquisitions will be is to be gained from the so-called “Lot of Fortune” 1; that one alone, however, to discover which we measure from the horoscope the distance from the sun to the moon, in both diurnal and nocturnal nativities, for the reasons which we stated in the discussion of the length of life. As it is constituted in this way, we shall be obliged therefore to take the lordship of the sign, and observe what is the condition of these planets with regard to power and familiarity, in the way which we specified at the beginning 2. Further, we must consider the planets in aspect with them, or those of their own or of the opposite sect that overcome them.
For when the planets which govern the Lot of Fortune are in power, they make the subjects rich, particularly when they chance to have the proper testimony 3 of the luminaries; thus Saturn brings riches through building, or agriculture, or shipping ventures, Jupiter through fiduciary relationships, guardianships, or priesthoods, Mars through military operations and command, Venus through gifts from friends or women, and Mercury through eloquence and trade.
And in a special way, when Saturn is associated with material fortune, if he is in aspect with Jupiter, he is the cause of inheritances, particularly when this comes about upon the upper angles and Jupiter is in a bicorporeal sign or holds the application of the moon. For in that case they are adopted and inherit the possessions of others; and if the planets of the same sect as the ruling planets happen themselves to witness to the rulership, they retain their possessions without loss; but if the planets of the opposite sect overcome the governing places or rise after them, they bring, about loss of possessions, and the general time 4 is discovered by means of the approach of the causative planets to the angles and the succedent signs.
3. Περὶ τύχης ἀξιωματικῆς
Τὰ δὲ τῆς ἀξίας καὶ τῆς τοιαύτης εὐδαιμονίας δεήσει σκοπεῖν ἀπό τε τῆς τῶν φώτων διαθέσεως καὶ τῆς τῶν δορυφορούντων ἀστέρων οἰκειώσεως [αὐτοῖς]· ἐν ἀρρενικοῖς μὲν γὰρ ζῳδίοις ὄντων ἀμφοτέρων τῶν φώτων καὶ ἐπικέντρων ἤτοι ἀμφοτέρων πάλιν ἢ καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου, μάλιστα δὲ τοῦ τῆς αἱρέσεως, καὶ δορυφορουμένων ὑπὸ τῶν πέντε πλανωμένων, ἡλίου μὲν ὑπὸ ἑῴων, σελήνης δὲ ὑπὸ ἑσπερίων, οἱ γεννώμενοι βασιλεῖς ἔσονται.
Καὶ ἐὰν μὲν οἱ δορυφοροῦντες ἀστέρες ἤτοι ἐπίκεντροι καὶ αὐτοὶ ὦσιν ἢ πρὸς τὸ ὑπὲρ γῆν κέντρον συσχηματίζωνται, μεγάλοι καὶ δυναμικοὶ καὶ κοσμοκράτορες διατελοῦσι, καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον εὐδαίμονες, ἐὰν οἱ δορυφοροῦντες δεξιοὶ τοῖς ὑπὲρ γῆν κέντροις συσχηματίζωνται·
Ἐὰν δὲ τῶν ἄλλων οὕτως ἐχόντων μόνος ὁ ἥλιος ᾖ ἐν ἀρρενικῷ ἡ δὲ σελήνη ἐν θηλυκῷ, ἐπίκεντρον δὲ τὸ ἕτερον τῶν φώτων, ἡγεμόνες μόνον ἔσονται ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου κύριοι, ἐὰν δὲ πρὸς τούτοις μηδὲ οἱ δορυφοροῦντες ἀστέρες ἐπίκεντροι ὦσιν ἢ μαρτυρήσωσι τοῖς κέντροις, μεγάλοι μόνον ἔσονται καὶ ἐν ἀξιώμασι τοῖς ἀπὸ μέρους στεμματηφορικοῖς ἢ ἐπιτροπικοῖς ἢ στρατοπεδαρχικοῖς ἢ ἱερατικοῖς καὶ οὐχὶ τοῖς ἡγεμονικοῖς.
Ἐὰν δὲ τὰ μὲν φῶτα μὴ ᾖ ἐπίκεντρα, τῶν δὲ δορυφορούντων ἀστέρων οἱ πλεῖστοι ἤτοι ἐπίκεντροι ὦσιν ἢ συσχηματίζωνται τοῖς κέντροις, ἐν ἀξιώμασι μὲν ἐπιφανεστέροις οὐ γενήσονται, ἐν προαγωγαῖς δὲ πολιτικαῖς καὶ μετριότητι περὶ τὰς κατὰ τὸν βίον προλήψεις· μηδὲ τῶν δορυφορούντων μέντοι τοῖς κέντροις συνοικειωθέντων ἀνεπίφαντοι ταῖς πράξεσι καὶ ἀπρόκοποι καθίστανται, τέλεον δὲ ταπεινοὶ καὶ κακοδαίμονες γίνονται ταῖς τύχαις, ὅταν μηδέτερον τῶν φώτων μήτε κεκεντρωμένον μήτ’ ἐν ἀρρενικῷ ζῳδίῳ τυγχάνῃ μήτε δορυφορῆται ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν καθόλου τύπος τῆς προκειμένης ἐπισκέψεως τοιαύτην τινὰ τὴν αὐξομείωσιν ἔχει τῶν ἀξιωμάτων, τὰς δὲ μεταξὺ τούτων καταστάσεις παμπληθεῖς οὔσας καταστοχαστέον ἀπὸ τῶν περὶ αὐτὸ τὸ εἶδος τῶν τε φώτων καὶ τῆς δορυφορίας αὐτῶν ἐπὶ μέρους ἐναλλοιώσεως καὶ τῆς κυρίας τῶν δορυφορήσεων·
Ταύτης γὰρ περὶ μὲν τοὺς τὴν αἵρεσιν ἔχοντας ἢ τοὺς ἀγαθοποιοὺς συνισταμένης τὸ αὐθεντικώτερον καὶ ἀπταιστότερον τοῖς ἀξιώμασι παρακολουθεῖ, περὶ δὲ τοὺς ἐναντίους ἢ τοὺς κακοποιοὺς τὸ ὑποτεταγμένον καὶ ἐπισφαλέστερον, καὶ τὸ τῆς ἀξίας δὲ τῆς ἐσομένης εἶδος ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν δορυφορησάντων ἀστέρων ἰδιοτροπίας θεωρητέον, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν κυρίαν τῆς δορυφορίας ἔχων ἐπὶ πολυκτημοσύνῃ καὶ συναγωγῇ χρημάτων τὰς δυναστείας ποιεῖ, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ἢ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπὶ χάρισι καὶ δωρεαῖς καὶ τιμαῖς καὶ μεγαλοψυχίαις, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἐπὶ στρατηλασίαις καὶ νίκαις καὶ φόβοις τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων, ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ σύνεσιν ἢ παιδείαν καὶ ἐπιμέλειαν καὶ οἰκονομίαν τῶν πραγμάτων.
3. Of the Fortune of Dignity
It will be needful to determine the questions of dignity and happiness resulting therefrom from the position of the luminaries and the familiarity to them of their attendant planets 5. For if both the luminaries are in masculine signs and either both of them, or even one of the two, angular, and particularly if the luminary of the sect 6 is also attended by the five planets, matutine to the sun and vespertine to the moon, the children will be kings.
And if the attendant planets are either themselves angular or bear an aspect to the superior angle, the children born will continue to be great, powerful, and worldrulers 7, and they will be even more fortunate if the attendant planets are in dexter aspect 8 to the superior angles.
But if, while the others are in this position, the sun alone is in a masculine sign, and the moon is in a feminine one, and one of the luminaries is angular, they will merely be generals 9, with power of life and death. If, however, besides this the attendant planets are neither angular nor witnessing 10 to the angles, they will be merely great and will enjoy partial dignities, those which involve the wearing of chaplets 11, or those of superintendence 12 or of military command 13, and not those of first rank.
But if the luminaries are not angular, and most of the attendant planets are either angular or in aspect with the angles, they will not attain the more conspicuous honours but rather civil leadership and moderate advancement in their careers. If, however, the attendant planets are not associated with the angles, they are rendered obscure in their actions and without preferment, and they are entirely humble and miserable in their fortunes when neither of the luminaries is angular, or in a masculine sign, or attended by the beneficent planets.
The general outline, then, of the investigation before us involves a gradation of dignities of this sort. Since there are very many conditions intermediate between these grades, one must estimate them from the specific qualities of the luminaries themselves, and the particular variations in the manner in which they are attended, and the government of the attendance.
For if their attendance consists of planets of the same sect, or of the beneficent planets, greater independence and security will attend the dignities; but if it involves the opposite sect, or the maleficent planets, there will be dependency and less security. The kind of future honour is to be divined from the quality of the attending planets; for if Saturn governs the attendance, he brings about power based on wealth and the amassing of riches, but Jupiter or Venus that which rests upon favours, gifts, honours, and magnanimity; Mars brings power founded on generalships, victories, and the fears of subordinates, and Mercury that which depends upon intelligence, education, and the care and management of affairs.
4. Περὶ πράξεως ποιότητος
Ὁ δὲ τῆς πράξεως τὴν κυρίαν ἔχων λαμβάνεται κατὰ τρόπους δύο, ἀπό τε τοῦ ἡλίου καὶ τοῦ μεσουρανοῦντος ζῳδίου· σκοπεῖν γὰρ δεήσει τόν τε φάσιν ἑῴαν ἔγγιστα πρὸς ἥλιον πεποιημένον καὶ τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, ὅταν μάλιστα τὴν συναφὴν τῆς σελήνης ἐπέχῃ, κἂν μὲν ὁ αὐτὸς ᾖ ἀστὴρ ὁ ἀμφότερα ἔχων τὰ εἰρημένα, τούτῳ μόνῳ προσχρηστέον, ὁμοίως δέ, κἂν τὸ ἕτερον μηδὲ εἷς ἔχῃ, τῷ τὸ ἕτερον εἰληφότι μόνῳ, ἐὰν δὲ ἕτερος ᾖ ὁ τὴν ἔγγιστα φάσιν πεποιημένος καὶ ἕτερος ὁ τῷ μεσουρανήματι καὶ τῇ σελήνῃ συνοικειούμενος, ἀμφοτέροις προσχρηστέον τὰ πρωτεῖα διδόντας τῷ κατ’ ἐπικράτησιν πλείους ἔχοντι ψήφους οἰκοδεσποτείας, καθ’ ὃν προεκτεθείμεθα τρόπον· ἐὰν δὲ μηδὲ εἷς εὑρίσκηται μήτε φάσιν πεποιημένος μήτε ἐπὶ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος, τὸν κύριον αὐτοῦ παραληπτέον, πρὸς ἐπιτηδεύσεις μέντοι τὰς κατὰ καιρούς· ἄπρακτοι γὰρ ὡς ἐπίπαν οἱ τοιοῦτοι γίνονται.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν τῆς πράξεως τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν ἀστὴρ λαβὼν οὕτως ἡμῖν διακριθήσεται, τὸ δὲ ποῖον τῶν πράξεων ἔκ τε τῆς ἰδιοτροπίας τῶν τριῶν ἀστέρων Ἄρεως καὶ Ἀφροδίτης καὶ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ τῆς τῶν ζῳδίων, ἐν οἷς ἂν τύχωσι παραπορευόμενοι.
Ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ τὸ πράσσειν παρέχων, ὡς ἄν τις εἴποι τυπωδῶς, ποιεῖ γραμματέας, πραγματευτικούς, λογιστάς, διδασκάλους, ἐμπόρους, τραπεζίτας, μάντεις, ἀστρολόγους, θύτας καὶ ὅλως τοὺς ἀπὸ γραμμάτων καὶ ἑρμηνείας καὶ δόσεως καὶ λήψεως ἐργαζομένους, κἂν μὲν ὃ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτῷ μαρτυρήσῃ, ἀλλοτρίων οἰκονόμους ἢ ὀνειροκρίτας ἢ ἐν ἱεροῖς τὰς ἀναστροφὰς ποιουμένους προφάσει μαντειῶν καὶ ἐνθουσιασμῶν, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός, νομογράφους, ῥήτορας, σοφιστὰς μετὰ προσώπων μειζόνων ἔχοντας τὰς ἀναστροφάς.
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τὸ πράσσειν παρέχων ποιεῖ τοὺς παρ’ ὀσμαῖς ἀνθέων ἢ μύρων ἢ οἴνοις ἢ χρώμασιν ἢ βαφαῖς ἢ ἀρώμασιν ἢ κοσμίοις τὰς πράξεις ἔχοντας, οἷον μυροπώλας, στεφανοπλόκους, ἐκδοχέας, οἰνεμπόρους, φαρμακοπώλας, ὑφάντας, ἀρωματοπώλας, ζωγράφους, βαφέας, ἱματιοπώλας· κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτῷ μαρτυρήσῃ ἐμπόρους τῶν πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν καὶ κόσμον γοήτας δὲ καὶ φαρμακοὺς καὶ προαγωγοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν ὁμοίων τούτοις πορίζοντας. Ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ἀθλητάς, στεφανηφόρους, τιμῶν καταξιουμένους, ὑπὸ θηλυκῶν προσώπων προβιβαζομένους.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως μετὰ μὲν τοῦ ἡλίου σχηματισθεὶς τοὺς διὰ πυρὸς ἐργαζομένους ποιεῖ οἷον μαγείρους, χωνευτάς, καύστας, χαλκέας, μεταλλευτάς· χωρὶς δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου τυχὼν τοὺς διὰ σιδήρου οἷον ναυπηγούς, τέκτονας, γεωργούς, λατόμους, λιθοξόους, λαοξόους, λιθουργούς, ξυλοσχίστας, ὑπουργούς. Κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτῷ μαρτυρήσῃ ναυτικούς, ἀντλητάς, ὑπονομευτάς, ζωγράφουξ, θηριοτρόφους, μαγείρους, παρασχίστας· ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς στρατιώτας, ὑπηρέτας, τελώνας, πανδοκέας, πορθμέας, φυσιουργούς.
Πάλιν δὲ δύο τῶν τὰς πράξεις παρεχομένων εὑρεθέντων ἐὰν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης λάβωσι τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν, ἀπὸ μούσης καὶ ὀργάνων καὶ μελῳδιῶν ἢ ποιημάτων καὶ ῥυθμῶν ποιοῦσι τὰς πράξεις καὶ μάλιστα ὅταν τοὺς τόπους ὦσιν ἀμφιλελαχότες· ἀποτελοῦσι γὰρ θυμελικούς, ὑποκριτάς, σωματεμπόρους, ὀργανοποιούς, χορδοστρόφους, ὀρχηστάς, ὑφάντας, κηροπλάστας, ζωγράφους· κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ, ποιεῖ τοὺς περὶ τὰ προειρημένα γένη καὶ τοὺς γυναικείους κόσμους ἐμπορευομένους, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός, δικολόγους, λογιστηρίων προισταμένους, ἐν δημοσίοις ἀσχολουμένους, παίδων διδασκάλους, ὄχλων προεστῶτας.
Ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἅμα τὴν κυρίαν λάβωσι τῆς πράξεως, ποιοῦσιν ἀνδριαντοποιούς, ὁπλουργούς, ἱερογλύφους, ζῳοπλάστας, παλαιστάς, ἰατρούς, χειρουργούς, κατηγόρους, μοιχικούς, κακοπράγμονας, πλαστογράφους· κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ, φονέας, λωποδύτας, ἅρπαγας, λῃστάς, ἀπελάτας, ῥᾳδιουργούς, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός, φιλόπλους ἢ φιλομονομάχους, δράστας, δεινούς, φιλοπράγμονας, ἀλλοτρίων ὑπεξερχομένους καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων πορίζοντας.
Ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἅμα τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν λάβωσι τῆς πράξεως, ποιοῦσι βαφέας, μυρεψούς, κασσιτεροποιούς, μολυβδουργούς, χρυσοχόους, ἀργυροκόπους, γεωργούς, ὁπλορχηστάς, φαρμακοποιούς, ἰατρούς, τοὺς διὰ τῶν φαρμάκων ταῖς θεραπείαις χρωμένους, κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ, ἱερῶν ζῴων θεραπευτάς, ἀνθρώπων ἐνταφιαστάς, θρηνῳδούς, τυμβαύλας, ἐνθουσιαστάς, ὅπου μυστήρια καὶ θρῆνοι καὶ αἱμαγμοί, τὰς ἀναστροφὰς ποιουμένους, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διός, ἱεροπροσπλόκους, οἰωνιστάς, ἱεροφόρους, γυναικῶν προισταμένους, γάμων καὶ συνεπιπλοκῶν ἑρμηνέας καὶ διὰ τῶν τοιούτων ζῶντας ἀπολαυστικῶς ἅμα καὶ ῥιψοκινδύνως.
Καὶ τῶν ζῳδίων δέ, ἐν οἷς ἂν ὦσιν οἱ τὸ πράττειν παρέχοντες, αἱ κατ’ εἶδος ἰδιοτροπίαι συλλαμβάνονταί τι πρὸς τὸ ποικίλον τῶν πράξεων· τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀνθρωπόμορφα συνεργεῖ πως πρὸς πάσας τὰς ἐπιστημονικὰς καὶ πρὸς τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην χρείαν καταγινομένας, τὰ δὲ τετράποδα πρὸς τὰς μεταλλικὰς καὶ ἐμπορικὰς καὶ οἰκοδομικὰς καὶ τεκτονικάς, τὰ δὲ τροπικὰ καὶ ἰσημερινὰ πρὸς τὰς ἑρμηνευτικὰς καὶ μεταβολικὰς καὶ μετρητικὰς καὶ γεωργικὰς καὶ ἱερατικάς, τὰ δὲ χερσαῖα καὶ τὰ κάθυγρα πρὸς τὰς ἐν ὑγροῖς καὶ δι’ ὑγρῶν καὶ τὰς βοτανικὰς καὶ ναυπηγικάς, ἔτι τε περὶ ταφὰς ἢ ταριχείας ἢ ἁλείας ἢ ψυλλίας.
Ἰδίως δὲ πάλιν, ἐὰν ἡ σελήνη τὸν πρακτικὸν τόπον ἐπισχῇ τὸν ἀπὸ συνόδου δρόμον ποιουμένη σὺν τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, ἐν μὲν τῷ Ταύρῳ καὶ Αἰγοκέρωτι καὶ Καρκίνῳ ποιεῖ μάντεις, θύτας, λεκανομάντεις, ἐν δὲ Τοξότῃ καὶ Ἰχθύσιν νεκρομάντεις καὶ δαιμόνων κινητικούς, ἐν δὲ Παρθένῳ καὶ Σκορπίῳ μάγους, ἀστρολόγους, ἀποφθεγγομένους, προγνώσεις ἔχοντας, ἐν δὲ Ζυγῷ καὶ Κριῷ καὶ Λέοντι θεολήπτους, ὀνειροκρίτας, ἐξορκιστάς.
Τὸ μὲν οὖν καλά, αὐτῶν τῶν πράξεων εἶδος διὰ τῶν τοιούτων κατὰ τὸ συγκρατικὸν εἶδος δεήσει καταστοχάζεσθαι, τὸ δὲ μέγεθος αὐτῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν οἰκοδεσποτησάντων ἀστέρων δυνάμεως· ἀνατολικοὶ μὲν γὰρ ὄντες ἢ ἐπίκεντροι ποιοῦσι τὰς πράξεις αὐθεντικάς, δυτικοὶ δὲ ἢ ἀποκεκλικότες τῶν κέντρων ὑποπρακτικάς, καὶ ὑπὸ μὲν ἀγαθοποιῶν καθυπερτερούμενοι μεγάλας καὶ ἐπιδόξους καὶ ἐπικερδεῖς καὶ ἀπταίστους καὶ ἐπαφροδίτους, ὑπὸ δὲ κακοποιῶν ταπεινὰς καὶ ἀδόξους καὶ ἀπερικτήτους καὶ ἐπισφαλεῖς, Κρόνου μὲν ἐναντιουμένου καταψύξεις καὶ χρωματοκρασίας, Ἄρεως δὲ καταρριψοκινδυνίας καὶ περιβοησίας, ἀμφοτέρων δὲ κατὰ τὰς τελείας ἀναστασίας τοῦ καθολικοῦ χρόνου τῆς αὐξήσεως ἢ τῆς ταπεινώσεως πάλιν θεωρουμένου διὰ τῆς τῶν αἰτίων τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος ἀστέρων πρὸς τὰ ἑῷα καὶ τὰ ἑσπέρια κέντρα ἀεὶ διαθέσεως.
4. Of the Quality of Action
The lord of action is apprehended by two methods, from the sun and from the culminating sign. For it will be needful to look both for the planet that has made its morning appearance closest to the sun, and that which is at mid-heaven, particularly when it occupies the application of the moon; and if the same star occupies both the aforesaid positions, this alone must be employed, and similarly if none occupies one of these places, we must use only the one which occupies the other of the places. And if one planet has made the nearest morning appearance and another is associated with the mid-heaven, and with the moon, we must employ them both, giving preference to the one which by reason of its strength has the greater number of claims to domination according to the scheme which we have already set forth 14. But if not one is found which either has made an appearance 15 or is at mid-heaven, we must take the lord of the latter region, with reference however to the occasional pursuits of the subject, for persons with such genitures are for the most part inactive.
Thus, then, we shall determine the planet that governs action. The quality of the action, however, is to be discerned from the character of the three planets, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and from that of the signs through which they happen to be passing.
For if Mercury governs action, to speak generally, he makes his subjects scribes, men of business, calculators, teachers, merchants, bankers, soothsayers, astrologers, sacrificers, and in general those who perform their functions by means of documents, interpretation, and giving and taking. And if Saturn testifies to him, they will be managers of the property of others, interpreters of dreams, or frequenters of temples for the purpose of prophecies and inspiration. If it is Jupiter that witnesses, they will be law-makers, orators, sophists, who enjoy familiarity with great persons.
If Venus rules action, she makes her subjects persons whose activities lie among the perfumes of flowers or of unguents, in wine, colours, dyes, spices, or adornments, as, for example, sellers of unguents, weavers of chaplets, innkeepers, wine-merchants, druggists, weavers, dealers in spices, painters, dyers, sellers of clothing. And if Saturn testifies to her, she makes them dealers in goods used for pleasure or adornment, sorcerers, poisoners, panders, and those who make their living from similar occupations. If Jupiter testifies, they will be athletes, wearers of the wreath, persons deemed worthy of honours, and men who derive advancement from women.
Mars, in aspect with the sun, makes his subjects those who use fire in their crafts, such as cooks, moulders, cauterizers, smiths, workers in mines; if he is not with the sun, those who work with iron, such as shipbuilders, carpenters, farmers, quarrymen, stone-dressers, jewellers, splitters of wood, and their subordinate workers. If Saturn testifies to him, he produces seamen, drawers of water, tunnelers, painters, gamekeepers 16, cooks, embalmers 17. If Jupiter testifies, he produccs soldiers, servants, publicans, innkeepers, ferrymen, assistants at sacrifice.
Again, when two planets are found to rule action, if Mercury and Venus take the rulership, they bring about action expressed by the arts of the Muses, musical instruments, melodies, or poems, and rhythm, particularly when they have exchanged places. For they produce workers in the theatre, actors, dealers in slaves, makers of musical instruments, members of the chorus, makers of strings, painters, dancers, weavers, and wax-moulders. And again, if Saturn testifies to them, he produces those in the aforesaid callings, as well as dealers in feminine finery. If Jupiter testifies, he produces lawyers, supervisors of counting houses 18, public officers, teachers of children, leaders of the populace 19.
If Mercury and Mars together assume the lordship of action, they produce sculptors, armourers, makers of sacred monuments, modellers, wrestlers, physicians, surgeons, accusers, adulterers, evil-doers, forgers. Ir Saturn testifies to them, they produce murderers, sneak-thieves, burglars, pirates, cattlethieves, villains. If Jupiter testifies, they produce men-at-arms, duellists, energetic, clever persons, busybodies, who meddle in others affairs and thereby gain their living.
But if Venus and Mars together dominate action, they produce dyers, perfumers, workers in tin, lead, gold, and silver, farmers, dancers in armour, druggists, physicians who employ drugs in their treatments. If Saturn testifies to them, they produce attendants of sacred animals, those who bury men, mourners, pipers at funerals, fanatics, who resort to wherever there are mysteries, laments, and bloody rites. But if Jupiter testifies, frequenters of temples, interpreters of omens, bearers of the sacred instruments, supervisors of women, interpreters of marriages 20 and matches, making their living by such occupations, and at the same time devoted to pleasure, and reckless.
Likewise the specific natures of the signs in which are the rulers of action contribute to the variety of the action. For anthropomorphic 21 signs are of same assistance to all scientific pursuits or those useful to man; the quadrupedal 22 assist in those that concern mines, commerce, building, and carpentry; the solstitial and equinoctial 23, those that are interpretative, involve barter, or concern measuring, agriculture, and religion; the terrestrial 24 and aquatic 25, activities in or with liquids, or those that are botanical, or concern shipbuilding, and furthermore burial, or pickling, or salting 26.
In a special way, again, if the moon holds the place of action, and is moving away from conjunction, together with Mercury, in Taurus, Capricorn, and Cancer, she produces soothsayers, makers of sacrifices, and adepts in lekanomancy 27; in Sagittarius and Pisces necromancers and those who can arouse daemons; in Virgo and Scorpio magicians, astrologers, prophets, those who have second sight; in Libra, Aries, and Leo persons inspired by the gods, interpreters of dreams, and exorcists.
So, then, the particular species of action will have to be conjectured by such means, through combinations; its amplitude must be discovered from the power of the dominating planets. For when they are rising or angular the actions which they cause are independent, but if they are setting or declining from the angles, subordinate; when beneficent planets overcome them, great, glorious, profitable, unerring, and gracious; but if maleficent planets overcome them, mean, inglorious, profitless, and fallible. With Saturn in opposition, they bring cold and mixtures of colours 28; with Mars, temerity and notoriety;’ with both together, utter ruin of action. In general the period of increase or diminution, again, is calculated by means of the position, from time to time, of the planets responsible for the effect relative to the eastern and western angles 29.
5. Περὶ συναρμογῶν
Ἑξῆς δὲ τούτοις ὄντος τοῦ περὶ συναρμογῶν λόγου περὶ μὲν τῶν κατὰ νόμους ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικὸς συμβιώσεων οὕτως σκεπτέον. Ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀφορᾶν δεῖ τὴν σελήνην αὐτῶν, πῶς διάκειται. Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἐν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς τυχοῦσα τεταρτημορίοις νεογάμους ποιεῖ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἢ νεωτέραις παρ’ ἡλικίαν συμβάλλονταξ, ἐν δὲ τοῖς λιβικοῖς βραδυγάμους ἢ πρεσβυτέραις συνιόντας, εἰ δὲ ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς εἴη καὶ τῷ τοῦ Κρόνου συσχηματιζομένη, τέλεον ἀγάμους. Ἔπειτα, ἐὰν μὲν ἐν μονοειδεῖ ζῳδίῳ ἢ καὶ ἑνὶ τῶν ἀστέρων συνάπτουσα τύχηι, μονογάμους ἀποτελεῖ, ἐὰν δὲ ἐν δισώμῳ ἢ καὶ πολυμόρφῳ ἢ καὶ πλείοσιν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ζῳδίῳ τὴν συναφὴν ἐπέχουσα, πολυγάμους.
Κἂν μὲν οἱ τὰς συναφὰς ἐπέχοντες τῶν ἀστέρων ἤτοι κατὰ κολλήσεις ἢ κατὰ μαρτυρίας ἀγαθοποιοὶ τυγχάνωσιν, λαμβάνουσιν γυναῖκας ἀγαθάς, ἐὰν δὲ κακοποιοὶ τὰς ἐναντίας. Κρόνος μὲν γὰρ ἐπισχὼν συναφὴν περιποιεῖ γυναῖκας ἐπιπόνους καὶ αὐστηράς, Ζεὺς δὲ σεμνὰς καὶ οἰκονομικάς, Ἄρης δὲ θρασείας καὶ ἀνυποτάκτους, Ἀφροδίτη δὲ ἱλαρὰς καὶ εὐμόρφους καὶ ἐπιχαρίτους, Ἑρμῆς δὲ συνετὰς καὶ ὀξείας, ἔτι δὲ Ἀφροδίτη μετὰ μὲν Διὸς ἢ Κρόνου ἢ μεθ’ Ἑρμοῦ βιωφελεῖς καὶ φιλάνδρους καὶ φιλοτέκνους, μετὰ δὲ Ἄρεως θυμικὰς καὶ ἀστάτους καὶ ἀγνώμονας.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν γυναικῶν ἀφορᾶν δεῖ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτῶν, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν μὲν τοῖς ἀπηλιωτικοῖς πάλιν τυχὼν τεταρτημορίοις ποιεῖ τὰς ἐχούσας αὐτὸν οὕτως διακείμενον ἤτοι νεογάμους ἢ νεωτέροις συμβαλλούσας, ἐν δὲ τοῖς λιβικοῖς βραδυγάμους ἢ πρεσβυτέροις παρ’ ἡλικίαν ζευγνυμένας, καὶ ἐν μὲν μονοειδεῖ ζῳδίῳ τυχὼν ἢ ἑνὶ τῶν ἑῴων ἀστέρων συνάπτων μονογάμους, ἐν δισώμῳ δὲ ἢ πολυμόρφῳ πάλιν ἢ καὶ πλείοσιν ἑῴοις συσχηματισθεὶς πολυγάμους. Κρόνου μὲν οὖν ὡσαύτως τῷ μὲν ἡλίῳ συσχηματισθέντος λαμβάνουσιν ἄνδρας καθεστῶτας καὶ χρησίμους καὶ φιλοπόνους, Διὸς δὲ σεμνοὺς καὶ μεγαλοψύχους, Ἄρεως δὲ δράστας καὶ ἀστόργους καὶ ἀνυποτάκτους, Ἀφροδίτης δὲ καθαρίους καὶ εὐμόρφους, Ἑρμοῦ δὲ βιωφελεῖς καὶ ἐμπράκτους, Ἀφροδίτης δὲ μετὰ μὲν Κρόνου νωχελεῖς καὶ εὐλαβεστέρους ἐν τοῖς ἀφροδισίοις, μετὰ δὲ Ἄρεως θερμοὺς καὶ καταφερεῖς καὶ μοιχώδεις, μετὰ δὲ Ἑρμοῦ περὶ παῖδας ἐπτοημένους.
Λέγομεν δὲ νῦν ἀπηλιωτικὰ τεταρτημόρια ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ ἡλίου τὰ προηγούμενα τοῦ τε ἀνατέλλοντος σημείου τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ καὶ τοῦ δύνοντος, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς σελήνης τὰ ἀπὸ συνόδου καὶ πανσελήνου μέχρι τῶν διχοτόμων, λιβικὰ δὲ τὰ τοῖς εἰρημένοις ἀντικείμενα. Διαμένουσι μὲν οὖν ὡς ἐπίπαν αἱ συμβιώσεις, ὅταν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν γενέσεων τὰ φῶτα συσχηματιζόμενα τύχῃ συμφώνως, τουτέστιν ὅταν ἢ τρίγωνα ᾖ ἀλλήλοις ἢ ἑξάγωνα, καὶ μάλιστα, ὅταν ἐναλλὰξ τοῦτο συμβαίνῃ, πολὺ δὲ πλεῖον, ὅταν ἡ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς σελήνη τῷ τῆς γυναικὸς ἡλίῳ. Διαλύονται δὲ ἐκ τῶν τυχόντων καὶ ἀπαλλοτριοῦνται τέλεον, ὅταν αἱ προειρημέναι τῶν φώτων στάσεις ἢ ἐν ἀσυνδέτοις ζῳδίοις τύχωσιν ἢ ἐν διαμέτροις ἢ τετραγώνοις.
Κἂν μὲν τοὺς συμφώνους τῶν φώτων συσχηματισμοὺς οἱ ἀγαθοποιοὶ τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπιθεωρήσωσιν ἡδείας καὶ προσηνεῖς καὶ ὀνησιφόρους τὰς διαμονὰς συντηροῦσιν, ἐὰν δὲ οἱ κακοποιοί, μαχίμους καὶ ἀηδεῖς καὶ ἐπιζημίους. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀσυμφώνων στάσεων οἱ μὲν ἀγαθοποιοὶ τοῖς φωσὶ μαρτυρήσαντες οὐ τέλεον ἀποκόπτουσι τὰς συμβιώσεις, ἀλλὰ ποιοῦσιν ἐπανόδους καὶ ἀναμνήσεις συντηρούσας τό τε προσηνὲς καὶ τὸ φιλόστοργον. Οἱ δὲ κακοποιοὶ μετά τινος ἐπηρείας καὶ ὕβρεως ποιοῦσι τὰς διαλύσεις· τοῦ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ μόνου σὺν αὐτοῖς γινομένου περιβοησίαις καὶ ἐγκλήμασι περικυλίονται, μετὰ δὲ τοῦ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπιμοιχίαις ἢ φαρμακείαις ἢ τοῖς τοιούτοις.
Τὰς δὲ κατ’ ἄλλον οἱονδήποτε τρόπον γινομένας συναρμογὰς διακριτέον ἀφορῶντας εἴς τε τὸν τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἀστέρα καὶ τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου· συνόντων γὰρ αὐτῶν τοῖς φωσὶν οἰκείως καὶ τὰς συμβιώσεις οἰκείας καὶ νομίμους ποιοῦσι· συγγένειαν γὰρ ὥσπερ ἔχει πρὸς ἑκάτερον τῶν εἰρημένων ἀστέρων ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ πρὸς μὲν τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεως κατὰ τὸ συνακμάζον πρόσωπον, ἐπειδήπερ ἐν τοῖς τριγωνικοῖς ἀλλήλων ζῳδίοις ἔχουσι τὰ ὑψώματα, πρὸς δὲ τὸν τοῦ Κρόνου κατὰ τὸ πρεσβύτερον πρόσωπον, ἐπειδήπερ πάλιν ἐν τοῖς τριγωνικοῖς ἀλλήλων ἔχουσι τοὺς οἴκους, ὅθεν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης μετὰ μὲν τοῦ Ἄρεως ἁπλῶς ἐρωτικὰς διαθέσεις ποιεῖ, προσόντος δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ περιβοησίας, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ἐπικοίνοις καὶ συνοικειουμένοις ζῳδίοις, Αἰγόκερω Ἰχθύσιν, ἀδελφῶν ἢ συγγενῶν ἐπιπλοκάς· κἂν μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῇ σελήνῃ συμπαρῇ, ποιεῖ δυσὶν ἀδελφαῖς ἢ συγγενέσι συνερχομένους, ἐὰν δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν γυναικῶν τῷ τοῦ Διός, δυσὶν ἀδελφοῖς ἢ συγγενέσιν.
Μετὰ δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου πάλιν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τυχὼν ἁπλῶς μὲν ἡδείας καὶ εὐσταθεῖς ποιεῖ τὰς συμβιώσεις, προσόντος δὲ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ὠφελίμους, συμπροσγενομένου δὲ καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀστάτους καὶ βλαβερὰς καὶ ἐπιζήλους· κἂν μὲν ὁμοιοσχημονῇ αὐτοῖς, πρὸς ὁμήλικας ποιεῖ τὰς ἐπιπλοκάς, ἂν δὲ ἀνατολικώτερος αὐτῶν, πρὸς νεωτέρας ἢ νεωτέρους, ἐὰν δὲ δυτικώτερος πρὸς πρεσβυτέρας ἢ πρεσβυτέρους. Ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἐπικοίνοις ζῳδίοις ὦσιν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου, τουτέστιν Αἰγόκερω καὶ Ζυγῷ, συγγενικὰς ποιοῦσιν τὰς συνελεύσεις.
Ὡροσκοπήσαντι δὲ ἢ μεσουρανήσαντι τῷ προειρημένῳ σχήματι ἡ σελήνη μὲν συμπροσγενομένη ποιεῖ τοὺς μὲν ἄρρενας μητράσιν ἢ μητέρων ἀδελφαῖς ἢ μητρυιαῖς συνέρχεσθαι, τὰς δὲ θηλείας υἱοῖς ἢ υἱοῖς ἀδελφῶν ἢ θυγατέρων ἀνδράσιν, ἥλιος δὲ δυτικῶν μάλιστα ὄντων τῶν ἀστέρων τοὺς μὲν ἄρρενας θυγατράσιν ἢ θυγατράσιν ἀδελφῶν ἢ γυναιξὶν υἱῶν, τὰς δὲ θηλείας πατράσιν ἢ πατέρων ἀδελφοῖς ἢ πατρῴοις.
Ἐὰν δὲ οἱ προκείμενοι σχηματισμοὶ τῶν μὲν συγγενικῶν ζῳδίων μὴ τύχωσιν, ἐν θηλυκοῖς δὲ ὦσι τόποις, ποιοῦσι καὶ οὕτως καταφερεῖς καὶ πρὸς τὸ διαθεῖναί τε καὶ διατεθῆναι πάντα τρόπον προχείρους, ἐπ’ ἐνίων δὲ μορφώσεων καὶ ἀσελγεῖς, ὡς ἐπί τε τῶν ἐμπροσθίων καὶ ὀπισθίων τοῦ Κριοῦ καὶ τῆς ὑάδος καὶ τῆς κάλπιδος καὶ τῶν ὀπισθίων τοῦ Λέοντος καὶ τοῦ προσώπου τοῦ Αἰγόκερω.
Κεντρωθέντες δὲ κατὰ μὲν τῶν πρώτων δύο κέντρων τοῦ τε ἀπηλιωτικοῦ καὶ τοῦ μεσημβρινοῦ παντελῶς ἀποδεικνύουσι τὰ πάθη καὶ ἐπὶ δημοσίων τόπων προάγουσι, κατὰ δὲ τῶν ἐσχάτων δύο τοῦ τε λιβικοῦ καὶ τοῦ βορείου σπάδοντας ποιοῦσι καὶ αὐλικοὺς ἢ στείρας ἢ ἀτρήτους, Ἄρεως δὲ προσόντος ἀποκόπους ἢ τριβάδας· καὶ καθόλου δὲ παντοδαπήν τινα διάθεσιν πρὸς τὰ ἀφροδίσια ἕξουσιν.
Ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἐπισκεψόμεθα. Τοῦ μὲν γὰρ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου χωρισθείς, μαρτυρηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ Διὸς καθαρίους καὶ σεμνοὺς περὶ τὰ ἀφροδίσια ποιεῖ καὶ μόνης τῆς φυσικῆς χρείας στοχαζομένους, μετὰ Κρόνου δὲ μόνου μὲν τυχὼν εὐλαβεῖς καὶ ὀκνηροὺς καὶ καταψύχρους ἀπεργάζεται, συσχηματιζομένων δὲ Ἀφροδίτης καὶ Διὸς εὐκινήτους μὲν καὶ ἐπιθυμητικούς, ἐγκρατεῖς δὲ καὶ ἀντιληπτικοὺς καὶ τὸ αἰσχρὸν φυλασσομένους, μετὰ μόνης δὲ Ἀφροδίτης ἢ καὶ τοῦ Διὸς σὺν αὐτῇ τυχόντος, ἀπόντος τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου, λάγνους καὶ ῥᾳθύμους καὶ πανταχόθεν ἑαυτοῖς τὰς ἡδονὰς ποριζομένους,
Κἂν ὁ μὲν ἑσπέριος ᾖ τῶν ἀστέρων, ὁ δὲ ἑῷος, καὶ πρὸς ἄρρενας καὶ πρὸς θηλείας οἰκείως ἔχοντας, οὐχ ὑπερπαθῶς μέντοι γε πρὸς οὐδέτερα τὰ πρόσωπα, ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφότεροι ἑσπέριοι, πρὸς τὰ θηλυκὰ μόνα καταφερεῖς, θηλυκῶν δὲ ὄντων τῶν ζῳδίων καὶ αὐτοὺς διατιθεμένους, ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφότεροι ἑῷοι, πρὸς τὰ παιδικὰ μόνα νοσηματώδεις, ἀρρενικῶν δὲ ὄντων τῶν ζῳδίων καὶ πρὸς πᾶσαν ἀρρένων ἡλικίαν, κἂν μὲν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης δυτικώτερος ᾖ, ταπειναῖς ἢ δούλαις ἢ ἀλλοφύλοις συνερχομένους, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως, ὑπερεχούσαις ἢ ὑπάνδροις ἢ δεσποίναις.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν γυναικῶν ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ἐπισκεπτέος· συσχηματιζόμενος γὰρ τῷ τοῦ Διὸς ἢ καὶ τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ σώφρονας καὶ καθαρίους ποιεῖ περὶ τὰ ἀφροδίσια, καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Κρόνου δὲ ἀπόντος τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συνοικειωθεὶς κεκινημένας μὲν καὶ ὀρεκτικάς, εὐλαβεῖς δὲ καὶ ὀκνηρὰς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ τὸ αἰσχρὸν φυλασσομένας·
Ἄρει δὲ μόνῳ μὲν συνὼν ἢ καὶ συσχηματισθεὶς ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης ποιεῖ λάγνους, καταφερεῖς καὶ μᾶλλον ῥᾳθύμους, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς αὐτοῖς προσγένηται, κἂν μὲν ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὑπὸ τὰς αὐγὰς ᾖ, συνέρχονται δούλοις ἢ ταπεινοτέροις ἢ ἀλλοφύλοις, ἐὰν δὲ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης, ὑπερέχουσιν ἢ δεσπόταις ἑταιρῶν ἢ μοιχάδων ἐπέχουσαι τρόπον, κἂν μὲν τεθηλυσμένοι ὦσι τοῖς τόποις ἢ τοῖς σχήμασιν οἱ ἀστέρες, πρὸς τὸ διατίθεσθαι μόνον καταφερεῖς, ἐὰν δὲ ἠρρενωμένοι, καὶ πρὸς τὸ διατιθέναι γυναῖκας.
Ὁ μέντοι τοῦ Κρόνου τοῖς προκειμένοις σχήμασι συνοικειωθείς, ἐὰν μὲν καὶ αὐτὸς ᾖ τεθηλυσμένος, ἀσελγειῶν μόνος αἴτιος γίνεται, ἐὰν δὲ ἀνατολικὸς καὶ ἠρρενωμένος, ἐπιψόγους ἵστησιν ἢ ἐπιψόγων ἐραστὰς ἀπεργάζεται, τοῦ μὲν τοῦ Διὸς πάλιν ἀεὶ πρὸς τὸ εὐσχημονέστερον τῶν παθῶν συλλαμβανομένου, τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ πρὸς τὸ διαβοητότερον καὶ εὐπταιστότερον.
5. Of Marriage
As the subject of marriage comes next in order to these matters, the following is the method whereby the lawful association of man and wife must be investigated. For men it is necessary to observe the position of the moon in their genitures 30.
For, in the first place, if she chances to be in the eastern quadrants, she makes men marry young or marry women younger than themselves; but if she is in the western quadrants they marry late or marry older women. And if she is under the rays of the sun 31 and in aspect with Saturn, they do not marry at all. Then again, if the moon is in a sign of a single figure, or is applying to one of the planets 32, she makes them men of one marriage; but if she is in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, or applies to several planets in the same sign, she makes them marry more than once.
And if the planets to which she applies, either by propinquity, or by testimony 33, are beneficent, the men get good wives; but if they are maleficent planets, the opposite. If she applies to Saturn, he makes the wives hardworking and stern ; Jupiter, dignified and good managers; Mars, bold and unruly; Venus, cheerful, beautiful, and charming; Mercury, intelligent and keen, Further, Venus with Jupiter, Saturn, or Mercury makes them thrifty and affectionate to their husbands and children, but with Mars, easily roused to wrath, unstable, and unfeeling.
In the case of the wives one must observe the sun in their genitures; for if he, again, chances to be in the eastern quadrants, he makes those who have him in this position in their genitures either marry young or marry men younger than themselves, but in the western quadrants, he makes them marry late or marry husbands older than themselves, And if the sun is in a sign of a single figure, or applies to one of the oriental planets, he makes them marry but once; but, again, if he is in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, or in aspect with several planets in the east, they marry more than once. If Saturn is similarly in aspect with the sun, they marry sedate, useful, industrious husbands; if Jupiter is in aspect, dignified and magnanimous; Mars, men of action, lacking in affection, and unruly; Venus, neat and handsome; Mercury, thrifty and practical; Venus with Saturn, sluggish and rather weak in sexual relations; Venus with Mars, ardent, impetuous, and adulterous; Venus with Mercury, infatuated with boys.
In this connection we mean by eastern quadrants, in the case of the sun, the signs which precede the rising sign of the zodiac, and those which precede the setting sign; with reference to the moon, the signs from new and full moon to the quarters; and by western quadrants the signs opposite these. Marriages for the most part are lasting when in both the genitures the luminaries happen to be in harmonious aspect, that is, in trine or in sextile with one another, and particularly when this comes about by exchange 34; and even more when the husband’s moon is in such aspect with the wife’s sun. Divorces on slight pretexts and complete alienations occur when the aforesaid positions of the luminaries are in disjunct signs, or in opposition or in quartile.
And if the beneficent planets regard the luminaries when the latter are in harmonious aspect, they keep the marriage pleasant, agreeable, and profitable, but if the maleficent planets so regard the luminaries, the marriage will be quarrelsome, unpleasant, and unprofitable. Similarly, when the luminaries are in inharmonious positions, the beneficent planets testifying to the luminaries do not completely terminate the marriages, but bring about renewals and recollections, which preserve kindness and affection; but the maleficent planets cause divorces with abuse and violence. If Mercury alone is with them, they are involved in notoriety and recriminations; and along with Venus, in adultery, poisonings, and the like.
Marriages which come about in any other manner whatsoever must be judged by looking to Venus, Mars, and Saturn. For if they are with the luminaries in familiarity, we must decide that the marriages also will be domestic and the relationship lawful. For the marriage relationship will follow the relation which Venus holds to each of the planets mentioned, toward Mars, that of persons of the same age, since they have their exaltations in signs that are in trine to one another 35; toward Saturn, that of the older person, since again they have their houses in signs which are in trine to each other 36. Therefore Venus with Mars, produces merely amorous dispositions, but if Mercury is present notoriety also; in the common and familiar signs 37, Capricorn and Pisces unions with brethren or kindred. If in the case of men Venus is with the moon, she makes them unite with two sisters or kinsfolk, and if in the case of women Venus is with Jupiter, with two brothers, or kinsfolk.
Again, if Venus happens to be with Saturn, she produces merely pleasant and firm unions, but if Mercury is present, they are also beneficial. But if Mars also is present the marriage will be unstable, harmful and full of jealousy. And if she is in the same aspect to them, she brings about marriages with equals in age; but if she is further to the east than they, marriages with younger men or women, and if she is further to the west, with older women or men. But if Venus and Saturn are also in the common signs, that is, in Capricorn or Libra 38, they portend marriages of kin.
If the moon is present with this aforesaid combination when it is at the horoscope or at mid-heaven, she makes men wed their mothers, or with their mother’s sisters, or their stepmothers, and women wed their sons, their brothers’ sons, or their daughters’ husbands. The sun, particularly if the planets are setting, makes men wed their daughters, daughters’ sisters, or sons’ wives, and the women wed their fathers, fathers’ brothers, or stepfathers.
But if the aforesaid aspects chance not to be composed of signs of the same gender, but are in feminine places 39, thus they produce depraved individuals, ready in every way for both active and passive participation, and in same formations utterly obscene, as for instance in the forward and hinder parts of Aries, the Hyades, and the Pitcher, and the hind parts of Leo, and the face of Capricorn. But if the configuration is angular, on the first two angles, the eastern and mid-heaven, they make a complete display of their abnormalities and bring them forward even in public places; on the last two, that is, the western and northern, they produce spades and eunuchs or sterile women and those without passages; if Mars is present, men who have lost their genitals, or the so-called tribades 40.
In general we shall, in the case of men, investigate through Mars what will be their disposition with respect to matters of love. For if Mars is separated from Venus and Saturn, but has the testimony of Jupiter, he produces men who are cleanly and decorous in love and who aim only at its natural use. But if he is accompanied by Saturn alone, he produces men cautious, hesitant, and frigid. If Venus and Jupiter are in aspect with him, he will produce men easily roused and passionate, who are, however, continent, hold themselves in check, and avoid unseemliness. With Venus alone, or if Jupiter also is with her, but Saturn is not present, he produces lustful, careless men, who seek their pleasures from every quarter;
And if one of the planets is an evening and the other a morning star, men who have relations with both males and females, but no more than moderately inclined to either. But if both are evening stars, they will be inclined toward the females alone, and if the signs of the zodiac are feminine, they themselves will be pathics. If both are morning stars, they will be infected only with love of boys, and if the signs of the zodiac are masculine, with males of any age. If Venus is further to the west, they will have to do with women of low degree, slaves, or foreigners; if Mars is further west, with superiors, or married women, or ladies of high station.
In the genitures of women one must examine Venus. For if Venus is in aspect with Jupiter or likewise with Mercury, she makes them temperate and pure in love. If Saturn 41 is not present, but she is associated with Mercury, she makes them easily aroused and full of desire, but generally cautious, hesitant, and avoiding turpitude.
But if Venus is together with Mars only, or is in some aspect to him, she makes them lustful and depraved and more heedless. If Jupiter too is present with them, and if Mars is under the sun’s rays, they have commerce with slaves, men of lower classes, or foreigners; but if Venus is in this position, they consort with men of superior rank, or masters, playing the part of mistresses or adulteresses; if the planets are made feminine by their places or aspects 42, they are inclined only to take the passive part, but if the, planets are made masculine they are so depeaved as actively to have commerce with women.
However, when Saturn is brought into association with the aforesaid configurations, if he is himself made feminine, he is by himself the cause of licentiousness, but if he is rising and is in a masculine position, he makes them the objects of censure or lovers of such; but combination with Jupiter, again, always gives a more seemly appearance to these faults, and with Mercury makes them more notorious and unsafe.
6. Περὶ τέκνων
Ἐπειδὴ δὲ τῷ περὶ γάμου τόπῳ καὶ ὁ περὶ τέκνων ἀκολουθεῖ, σκοπεῖν δεήσει τοὺς τῷ κατὰ κορυφὴν τόπῳ ἢ τῷ ἐπιφερομένῳ, τουτέστι τῷ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ δαίμονος, προσόντας ἢ συσχηματιζομένους, εἰ δὲ μή, τοὺς τοῖς διαμέτροις αὐτῶν, καὶ σελήνην μὲν καὶ Δία καὶ Ἀφροδίτην πρὸς δόσιν τέκνων λαμβάνειν, ἥλιον δὲ καὶ Ἄρη καὶ Κρόνον πρὸς ἀτεκνίαν ἢ ὀλιγοτεκνίαν, τὸν δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ, πρὸς ὁπότερον ἂν αὐτῶν τύχῃ συσχηματισθείς, ἐπίκοινον, καὶ ἐπιδοτῆρα μὲν ὅταν ἀνατολικὸς ᾖ, ἀφαιρέτην δ’ ὅταν δυτικός. Οἱ μὲν οὖν δοτῆρες ἁπλῶς μὲν οὕτως κείμενοι καὶ κατὰ μόνας ὄντες μοναχὰ διδόασι τέκνα, ἐν δισώμοις δὲ δισσὰ καὶ ἐν θηλυκοῖς ζῳδίοις, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖς πολυσπέρμοις, οἷον Ἰχθύσι καὶ Καρκίνῳ καὶ Σκορπίῳ, δισσὰ ἢ καὶ πλείονα, καὶ ἠρρενωμένοι τοῖς τε ζῳδίοις καὶ τοῖς πρὸς ἥλιον σχηματισμοῖς ἄρρενα, τεθηλυσμένοι δὲ θήλεα, καθυπερτερηθέντες δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν κακοποιῶν ἢ καὶ ἐν στειρώδεσι ζῳδίοις τυχόντες, οἷον Λέοντι ἢ Παρθένῳ, διδόασι μέν, οὐκ ἐπὶ καλῷ δὲ οὐδὲ ἐπὶ διαμονῇ.
Ἥλιος δὲ καὶ οἱ κακοποιοὶ διακατασχόντες τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους ἐὰν μὲν ἐν ἀρρενικοῖς ὦσιν ἢ στειρώδεσι ζῳδίοις καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν ἀκαθυπερτέρητοι, τελείας εἰσὶν ἀτεκνίας δηλωτικοί, ἐπὶ θηλυκῶν δὲ ἢ πολυσπέρμων ζῳδίων τυχόντες ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν μαρτυρηθέντες διδόασι μέν, ἐπισινῆ δὲ ἢ ὀλιγοχρόνια. Τῶν δὲ αἱρέσεων ἀμφοτέρων λόγον ἐχουσῶν πρὸς τὰ τεκνοποιὰ ζῴδια τῶν δοθέντων τέκνων ἀποβολαὶ γενήσονται ἢ πάντων ἢ ὀλίγων, πρὸς τὰς ὑπεροχὰς τῶν καθ’ ἑκατέραν αἵρεσιν μαρτυρησάντων, ὁποτέρους ἂν εὑρίσκωμεν ἤτοι πλείους ἢ δυνατωτέρους ἐν τῷ ἀνατολικωτέρους ὑπάρχειν ἢ ἐπικεντροτέρους ἢ καθυπερτερεῖν ἢ ἐπαναφέρεσθαι. Ἐὰν μὲν οὖν οἱ κυριεύσαντες τῶν εἰρημένων ζῳδίων ἀνατολικοὶ τυγχάνωσι, δοτῆρες ἔσονται τέκνων, εἰ δὲ ἐν ἰδίοις ὦσιν τόποις, ἔνδοξα καὶ ἐπιφανῆ ποιοῦσι τὰ δοθέντα τέκνα, ἐὰν δὲ δυτικοὶ καὶ ἐν τοῖς τῆς ἀλλοτρίας αἱρέσεως τόποις, ταπεινὰ καὶ ἀνεπίφαντα.
Κἂν μὲν σύμφωνοι τῇ ὥρᾳ καὶ τῷ κλήρῳ τῆς τύχης καταλαμβάνωνται, προσφιλῆ τοῖς γονεῦσι καὶ ἐπαφρόδιτα καὶ κληρονομοῦντα τὰς οὐσίας αὐτῶν, ἐὰν δὲ ἀσύνδετοι ἢ ἀντικείμενοι, μάχιμα καὶ ἐχθροποιούμενα καὶ ἐπιβλαβῆ καὶ μὴ παραλαμβάνοντα τὰς τῶν γονέων οὐσίας· ὁμοίως δέ, κἂν μὲν ἀλλήλοις ὦσι συνεσχηματισμένοι συμφώνως οἱ τὰ τέκνα διδόντες, διαμένουσιν οἱ δοθέντες φιλάδελφοι καὶ τιμητικοὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἐὰν δὲ ἀσύνδετοι ἢ διάμετροι, φιλέχθρως καὶ ἐπιβουλευτικῶς διακείμενοι· τὰ δὲ κατὰ μέρος πάλιν ἄν τις καταστοχάζοιτο χρησάμενος ἐφ’ ἑκάστου τῷ τὴν δόσιν πεποιημένῳ τῶν ἀστέρων ὡροσκοπίῳ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς λοιπῆς διαθέσεως ὡς ἐπὶ γενέσεως τὴν περὶ τῶν ὁλοσχερεστέρων ἐπίσκεψιν ποιούμενος.
6. Of Children
As the topic of children follows upon that of marriage, we shall have to observe the planets that are in the mid-heaven or in aspect with it or with its succedant, that is, the house of the Good Daemon 43, or, in default of such planets, those connected with the diametrically opposite places; and we must take the moon, Jupiter, and Venus to portend the giving of children, the sun, Mars, and Saturn to indicate few or no children. Mercury must be taken as common, with whichever group of planets he chances to be in aspect, and to give children when he is a morning star, and to take them away when he is an evening star. Now, the donative planets, when they are merely in such a position and are by themselves, give single offspring, but if they are in bicorporeal and feminine signs, and similarly if they are in the fecund signs, such as Pisces, Scorpio, and Cancer, they give two or even more. If they are of a masculine nature, because they are in masculine signs or in aspect to the sun, they give male children; but female, if they are of a feminine nature. If the maleficent planets overcome them, or if they are found in sterile places 44, such as Leo or Virgo, they give children, but for no good nor for any length of time.
When the sun and the maleficent planets govern the aforesaid regions, if they are in masculine signs or in sterile signs, and if they are not overcome by the beneficent planets, they signify complete childlessness, but if they are in feminine or fecund signs or have the testimony of the beneficent planets, they give offspring, but it will suffer injury and be short-lived. If both the sects 45 bear some relation to the signs which signify the begetting of children, there will be losses among the children given, either of all of them or of a few, depending upon the superiority of the planets of either sect that bear witness, whichever we find to be more in number, or greater in power, because they are further to the east, or are closer to the angles, or are superior, or are succedant. If, then, the planets which rule the aforesaid signs are rising, and are givers of children, if they are in their own places, they will make famous and illustrious the children which are given; but if they are setting and are in places belonging to the other sect, the children will be humble and obscure.
And if they are found to be in harmony with the horoscope and with the Lot of Fortune. the children will be dear to their parents, they will be attractive, and will inherit their parents estates; if however they are disjunct or opposed, they will be quarrelsome, trouble-makers, and injurious, and will not succeed to their patrimony. And similarly, if also the planets which give children are in harmonious aspect one to another, the children which they give continue in brotherly affection and mutual respect; but if they are disjunct or in opposition to one another, the disposition of the children will he quarrelsome and scheming. Particular details, again, one could conjecture by using in each case as a horoscope the planet which gives children, and making his investigation of the more important questions from the rest of the configuration, as in a geniture.
7. Περὶ φίλων καὶ ἐχθρῶν
Τῶν δὲ φιλικῶν διαθέσεων καὶ τῶν ἐναντίων, ὧν τὰς μὲν μείζους καὶ πολυχρονίους καλοῦμεν συμπαθείας καὶ ἔχθρας, τὰς δὲ ἐλάττους καὶ προσκαίρους συναστρίας καὶ ἀντιδικίας, ἡ ἐπίσκεψις ἡμῖν ἔσται τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον. Ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν κατὰ μεγάλα συμπτώματα θεωρουμένων παρατηρεῖν δεῖ τοὺς ἀμφοτέρων τῶν γενέσεων κυριωτάτους τόπους, τουτέστι τόν τε ἡλιακὸν καὶ τὸν σεληνιακὸν καὶ τὸν ὡροσκοπικὸν καὶ τὸν τοῦ κλήρου τῆς τύχης.
Ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ μὲν τῶν αὐτῶν τυχόντες δωδεκατημορίων ἢ ἐναλλάξαντες τοὺς τόπους ἤτοι πάντες ἢ οἱ πλείους, καὶ μάλιστα, ὅταν οἱ ὡροσκοποῦντες περὶ τὰς ἑπτακαίδεκα μοίρας ἀλλήλων ἀπέχωσι, ποιοῦσι συμπαθείας ἀπταίστους καὶ ἀδιαλύτους καὶ ἀνεπηρεάστους, κατὰ δὲ τῶν ἀσυνδέτων ἢ τῶν διαμετρούντων σταθέντες ἔχθρας μεγίστας καὶ ἐναντιώσεις πολυχρονίους, μηδετέρως δὲ τυχόντες, ἀλλὰ μόνον ἐν τοῖς συσχηματιζομένοις δωδεκατημορίοις, εἰ μὲν ἐν τοῖς τριγώνοις εἶεν ἢ ἐν ἑξαγώνοις, ἥττονας ποιοῦσι τὰς συμπαθείας, εἰ δὲ ἐν τοῖς τετραγώνοις, ἥττονας τὰς ἀντιπαθείας, ὡς γίνεσθαί τινας κατὰ καιροὺς ἐν μὲν ταῖς φιλίαις ὑποσιωπήσεις καὶ μικρολογίας, ὅταν οἱ κακοποιοὶ τὸν σχηματισμὸν παροδεύωσιν, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἔχθραις σπονδὰς καὶ ἀποκαταστάσεις κατὰ τὰς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν τοῖς σχηματισμοῖς ἐπεμβάσεις.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ φιλίας καὶ ἔχθρας εἴδη τρία ἢ γὰρ διὰ προαίρεσιν οὕτως ἔχουσι πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἢ διὰ χρείαν ἢ διὰ ἡδονὴν καὶ λύπην· ὅταν μὲν πάντες ἢ οἱ πλείους τῶν προειρημένων τόπων οἰκειωθῶσι πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ἐκ πάντων ἡ φιλία συνάγεται τῶν εἰδῶν, ὥσπερ, ὅταν ἀνοικείως, ἡ ἔχθρα, ὅταν δὲ οἱ τῶν φώτων μόνον, διὰ προαίρεσιν, ἥτις ἐστὶ φιλία καὶ βελτίστη καὶ ἀσφαλεστάτη καὶ ἔχθρα χειρίστη καὶ ἄπιστος· ὁμοίως δέ, ὅταν μὲν οἱ τῶν κλήρων τῆς τύχης, διὰ χρείαν, ὅταν δὲ οἱ τῶν ὡροσκόπων, δι’ ἡδονὰς ἢ λύπας.
Παρατηρητέον δὲ τῶν συσχηματιζομένων τόπων τάς τε καθυπερτερήσεις καὶ τὰς τῶν ἀστέρων ἐπιθεωρήσεις· ἐφ’ ὧν μὲν γὰρ ἂν γενέσεων ᾖ ἡ τοῦ σχηματισμοῦ καθυπερτέρησις, –ἢ ἐὰν τὸ αὐτὸ ἢ τὸ ἔγγιστα ἦν ζῴδιον, –ἢ ἐπαναφορά, ἐκείνῃ τὸ αὐθεντικώτερον καὶ ἐπιστατικώτερον τῆς φιλίας καὶ ἔχθρας προσνεμητέον, ἐφ’ ὧν δὲ ἡ ἐπιθεώρησις τῶν ἀστέρων βελτίων πρὸς ἀγαθοποιίαν καὶ δύναμιν, ἐκείναις τό τε ἐκ τῆς φιλίας ὠφελιμώτερον καὶ τὸ ἐκ τῆς ἔχθρας κατορθωτικώτερον ἀποδοτέον.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν κατὰ χρόνον τισὶ συνισταμένων προσκαίρων συναστριῶν τε καὶ ἐναντιώσεων προσεκτέον ταῖς καθ’ ἑκατέραν γένεσιν κινήσεσι τῶν ἀστέρων, τουτέστι κατὰ ποίους χρόνους αἱ τῶν τῆς ἑτέρας γενέσεως ἀστέρων ἀφέσεις ἐπέρχονται τοῖς τόποις τῶν τῆς ἑτέρας γενέσεως ἀστέρων· γίνονται γὰρ κατὰ τούτους φιλίαι καὶ ἔχθραι μερικαὶ διακρατοῦσαι χρόνον ὀλιγοστὸν μὲν τὸν μέχρι τῆς διαλύσεως αὐτῆς, πλεῖστον δὲ τὸν μέχρι τῆς ἑτέρου τινὸς τῶν ἐπιφερομένων ἀστέρων καταλήψεως.
Κρόνος μὲν οὖν καὶ Ζεὺς ἐπελθόντες τοῖς ἀλλήλων τόποις ποιοῦσι φιλίας διὰ συστάσεως ἢ γεωργίας ἢ κληρονομίας, Κρόνος δὲ καὶ Ἄρης μάχας καὶ ἐπιβουλὰς τὰς κατὰ προαίρεσιν, Κρόνος δὲ καὶ Ἀφροδίτη συνεπιπλοκὰς διὰ συγγενικῶν προσώπων, ταχὺ μέντοι ψυχούσας, Κρόνος δὲ καὶ Ἕρμῆς συμβιώσεις καὶ κοινωνίας διὰ δόσιν καὶ λῆψιν καὶ ἐμπορίαν ἢ μυστήρια, Ζεὺς δὲ καὶ Ἄρης ἑταιρίας δι’ ἀξιωματικῶν ἢ οἰκονομιῶν, Ζεὺς δὲ καὶ Ἀφροδίτη φιλίας τὰς διὰ θηλυκῶν προσώπων ἢ τῶν ἐν ἱεροῖς θρησκειῶν ἢ χρησμῶν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων, Ζεὺς δὲ καὶ Ἑρμῆς συναναστροφὰς διὰ λόγους καὶ ἐπιστήμας καὶ προαίρεσιν φιλόσοφον, Ἄρης δὲ καὶ Ἄφροδίτη συνεπιπλοκὰς τὰς δι’ ἔρωτας καὶ μοιχείας ἢ νοθείας, ἐπισφαλεῖς δὲ καὶ οὐκ ἐπιπολὺ διευθυνούσας, Ἄρης δὲ καὶ Ἑρμῆς ἔχθρας καὶ περιβοησίας καὶ δίκας διὰ πραγμάτων ἢ φαρμάκων ἀφορμάς, Ἀφροδίτη δὲ καὶ Ἕρμῆς συμβιώσεις τὰς διὰ τέχνην τινὰ ἢ μοῦσαν ἢ σύστασιν ἀπὸ γραμμάτων ἢ θηλυκῶν προσώπων.
Τὴν μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον ἐπίτασιν καὶ ἄνεσιν τῶν συναστριῶν ἢ τῶν ἐναντιώσεων διακριτέον ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἐπιλαμβανομένων τόπων πρὸς τοὺς πρώτους καὶ κυριωτάτους τέσσαρας τόπους διαθέσεως, ἐπειδήπερ κατὰ τῶν κέντρων μὲν ἢ τῶν κλήρων ἢ τῶν φώτων τυχόντες ἐπιφανεστέρας ποιοῦσι τὰς ἐπισημασίας, ἀλλοτριωθέντες δὲ αὐτῶν ἀνεπιφάντους, τὴν δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ βλαβερώτερον ἢ ὠφελιμώτερον τοῖς ἑτέροις ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων ἀστέρων τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους ἐπὶ τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἢ κακὸν ἰδιοτροπίας.
Ἰδίως δὲ ὁ περὶ δούλων τόπος ἢ λόγος καὶ τῆς τῶν δεσποτῶν πρὸς αὐτοὺς συμπαθείας ἢ ἀντιπαθείας ἐκ τοῦ κακοδαιμονοῦντος ζῳδίου λαμβάνεται καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐπιθεωρούντων τὸν τόπον ἀστέρων κατά τε τὴν γένεσιν αὐτὴν καὶ κατὰ τὰς ἐπεμβάσεις ἢ διαμετρήσεις φυσικῆς ἐπιτηδειότητος καὶ μάλιστα, ὅταν οἱ τοῦ δωδεκατημορίου κυριεύσαντες ἤτοι συμφώνως τοῖς αὐθεντικοῖς τόποις τῆς γενέσεως ἢ ἐναντίως ποιῶνται τοὺς συσχηματισμούς.
7. Of Friends and Enemies
With regard to friendly dispositions and the opposite, the deeper and more lasting of which we call sympathies and hostilities, and the lesser and occasional acquaintances 46 and quarrels, our investigation will follow this course. In inquiries regarding matters of importance we must observe the places in both nativities which have the greatest authority, that is, those of the sun, the moon, the horoscope, and the Lot of Fortune.
For if they chance to fall in the same signs of the zodiac, or if they exchange places 47, either all or most of them, and particularly if the horoscopic regions are about 17° apart, they bring about secure and indissoluble sympathy, unbroken by any quarrel. However, if they are in disjunct signs or opposite signs, they produce the deepest enmities and lasting contentions. If they chance to be situated in neither of these ways, but merely in signs which bear an aspect to one another, if they are in trine or in sextile, they make the sympathies less, and in quartile, the antipathies less. Thus there come about occasional spells of silence and of disparaging talk in friendships, whenever the maleficent planets are passing through these configurations, and truces and reconciliations in enmities at the ingress of the beneficent planets upon them.
For there are three classes of friendship and enmity, since men are so disposed to one another either by preference or by need or through pleasure and pain; when all or most of the aforesaid places have familiarity with each other, the friendship is compounded of all three kinds, even as the enmity is, when they are dissociated. But when the places of the luminaries only are in familiarity, the friendship will result from choice, which is the best and surest kind, and in the case of enmity the worst and faithless; similarly, when the places of the Lots of Fortune are familiar, through need; and when the places of the horoscopes are familiar, through pleasure or pain.
One must observe, of the places in aspect, their elevations 48 and how the planets regard them. To the nativity in which an elevation of the configuration occurs, whether it is the same sign as the succedant place or the one closest to it 49, must be assigned the greater authority and direction over friendship or enmity; and to those nativities in which the regard of the planets is more favourable 50 for benevolence and power, we must allot the greater benefit from the friendship and the greater success in the enmity.
In the occasional acquaintances and oppositions that arise from time to time between individuals, we must pay attention to the movements of the planets in each of the nativities, that is, at what times the prorogations of the planets of one nativity reach the places of the other 51. For partial friendships and enmities take place in these times, prevailing at the shortest up to the completion of the prorogation, and at the longest until same other of the approaching planets reaches the place.
Now if Saturn and Jupiter approach each other’s places they produce friendships through introductions, agriculture, or inheritance; Saturn and Mars make intentional quarrels and schemings; Saturn and Venus, associations through kinsfolk, which, however, quickly cool; Saturn and Mercury make marriage and partnerships for the sake of giving and receiving, trade, or the mysteries. Jupiter and Mars cause associations through dignities or the management of property; Jupiter and Venus friendships through women, religions rites, oracles, or the like; Jupiter and Mercury associations for learned discussion, based upon philosophic inclination. Mars and Venus cause associations through love, adultery, or illegitimate relations, but they are unsure and flourish only briefly; Mars and Mercury produce enmities, noisy disputes, and lawsuits which arise through business or poisonings. Venus and Mercury give associations based upon same art or domain of the Muses, or an introduction by letter or through women.
Now then we must determine the degree of the intensity or relaxation of acquaintances and oppositions from the relation between the places which they assume and the four principal and most authoritative places 52, for if they are upon the angles or the Lots of Fortune or the houses of the luminaries, their portent is the more conspicuous, but if they are removed from them, they are insignificant. Whether the association will be more injurious or more beneficial to the associates is to be determined from the character for good or bad of the planets which regard the places named.
The special topic or account of serfs 53 and the sympathy or antipathy of their masters to them is elucidated from the house of the Evil Daemon 54 and from the natural suitability of the planets which regard this place both in the nativity itself and in their ingresses and oppositions to it, particularly when the lords of the sign are either in harmonious aspect to the principal places of the nativity, or the opposite 55.
8. Περὶ ξενιτείας
Ὁ δὲ περὶ ξενιτείας τόπος καταλαμβάνεται διὰ τῆς τῶν φώτων πρὸς τὰ κέντρα στάσεως, ἀμφοτέρων μέν, μάλιστα δὲ τῆς σελήνης· δύνουσα γὰρ ἢ ἀποκεκλικυῖα τῶν κέντρων ξενιτείας καὶ τόπων μεταβολὰς ποιεῖ, δύναται δὲ τὸ παραπλήσιον ἐνίοτε καὶ ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἤτοι δύνων καὶ αὐτὸς ἢ ἀποκεκλικὼς τοῦ κατὰ κορυφήν, ὅταν τοῖς φωσὶ διάμετρον ἢ τετράγωνον ἔχῃ στάσιν. Ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ὁ κλῆρος τῆς τύχης ἐν τοῖς ποιοῦσι τὴν ἀποδημίαν ζῳδίοις ἐκπέσῃ, καὶ τοὺς βίους ὅλους καὶ τὰς ἀναστροφὰς καὶ τὰς πράξεις ἐπὶ τῆς ξένης ἔχοντες διατελοῦσιν.
Ἀγαθοποιῶν μὲν οὖν ἐπιθεωρούντων τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους ἢ ἐπιφερομένων αὐτοῖς ἐνδόξους ἕξουσι καὶ ἐπικερδεῖς τὰς ἐπὶ τῆς ξένης πράξεις καὶ τὰς ἐπανόδους ταχείας καὶ ἀνεμποδίστους, κακοποιῶν δὲ ἐπιπόνους καὶ ἐπιβλαβεῖς καὶ ἐπικινδύνους καὶ δυσανακομίστους, τῆς συγκρατικῆς ἐπισκέψεως πανταχῆ συμπαραλαμβανομένης κατ’ ἐπικράτησιν τῶν τοῖς αὐτοῖς τόποις συσχηματιζομένων, καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις διωρισάμεθα.
Ὡς ἐπίπαν δὲ ἐν μὲν τοῖς τῶν ἑῴων τεταρτημορίων ἀποκλίμασιν ἐκπεσόντων τῶν φώτων εἰς τὰ πρὸς ἀνατολὰς καὶ μεσημβρίαν μέρη τῶν οἰκήσεων τὰς ἀποδημίας γίνεσθαι συμβαίνει, ἐν δὲ τοῖς τῶν λιβικῶν ἢ καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ δύνοντι εἰς τὰ πρὸς ἄρκτους καὶ δυσμάς· κἂν μὲν μονοειδῆ τύχῃ τὰ τὴν ξενιτείαν ποιήσαντα ζῴδια ἤτοι αὐτὰ ἢ οἱ οἰκοδεσποτήσαντες αὐτῶν ἀστέρες, διὰ μακροῦ καὶ κατὰ καιροὺς ποιήσονται τὰς ἀποδημίας, ἐὰν δὲ δίσωμα ἢ δίμορφα, συνεχῶς καὶ ἐπὶ πλεῖστον χρόνον.
Ζεὺς μὲν οὖν καὶ Ἀφροδίτη κύριοι γενόμενοι τῶν τὴν ξενιτείαν ποιούντων τόπων καὶ φώτων οὐ μόνον ἀκινδύνους ἀλλὰ καὶ θυμήρεις ποιοῦσι τὰς ὁδοιπορίας, ἤτοι γὰρ ὑπὸ τῶν προεστώτων ἐν ταῖς χώραις ἢ διὰ φίλων ἀφορμὰς παραπέμπονται συνεργούσης αὐτοῖς τῆς τε τῶν καταστημάτων εὐαερίας καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀφθονίας, προσγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῦ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ πολλάκις καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς τῆς εἰρημένης συντυχίας ὠφέλειαι καὶ προκοπαὶ καὶ δωρεαὶ καὶ τιμαὶ προσγίνονται·
Κρόνος δὲ καὶ Ἄρης ἐπιλαβόντες τὰ φῶτα, καὶ μάλιστα ἂν διαμηκίζωσιν ἀλλήλοις, τὰ περιγενόμενα ποιοῦσιν ἄχρηστα καὶ κινδύνοις περικυλίουσι μεγάλοις, ἐν μὲν τοῖς καθύγροις τυχόντες ζῳδίοις διὰ δυσπλοιῶν καὶ ναυαγιῶν ἢ πάλιν δυσοδιῶν καὶ ἐρήμων τόπων, ἐν δὲ τοῖς στερεοῖς διὰ κρημνισμῶν καὶ ἐμβολῶν πνευμάτων, ἐν δὲ τοῖς τροπικοῖς καὶ ἰσημερινοῖς δι’ ἔνδειαν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων καὶ νοσώδεις καταστάσεις, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ἀνθρωποειδέσι διὰ λῃστήρια καὶ ἐπιβουλὰς καὶ συλήσεις, ἐν δὲ τοῖς χερσαίοις διὰ θηρίων ἐφόδους ἢ σεισμούς, Ἑρμοῦ δὲ συμπροσόντος διὰ μετέωρα καὶ κατηγορίας ἐπισφαλεῖς, ἔτι δὲ καὶ διὰ τὰς τῶν ἑρπετῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἰοβόλων πληγάς, παρατηρουμένης ἔτι τῆς μὲν τῶν συμπτωμάτων, ἐάν τε ὠφέλιμα ἐάν τε βλαβερὰ ᾖ, ἰδιοτροπίας ἐκ τῆς περὶ τὸ αἴτιον διαφορᾶς καὶ ἐκ τῆς τῶν αἰτιατικῶν τόπων πράξεως ἢ κτήσεως ἢ σώματος ἢ ἀξιώματος κατὰ τὴν ἐξ ἀρχῆς διάθεσιν κυρίας, τῶν δὲ τὰς ἐπισημασίας μάλιστα ποιησόντων καιρῶν ἐκ τῆς τῶν ε πλανωμένων κατὰ χρόνους ἐπεμβάσεων ποιότητος· καὶ ταῦτα μὲν ἡμῖν μέχρι τοσούτου ὑποτετυπώσθω.
8. Of Foreign Travel
The topic of foreign travel 56 receives treatment by observing the position of the luminaries to the angles, both of them, but particularly the moon. For when the moon is setting or declining from the angles 57, she portends journeys abroad or changes of place. Mars too sometimes has a similar force, either when he is setting or when he himself also has declined from mid-heaven, when he is in opposition or quartile to the luminaries. If the Lot of Fortune also falls among the sign that cause travel, the subjects spend their whole lives abroad and will have all their personal relations and business there.
If beneficent planets regard the aforesaid places or succeed them, their activities abroad will be honourable and profitable and their return quick and unimpeded; but if the maleficent planets regard them, their journeys will be laborious, injurious, and dangerous, and the return difficult, although in every case the mixture of influences is taken into consideration, determined by the dominance of the planets that bear an aspect to these same places, as we explained at first 58.
In general, it happens that, if the luminaries fall in the lower parts of the eastern quadrants, the travel is to the eastern and southern parts of the world, but if in the western quadrants or in the occident itself, to the north and the west; and if the zodiacal signs which caused the travel chance to be those of a single figure, either themselves or the planets that rule them, the journeys will be made at long intervals and upon occasion; but if they are bicorporeal signs, or of double form, they will travel continuously and for a very long time.
If Jupiter and Venus are the rulers of the places which govern travel, and of the luminaries, they make the journeys not only safe but also pleasant; for the subjects will be sent on their way either by the chief men of the country or by the resources of their friends, and favourable conditions of weather and abundance of supplies will also aid them. Often, too, if Mercury is added to these, profit, gain, gifts, and honour result from this good fortune of which we have spoken.
If Saturn and Mars control the luminaries, however, and particularly if they are in opposition to each other, they will make the results useless and will involve the subject in great dangers, through unfortunate voyages and shipwreck if they are in watery signs, or again through hard going and desert places; and if they are in solid signs, through falling from heights and assaults of winds; in the solstitial and equinoctial signs, through lack of provisions and unhealthy conditions; in the signs of human form, through piracy, plots, and robberies; in the terrestrial signs, through the attacks of beasts, or earthquakes, and if Mercury is present at the same time, through the weather, dangerous accusations, and, furthermore, through the bites of reptiles and other poisonous creatures. The peculiar quality of the events, whether they be beneficial or harmful that is, the differentiation in the cause is observed from the government of the places significant of action, property, body, or dignity, according to our original disposition of them 59, and the occasions which will to the greatest degree bring about these portended events are judged from the time of the ingresses 60 of the five planets. Such be our general account of the matter.
9. Περὶ θανάτου ποιότητος
Καταλειπομένης δὲ ἐπὶ πᾶσι τῆς περὶ τὸ ποῖον τῶν θανάτων ἐπισκέψεως προδιαληψόμεθα διὰ τῶν ἐν τοῖς περὶ τῶν χρόνων τῆς ζωῆς ἐφωδευμένων, πότερον κατὰ ἄφεσιν ἀκτῖνος ἡ ἀναίρεσις ἀποτελεσθήσεται ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τὸ δυτικὸν τοῦ ἐπικρατήτορος καταφοράν· εἰ μὲν γὰρ κατὰ ἄφεσιν καὶ ὑπάντησιν ἡ ἀναίρεσις γένοιτο, τὸν τῆς ὑπαντήσεως τόπον εἰς τὴν τοῦ θανάτου ποιότητα προσήκει παρατηρεῖν, εἰ δὲ κατὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τὸ δῦνον καταφοράν, αὐτὸν τὸν δυτικὸν τόπον. Ὁποῖοι γὰρ ἂν ὦσιν ἤτοι οἱ ἐπόντες τοῖς εἰρημένοις τόποις ἤ, ἐὰν μὴ ἐπῶσιν, οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν ἄλλων αὐτοῖς ἐπιφερόμενοι, τοιούτους καὶ τοὺς θανάτους ἔσεσθαι διαληπτέον, συλλαμβανομένων ταῖς φύσεσιν αὐτῶν πρὸς τὸ ποικίλον τῶν συμπτωμάτων τῶν τε συσχηματιζομένων ἀστέρων καὶ τῆς αὐτῶν τῶν εἰρημένων ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἰδιοτροπίας ζῳδιακῶς τε καὶ κατὰ τὴν τῶν ὁρίων φύσιν.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν κυρίαν τοῦ θανάτου λαβὼν ποιεῖ τὰ τέλη διὰ νόσων πολυχρονίων καὶ φθίσεων καὶ ῥευματισμῶν καὶ συντήξεων καὶ ῥιγοπυρέτων καὶ σπληνικῶν καὶ ὑδρωπικῶν καὶ κοιλιακῶν καὶ ὑστερικῶν διαθέσεων, καὶ ὅσαι κατὰ πλεονασμὸν τοῦ ψυχροῦ συνίστανται·
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῖ τοὺς θανάτους ἀπὸ συνάγχης καὶ περιπνευμονίας καὶ ἀποπληξίας καὶ σπασμῶν καὶ κεφαλαλγίας καὶ τῶν καρδιακῶν διαθέσεων, καὶ ὅσαι κατὰ πνεύματος ἀμετρίαν ἢ δυσωδίαν ἐπισυμπίπτουσι·
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως ἀπὸ πυρετῶν συνεχῶν καὶ ἡμιτριταϊκῶν καὶ αἰφνιδίων πληγῶν καὶ νεφριτικῶν καὶ αἱμοπτυϊκῶν διαθέσεων καὶ αἱμορραγιῶν καὶ ἐκτρωσμῶν καὶ τοκετῶν καὶ ἐρυσιπελάτων καὶ ὀλέθρων, καὶ ὅσα τῶν νοσημάτων κατ’ ἐκπύρωσιν καὶ ἀμετρίαν τοῦ θερμοῦ τοὺς θανάτους ἐπιφέρει·
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης διὰ στομαχικῶν καὶ ἡπατικῶν καὶ λειχήνων καὶ δυσεντερικῶν διαθέσεων ποιεῖ τοὺς θανάτους, ἔτι δὲ καὶ διὰ νομῶν καὶ συρίγγων καὶ φαρμάκων δόσεων, καὶ ὅσα τοῦ ὑγροῦ πλεονάσαντος ἢ φθαρέντος ἀποτελεῖται συμπτώματα· ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ διὰ μανιῶν καὶ ἐκστάσεων καὶ μελαγχολιῶν καὶ πτωματισμῶν καὶ ἐπιλήψεων καὶ βηχικῶν καὶ ἀναφορικῶν νοσημάτων, καὶ ὅσα τοῦ ξηροῦ πλεονάσαντος ἢ φθαρέντος συνίσταται.
Ἰδίοις μὲν οὖν τελευτῶσι θανάτοις οἱ κατὰ τὸν εἰρημένον τρόπον μεταστάντες τοῦ ζῆν, ὅταν οἱ τὴν κυρίαν τοῦ θανάτου λαβόντες ἐπὶ τῆς ἰδίας ἢ τῆς οἰκείας φυσικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας τύχωσιν ὄντες ὑπὸ μηδενὸς καθυπερτερηθέντες τῶν κακῶσαι καὶ ἐπισφαλέστερον ποιῆσαι τὸ τέλος δυναμένων, βιαίοις δὲ καὶ ἐπισήμοις, ὅταν ἀμφότεροι κυριεύσωσιν οἱ κακοποιοὶ τῶν ἀναιρετικῶν τόπων ἤτοι συνόντες ἢ τετραγωνίζοντες ἢ διαμηκίζοντες, ἢ ὁπότερος αὐτῶν ἢ καὶ ἀμφότεροι τὸν ἥλιον ἢ καὶ τὴν σελήνην ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα τὰ φῶτα καταλάβωσι, τῆς μὲν τοῦ θανάτου κακώσεως ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῶν συνελεύσεως συνισταμένης, τοῦ δὲ μεγέθους ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν φώτων ἐπιμαρτυρήσεως, τῆς δὲ ποιότητος πάλιν ἀπὸ τῆς τῶν λοιπῶν ἀστέρων συνεπιθεωρήσεως καὶ τῶν τοὺς κακοποιοὺς περιεχόντων ζῳδίων.
Ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Κρόνου τὸν ἥλιον παρὰ τὴν αἵρεσιν τετραγωνίσας ἢ διαμηκίσας ἐν μὲν τοῖς στερεοῖς ποιεῖ τοὺς κατὰ θλίψιν ὄχλων ἢ ἀγχόναις ἢ στραγγαλιαῖς ἀπολλυμένους, ὁμοίως δέ, κἂν δύνῃ τῆς σελήνης ἐπιφερομένης,
Ἐν δὲ τοῖς θηριώδεσι τόποις ἢ ζῳδίοις ὑπὸ θηρίων διαφθειρομένους, κἂν ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ἐπιμαρτυρήσῃ κεκακωμένος καὶ αὐτός, ἐν δημοσίοις τόποις ἢ ἐπισήμοις ἡμέραις θηριομαχοῦντας, ἀνθωροσκοπήσας δὲ ὁποτέρῳ τῶν φώτων ἐν εἱρκταῖς ἀπολλυμένους, τῷ δὲ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ συσχηματισθείς, καὶ μάλιστα περὶ τοὺς ἐν τῇ σφαίρᾳ ὄφεις ἢ τὰ χερσαῖα τῶν ζῳδίων, ἀπὸ δακετῶν ἰοβόλων ἀποθνῄσκοντας, Ἀφροδίτης δὲ αὐτοῖς προσγενομένης ὑπὸ φαρμακειῶν καὶ γυναικείων ἐπιβουλῶν, ἐν Παρθένῳ δὲ καὶ Ἰχθύσιν ἢ τοῖς καθύγροις ζῳδίοις τῆς σελήνης συσχηματισθείσης ὑποβρυχίους καὶ ἐν ὕδασιν ἀποπνιγομένους, περὶ δὲ τὴν Ἀργὼ καὶ ναυαγίοις περιπίπτοντας, ἐν δὲ τοῖς τροπικοῖς ἢ τετραπόδοις ἡλίῳ συνὼν ἢ διαμηκίσας ἢ ἀντὶ τοὺ ἡλίου τῷ τοῦ Ἄρεως ὑπὸ συμπτώσεων καταλαμβανομένους, ἐὰν δὲ καὶ μεσουρανῶσιν ἢ ἀντιμεσουρανῶσιν, ἀπὸ ὕψους κατακρημνιζομένους.
Ὁ δὲ τοῦ Ἄρεως τῷ ἡλίῳ παρ’ αἵρεσιν ἢ τῇ σελήνῃ τετράγωνος ἢ διάμετρος σταθεὶς ἐν μὲν τοῖς ἀνθρωποειδέσι ζῳδίοις ἐν στάσεσιν ἐμφυλίοις ἢ ὑπὸ πολεμίων ποιεῖ σφαζομένους ἢ αὐτόχειρας ἑαυτῶν γινομένους, διὰ γυναῖκας δὲ ἢ γυναικῶν φονέας, ἐπὰν καὶ ὁ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης αὐτοῖς μαρτυρήσῃ· κἂν ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ δὲ τούτοις συσχηματισθῇ ὑπὸ πειρατῶν ἢ λῃστηρίων ἢ κακούργων ἀπολλυμένους, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν μελεοκοπουμένων καὶ ἀτελῶν ζῳδίων ἢ κατὰ τὸ Γοργόνιον τοῦ Περσέως ἀποκεφαλιζομένους ἢ μελεοκοπουμένους, ἐν δὲ Σκορπίῳ καὶ Ταύρῳ καύσεσιν ἢ τομαῖς ἢ ἀποτομαῖς ἰατρῶν καὶ σπασμοῖς ἀποθνῄσκοντας, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἢ ἀντιμεσουρανήματος σταυροῖς ἀνορθουμένους, καὶ μάλιστα περὶ τὸν Κηφέα καὶ τὴν Ἀνδρομέδαν, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ δύνοντος ἢ ἀνθωροσκοποῦντος ζῶντας καιουμένους, ἐν δὲ τοῖς τετραπόδοις ἀπὸ συμπτώσεων καὶ συνθραύσεων ἢ συρμάτων ἀποθνῄσκοντας.
Τοῦ δὲ τοῦ Διὸς καὶ τούτῳ μαρτυρήσαντος καὶ συγκακωθέντος ἐπισήμοις πάλιν ἀπόλλυνται κατακρίσεσι καὶ χόλοις ἡγεμόνων ἢ βασιλέων· συγγενόμενοι δὲ ἀλλήλοις οἱ κακοποιοὶ καὶ οὕτως διαμηκίσαντες ἐπί τινος τῶν εἰρημένων αἰτιατικῶν διαθέσεων συνεργοῦσιν ἔτι μᾶλλον πρὸς τὴν τοῦ θανάτου κάκωσιν τῆς κατὰ τὸ ποῖον κυρίας περὶ τὸν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀναιρετικοῦ τόπου τυχόντα γινομένης ἢ καὶ πολλῶν τῶν θανατικῶν συμπτωμάτων ἢ δισσῶν ἤτοι κατὰ τὸ ποῖον ἢ κατὰ τὸ πόσον ἀποτελουμένων, ὅταν ἀμφότεροι λόγον ἔχωσι πρὸς τοὺς ἀναιρετικοὺς τόπους. Οἱ τοιοῦτοι δὲ καὶ ταφῆς ἄμοιροι καταλείπονται, δαπανῶνται δὲ ὑπὸ θηρίων ἢ οἰωνῶν, ὅταν περὶ τὰ ὁμοειδῆ τῶν ζῳδίων οἱ κακοποιοὶ τύχωσι μηδενὸς τῶν ἀγαθοποιῶν τῷ ὑπὸ γῆν ἢ τοῖς ἀναιρετικοῖς τόποις μαρτυρήσαντος.
Ἐπὶ ξένης δὲ οἱ θάνατοι γίνονται τῶν τοὺς ἀναιρετικοὺς τόπους κατασχόντων ἀστέρων ἐν τοῖς ἀποκλίμασιν ἐκπεσόντων, μάλισθ’ ὅταν καὶ ἡ σελήνη παροῦσα ἢ τετραγωνίζουσα ἢ διαμηκίζουσα τύχῃ τοὺς εἰρημένους τόπους.
9. Of the Quality of Death
Since after all the others the inquiry concerning the quality of death remains, we shall first determine, through the means furnished by the discussion of the length of life, whether the destruction will be accomplished by the projection of a ray or by the descent of the significator to the occident 61. For if the destruction should come about through the projection of rays and occourse, it is fitting to observe the place of the occourse in order to determine the quality of the death, but if it occurs by the descent of the significator to the occident, we must observe the occident itself. For of whatever quality are the planets that are upon the aforesaid places, or, if they are not upon them, the first planets to approach them, such we must understand that the deaths will be, while at the same time the planets in aspect by their natures contribute to the complexity of the events, as do also the peculiar characters of the aforesaid destructive places themselves, both through the signs of the zodiac and through the nature of the terms 62.
Now then, if Saturn holds the lordship of death, he brings about the end through long illness, phthisis, rheumatism, colliquations, chills and fever, and splenic, dropsical, enteric, or hysteric conditions, and such as arise through excesses of cold.
Jupiter causes death through strangulation, pneumonia, apoplexy, spasms, headaches, and cardiac affections, and such conditions as are accompanied by irregularity or foulness of breath.
Mars kills by means of fevers, continued or intermittent at intervals of one and a half days, sudden strokes, nephritic conditions and those that involve the spitting of blood, hæmorrhages, miscarriages, childbirth, erysipelas, and pestilences, and such diseases as induce death by fever and immoderate heat.
Venus causes death by stomachic, hepatic, and intestinal conditions, and furthermore through cancers, fistulas, lichens, taking poisons, and such misfortunes as come about from excess or deficiency of moisture. Mercury portends death by madness, distraction, melancholy, the falling sickness, epilepsy, diseases accompanied by coughing and raising, and all such ailments as arise from the excess or deficiency of dryness.
Thus, then, those who depart from life in the way described die natural deaths 63, whenever the lords of death happen to be in their own or in kindred natural characters 64, and if no planet that is able to do injury and to make the end more remarkable overcomes them. They die, however, by violent and conspicuous means whenever both the evil planets dominate the destructive places, either in conjunction, or in quartile, or in opposition, or also if one of the two, or both, seize upon 65 the sun, or the moon, or both the luminaries. The affliction of the death in this case arises from their junction, its magnitude from the testimony of the luminaries, and its quality, again, from the way in which the other planets regard them, and from the signs in which the evil planets are found.
For if Saturn is in quartile to the sun from a sign of the opposite sect, or is in opposition, in the solid signs he causes death by trampling in a mob, or by the noose, or by indurations, and similarly if he is setting and the moon is approaching him;
in the signs that have the form of animals, he causes death by wild beasts, and if Jupiter, who is himself afflicted, bears witness to him, death in public places, or on days of celebration, in fighting with the beasts; but in the ascendant, in opposition 66 to either of the luminaries, death in prison. If he is in aspect to Mercury, and particularly in the neighbourhood of the serpents 67 in the sphere, or in the terrestrial signs, he makes men die from the bites of poisonous creatures, and if Venus is present with them, by poisoning and by feminine plots; but in Virgo and Pisces, or the watery signs, if the moon is in aspect, by drowning and suffocation in water; in the neighbourhood of Argo, as the victims of shipwreck ; in the tropical or four-footed signs, when Saturn is with the sun or is in opposition to him, or if he is with Mars instead of the sun, by being caught in the collapse of a house; and if they are in mid-heaven, above or below the earth, by a fall from a height.
If Mars is quartile or in opposition to the sun or the moon, from a sign of the other sect, in the signs of human form, he causes the subjects to be slaughtered in civil factions or by the enemy, or to commit suicide, and to die because of women or as murderers of women, whenever Venus testifies to them 68; and if Mercury also is in aspect to these, he causes death at the bands of pirates, robbers, or criminals; in the mutilated and imperfect signs 69, or in the Gorgon of Perseus, death by decapitation or mutilation; in Scorpio and Taurus, death through cautery, cutting 70, or amputation by physicians, or death in convulsions; at mid-heaven or the opposite point, by being set up on stakes 71, and particularly in Cepheus and Andromeda; at the occident or in opposition to the horoscope, by being burned alive; in the quadrupedal signs, death by the collapse of houses, by breaking, or by crushing; if Jupiter also bears witness to him and is afflicted at the same time, again the subjects perish conspicuously by condemnation and through the anger of generals or kings.
If the maleficent planets are together and in this state are in opposition in same one of the aforesaid significant positions, they work together all the more for the affliction of the death. In this case the signification of the quality of the death lies with the one that chances to occupy the destructive place, or else the fatal occurrences are multiplied, or doubled, either in quality or in quantity, whenever both have same relation to the destructive places. Persons with such genitures are even left without burial, and are consumed by wild beasts or birds, whenever the maleficent planets chance to be in signs of such form 72, if none of the beneficent planets is witnessing to the lower mid-heaven or to the destructive places.
Deaths occur in foreign lands if the planets that occupy the destructive places fall in the declining places 73, and particularly whenever the moon happens to be in, or quartile to, or in opposition to, the aforesaid regions.
10. Περὶ χρόνων διαιρέσεως
Ἐφωδευμένου δὲ ἡμῖν κεφαλαιωδῶς τοῦ τύπου τῆς καθ’ ἕκαστον εἶδος ἐπισκέψεως μέχρι μόνον αὐτῶν, ὥσπερ ἐν ἀρχῇ προεθέμεθα, τῶν καθ’ ὅλα μέρη λαμβανομένων πραγματειῶν λοιπὸν ἂν εἴη προσθεῖναι κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον, ὅσα καὶ περὶ τὰς τῶν χρόνων διαιρέσεις ὀφείλει θεωρηθῆναι φυσικῶς καὶ ἀκολούθως ταῖς ἐπὶ μέρους ἐκτεθειμέναις πραγματείαις. Ὥσπερ τοίνυν καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων ἁπλῶς τῶν γενεθλιαλογικῶν τόπων προυφέστηκέ τις τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους εἱμαρμένη μείζων, ἡ τῆς τῶν χωρῶν αὐτῶν, ᾗ τὰ καθ’ ἕκαστον ὁλοσχερῶς θεωρούμενα περὶ τὰς γενέσεις ὑποπίπτειν πέφυκεν, ὡς τά τε περὶ τὰς τῶν σωμάτων μορφὰς καὶ τὰς τῶν ψυχῶν ἰδιοτροπίας καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐθῶν καὶ νομίμων ἐναλλαγάς,
Καὶ δεῖ τὸν φυσικῶς ἐπισκεπτόμενον ἀεὶ τῆς πρώτης καὶ κυριωτέρας αἰτίας κρατεῖν, ὅπως μὴ κατὰ τὸ τῶν γενέσεων παρόμοιον λάθῃ ποτὲ τὸν μὲν ἐν Αἰθιοπίᾳ γεννώμενον φέρε εἰπεῖν λευκόχρουν ἢ τετανὸν τὰς τρίχας εἰπών, τὸν δὲ Γερμανὸν ἢ τὸν Γαλάτην μελάγχροα ἢ οὐλοκέφαλον, ἢ τούτους μὲν ἡμέρους τοῖς ἤθεσιν καὶ φιλολόγους ἢ φιλοθεωρούς, τοὺς δὲ ἐν τῇ ῾Ελλάδι τὰς ψυχὰς ἀγρίους καὶ τὸν λόγον ἀπαιδεύτους, ἢ πάλιν κατὰ τὸ τῶν ἐθῶν καὶ νομίμων ἴδιον ἐπὶ τῶν συμβιώσεων λόγου χάριν τῷ μὲν Ἰταλῷ τὸ γένος ἀδελφικὸν γάμον προθέμενος, δέον τῷ Αἰγυπτίῳ, τούτῳ δὲ μητρικόν, δέον τῷ Πέρσῃ,
Καὶ ὅλως προδιαλαμβάνειν τὰς καθόλου τῆς εἱμαρμένης περιστάσεις, εἶτα τὰς κατὰ μέρος πρὸς τὸ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον ἐφαρμόζειν· τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν χρονικῶν διαιρέσεων τὰς τῶν ἡλικιῶν διαφορὰς καὶ ἐπιτηδειότητας πρὸς ἕκαστα τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων ἀναγκαῖον προυποτίθεσθαι καὶ σκοπεῖν, ὅπως μὴ κατὰ τὸ κοινὸν καὶ ἁπλοῦν τῶν πρὸς τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν θεωρουμένων συμβατικῶν λάθωμεν αὐτούς ποτε τῷ μὲν βρέφει πρᾶξιν ἢ γάμον ἤ τι τῶν τελειοτέρων εἰπόντες, τῷ δὲ πάνυ γέροντι τεκνοποιίαν ἤ τι τῶν νεανικωτέρων, ἀλλὰ καθάπαξ τὰ διὰ τῶν ἐφόδων τῶν χρονικῶν θεωρούμενα κατὰ τὸ παρόμοιον καὶ ἐνδεχόμενον τῶν ταῖς ἡλικίαις συμφύλων ἐφαρμόζωμεν·
Ἔστι γὰρ ἐπιβολὴ μία καὶ ἡ αὐτὴ πάντων ἐπὶ τῶν χρονικῶν διαφορῶν τῆς καθόλου φύσεως τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐχομένη καθ’ ὁμοιότητα καὶ παραβολὴν τῆς τάξεως τῶν ἑπτὰ πλανωμένων ἀρχομένη μὲν ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡλικίας καὶ τῆς πρώτης ἀφ’ ἡμῶν σφαίρας, τουτέστι τῆς σεληνιακῆς, λήγουσα δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν πυμάτην τῶν ἡλικιῶν καὶ τῶν πλανωμένων σφαιρῶν τὴν ὑστάτην, Κρόνου δὲ προσαγορευομένην, καὶ συμβέβηκεν ὡς ἀληθῶς ἑκάστῃ τῶν ἡλικιῶν τὰ οἰκεῖα τῇ φύσει τοῦ παραβεβλημένου τῶν πλανωμένων, ἃ δεήσει παρατηρεῖν, ὅπως τὰ μὲν καθόλου τῶν χρονικῶν ἐντεῦθεν σκοπῶμεν, τὰς δὲ τῶν κατὰ μέρος διαφορὰς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν ταῖς γενέσεσιν εὑρισκομένων ἰδιωμάτων.
Μέχρι μὲν γὰρ τῶν πρώτων σχεδόν που τεσσάρων ἐτῶν κατὰ τὸν οἰκεῖον ἀριθμὸν τῆς τετραετηρίδος τὴν τοῦ βρέφους ἡλικίαν ἡ σελήνη λαχοῦσα τήν τε ὑγρότητα καὶ ἀπηξίαν τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὸ τῆς αὐξήσεως ὀξὺ καὶ τὸ τῶν τροφῶν ὡς ἐπίπαν ὑδατῶδες καὶ τὸ τῆς ἕξεως εὐμετάβολον καὶ τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀτελὲς καὶ ἀδιάρθρωτον ἀπειργάσατο τοῖς περὶ τὸ ποιητικὸν αὐτῆς συμβεβηκόσιν οἰκείως.
Ἐπὶ δὲ τὴν ἑξῆς δεκαετίαν τὴν παιδικὴν ἡλικίαν δεύτερος καὶ δευτέραν λαχὼν ὁ τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ ἀστὴρ τοῦ καθ’ ἥμισυ μέρους τοῦ τῆς εἰκοσαετηρίδος ἀριθμοῦ, τότε διανοητικὸν καὶ λογικὸν τῆς ψυχῆς ἄρχεται διαρθροῦν ὥσπερ καὶ διαπλάττειν καὶ μαθημάτων ἐντιθέναι σπέρματά τινα καὶ στοιχεῖα, τῶν τε ἠθῶν καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδειοτήτων ἐμφαίνει τὰς ἰδιοτροπίας διδασκαλίαις ἤδη καὶ παιδαγωγίαις καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις γυμνασίοις ἐγείρων τὰς ψυχάς.
Ὁ δὲ τῆς Ἀφροδίτης τὴν μειρακιώδη καὶ τρίτην ἡλικίαν παραλαβὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ἑξῆς ὀκταετίαν κατὰ τὸν ἴσον ἀριθμὸν τῆς ἰδίας περιόδου, κίνησιν εἰκότως τῶν σπερματικῶν πόρων ἐμποιεῖν ἄρχεται κατὰ τὴν πλήρωσιν αὐτῶν καὶ ὁρμὴν ἐπὶ τὴν τῶν ἀφροδισίων συνέλευσιν, ὅτε μάλιστα λύσσα τις ἐγγίνεται ταῖς ψυχαῖς καὶ ἀκρασία καὶ πρὸς τὰ τυχόντα τῶν ἀφροδισίων ἔρως καὶ φλεγμονῆς ἀπάτη καὶ τοῦ προπετοῦς ἀβλεψία.
Τὴν δὲ τετάρτην καὶ τάξει μέσην ἡλικίαν τὴν νεανικὴν λαβὼν ὁ τῆς μέσης σφαίρας κύριος ἥλιος ἐπὶ τὰ τῆς ἐννεακαιδεκαετηρίδος ἔτη τὸ οἰκοδεσποτικὸν ἤδη καὶ αὐθεντικὸν τῶν πράξεων ἐμποιεῖ τῇ ψυχῇ βίου τε καὶ δόξης καὶ καταστάσεως ἐπιθυμίαν καὶ μετάβασιν ἀπὸ τῶν παιγνιωδῶν καὶ ἀνεπιστάτων ἁμαρτημάτων ἐπὶ τὸ προσεκτικὸν καὶ αἰδημονικὸν καὶ φιλότιμον.
Μετὰ δὲ τὸν ἥλιον ὁ τοῦ Ἄρεως πέμπτος ἐπιλαβὼν τὸ τῆς ἡλικίας ἀνδρῶδες ἐπὶ τὰ ἴσα τῆς ἰδίας περιόδου πεντεκαίδεκα ἔτη τὸ αὐστηρὸν καὶ κακόπαθον εἰσάγει τοῦ βίου, μερίμνας τε καὶ σκυλμοὺς ἐμποιεῖ τῇ ψυχῇ καὶ τῷ σώματι, καθάπερ αἴσθησίν τινα ἤδη καὶ ἔννοιαν ἐνδιδοὺς τῆς παρακμῆς καὶ ἐπιστρέφων πρὸς τὸ πρὶν ἐγγὺς ἐλθεῖν τοῦ τέλους ἀνύσαι τι λόγου ἄξιον μετὰ πόνου τῶν μεταχειριζομένων.
Ἕκτος δὲ ὁ τοῦ Διὸς τὴν πρεσβυτικὴν ἡλικίαν λαχὼν ἐπὶ τὴν τῆς ἰδίας περιόδου πάλιν δωδεκαετίαν τὸ μὲν αὐτουργὸν καὶ ἐπίπονον καὶ ταραχῶδες καὶ παρακεκινδυνευμένον τῶν πράξεων ἀποστρέφεσθαι ποιεῖ, τὸ δὲ εὔσχημον καὶ προνοητικὸν καὶ ἀνακεχωρηκός, ἔτι δὲ ἐπιλογιστικὸν πάντων καὶ νουθετικὸν καὶ παραμυθητικὸν ἀντεισάγει τιμῆς τότε μάλιστα καὶ ἐπαίνου καὶ ἐλευθεριότητος ἀντιποιεῖσθαι παρασκευάζων μετ’ αἰδοῦς καὶ σεμνοπρεπείας.
Τελευταῖος δὲ ὁ τοῦ Κρόνου τὴν ἐσχάτην καὶ γεροντικὴν ἡλικίαν ἐκληρώθη μέχρι τῶν ἐπιλοίπων τῆς ζωῆς χρόνων καταψυχομένων ἤδη καὶ ἐμποδιζομένων τῶν τε σωματικῶν καὶ τῶν ψυχικῶν κινήσεων ἐν ταῖς ὁρμαῖς καὶ ἀπολαύσεσι καὶ ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ταχείας τῆς ἐπὶ τὴν φύσιν παρακμῆς ἐπιγινομένης τῷ βίῳ κατεσκληκότι καὶ ἀθύμῳ καὶ ἀσθενικῷ καὶ εὐπροσκόπῳ καὶ πρὸς πάντα δυσαρέστῳ κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον τῆς τῶν κινήσεων νωχελίας.
Αἱ μὲν οὖν κατὰ τὸ κοινὸν καὶ καθόλου τῆς φύσεως θεωρούμεναι τῶν χρόνων ἰδιοτροπίαι τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον προυποτετυπώσθωσαν, τῶν δὲ ἐπὶ μέρους κατὰ τὸ τῶν γενέσεων ἴδιον ὀφειλουσῶν λαμβάνεσθαι τὰς μὲν κατὰ τὸ προυποτιθέμενον πάλιν καὶ ὁλοσχερέστερον ἀπὸ τῶν κυριωτάτων ἀφέσεων ποιησόμεθα, πασῶν μέντοι καὶ οὐκ ἀπὸ μιᾶς ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς χρόνων, ἀλλὰ τὴν μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὡροσκόπου πρὸς τὰ σωματικὰ τῶν συμπτωμάτων καὶ τὰς ξενιτείας, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ κλήρου τῆς τύχης πρὸς τὰ τῆς κτήσεως, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς σελήνης πρὸς τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς πάθη καὶ τὰς συμβιώσεις, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου πρὸς τὰ κατ’ ἀξίαν καὶ δόξαν, τὴν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος πρὸς τὰς λοιπὰς καὶ κατὰ μέρος τοῦ βιοῦ διαγωγάς, οἷον πράξεις, φιλίας, τεκνοποιίας·
Οὕτω γὰρ ἂν ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς καιροῖς οὐχ εἷς ἔσται ἤτοι ἀγαθοποιὸς ἢ κακοποιὸς κύριος αὐτῶν πολλῶν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ συμβαινόντων ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους ἐναντίων συμπτωμάτων, ὡς ὅταν τις ἀποβαλὼν πρόσωπον οἰκεῖον λάβῃ κληρονομίαν ἢ νόσῳ καταληφθεὶς κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸ καὶ τύχῃ τινὸς ἀξίας καὶ προκοπῆς ἢ ἐν ἀπραγίᾳ τυγχάνων τέκνων γένηται πατήρ, καὶ ὅσα τοιαῦτα συμβαίνειν εἴωθεν·
Οὐ γὰρ τὸ αὐτὸ σώματος καὶ ψυχῆς καὶ κτήματος καὶ ἀξιώματος καὶ τῶν συμβαινόντων ἀγαθῶν ἢ κακῶν, ὡς ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἐν ἅπασι τούτοις εὐτυχεῖν τινα ἢ πάλιν ἀτυχεῖν, ἀλλὰ συμβαίνειν μὲν ἂν ἴσως καὶ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐπὶ τῶν τέλεον εὐδαιμονιζομένων ἢ ταλανιζομένων καιρῶν, ὅταν ἐν ἁπάσαις ἢ ταῖς πλείσταις ἀφέσεσι συνδράμωσιν ὑπαντήσεις ἀγαθοποιῶν πάντων ἢ πάλιν κακοποιῶν, σπανίως δὲ διὰ τὸ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως, ἀτελὲς μὲν πρὸς ἑκατέραν τῶν ἀκροτήτων, εὐκατάφορον δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἐκ τῆς ἐναλλαγῆς τῶν ἀγαθῶν καὶ κακῶν συμμετρίαν.
Τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἀφετικοὺς τόπους κατὰ τὸν εἰρημένον τρόπον διακρινοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἀφέσεσιν ὑπαντῶντας οὐ μόνον πάλιν τοὺς ἀναιρετὰς ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς χρόνων, ἀλλὰ πάντας ἁπλῶς παραληπτέον, καὶ ὁμοίως οὐ τοὺς σωματικῶς μόνον ἢ κατὰ διάμετρον ἢ τετράγωνον στάσιν συναντῶντας, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς κατὰ τρίγωνον καὶ ἑξάγωνον σχηματισμόν. Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν δοτέον τοὺς χρόνους καθ’ ἑκάστην ἄφεσιν τῷ κατ’ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀφετικῆς μοίρας τυχόντι ἢ συσχηματισθέντι, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ οὕτως ἔχῃ, τῷ τὴν ἔγγιστα προήγησιν ἐπιλαβόντι μέχρι τοῦ τὴν ἑξῆς εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα μοῖραν ἐπιθεωρήσαντος, εἶτα τούτῳ μέχρι τοῦ ἑξῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁμοίως παραλαμβανομένων εἰς οἰκοδεσποτείαν καὶ τῶν τὰ ὅρια ἐπεχόντων ἀστέρων.
Δοτέον δὲ πάλιν ταῖς τῶν διαστάσεων μοίραις ἔτη κατὰ μὲν τὴν τοῦ ὡροσκόπου ἄφεσιν ἰσάριθμα τοῖς τοῦ οἰκείου κλίματος χρόνοις ἀναφορικοῖς, κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ μεσουρανήματος ἰσάριθμον τοῖς χρόνοις τῶν μεσουρανήσεων, κατὰ δὲ τὰς ἀπὸ λοιπῶν ἀνάλογον τῷ πρὸς τὰ κέντρα συνεγγισμῷ τῶν ἀναφορῶν ἢ καταφορῶν ἢ συμμεσουρανήσεων, καθάπερ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν τῆς ζωῆς χρόνων διωρισάμεθα.
Τοὺς μὲν οὖν καθολικοὺς χρονοκράτορας ληψόμεθα τὸν εἰρημένον τρόπον, τοὺς δ’ ἐνιαυσίους ἐκβάλλοντες τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γενέσεως ἐτῶν ἀφ’ ἑκάστου τῶν ἀφετικῶν τόπων εἰς τὰ ἑπόμενα κατὰ ζῴδιον ἓν καὶ τοῦ συντελειουμένου ζῳδίου τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην συμπαραλαμβάνοντες, τὸ δ’ αὐτὸ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν μηνῶν ποιήσομεν ἐκβάλλοντες πάλιν καὶ τούτων τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ γενεθλιακοῦ μηνὸς πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῶν τὴν κυρίαν τοῦ ἔτους λαβόντων τόπων, κατὰ ζῴδιον μέντοι ἡμέρας εἴκοσι ὀκτώ, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμερῶν· τὰς γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς γενεθλιακῆς ἡμέρας ἐκβαλοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν μηνιαίων τόπων κατὰ ζῴδιον ἡμέρας δύο τρίτον.
Προσεκτέον δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἐπεμβάσεσι ταῖς πρὸς τοὺς τῶν χρόνων τόπους γινομέναις ὡς οὐ τὰ τυχόντα καὶ αὐταῖς συλλαμβανομέναις πρὸς τὰ τῶν καιρῶν ἀποτελέσματα, καὶ μάλιστα ταῖς μὲν τοῦ Κρόνου πρὸς τοὺς καθολικοὺς τῶν χρόνων τόπους, ταῖς δὲ τοῦ Διὸς πρὸς τοὺς τῶν ἐνιαυσιαίων, ταῖς δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου καὶ ταῖς τοῦ Ἄρεως καὶ Ἀφροδίτης καὶ Ἑρμοῦ πρὸς τοὺς τῶν μηνιαίων, ταῖς δὲ τῆς σελήνης παρόδοις πρὸς τοὺς τῶν ἡμερησίων, καὶ ὡς τῶν μὲν καθολικῶν χρονοκρατόρων κυριωτέρων ὄντων πρὸς τὴν τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος τελείωσιν, τῶν δὲ ἐπὶ μέρους συνεργούντων ἢ ἀποσυνεργούντων κατὰ τὸ οἰκεῖον ἢ ἀνοίκειον τῶν φύσεων, τῶν δὲ ἐπεμβάσεων τὰς ἐπιτάσεις καὶ τὰς ἀνέσεις τῶν συμπτωμάτων ἀπεργαζομένων·
Ὁ μὲν γὰρ καθόλου τῆς ποιότητος ἴδιον καὶ τὴν τοῦ χρόνου παράτασιν ὅ τε τῆς ἀφέσεως τόπος καὶ ὁ τῶν καθολικῶν χρόνων κύριος μετὰ τοῦ τῶν ὁρίων διασημαίνει διὰ τὸ συνοικειοῦσθαι τῶν ἀστέρων ἕκαστον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς τοῖς τῆς γενέσεως τόποις, ὧν ἂν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς ἔτυχον λαβόντες τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν, τὸ δέ, πότερον ἀγαθὸν ἢ τοὐναντίον ἔσται τὸ σύμπτωμα, καταλαμβάνεται διὰ τῆς τῶν χρονοκρατόρων φυσικῆς τε καὶ συγκρατικῆς ἰδιοτροπίας εὐποιητικῆς ἢ κακωτικῆς καὶ τῆς ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς πρὸς τὸν ἐπικρατούμενον τόπον συνοικειώσεως ἢ ἀντιπαθείας, τὸ δέ, ἐν ποίοις χρόνοις μᾶλλον ἐπισημανθήσεται τὸ ἀποτέλεσμα, δείκνυται διὰ τῶν τῶν ἐνιαυσίων καὶ μηνιαίων ζῳδίων πρὸς τοὺς αἰτιατικοὺς τόπους συσχηματισμῶν καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὰς ἐπεμβάσεις τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ τὰς φάσεις ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης πρὸς τὰ ἐνιαύσια καὶ μηνιαῖα τῶν ζῳδίων·
Οἱ μὲν γὰρ συμφώνως ἔχοντες πρὸς τοὺς διατιθεμένους τόπους ἀπὸ τῆς ἐν τῇ γενέσει καταρχῆς καὶ κατὰ τὰς ἐπεμβάσεις συμφώνως αὐτοῖς συσχηματισθέντες ἀγαθῶν εἰσι περὶ τὸ ὑποκείμενον εἶδος ἀπεργαστικοί, καθάπερ, ἐὰν ἐναντιωθῶσι, φαύλων, οἱ δὲ ἀσυμφώνως καὶ παρ’ αἵρεσιν διαμηκίσαντες μὲν ἢ τετραγωνίσαντες ταῖς παρόδοις κακῶν εἰσιν παραίτιοι, κατὰ δὲ τοὺς ἄλλους σχηματισμοὺς οὐκέτι.
Κἂν οἱ αὐτοὶ καὶ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν ἐπεμβάσεων κυριεύσωσιν ἀστέρες, ὑπερβάλλουσα καὶ ἄκρατος γίνεται ἡ τοῦ ἀποτελέσματος φύσις, ἐάν τε ἐπὶ τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐάν τε ἐπὶ τὸ φαῦλον ῥέπῃ, πολὺ δὲ πλεῖον, ἐὰν μὴ μόνον διὰ τὸ χρονοκράτορας εἶναι κυριεύσωσι τοῦ τῆς αἰτίας εἴδους, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὸ κατ’ αὐτὴν τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς γενέσεως τὴν οἰκοδεσποτείαν αὐτοῦ τετυχηκέναι. Κατὰ πάντα δὲ ὁμοῦ δυστυχοῦσιν ἢ εὐτυχοῦσιν, ὅταν ἤτοι τόπος εἷς καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς ὑπὸ πασῶν ἢ τῶν πλείστων ἀφέσεων τύχῃ καταληφθείς, ἢ τούτων διαφόρων οὐσῶν οἱ αὐτοὶ χρόνοι πάσας ἢ τὰς πλείστας ὑπαντήσεις ὁμοίως ἀγαθοποιοὺς ἢ κακοποιοὺς τύχωσιν ἐσχηκότες. Ὁ μὲν οὖν τύπος τῆς τῶν καιρῶν ἐπισκέψεως τοσοῦτός τις ἂν εἴη.
Κατάληξις, συμφώνως πρὸς τὸν κώδικα MADProc.Cam.:
Τὰ δὲ εἴδη τῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων τῶν συμβαινόντων κατὰ χρόνους συνάπτειν ἐνταῦθα κατὰ διέξοδον παραλείψομεν, δι’ ὃν ἔφην σκοπὸν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, ὅτι τῶν ἀστέρων ἡ ποιητικὴ δύναμις, ἣν ἔχουσιν ἐπὶ τοὺς καθόλου ὁμοίως καὶ ἐν τοῖς μερικοῖς, κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον ἐφαρμόζεσθαι δύναται συναπτομένων εὐστόχως τῆς τε αἰτίας τοῦ μαθηματικοῦ καὶ τῆς αἰτίας τῆς ἐκ τῆς συγκράσεως.
Κατάληξις, συμφώνως πρὸς τὸν κώδικα Parisinus 2425:
Κατὰ τὸν ἁρμόζοντα ταῖς φυσικαῖς χρηματείαις τύπον· τὰς δὲ κατὰ μέρος ἐπιβολὰς τῆς ποιότητος τῶν χρονικῶν ἀποτελεσμάτων πολυχόως καὶ δυσερμηνεύτως ἐχούσας ἐνθάδς μάλιστα κατὰ τὸ διεξοδικὸν τῶν ἀποφησομένων ὑπολειπτέον, διὰ τὴν ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἡμῶν πρόθεσιν, τῇ τοῦ μαθηματικοῦ πρὸς τὸ συγκρατικὸν εἶδος εὐστοχίᾳ, τὸ τῆς καθ’ ὅλου φύσεως τῶν ἀστέρων ποιητικὸν ἔτι καὶ τοῖς ἐπὶ μέρους ὁμοίως κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον ἐφαρμόζειν δυναμένου. Διοδευομένου δὲ καὶ τοῦ γενεθλιαλογικοῦ τόπου κεφαλαιωδῶς καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι καὶ τῇδε τῇ πραγματείᾳ τὸ προσῆκον ἐπιθεῖναι τέλος.
–––––––––––––––––––––
Ἡ κατάληξις τῆς Τετραβίβλου εἶναι ἀμφίβολη. Ἡ παράγραφος τοῦ κώδικος MAD φαίνεται νὰ προέρχεται ἀπὸ τὴν Παράφρασις εἰς τὴν τοῦ Πτολεμαίου Τετράβιβλον τοῦ Πρόκλου, καὶ ἐχρησιμοποιήθει ὑπὸ τοῦ Camerarius εἰς ἀμφοτέρας τῶν ἐκδόσεών του (Τετράβιβλος, μετὰ λατινικῆς μεταφράσεως, 1535 καὶ 1553, Νυρεμβέργη).
10. Of the Division of Times
As we have treated systematically under its several heads the outline of each kind of inquiry only so far as to explain the general doctrine, which was our original intention, it would remain to add in the same manner any observations that should be made about the division of times, in such manner as to agree with nature and to be consistent with the specific doctrines which have already been set forth. So then, as, among all genethlialogical inquiries whatsoever, a more general destiny takes precedence of all particular considerations, namely, that of country of birth, to which the major details of a geniture are naturally subordinate, such as the topics of the form of the body, the character of the soul and the variations of manners and customs.
It is also necessary that he who makes his inquiry naturally should always hold first to the primary and more authoritative cause, lest, misled by the similarity of genitures, he should unwittingly call, let us say, the Ethiopian white or straight-haired, and the German or Gaul black-skinned and woolly-haired, or the latter gentle in character, fond of discussion, or fond of contemplation, and the Greeks savage of soul and untutored of mind; or, again, on the subject of marriage, lest he mistake the appropriate customs and manners by assigning, for example, marriage with a sister to one who is Italian by race, instead of to the Egyptian as he should, and a marriage with his mother to this latter, though it suits the Persian.
Thus in general it is needful first to apprehend universal conditions of destiny, and then to attach to them the particular conditions which relate to degree. In the same fashion likewise, dealing with the division of time, one most take as a basis in each single prediction the differences and special proprieties of the temporal ages, and see to it that we do not, in the ordinary, simple treatment of matters incident to the inquiry, carelessly assign to a babe action or marriage, or anything that belongs to adults, or to an extremely old man the begetting of children or anything else that fits younger men; but once and for all let us harmonize those details which are contemplated in temporal terms with that which is suitable and possible for persons in the various age-classes.
For in the matter of the age divisions of mankind 74 in general there is one and the same approach, which for likeness and comparison depends upon the order of the seven planets; it begins with the first age of man and with the first sphere from us, that is, the moon’s, and ends with the last of the ages and the outermost of the planetary spheres, which is called that of Saturn. And in truth the accidental qualities of each of the ages are those which are naturally proper to the planet compared with it, and these it will be needful to observe, in order that by this means we may investigate the general questions of the temporal divisions, while we determine particular differences from the special qualities which are discovered in the nativities.
For up to about the fourth year, following the number which belongs to the quadrennium 75, the moon takes over the age of infancy and produces the suppleness and lack of fixity in its body, its quick growth and the moist nature, as a rule, of its food, the changeability of its condition, and the imperfection and inarticulate state of its soul, suitably to her own active qualities.
In the following period of ten years, Mercury, to whom falls the second place and the second age, that of childhood, for the period which is half of the space of twenty years 76, begins to articulate and fashion the intelligent and logical part of the soul, to implant certain seeds and rudiments of learning, and to bring to light individual peculiarities of character and faculties, awaking the soul at this stage by instruction, tutelage, and the first gymnastic exercises.
Venus, taking in charge the third age, that of youth, for the next eight years, corresponding in number to her own period, begins, as is natural, to inspire, at their maturity, an activity of the seminal passages and to implant an impulse toward the embrace of love. At this time particularly a kind of frenzy enters the soul, incontinence, desire for any chance sexual gratification, burning passion, guile, and the blindness of the impetuous lover.
The lord of the middle sphere, the sun, takes over the fourth age, which is the middle one in order, young manhood, for the period of nineteen years, wherein he implants in the soul at length the mastery and direction of its actions, desire for substance, glory, and position, and a change from playful, ingenuous error to seriousness, decorum, and ambition.
After the sun, Mars, fifth in order, assumes command of manhood for the space of fifteen years, equal to his own period 77. He introduces severity and misery into life, and implants cares and troubles in the soul and in the body, giving it, as it were, same sense and notion of passing its prime and urging it, before it approaches its end, by labour to accomplish something among its undertakings that is worthy of note.
Sixth, Jupiter, taking as his lot the elderly age, again for the space of his own period, twelve years, brings about the renunciation of manual labour, toil, turmoil, and dangerous activity, and in their place brings decorum, foresight, retirement, together with all-embracing deliberation, admonition, and consolation; now especially he brings men to set store by honour, praise, and independence, accompanied by modesty and dignity.
Finally to Saturn falls as his lot old age, the latest period, which lasts for the rest of life. Now the movements both of body and of soul are cooled and impeded in their impulses, enjoyments, desires, and speed; for the natural decline supervenes upon life, which has become worn down with age, dispirited, weak, easily offended, and hard to please in all situations, in keeping with the sluggishness of his movements.
The foregoing, then, may be taken as a preliminary description of the characteristics of the ages of life, viewed generally and in accordance with the ordinary course of nature. But as for particulars 78, which are to be discovered from the peculiarities of the nativities, some of them again we shall base upon the general considerations already set forth, that is, upon the prorogations of greatest authority, all of them, however, and not one, as in the case of the space of life. We shall apply the prorogation from the horoscope to events relating to the body and to journeys abroad; that from the Lot of Fortune to matters of property; that from the moon to affections of the soul and to marriage; that from the sun to dignities and glory; that from the mid-heaven to the other details of the conduct of life, such as actions, friendships, and the begetting of children.
For thus it will come about that one beneficent or maleficent star will not be the ruler of all of them on the same occasion, for usually many contradictory events take place at the same time. One may, for example, lose a relative and receive an inheritance, or at once be prostrated by illness and gain some dignity and promotion, or in the midst of misfortune become the father of children, or have other experiences of this sort which are apt to occur.
For it is not usual that alike in goodness or badness of body, soul, property, dignity, and companions, one must by very necessity be either fortunate, or, again, unfortunate in all these particulars. This, to be sure, might perhaps happen upon occasions that are completely blessed or completely unhappy, when the occourses of all the beneficent planets, or of all the maleficent planets, converge upon all or the majority of the prorogations. Rarely would this take place, however, because human nature is imperfectly adapted to either one of the extremes, but is inclined toward the balance of good and evil arising from their alternation.
We shall, then, make distinctions among the prorogatory places in the manner descrihed, and as for the stars whose occourses take place in the prorogations, we must take into account not only the destructive ones, as in the case of the length of life, but ahsolutely all of them, and similarly not those alone that meet the prorogation only bodily, or by opposition, or in quartile 79, but also those that are in the trine and sextile aspects. In the first place, we must give the rulership of the times in each prorogation to the star that is actually upon the prorogatory degree or in aspect to it, or, if this condition does not exist, to the one that most nearly precedes, until we come to another which is in aspect with the next following degree in the order of the signs; then to this as far as the next following, and so on ; and the planets which govern the terms are to be given a part of the rulership.
And again we must assign years to the degrees of the intervals: in the prorogation from the horoscope a numher equal to the times of ascension in the latitude concerned; in the prorogation from mid-heaven, as many as the times of the culminations; and in the prorogations from all the others, in proportion to or in accordance with the nearness of the risings, or settings, or culminations, to the angles, as we explained in the discussion of the length of life.
We shall discover the general chronocrators 80, then, in the manner described, and the annual chronocrators by setting out from each of the prorogatory places, in the order of the signs, the numher of years from birth, one year to each sign 81, and taking the ruler of the last sign. We shall do the same thing for the months, setting out, again, the number of months from the month of birth, starting from the places that govern the year, twenty-eight days to a sign; and similarly for the days, we shall set out the number of the days from the day of birth, starting with the places which govern the months, two and a third days to a sign 82.
We must also pay attention to the ingresses 83 which are made to the places of the times, for they play no small part in the prediction of the times of events; particularly to the ingresses of Saturn to the general places of the times, and to those of Jupiter to the places of the years; to those of the sun, Mars, venus, and Mercury to those of the months, and to the transits of the moon to those of the days. The reason for this is that the general chronocrators have greater authority to realize the prediction, while the partial chronocrators assist or deter, in accordance with the familiarity or unfamiliarity of their natures, and the ingresses infillence the degree of increase or diminution in the event.
For in general the special quality and the length of time are signified by the prorogatory place and the lord of the general times together with the lord of the terms, because each one of the planets at the very time of the nativity is made familiar with the places which they happened at first to govern. Whether the event will be good or bad is discovered from the natural and composite properties of the chronocrators, whether they are beneficent or maleficent, and from their original familiarity with or antipathy to the places which they possess. At what time the predicted event will be evidenced is shown by the aspects of the annual and monthly signs to the places which furnish the causes, and by the aspects of the signs into which the planets are making ingress and in which the phases of the sun a and moon occur to the annual and monthly signs.
For those whose relation to the affected places under consideration is harmonious from the beginning made in the nativity, and which in their ingresses are in favourable aspect to them, exert a good effect upon the species of the matter concerned, even as they cause evil if they oppose. And those which are inharmoniously related and of opposite sect cause evil if they are in opposition or in quartile to the transits, but not in the other aspects.
And if the same planets are lords of both the times and the ingresses, the nature of the predicted event is made excessive and unalloyed, whether it incline to the good or to the bad; all the more so if they govern the species of the cause 84 not only because they are chronocrators, but also because they ruled it originally in the nativity. The subjects are unfortunate or fortunate in all respects at once, whenever either all or most of the prorogations are found in one and the same place, or if these are different, whenever all or most of the occourses occurring at the same times are similarly fortunate or unforturnate. The character of the investigation of the times, then, is of this fashion 85.
Conclusion according to MADProc.Cam.:
We shall, however, omit adding at this point 86 a detailed account of the kinds of predicted events that happen at the times, on account of the plan which I stated at the outset, namely that the effective power which the planets exercise in general situations can be made to apply similarly and consistently in particular cases also, if the cause furnished by the astrologer and the cause arising from the mixture are combined with due skill.
Conclusion according to Parisinus 2425:
By the style which agrees with the natural procedures 87. At this point, however, the method of attacking, in particular cases, the problem of the quality of temporal predictions, with a complete account of the results, which is a complicated matter difficult of explanation, must, in accordance with our original programme, be left to the astrologer’s good judgement of the matter of temperaments, for thereby he is able correctly to accommodate to specific instances the effective force of the stars general nature. Now since the topic of nativities has been summarily reviewed, it would be well to bring this procedure also to a fitting close.